Spring Cloud


Table of Contents

1. Features
I. Cloud Native Applications
2. Spring Cloud Context: Application Context Services
2.1. The Bootstrap Application Context
2.2. Application Context Hierarchies
2.3. Changing the Location of Bootstrap Properties
2.4. Overriding the Values of Remote Properties
2.5. Customizing the Bootstrap Configuration
2.6. Customizing the Bootstrap Property Sources
2.7. Environment Changes
2.8. Refresh Scope
2.9. Encryption and Decryption
2.10. Endpoints
3. Spring Cloud Commons: Common Abstractions
3.1. @EnableDiscoveryClient
3.2. ServiceRegistry
3.2.1. ServiceRegistry Auto-Registration
3.2.2. Service Registry Actuator Endpoint
3.3. Spring RestTemplate as a Load Balancer Client
3.3.1. Retrying Failed Requests
3.4. Multiple RestTemplate objects
3.5. Ignore Network Interfaces
II. Spring Cloud Config
4. Quick Start
4.1. Client Side Usage
5. Spring Cloud Config Server
5.1. Environment Repository
5.1.1. Git Backend
Placeholders in Git URI
Pattern Matching and Multiple Repositories
Authentication
Authentication with AWS CodeCommit
Git SSH configuration using properties
Placeholders in Git Search Paths
Force pull in Git Repositories
5.1.2. Version Control Backend Filesystem Use
5.1.3. File System Backend
5.1.4. Vault Backend
Multiple Properties Sources
5.1.5. Sharing Configuration With All Applications
File Based Repositories
Vault Server
5.1.6. Composite Environment Repositories
Custom Composite Environment Repositories
5.1.7. Property Overrides
5.2. Health Indicator
5.3. Security
5.4. Encryption and Decryption
5.5. Key Management
5.6. Creating a Key Store for Testing
5.7. Using Multiple Keys and Key Rotation
5.8. Serving Encrypted Properties
6. Serving Alternative Formats
7. Serving Plain Text
8. Embedding the Config Server
9. Push Notifications and Spring Cloud Bus
10. Spring Cloud Config Client
10.1. Config First Bootstrap
10.2. Discovery First Bootstrap
10.3. Config Client Fail Fast
10.4. Config Client Retry
10.5. Locating Remote Configuration Resources
10.6. Security
10.6.1. Health Indicator
10.6.2. Providing A Custom RestTemplate
10.6.3. Vault
10.7. Vault
10.7.1. Nested Keys In Vault
III. Spring Cloud Netflix
11. Service Discovery: Eureka Clients
11.1. How to Include Eureka Client
11.2. Registering with Eureka
11.3. Authenticating with the Eureka Server
11.4. Status Page and Health Indicator
11.5. Registering a Secure Application
11.6. Eureka’s Health Checks
11.7. Eureka Metadata for Instances and Clients
11.7.1. Using Eureka on Cloudfoundry
11.7.2. Using Eureka on AWS
11.7.3. Changing the Eureka Instance ID
11.8. Using the EurekaClient
11.9. Alternatives to the native Netflix EurekaClient
11.10. Why is it so Slow to Register a Service?
11.11. Zones
12. Service Discovery: Eureka Server
12.1. How to Include Eureka Server
12.2. How to Run a Eureka Server
12.3. High Availability, Zones and Regions
12.4. Standalone Mode
12.5. Peer Awareness
12.6. Prefer IP Address
13. Circuit Breaker: Hystrix Clients
13.1. How to Include Hystrix
13.2. Propagating the Security Context or using Spring Scopes
13.3. Health Indicator
13.4. Hystrix Metrics Stream
14. Circuit Breaker: Hystrix Dashboard
15. Hystrix Timeouts And Ribbon Clients
15.1. How to Include Hystrix Dashboard
15.2. Turbine
15.3. Turbine Stream
16. Client Side Load Balancer: Ribbon
16.1. How to Include Ribbon
16.2. Customizing the Ribbon Client
16.3. Customizing the Ribbon Client using properties
16.4. Using Ribbon with Eureka
16.5. Example: How to Use Ribbon Without Eureka
16.6. Example: Disable Eureka use in Ribbon
16.7. Using the Ribbon API Directly
16.8. Caching of Ribbon Configuration
17. Declarative REST Client: Feign
17.1. How to Include Feign
17.2. Overriding Feign Defaults
17.3. Creating Feign Clients Manually
17.4. Feign Hystrix Support
17.5. Feign Hystrix Fallbacks
17.6. Feign and @Primary
17.7. Feign Inheritance Support
17.8. Feign request/response compression
17.9. Feign logging
18. External Configuration: Archaius
19. Router and Filter: Zuul
19.1. How to Include Zuul
19.2. Embedded Zuul Reverse Proxy
19.3. Zuul Http Client
19.4. Cookies and Sensitive Headers
19.5. Ignored Headers
19.6. The Routes Endpoint
19.7. Strangulation Patterns and Local Forwards
19.8. Uploading Files through Zuul
19.9. Query String Encoding
19.10. Plain Embedded Zuul
19.11. Disable Zuul Filters
19.12. Providing Hystrix Fallbacks For Routes
19.13. Zuul Developer Guide
19.13.1. The Zuul Servlet
19.13.2. Zuul RequestContext
19.13.3. @EnableZuulProxy vs. @EnableZuulServer
19.13.4. @EnableZuulServer Filters
19.13.5. @EnableZuulProxy Filters
19.13.6. Custom Zuul Filter examples
19.13.7. How to Write a Pre Filter
19.13.8. How to Write a Route Filter
19.13.9. How to Write a Post Filter
19.13.10. How Zuul Errors Work
19.13.11. Zuul Eager Application Context Loading
20. Polyglot support with Sidecar
21. RxJava with Spring MVC
22. Metrics: Spectator, Servo, and Atlas
22.1. Dimensional vs. Hierarchical Metrics
22.2. Default Metrics Collection
22.3. Metrics Collection: Spectator
22.3.1. Spectator Counter
22.3.2. Spectator Timer
22.3.3. Spectator Gauge
22.3.4. Spectator Distribution Summaries
22.4. Metrics Collection: Servo
22.4.1. Creating Servo Monitors
22.5. Metrics Backend: Atlas
22.5.1. Global tags
22.5.2. Using Atlas
22.6. Retrying Failed Requests
22.6.1. Configuration
22.6.2. Zuul
IV. Spring Cloud Stream
23. Introducing Spring Cloud Stream
24. Main Concepts
24.1. Application Model
24.1.1. Fat JAR
24.2. The Binder Abstraction
24.3. Persistent Publish-Subscribe Support
24.4. Consumer Groups
24.4.1. Durability
24.5. Partitioning Support
25. Programming Model
25.1. Declaring and Binding Channels
25.1.1. Triggering Binding Via @EnableBinding
25.1.2. @Input and @Output
Customizing Channel Names
Source, Sink, and Processor
25.1.3. Accessing Bound Channels
Injecting the Bound Interfaces
Injecting Channels Directly
25.1.4. Producing and Consuming Messages
Native Spring Integration Support
Spring Integration Error Channel Support
Using @StreamListener for Automatic Content Type Handling
Using @StreamListener for dispatching messages to multiple methods
25.1.5. Reactive Programming Support
Reactor-based handlers
RxJava 1.x support
25.1.6. Aggregation
Configuring aggregate application
Configuring binding service properties for non self contained aggregate application
26. Binders
26.1. Producers and Consumers
26.2. Binder SPI
26.3. Binder Detection
26.3.1. Classpath Detection
26.4. Multiple Binders on the Classpath
26.5. Connecting to Multiple Systems
26.6. Binder configuration properties
27. Configuration Options
27.1. Spring Cloud Stream Properties
27.2. Binding Properties
27.2.1. Properties for Use of Spring Cloud Stream
27.2.2. Consumer properties
27.2.3. Producer Properties
27.3. Using dynamically bound destinations
28. Content Type and Transformation
28.1. MIME types
28.2. MIME types and Java types
28.3. Customizing message conversion
28.4. @StreamListener and Message Conversion
29. Schema evolution support
29.1. Apache Avro Message Converters
29.2. Converters with schema support
29.3. Schema Registry Support
29.4. Schema Registry Server
29.4.1. Schema Registry Server API
POST /
GET /{subject}/{format}/{version}
GET /{subject}/{format}
GET /schemas/{id}
DELETE /{subject}/{format}/{version}
DELETE /schemas/{id}
DELETE /{subject}
29.5. Schema Registry Client
29.5.1. Schema Registry Client properties
29.6. Avro Schema Registry Client Message Converters
29.6.1. Avro Schema Registry Message Converter properties
29.7. Schema Registration and Resolution
29.7.1. Schema Registration Process (Serialization)
29.7.2. Schema Resolution Process (Deserialization)
30. Inter-Application Communication
30.1. Connecting Multiple Application Instances
30.2. Instance Index and Instance Count
30.3. Partitioning
30.3.1. Configuring Output Bindings for Partitioning
Spring-managed custom PartitionKeyExtractorClass implementations
Configuring Input Bindings for Partitioning
31. Testing
32. Health Indicator
33. Metrics Emitter
34. Samples
35. Getting Started
V. Binder Implementations
36. Apache Kafka Binder
36.1. Usage
36.2. Apache Kafka Binder Overview
36.3. Configuration Options
36.3.1. Kafka Binder Properties
36.3.2. Kafka Consumer Properties
36.3.3. Kafka Producer Properties
36.3.4. Usage examples
Example: Setting autoCommitOffset false and relying on manual acking.
Example: security configuration
Using the binder with Apache Kafka 0.10
Excluding Kafka broker jar from the classpath of the binder based application
36.4. Dead-Letter Topic Processing
37. RabbitMQ Binder
37.1. Usage
37.2. RabbitMQ Binder Overview
37.3. Configuration Options
37.3.1. RabbitMQ Binder Properties
37.3.2. RabbitMQ Consumer Properties
37.3.3. Rabbit Producer Properties
37.4. Retry With the RabbitMQ Binder
37.4.1. Overview
37.4.2. Putting it All Together
37.5. Dead-Letter Queue Processing
37.5.1. Non-Partitioned Destinations
37.5.2. Partitioned Destinations
republishToDlq=false
republishToDlq=true
VI. Spring Cloud Bus
38. Quick Start
39. Addressing an Instance
40. Addressing all instances of a service
41. Application Context ID must be unique
42. Customizing the Message Broker
43. Tracing Bus Events
44. Broadcasting Your Own Events
44.1. Registering events in custom packages
VII. Spring Cloud Sleuth
45. Introduction
45.1. Terminology
45.2. Purpose
45.2.1. Distributed tracing with Zipkin
45.2.2. Visualizing errors
45.2.3. Live examples
45.2.4. Log correlation
JSON Logback with Logstash
45.2.5. Propagating Span Context
Baggage vs. Span Tags
45.3. Adding to the project
45.3.1. Only Sleuth (log correlation)
45.3.2. Sleuth with Zipkin via HTTP
45.3.3. Sleuth with Zipkin via Spring Cloud Stream
45.3.4. Spring Cloud Sleuth Stream Zipkin Collector
46. Additional resources
47. Features
48. Sampling
49. Instrumentation
50. Span lifecycle
50.1. Creating and closing spans
50.2. Continuing spans
50.3. Creating spans with an explicit parent
51. Naming spans
51.1. @SpanName annotation
51.2. toString() method
52. Managing spans with annotations
52.1. Rationale
52.2. Creating new spans
52.3. Continuing spans
52.4. More advanced tag setting
52.4.1. Custom extractor
52.4.2. Resolving expressions for value
52.4.3. Using toString method
53. Customizations
53.1. Spring Integration
53.2. HTTP
53.3. Example
53.4. TraceFilter
53.5. Custom SA tag in Zipkin
53.6. Custom service name
53.7. Customization of reported spans
53.8. Host locator
54. Span Data as Messages
54.1. Zipkin Consumer
54.2. Custom Consumer
55. Metrics
56. Integrations
56.1. Runnable and Callable
56.2. Hystrix
56.2.1. Custom Concurrency Strategy
56.2.2. Manual Command setting
56.3. RxJava
56.4. HTTP integration
56.4.1. HTTP Filter
56.4.2. HandlerInterceptor
56.4.3. Async Servlet support
56.5. HTTP client integration
56.5.1. Synchronous Rest Template
56.5.2. Asynchronous Rest Template
Multiple Asynchronous Rest Templates
56.5.3. Traverson
56.6. Feign
56.7. Asynchronous communication
56.7.1. @Async annotated methods
56.7.2. @Scheduled annotated methods
56.7.3. Executor, ExecutorService and ScheduledExecutorService
Customization of Executors
56.8. Messaging
56.9. Zuul
57. Running examples
VIII. Spring Cloud Consul
58. Install Consul
59. Consul Agent
60. Service Discovery with Consul
60.1. How to activate
60.2. Registering with Consul
60.3. HTTP Health Check
60.3.1. Metadata and Consul tags
60.3.2. Making the Consul Instance ID Unique
60.4. Using the DiscoveryClient
61. Distributed Configuration with Consul
61.1. How to activate
61.2. Customizing
61.3. Config Watch
61.4. YAML or Properties with Config
61.5. git2consul with Config
61.6. Fail Fast
62. Consul Retry
63. Spring Cloud Bus with Consul
63.1. How to activate
64. Circuit Breaker with Hystrix
65. Hystrix metrics aggregation with Turbine and Consul
IX. Spring Cloud Zookeeper
66. Install Zookeeper
67. Service Discovery with Zookeeper
67.1. How to activate
67.2. Registering with Zookeeper
67.3. Using the DiscoveryClient
68. Using Spring Cloud Zookeeper with Spring Cloud Netflix Components
68.1. Ribbon with Zookeeper
69. Spring Cloud Zookeeper and Service Registry
69.1. Instance Status
70. Zookeeper Dependencies
70.1. Using the Zookeeper Dependencies
70.2. How to activate Zookeeper Dependencies
70.3. Setting up Zookeeper Dependencies
70.3.1. Aliases
70.3.2. Path
70.3.3. Load balancer type
70.3.4. Content-Type template and version
70.3.5. Default headers
70.3.6. Obligatory dependencies
70.3.7. Stubs
70.4. Configuring Spring Cloud Zookeeper Dependencies
71. Spring Cloud Zookeeper Dependency Watcher
71.1. How to activate
71.2. Registering a listener
71.3. Presence Checker
72. Distributed Configuration with Zookeeper
72.1. How to activate
72.2. Customizing
72.3. ACLs
X. Spring Cloud Security
73. Quickstart
73.1. OAuth2 Single Sign On
73.2. OAuth2 Protected Resource
74. More Detail
74.1. Single Sign On
74.2. Token Relay
74.2.1. Client Token Relay
74.2.2. Client Token Relay in Zuul Proxy
74.2.3. Resource Server Token Relay
75. Configuring Authentication Downstream of a Zuul Proxy
XI. Spring Cloud for Cloud Foundry
76. Discovery
77. Single Sign On
XII. Spring Cloud Contract
78. Spring Cloud Contract
79. Spring Cloud Contract Verifier Introduction
79.1. Why?
79.1.1. Testing issues
79.2. Purposes
79.3. How
79.3.1. Define the contract
79.3.2. Client Side
79.3.3. Server Side
79.4. Step by step guide to CDC
79.4.1. Technical note
79.4.2. Consumer side (Loan Issuance)
79.4.3. Producer side (Fraud Detection server)
79.4.4. Consumer side (Loan Issuance) final step
79.5. Dependencies
79.6. Additional links
79.6.1. Spring Cloud Contract video
79.6.2. Readings
79.7. Samples
80. Spring Cloud Contract Verifier Setup
80.1. Gradle Project
80.1.1. Prerequisites
80.1.2. Add gradle plugin with dependencies
80.1.3. Gradle and Rest Assured 3.0
80.1.4. Snapshot versions for Gradle
80.1.5. Add stubs
80.1.6. Run plugin
80.1.7. Default setup
80.1.8. Configure plugin
80.1.9. Configuration options
80.1.10. Single base class for all tests
80.1.11. Different base classes for contracts
80.1.12. Invoking generated tests
80.1.13. Spring Cloud Contract Verifier on consumer side
80.2. Using in your Maven project
80.2.1. Add maven plugin
80.2.2. Maven and Rest Assured 3.0
80.2.3. Snapshot versions for Maven
80.2.4. Add stubs
80.2.5. Run plugin
80.2.6. Configure plugin
80.2.7. Important configuration options
80.2.8. Single base class for all tests
80.2.9. Different base classes for contracts
80.2.10. Invoking generated tests
80.2.11. FAQ with Maven Plugin
80.2.12. Maven Plugin and STS
80.2.13. Spring Cloud Contract Verifier on consumer side
80.3. Scenarios
80.4. Stubs and transitive dependencies
81. Spring Cloud Contract Verifier Messaging
81.1. Integrations
81.2. Manual Integration Testing
81.3. Publisher side test generation
81.3.1. Scenario 1 (no input message)
81.3.2. Scenario 2 (output triggered by input)
81.3.3. Scenario 3 (no output message)
81.4. Consumer Stub Side generation
82. Spring Cloud Contract Stub Runner
82.1. Snapshot versions
82.2. Publishing stubs as JARs
82.3. Stub Runner Core
82.3.1. Retrieving stubs
Stub downloading
Classpath scanning
82.3.2. Running stubs
Limitations
Running using main app
HTTP Stubs
Viewing registered mappings
Messaging Stubs
82.4. Stub Runner JUnit Rule
82.4.1. Maven settings
82.4.2. Providing fixed ports
82.4.3. Fluent API
82.4.4. Stub Runner with Spring
82.5. Stub Runner Spring Cloud
82.5.1. Stubbing Service Discovery
Test profiles and service discovery
82.5.2. Additional Configuration
82.6. Stub Runner Boot Application
82.6.1. How to use it?
Stub Runner Server
Spring Cloud CLI
82.6.2. Endpoints
HTTP
Messaging
82.6.3. Example
82.6.4. Stub Runner Boot with Service Discovery
82.7. Stubs Per Consumer
82.8. Common
82.8.1. Common properties for JUnit and Spring
82.8.2. Stub runner stubs ids
83. Stub Runner for Messaging
83.1. Stub triggering
83.1.1. Trigger by label
83.1.2. Trigger by group and artifact ids
83.1.3. Trigger by artifact ids
83.1.4. Trigger all messages
83.2. Stub Runner Camel
83.2.1. Adding it to the project
83.2.2. Disabling the functionality
83.2.3. Examples
Stubs structure
Scenario 1 (no input message)
Scenario 2 (output triggered by input)
Scenario 3 (input with no output)
83.3. Stub Runner Integration
83.3.1. Adding it to the project
83.3.2. Disabling the functionality
83.3.3. Examples
Stubs structure
Scenario 1 (no input message)
Scenario 2 (output triggered by input)
Scenario 3 (input with no output)
83.4. Stub Runner Stream
83.4.1. Adding it to the project
83.4.2. Disabling the functionality
83.4.3. Examples
Stubs structure
Scenario 1 (no input message)
Scenario 2 (output triggered by input)
Scenario 3 (input with no output)
83.5. Stub Runner Spring AMQP
83.5.1. Adding it to the project
83.5.2. Examples
Stubs structure
Triggering the message
Spring AMQP Test Configuration
84. Contract DSL
84.1. Limitations
84.2. Common Top-Level elements
84.2.1. Description
84.2.2. Name
84.2.3. Ignoring Contracts
84.2.4. HTTP Top-Level Elements
84.3. Request
84.4. Response
84.5. Dynamic properties
84.5.1. Dynamic properties inside the body
84.5.2. Regular expressions
84.5.3. Passing Optional Parameters
84.5.4. Executing Custom Methods on the Server Side
84.5.5. Referencing the Request from the Response
84.5.6. Registering Your Own WireMock Extension
84.5.7. Dynamic Properties in the Matchers Sections
84.6. JAX-RS Support
84.7. Async Support
84.8. Working with Context Paths
84.9. Messaging Top-Level Elements
84.9.1. Output Triggered by a Method
84.9.2. Output Triggered by a Message
84.9.3. Consumer/Producer
84.9.4. Common
84.10. Multiple Contracts in One File
85. Customization
85.1. Extending the DSL
85.1.1. Common JAR
85.1.2. Adding the Dependency to the Project
85.1.3. Test the Dependency in the Project’s Dependencies
85.1.4. Test a Dependency in the Plugin’s Dependencies
85.1.5. Referencing classes in DSLs
86. Using the Pluggable Architecture
86.1. Custom Contract Converter
86.1.1. Pact Converter
86.1.2. Pact Contract
86.1.3. Pact for Producers
86.1.4. Pact for Consumers
86.2. Using the Custom Test Generator
86.3. Using the Custom Stub Generator
86.4. Using the Custom Stub Runner
86.5. Using the Custom Stub Downloader
87. Spring Cloud Contract WireMock
87.1. Registering Stubs Automatically
87.2. Using Files to Specify the Stub Bodies
87.3. Alternative: Using JUnit Rules
87.4. Relaxed SSL Validation for Rest Template
87.5. WireMock and Spring MVC Mocks
87.6. Generating Stubs using RestDocs
87.7. Generating Contracts using RestDocs
88. Links
XIII. Spring Cloud Vault
89. Quick Start
90. Client Side Usage
90.1. Authentication
91. Authentication methods
91.1. Token authentication
91.2. AppId authentication
91.2.1. Custom UserId
91.3. AppRole authentication
91.4. AWS-EC2 authentication
91.5. TLS certificate authentication
91.6. Cubbyhole authentication
92. Secret Backends
92.1. Generic Backend
92.2. Consul
92.3. RabbitMQ
92.4. AWS
93. Database backends
93.1. Apache Cassandra
93.2. MongoDB
93.3. MySQL
93.4. PostgreSQL
94. Vault Client Fail Fast
95. Vault Client SSL configuration
96. Lease lifecycle management (renewal and revocation)
XIV. Appendix: Compendium of Configuration Properties

Spring Cloud provides tools for developers to quickly build some of the common patterns in distributed systems (e.g. configuration management, service discovery, circuit breakers, intelligent routing, micro-proxy, control bus). Coordination of distributed systems leads to boiler plate patterns, and using Spring Cloud developers can quickly stand up services and applications that implement those patterns. They will work well in any distributed environment, including the developer’s own laptop, bare metal data centres, and managed platforms such as Cloud Foundry.

Version: Dalston.SR5

1. Features

Spring Cloud focuses on providing good out of box experience for typical use cases and extensibility mechanism to cover others.

  • Distributed/versioned configuration
  • Service registration and discovery
  • Routing
  • Service-to-service calls
  • Load balancing
  • Circuit Breakers
  • Distributed messaging

Part I. Cloud Native Applications

Cloud Native is a style of application development that encourages easy adoption of best practices in the areas of continuous delivery and value-driven development. A related discipline is that of building 12-factor Apps in which development practices are aligned with delivery and operations goals, for instance by using declarative programming and management and monitoring. Spring Cloud facilitates these styles of development in a number of specific ways and the starting point is a set of features that all components in a distributed system either need or need easy access to when required.

Many of those features are covered by Spring Boot, which we build on in Spring Cloud. Some more are delivered by Spring Cloud as two libraries: Spring Cloud Context and Spring Cloud Commons. Spring Cloud Context provides utilities and special services for the ApplicationContext of a Spring Cloud application (bootstrap context, encryption, refresh scope and environment endpoints). Spring Cloud Commons is a set of abstractions and common classes used in different Spring Cloud implementations (eg. Spring Cloud Netflix vs. Spring Cloud Consul).

If you are getting an exception due to "Illegal key size" and you are using Sun’s JDK, you need to install the Java Cryptography Extension (JCE) Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files. See the following links for more information:

Extract files into JDK/jre/lib/security folder (whichever version of JRE/JDK x64/x86 you are using).

[Note]Note

Spring Cloud is released under the non-restrictive Apache 2.0 license. If you would like to contribute to this section of the documentation or if you find an error, please find the source code and issue trackers in the project at github.

2. Spring Cloud Context: Application Context Services

Spring Boot has an opinionated view of how to build an application with Spring: for instance it has conventional locations for common configuration file, and endpoints for common management and monitoring tasks. Spring Cloud builds on top of that and adds a few features that probably all components in a system would use or occasionally need.

2.1 The Bootstrap Application Context

A Spring Cloud application operates by creating a "bootstrap" context, which is a parent context for the main application. Out of the box it is responsible for loading configuration properties from the external sources, and also decrypting properties in the local external configuration files. The two contexts share an Environment which is the source of external properties for any Spring application. Bootstrap properties are added with high precedence, so they cannot be overridden by local configuration, by default.

The bootstrap context uses a different convention for locating external configuration than the main application context, so instead of application.yml (or .properties) you use bootstrap.yml, keeping the external configuration for bootstrap and main context nicely separate. Example:

bootstrap.yml. 

spring:
  application:
    name: foo
  cloud:
    config:
      uri: ${SPRING_CONFIG_URI:http://localhost:8888}

It is a good idea to set the spring.application.name (in bootstrap.yml or application.yml) if your application needs any application-specific configuration from the server.

You can disable the bootstrap process completely by setting spring.cloud.bootstrap.enabled=false (e.g. in System properties).

2.2 Application Context Hierarchies

If you build an application context from SpringApplication or SpringApplicationBuilder, then the Bootstrap context is added as a parent to that context. It is a feature of Spring that child contexts inherit property sources and profiles from their parent, so the "main" application context will contain additional property sources, compared to building the same context without Spring Cloud Config. The additional property sources are:

  • "bootstrap": an optional CompositePropertySource appears with high priority if any PropertySourceLocators are found in the Bootstrap context, and they have non-empty properties. An example would be properties from the Spring Cloud Config Server. See below for instructions on how to customize the contents of this property source.
  • "applicationConfig: [classpath:bootstrap.yml]" (and friends if Spring profiles are active). If you have a bootstrap.yml (or properties) then those properties are used to configure the Bootstrap context, and then they get added to the child context when its parent is set. They have lower precedence than the application.yml (or properties) and any other property sources that are added to the child as a normal part of the process of creating a Spring Boot application. See below for instructions on how to customize the contents of these property sources.

Because of the ordering rules of property sources the "bootstrap" entries take precedence, but note that these do not contain any data from bootstrap.yml, which has very low precedence, but can be used to set defaults.

You can extend the context hierarchy by simply setting the parent context of any ApplicationContext you create, e.g. using its own interface, or with the SpringApplicationBuilder convenience methods (parent(), child() and sibling()). The bootstrap context will be the parent of the most senior ancestor that you create yourself. Every context in the hierarchy will have its own "bootstrap" property source (possibly empty) to avoid promoting values inadvertently from parents down to their descendants. Every context in the hierarchy can also (in principle) have a different spring.application.name and hence a different remote property source if there is a Config Server. Normal Spring application context behaviour rules apply to property resolution: properties from a child context override those in the parent, by name and also by property source name (if the child has a property source with the same name as the parent, the one from the parent is not included in the child).

Note that the SpringApplicationBuilder allows you to share an Environment amongst the whole hierarchy, but that is not the default. Thus, sibling contexts in particular do not need to have the same profiles or property sources, even though they will share common things with their parent.

2.3 Changing the Location of Bootstrap Properties

The bootstrap.yml (or .properties) location can be specified using spring.cloud.bootstrap.name (default "bootstrap") or spring.cloud.bootstrap.location (default empty), e.g. in System properties. Those properties behave like the spring.config.* variants with the same name, in fact they are used to set up the bootstrap ApplicationContext by setting those properties in its Environment. If there is an active profile (from spring.profiles.active or through the Environment API in the context you are building) then properties in that profile will be loaded as well, just like in a regular Spring Boot app, e.g. from bootstrap-development.properties for a "development" profile.

2.4 Overriding the Values of Remote Properties

The property sources that are added to you application by the bootstrap context are often "remote" (e.g. from a Config Server), and by default they cannot be overridden locally, except on the command line. If you want to allow your applications to override the remote properties with their own System properties or config files, the remote property source has to grant it permission by setting spring.cloud.config.allowOverride=true (it doesn’t work to set this locally). Once that flag is set there are some finer grained settings to control the location of the remote properties in relation to System properties and the application’s local configuration: spring.cloud.config.overrideNone=true to override with any local property source, and spring.cloud.config.overrideSystemProperties=false if only System properties and env vars should override the remote settings, but not the local config files.

2.5 Customizing the Bootstrap Configuration

The bootstrap context can be trained to do anything you like by adding entries to /META-INF/spring.factories under the key org.springframework.cloud.bootstrap.BootstrapConfiguration. This is a comma-separated list of Spring @Configuration classes which will be used to create the context. Any beans that you want to be available to the main application context for autowiring can be created here, and also there is a special contract for @Beans of type ApplicationContextInitializer. Classes can be marked with an @Order if you want to control the startup sequence (the default order is "last").

[Warning]Warning

Be careful when adding custom BootstrapConfiguration that the classes you add are not @ComponentScanned by mistake into your "main" application context, where they might not be needed. Use a separate package name for boot configuration classes that is not already covered by your @ComponentScan or @SpringBootApplication annotated configuration classes.

The bootstrap process ends by injecting initializers into the main SpringApplication instance (i.e. the normal Spring Boot startup sequence, whether it is running as a standalone app or deployed in an application server). First a bootstrap context is created from the classes found in spring.factories and then all @Beans of type ApplicationContextInitializer are added to the main SpringApplication before it is started.

2.6 Customizing the Bootstrap Property Sources

The default property source for external configuration added by the bootstrap process is the Config Server, but you can add additional sources by adding beans of type PropertySourceLocator to the bootstrap context (via spring.factories). You could use this to insert additional properties from a different server, or from a database, for instance.

As an example, consider the following trivial custom locator:

@Configuration
public class CustomPropertySourceLocator implements PropertySourceLocator {

    @Override
    public PropertySource<?> locate(Environment environment) {
        return new MapPropertySource("customProperty",
                Collections.<String, Object>singletonMap("property.from.sample.custom.source", "worked as intended"));
    }

}

The Environment that is passed in is the one for the ApplicationContext about to be created, i.e. the one that we are supplying additional property sources for. It will already have its normal Spring Boot-provided property sources, so you can use those to locate a property source specific to this Environment (e.g. by keying it on the spring.application.name, as is done in the default Config Server property source locator).

If you create a jar with this class in it and then add a META-INF/spring.factories containing:

org.springframework.cloud.bootstrap.BootstrapConfiguration=sample.custom.CustomPropertySourceLocator

then the "customProperty" PropertySource will show up in any application that includes that jar on its classpath.

2.7 Environment Changes

The application will listen for an EnvironmentChangeEvent and react to the change in a couple of standard ways (additional ApplicationListeners can be added as @Beans by the user in the normal way). When an EnvironmentChangeEvent is observed it will have a list of key values that have changed, and the application will use those to:

  • Re-bind any @ConfigurationProperties beans in the context
  • Set the logger levels for any properties in logging.level.*

Note that the Config Client does not by default poll for changes in the Environment, and generally we would not recommend that approach for detecting changes (although you could set it up with a @Scheduled annotation). If you have a scaled-out client application then it is better to broadcast the EnvironmentChangeEvent to all the instances instead of having them polling for changes (e.g. using the Spring Cloud Bus).

The EnvironmentChangeEvent covers a large class of refresh use cases, as long as you can actually make a change to the Environment and publish the event (those APIs are public and part of core Spring). You can verify the changes are bound to @ConfigurationProperties beans by visiting the /configprops endpoint (normal Spring Boot Actuator feature). For instance a DataSource can have its maxPoolSize changed at runtime (the default DataSource created by Spring Boot is an @ConfigurationProperties bean) and grow capacity dynamically. Re-binding @ConfigurationProperties does not cover another large class of use cases, where you need more control over the refresh, and where you need a change to be atomic over the whole ApplicationContext. To address those concerns we have @RefreshScope.

2.8 Refresh Scope

A Spring @Bean that is marked as @RefreshScope will get special treatment when there is a configuration change. This addresses the problem of stateful beans that only get their configuration injected when they are initialized. For instance if a DataSource has open connections when the database URL is changed via the Environment, we probably want the holders of those connections to be able to complete what they are doing. Then the next time someone borrows a connection from the pool he gets one with the new URL.

Refresh scope beans are lazy proxies that initialize when they are used (i.e. when a method is called), and the scope acts as a cache of initialized values. To force a bean to re-initialize on the next method call you just need to invalidate its cache entry.

The RefreshScope is a bean in the context and it has a public method refreshAll() to refresh all beans in the scope by clearing the target cache. There is also a refresh(String) method to refresh an individual bean by name. This functionality is exposed in the /refresh endpoint (over HTTP or JMX).

[Note]Note

@RefreshScope works (technically) on an @Configuration class, but it might lead to surprising behaviour: e.g. it does not mean that all the @Beans defined in that class are themselves @RefreshScope. Specifically, anything that depends on those beans cannot rely on them being updated when a refresh is initiated, unless it is itself in @RefreshScope (in which it will be rebuilt on a refresh and its dependencies re-injected, at which point they will be re-initialized from the refreshed @Configuration).

2.9 Encryption and Decryption

Spring Cloud has an Environment pre-processor for decrypting property values locally. It follows the same rules as the Config Server, and has the same external configuration via encrypt.*. Thus you can use encrypted values in the form {cipher}* and as long as there is a valid key then they will be decrypted before the main application context gets the Environment. To use the encryption features in an application you need to include Spring Security RSA in your classpath (Maven co-ordinates "org.springframework.security:spring-security-rsa") and you also need the full strength JCE extensions in your JVM.

If you are getting an exception due to "Illegal key size" and you are using Sun’s JDK, you need to install the Java Cryptography Extension (JCE) Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files. See the following links for more information:

Extract files into JDK/jre/lib/security folder (whichever version of JRE/JDK x64/x86 you are using).

2.10 Endpoints

For a Spring Boot Actuator application there are some additional management endpoints:

  • POST to /env to update the Environment and rebind @ConfigurationProperties and log levels
  • /refresh for re-loading the boot strap context and refreshing the @RefreshScope beans
  • /restart for closing the ApplicationContext and restarting it (disabled by default)
  • /pause and /resume for calling the Lifecycle methods (stop() and start() on the ApplicationContext)

3. Spring Cloud Commons: Common Abstractions

Patterns such as service discovery, load balancing and circuit breakers lend themselves to a common abstraction layer that can be consumed by all Spring Cloud clients, independent of the implementation (e.g. discovery via Eureka or Consul).

3.1 @EnableDiscoveryClient

Commons provides the @EnableDiscoveryClient annotation. This looks for implementations of the DiscoveryClient interface via META-INF/spring.factories. Implementations of Discovery Client will add a configuration class to spring.factories under the org.springframework.cloud.client.discovery.EnableDiscoveryClient key. Examples of DiscoveryClient implementations: are Spring Cloud Netflix Eureka, Spring Cloud Consul Discovery and Spring Cloud Zookeeper Discovery.

By default, implementations of DiscoveryClient will auto-register the local Spring Boot server with the remote discovery server. This can be disabled by setting autoRegister=false in @EnableDiscoveryClient.

3.2 ServiceRegistry

Commons now provides a ServiceRegistry interface which provides methods like register(Registration) and deregister(Registration) which allow you to provide custom registered services. Registration is a marker interface.

@Configuration
@EnableDiscoveryClient(autoRegister=false)
public class MyConfiguration {
    private ServiceRegistry registry;

    public MyConfiguration(ServiceRegistry registry) {
        this.registry = registry;
    }

    // called via some external process, such as an event or a custom actuator endpoint
    public void register() {
        Registration registration = constructRegistration();
        this.registry.register(registration);
    }
}

Each ServiceRegistry implementation has its own Registry implementation.

3.2.1 ServiceRegistry Auto-Registration

By default, the ServiceRegistry implementation will auto-register the running service. To disable that behavior, there are two methods. You can set @EnableDiscoveryClient(autoRegister=false) to permanently disable auto-registration. You can also set spring.cloud.service-registry.auto-registration.enabled=false to disable the behavior via configuration.

3.2.2 Service Registry Actuator Endpoint

A /service-registry actuator endpoint is provided by Commons. This endpoint relys on a Registration bean in the Spring Application Context. Calling /service-registry/instance-status via a GET will return the status of the Registration. A POST to the same endpoint with a String body will change the status of the current Registration to the new value. Please see the documentation of the ServiceRegistry implementation you are using for the allowed values for updating the status and the values retured for the status.

3.3 Spring RestTemplate as a Load Balancer Client

RestTemplate can be automatically configured to use ribbon. To create a load balanced RestTemplate create a RestTemplate @Bean and use the @LoadBalanced qualifier.

[Warning]Warning

A RestTemplate bean is no longer created via auto configuration. It must be created by individual applications.

@Configuration
public class MyConfiguration {

    @LoadBalanced
    @Bean
    RestTemplate restTemplate() {
        return new RestTemplate();
    }
}

public class MyClass {
    @Autowired
    private RestTemplate restTemplate;

    public String doOtherStuff() {
        String results = restTemplate.getForObject("http://stores/stores", String.class);
        return results;
    }
}

The URI needs to use a virtual host name (ie. service name, not a host name). The Ribbon client is used to create a full physical address. See RibbonAutoConfiguration for details of how the RestTemplate is set up.

3.3.1 Retrying Failed Requests

A load balanced RestTemplate can be configured to retry failed requests. By default this logic is disabled, you can enable it by adding Spring Retry to your application’s classpath. The load balanced RestTemplate will honor some of the Ribbon configuration values related to retrying failed requests. If you would like to disable the retry logic with Spring Retry on the classpath you can set spring.cloud.loadbalancer.retry.enabled=false. The properties you can use are client.ribbon.MaxAutoRetries, client.ribbon.MaxAutoRetriesNextServer, and client.ribbon.OkToRetryOnAllOperations. See the Ribbon documentation for a description of what there properties do.

[Note]Note

client in the above examples should be replaced with your Ribbon client’s name.

3.4 Multiple RestTemplate objects

If you want a RestTemplate that is not load balanced, create a RestTemplate bean and inject it as normal. To access the load balanced RestTemplate use the @LoadBalanced qualifier when you create your @Bean.

[Important]Important

Notice the @Primary annotation on the plain RestTemplate declaration in the example below, to disambiguate the unqualified @Autowired injection.

@Configuration
public class MyConfiguration {

    @LoadBalanced
    @Bean
    RestTemplate loadBalanced() {
        return new RestTemplate();
    }

    @Primary
    @Bean
    RestTemplate restTemplate() {
        return new RestTemplate();
    }
}

public class MyClass {
    @Autowired
    private RestTemplate restTemplate;

    @Autowired
    @LoadBalanced
    private RestTemplate loadBalanced;

    public String doOtherStuff() {
        return loadBalanced.getForObject("http://stores/stores", String.class);
    }

    public String doStuff() {
        return restTemplate.getForObject("http://example.com", String.class);
    }
}
[Tip]Tip

If you see errors like java.lang.IllegalArgumentException: Can not set org.springframework.web.client.RestTemplate field com.my.app.Foo.restTemplate to com.sun.proxy.$Proxy89 try injecting RestOperations instead or setting spring.aop.proxyTargetClass=true.

3.5 Ignore Network Interfaces

Sometimes it is useful to ignore certain named network interfaces so they can be excluded from Service Discovery registration (eg. running in a Docker container). A list of regular expressions can be set that will cause the desired network interfaces to be ignored. The following configuration will ignore the "docker0" interface and all interfaces that start with "veth".

application.yml. 

spring:
  cloud:
    inetutils:
      ignoredInterfaces:
        - docker0
        - veth.*

You can also force to use only specified network addresses using list of regular expressions:

application.yml. 

spring:
  cloud:
    inetutils:
      preferredNetworks:
        - 192.168
        - 10.0

You can also force to use only site local addresses. See Inet4Address.html.isSiteLocalAddress() for more details what is site local address.

application.yml. 

spring:
  cloud:
    inetutils:
      useOnlySiteLocalInterfaces: true

Part II. Spring Cloud Config

Dalston.SR5

Spring Cloud Config provides server and client-side support for externalized configuration in a distributed system. With the Config Server you have a central place to manage external properties for applications across all environments. The concepts on both client and server map identically to the Spring Environment and PropertySource abstractions, so they fit very well with Spring applications, but can be used with any application running in any language. As an application moves through the deployment pipeline from dev to test and into production you can manage the configuration between those environments and be certain that applications have everything they need to run when they migrate. The default implementation of the server storage backend uses git so it easily supports labelled versions of configuration environments, as well as being accessible to a wide range of tooling for managing the content. It is easy to add alternative implementations and plug them in with Spring configuration.

4. Quick Start

Start the server:

$ cd spring-cloud-config-server
$ ../mvnw spring-boot:run

The server is a Spring Boot application so you can run it from your IDE instead if you prefer (the main class is ConfigServerApplication). Then try out a client:

$ curl localhost:8888/foo/development
{"name":"development","label":"master","propertySources":[
  {"name":"https://github.com/scratches/config-repo/foo-development.properties","source":{"bar":"spam"}},
  {"name":"https://github.com/scratches/config-repo/foo.properties","source":{"foo":"bar"}}
]}

The default strategy for locating property sources is to clone a git repository (at spring.cloud.config.server.git.uri) and use it to initialize a mini SpringApplication. The mini-application’s Environment is used to enumerate property sources and publish them via a JSON endpoint.

The HTTP service has resources in the form:

/{application}/{profile}[/{label}]
/{application}-{profile}.yml
/{label}/{application}-{profile}.yml
/{application}-{profile}.properties
/{label}/{application}-{profile}.properties

where the "application" is injected as the spring.config.name in the SpringApplication (i.e. what is normally "application" in a regular Spring Boot app), "profile" is an active profile (or comma-separated list of properties), and "label" is an optional git label (defaults to "master".)

Spring Cloud Config Server pulls configuration for remote clients from a git repository (which must be provided):

spring:
  cloud:
    config:
      server:
        git:
          uri: https://github.com/spring-cloud-samples/config-repo

4.1 Client Side Usage

To use these features in an application, just build it as a Spring Boot application that depends on spring-cloud-config-client (e.g. see the test cases for the config-client, or the sample app). The most convenient way to add the dependency is via a Spring Boot starter org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-starter-config. There is also a parent pom and BOM (spring-cloud-starter-parent) for Maven users and a Spring IO version management properties file for Gradle and Spring CLI users. Example Maven configuration:

pom.xml. 

   <parent>
       <groupId>org.springframework.boot</groupId>
       <artifactId>spring-boot-starter-parent</artifactId>
       <version>1.3.5.RELEASE</version>
       <relativePath /> <!-- lookup parent from repository -->
   </parent>

<dependencyManagement>
	<dependencies>
		<dependency>
			<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
			<artifactId>spring-cloud-dependencies</artifactId>
			<version>Brixton.RELEASE</version>
			<type>pom</type>
			<scope>import</scope>
		</dependency>
	</dependencies>
</dependencyManagement>

<dependencies>
	<dependency>
		<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
		<artifactId>spring-cloud-starter-config</artifactId>
	</dependency>
	<dependency>
		<groupId>org.springframework.boot</groupId>
		<artifactId>spring-boot-starter-test</artifactId>
		<scope>test</scope>
	</dependency>
</dependencies>

<build>
	<plugins>
           <plugin>
               <groupId>org.springframework.boot</groupId>
               <artifactId>spring-boot-maven-plugin</artifactId>
           </plugin>
	</plugins>
</build>

   <!-- repositories also needed for snapshots and milestones -->

Then you can create a standard Spring Boot application, like this simple HTTP server:

@SpringBootApplication
@RestController
public class Application {

    @RequestMapping("/")
    public String home() {
        return "Hello World!";
    }

    public static void main(String[] args) {
        SpringApplication.run(Application.class, args);
    }

}

When it runs it will pick up the external configuration from the default local config server on port 8888 if it is running. To modify the startup behaviour you can change the location of the config server using bootstrap.properties (like application.properties but for the bootstrap phase of an application context), e.g.

spring.cloud.config.uri: http://myconfigserver.com

The bootstrap properties will show up in the /env endpoint as a high-priority property source, e.g.

$ curl localhost:8080/env
{
  "profiles":[],
  "configService:https://github.com/spring-cloud-samples/config-repo/bar.properties":{"foo":"bar"},
  "servletContextInitParams":{},
  "systemProperties":{...},
  ...
}

(a property source called "configService:<URL of remote repository>/<file name>" contains the property "foo" with value "bar" and is highest priority).

[Note]Note

the URL in the property source name is the git repository not the config server URL.

5. Spring Cloud Config Server

The Server provides an HTTP, resource-based API for external configuration (name-value pairs, or equivalent YAML content). The server is easily embeddable in a Spring Boot application using the @EnableConfigServer annotation. So this app is a config server:

ConfigServer.java. 

@SpringBootApplication
@EnableConfigServer
public class ConfigServer {
  public static void main(String[] args) {
    SpringApplication.run(ConfigServer.class, args);
  }
}

Like all Spring Boot apps it runs on port 8080 by default, but you can switch it to the conventional port 8888 in various ways. The easiest, which also sets a default configuration repository, is by launching it with spring.config.name=configserver (there is a configserver.yml in the Config Server jar). Another is to use your own application.properties, e.g.

application.properties. 

server.port: 8888
spring.cloud.config.server.git.uri: file://${user.home}/config-repo

where ${user.home}/config-repo is a git repository containing YAML and properties files.

[Note]Note

in Windows you need an extra "/" in the file URL if it is absolute with a drive prefix, e.g. file:///${user.home}/config-repo.

[Tip]Tip

Here’s a recipe for creating the git repository in the example above:

$ cd $HOME
$ mkdir config-repo
$ cd config-repo
$ git init .
$ echo info.foo: bar > application.properties
$ git add -A .
$ git commit -m "Add application.properties"
[Warning]Warning

using the local filesystem for your git repository is intended for testing only. Use a server to host your configuration repositories in production.

[Warning]Warning

the initial clone of your configuration repository will be quick and efficient if you only keep text files in it. If you start to store binary files, especially large ones, you may experience delays on the first request for configuration and/or out of memory errors in the server.

5.1 Environment Repository

Where do you want to store the configuration data for the Config Server? The strategy that governs this behaviour is the EnvironmentRepository, serving Environment objects. This Environment is a shallow copy of the domain from the Spring Environment (including propertySources as the main feature). The Environment resources are parametrized by three variables:

  • {application} maps to "spring.application.name" on the client side;
  • {profile} maps to "spring.profiles.active" on the client (comma separated list); and
  • {label} which is a server side feature labelling a "versioned" set of config files.

Repository implementations generally behave just like a Spring Boot application loading configuration files from a "spring.config.name" equal to the {application} parameter, and "spring.profiles.active" equal to the {profiles} parameter. Precedence rules for profiles are also the same as in a regular Boot application: active profiles take precedence over defaults, and if there are multiple profiles the last one wins (like adding entries to a Map).

Example: a client application has this bootstrap configuration:

bootstrap.yml. 

spring:
  application:
    name: foo
  profiles:
    active: dev,mysql

(as usual with a Spring Boot application, these properties could also be set as environment variables or command line arguments).

If the repository is file-based, the server will create an Environment from application.yml (shared between all clients), and foo.yml (with foo.yml taking precedence). If the YAML files have documents inside them that point to Spring profiles, those are applied with higher precedence (in order of the profiles listed), and if there are profile-specific YAML (or properties) files these are also applied with higher precedence than the defaults. Higher precedence translates to a PropertySource listed earlier in the Environment. (These are the same rules as apply in a standalone Spring Boot application.)

5.1.1 Git Backend

The default implementation of EnvironmentRepository uses a Git backend, which is very convenient for managing upgrades and physical environments, and also for auditing changes. To change the location of the repository you can set the "spring.cloud.config.server.git.uri" configuration property in the Config Server (e.g. in application.yml). If you set it with a file: prefix it should work from a local repository so you can get started quickly and easily without a server, but in that case the server operates directly on the local repository without cloning it (it doesn’t matter if it’s not bare because the Config Server never makes changes to the "remote" repository). To scale the Config Server up and make it highly available, you would need to have all instances of the server pointing to the same repository, so only a shared file system would work. Even in that case it is better to use the ssh: protocol for a shared filesystem repository, so that the server can clone it and use a local working copy as a cache.

This repository implementation maps the {label} parameter of the HTTP resource to a git label (commit id, branch name or tag). If the git branch or tag name contains a slash ("/") then the label in the HTTP URL should be specified with the special string "(_)" instead (to avoid ambiguity with other URL paths). For example, if the label is foo/bar, replacing the slash would result in a label that looks like foo(_)bar. Be careful with the brackets in the URL if you are using a command line client like curl (e.g. escape them from the shell with quotes '').

Placeholders in Git URI

Spring Cloud Config Server supports a git repository URL with placeholders for the {application} and {profile} (and {label} if you need it, but remember that the label is applied as a git label anyway). So you can easily support a "one repo per application" policy using (for example):

spring:
  cloud:
    config:
      server:
        git:
          uri: https://github.com/myorg/{application}

or a "one repo per profile" policy using a similar pattern but with {profile}.

Pattern Matching and Multiple Repositories

There is also support for more complex requirements with pattern matching on the application and profile name. The pattern format is a comma-separated list of {application}/{profile} names with wildcards (where a pattern beginning with a wildcard may need to be quoted). Example:

spring:
  cloud:
    config:
      server:
        git:
          uri: https://github.com/spring-cloud-samples/config-repo
          repos:
            simple: https://github.com/simple/config-repo
            special:
              pattern: special*/dev*,*special*/dev*
              uri: https://github.com/special/config-repo
            local:
              pattern: local*
              uri: file:/home/configsvc/config-repo

If {application}/{profile} does not match any of the patterns, it will use the default uri defined under "spring.cloud.config.server.git.uri". In the above example, for the "simple" repository, the pattern is simple/* (i.e. it only matches one application named "simple" in all profiles). The "local" repository matches all application names beginning with "local" in all profiles (the /* suffix is added automatically to any pattern that doesn’t have a profile matcher).

[Note]Note

the "one-liner" short cut used in the "simple" example above can only be used if the only property to be set is the URI. If you need to set anything else (credentials, pattern, etc.) you need to use the full form.

The pattern property in the repo is actually an array, so you can use a YAML array (or [0], [1], etc. suffixes in properties files) to bind to multiple patterns. You may need to do this if you are going to run apps with multiple profiles. Example:

spring:
  cloud:
    config:
      server:
        git:
          uri: https://github.com/spring-cloud-samples/config-repo
          repos:
            development:
              pattern:
                - '*/development'
                - '*/staging'
              uri: https://github.com/development/config-repo
            staging:
              pattern:
                - '*/qa'
                - '*/production'
              uri: https://github.com/staging/config-repo
[Note]Note

Spring Cloud will guess that a pattern containing a profile that doesn’t end in * implies that you actually want to match a list of profiles starting with this pattern (so */staging is a shortcut for ["*/staging", "*/staging,*"]). This is common where you need to run apps in the "development" profile locally but also the "cloud" profile remotely, for instance.

Every repository can also optionally store config files in sub-directories, and patterns to search for those directories can be specified as searchPaths. For example at the top level:

spring:
  cloud:
    config:
      server:
        git:
          uri: https://github.com/spring-cloud-samples/config-repo
          searchPaths: foo,bar*

In this example the server searches for config files in the top level and in the "foo/" sub-directory and also any sub-directory whose name begins with "bar".

By default the server clones remote repositories when configuration is first requested. The server can be configured to clone the repositories at startup. For example at the top level:

spring:
  cloud:
    config:
      server:
        git:
          uri: https://git/common/config-repo.git
          repos:
            team-a:
                pattern: team-a-*
                cloneOnStart: true
                uri: http://git/team-a/config-repo.git
            team-b:
                pattern: team-b-*
                cloneOnStart: false
                uri: http://git/team-b/config-repo.git
            team-c:
                pattern: team-c-*
                uri: http://git/team-a/config-repo.git

In this example the server clones team-a’s config-repo on startup before it accepts any requests. All other repositories will not be cloned until configuration from the repository is requested.

[Note]Note

Setting a repository to be cloned when the Config Server starts up can help to identify a misconfigured configuration source (e.g., an invalid repository URI) quickly, while the Config Server is starting up. With cloneOnStart not enabled for a configuration source, the Config Server may start successfully with a misconfigured or invalid configuration source and not detect an error until an application requests configuration from that configuration source.

Authentication

To use HTTP basic authentication on the remote repository add the "username" and "password" properties separately (not in the URL), e.g.

spring:
  cloud:
    config:
      server:
        git:
          uri: https://github.com/spring-cloud-samples/config-repo
          username: trolley
          password: strongpassword

If you don’t use HTTPS and user credentials, SSH should also work out of the box when you store keys in the default directories (~/.ssh) and the uri points to an SSH location, e.g. "[email protected]:configuration/cloud-configuration". It is important that an entry for the Git server be present in the ~/.ssh/known_hosts file and that it is in ssh-rsa format. Other formats (like ecdsa-sha2-nistp256) are not supported. To avoid surprises, you should ensure that only one entry is present in the known_hosts file for the Git server and that it is matching with the URL you provided to the config server. If you used a hostname in the URL, you want to have exactly that in the known_hosts file, not the IP. The repository is accessed using JGit, so any documentation you find on that should be applicable. HTTPS proxy settings can be set in ~/.git/config or in the same way as for any other JVM process via system properties (-Dhttps.proxyHost and -Dhttps.proxyPort).

[Tip]Tip

If you don’t know where your ~/.git directory is use git config --global to manipulate the settings (e.g. git config --global http.sslVerify false).

Authentication with AWS CodeCommit

AWS CodeCommit authentication can also be done. AWS CodeCommit uses an authentication helper when using Git from the command line. This helper is not used with the JGit library, so a JGit CredentialProvider for AWS CodeCommit will be created if the Git URI matches the AWS CodeCommit pattern. AWS CodeCommit URIs always look like https://git-codecommit.${AWS_REGION}.amazonaws.com/${repopath}.

If you provide a username and password with an AWS CodeCommit URI, then these must be the AWS accessKeyId and secretAccessKey to be used to access the repository. If you do not specify a username and password, then the accessKeyId and secretAccessKey will be retrieved using the AWS Default Credential Provider Chain.

If your Git URI matches the CodeCommit URI pattern (above) then you must provide valid AWS credentials in the username and password, or in one of the locations supported by the default credential provider chain. AWS EC2 instances may use IAM Roles for EC2 Instances.

Note: The aws-java-sdk-core jar is an optional dependency. If the aws-java-sdk-core jar is not on your classpath, then the AWS Code Commit credential provider will not be created regardless of the git server URI.

Git SSH configuration using properties

By default, the JGit library used by Spring Cloud Config Server uses SSH configuration files such as ~/.ssh/known_hosts and /etc/ssh/ssh_config when connecting to Git repositories using an SSH URI. In cloud environments such as Cloud Foundry, the local filesystem may be ephemeral or not easily accessible. For cases such as these, SSH configuration can be set using Java properties. In order to activate property based SSH configuration, the property spring.cloud.config.server.git.ignoreLocalSshSettings must be set to true. Example:

  spring:
    cloud:
      config:
        server:
          git:
            uri: git@gitserver.com:team/repo1.git
            ignoreLocalSshSettings: true
            hostKey: someHostKey
            hostKeyAlgorithm: ssh-rsa
            privateKey: |
                         -----BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY-----
                         MIIEpgIBAAKCAQEAx4UbaDzY5xjW6hc9jwN0mX33XpTDVW9WqHp5AKaRbtAC3DqX
                         IXFMPgw3K45jxRb93f8tv9vL3rD9CUG1Gv4FM+o7ds7FRES5RTjv2RT/JVNJCoqF
                         ol8+ngLqRZCyBtQN7zYByWMRirPGoDUqdPYrj2yq+ObBBNhg5N+hOwKjjpzdj2Ud
                         1l7R+wxIqmJo1IYyy16xS8WsjyQuyC0lL456qkd5BDZ0Ag8j2X9H9D5220Ln7s9i
                         oezTipXipS7p7Jekf3Ywx6abJwOmB0rX79dV4qiNcGgzATnG1PkXxqt76VhcGa0W
                         DDVHEEYGbSQ6hIGSh0I7BQun0aLRZojfE3gqHQIDAQABAoIBAQCZmGrk8BK6tXCd
                         fY6yTiKxFzwb38IQP0ojIUWNrq0+9Xt+NsypviLHkXfXXCKKU4zUHeIGVRq5MN9b
                         BO56/RrcQHHOoJdUWuOV2qMqJvPUtC0CpGkD+valhfD75MxoXU7s3FK7yjxy3rsG
                         EmfA6tHV8/4a5umo5TqSd2YTm5B19AhRqiuUVI1wTB41DjULUGiMYrnYrhzQlVvj
                         5MjnKTlYu3V8PoYDfv1GmxPPh6vlpafXEeEYN8VB97e5x3DGHjZ5UrurAmTLTdO8
                         +AahyoKsIY612TkkQthJlt7FJAwnCGMgY6podzzvzICLFmmTXYiZ/28I4BX/mOSe
                         pZVnfRixAoGBAO6Uiwt40/PKs53mCEWngslSCsh9oGAaLTf/XdvMns5VmuyyAyKG
                         ti8Ol5wqBMi4GIUzjbgUvSUt+IowIrG3f5tN85wpjQ1UGVcpTnl5Qo9xaS1PFScQ
                         xrtWZ9eNj2TsIAMp/svJsyGG3OibxfnuAIpSXNQiJPwRlW3irzpGgVx/AoGBANYW
                         dnhshUcEHMJi3aXwR12OTDnaLoanVGLwLnkqLSYUZA7ZegpKq90UAuBdcEfgdpyi
                         PhKpeaeIiAaNnFo8m9aoTKr+7I6/uMTlwrVnfrsVTZv3orxjwQV20YIBCVRKD1uX
                         VhE0ozPZxwwKSPAFocpyWpGHGreGF1AIYBE9UBtjAoGBAI8bfPgJpyFyMiGBjO6z
                         FwlJc/xlFqDusrcHL7abW5qq0L4v3R+FrJw3ZYufzLTVcKfdj6GelwJJO+8wBm+R
                         gTKYJItEhT48duLIfTDyIpHGVm9+I1MGhh5zKuCqIhxIYr9jHloBB7kRm0rPvYY4
                         VAykcNgyDvtAVODP+4m6JvhjAoGBALbtTqErKN47V0+JJpapLnF0KxGrqeGIjIRV
                         cYA6V4WYGr7NeIfesecfOC356PyhgPfpcVyEztwlvwTKb3RzIT1TZN8fH4YBr6Ee
                         KTbTjefRFhVUjQqnucAvfGi29f+9oE3Ei9f7wA+H35ocF6JvTYUsHNMIO/3gZ38N
                         CPjyCMa9AoGBAMhsITNe3QcbsXAbdUR00dDsIFVROzyFJ2m40i4KCRM35bC/BIBs
                         q0TY3we+ERB40U8Z2BvU61QuwaunJ2+uGadHo58VSVdggqAo0BSkH58innKKt96J
                         69pcVH/4rmLbXdcmNYGm6iu+MlPQk4BUZknHSmVHIFdJ0EPupVaQ8RHT
                         -----END RSA PRIVATE KEY-----

Table 5.1. SSH Configuration properties

Property NameRemarks

ignoreLocalSshSettings

If true, use property based SSH config instead of file based. Must be set at as spring.cloud.config.server.git.ignoreLocalSshSettings, not inside a repository definition.

privateKey

Valid SSH private key. Must be set if ignoreLocalSshSettings is true and Git URI is SSH format

hostKey

Valid SSH host key. Must be set if hostKeyAlgorithm is also set

hostKeyAlgorithm

One of ssh-dss, ssh-rsa, ecdsa-sha2-nistp256, ecdsa-sha2-nistp384 ,ecdsa-sha2-nistp521. Must be set if hostKey is also set

strictHostKeyChecking

true or false. If false, ignore errors with host key


Placeholders in Git Search Paths

Spring Cloud Config Server also supports a search path with placeholders for the {application} and {profile} (and {label} if you need it). Example:

spring:
  cloud:
    config:
      server:
        git:
          uri: https://github.com/spring-cloud-samples/config-repo
          searchPaths: '{application}'

searches the repository for files in the same name as the directory (as well as the top level). Wildcards are also valid in a search path with placeholders (any matching directory is included in the search).

Force pull in Git Repositories

As mentioned before Spring Cloud Config Server makes a clone of the remote git repository and if somehow the local copy gets dirty (e.g. folder content changes by OS process) so Spring Cloud Config Server cannot update the local copy from remote repository.

To solve this there is a force-pull property that will make Spring Cloud Config Server force pull from remote repository if the local copy is dirty. Example:

spring:
  cloud:
    config:
      server:
        git:
          uri: https://github.com/spring-cloud-samples/config-repo
          force-pull: true

If you have a multiple repositories configuration you can configure the force-pull property per repository. Example:

spring:
  cloud:
    config:
      server:
        git:
          uri: https://git/common/config-repo.git
          force-pull: true
          repos:
            team-a:
                pattern: team-a-*
                uri: http://git/team-a/config-repo.git
                force-pull: true
            team-b:
                pattern: team-b-*
                uri: http://git/team-b/config-repo.git
                force-pull: true
            team-c:
                pattern: team-c-*
                uri: http://git/team-a/config-repo.git
[Note]Note

The default value for force-pull property is false.

5.1.2 Version Control Backend Filesystem Use

[Warning]Warning

With VCS based backends (git, svn) files are checked out or cloned to the local filesystem. By default they are put in the system temporary directory with a prefix of config-repo-. On linux, for example it could be /tmp/config-repo-<randomid>. Some operating systems routinely clean out temporary directories. This can lead to unexpected behaviour such as missing properties. To avoid this problem, change the directory Config Server uses, by setting spring.cloud.config.server.git.basedir or spring.cloud.config.server.svn.basedir to a directory that does not reside in the system temp structure.

5.1.3 File System Backend

There is also a "native" profile in the Config Server that doesn’t use Git, but just loads the config files from the local classpath or file system (any static URL you want to point to with "spring.cloud.config.server.native.searchLocations"). To use the native profile just launch the Config Server with "spring.profiles.active=native".

[Note]Note

Remember to use the file: prefix for file resources (the default without a prefix is usually the classpath). Just as with any Spring Boot configuration you can embed ${}-style environment placeholders, but remember that absolute paths in Windows require an extra "/", e.g. file:///${user.home}/config-repo

[Warning]Warning

The default value of the searchLocations is identical to a local Spring Boot application (so [classpath:/, classpath:/config, file:./, file:./config]). This does not expose the application.properties from the server to all clients because any property sources present in the server are removed before being sent to the client.

[Tip]Tip

A filesystem backend is great for getting started quickly and for testing. To use it in production you need to be sure that the file system is reliable, and shared across all instances of the Config Server.

The search locations can contain placeholders for {application}, {profile} and {label}. In this way you can segregate the directories in the path, and choose a strategy that makes sense for you (e.g. sub-directory per application, or sub-directory per profile).

If you don’t use placeholders in the search locations, this repository also appends the {label} parameter of the HTTP resource to a suffix on the search path, so properties files are loaded from each search location and a subdirectory with the same name as the label (the labelled properties take precedence in the Spring Environment). Thus the default behaviour with no placeholders is the same as adding a search location ending with /{label}/. For example file:/tmp/config is the same as file:/tmp/config,file:/tmp/config/{label}. This behavior can be disabled by setting spring.cloud.config.server.native.addLabelLocations=false.

5.1.4 Vault Backend

Spring Cloud Config Server also supports Vault as a backend.

For more information on Vault see the Vault quickstart guide.

To enable the config server to use a Vault backend you must run your config server with the vault profile. For example in your config server’s application.properties you can add spring.profiles.active=vault.

By default the config server will assume your Vault server is running at http://127.0.0.1:8200. It also will assume that the name of backend is secret and the key is application. All of these defaults can be configured in your config server’s application.properties. Below is a table of configurable Vault properties. All properties are prefixed with spring.cloud.config.server.vault.

NameDefault Value

host

127.0.0.1

port

8200

scheme

http

backend

secret

defaultKey

application

profileSeparator

,

All configurable properties can be found in org.springframework.cloud.config.server.environment.VaultEnvironmentRepository.

With your config server running you can make HTTP requests to the server to retrieve values from the Vault backend. To do this you will need a token for your Vault server.

First place some data in you Vault. For example

$ vault write secret/application foo=bar baz=bam
$ vault write secret/myapp foo=myappsbar

Now make the HTTP request to your config server to retrieve the values.

$ curl -X "GET" "http://localhost:8888/myapp/default" -H "X-Config-Token: yourtoken"

You should see a response similar to this after making the above request.

{
   "name":"myapp",
   "profiles":[
      "default"
   ],
   "label":null,
   "version":null,
   "state":null,
   "propertySources":[
      {
         "name":"vault:myapp",
         "source":{
            "foo":"myappsbar"
         }
      },
      {
         "name":"vault:application",
         "source":{
            "baz":"bam",
            "foo":"bar"
         }
      }
   ]
}

Multiple Properties Sources

When using Vault you can provide your applications with multiple properties sources. For example, assume you have written data to the following paths in Vault.

secret/myApp,dev
secret/myApp
secret/application,dev
secret/application

Properties written to secret/application are available to all applications using the Config Server. An application with the name myApp would have any properties written to secret/myApp and secret/application available to it. When myApp has the dev profile enabled then properties written to all of the above paths would be available to it, with properties in the first path in the list taking priority over the others.

5.1.5 Sharing Configuration With All Applications

File Based Repositories

With file-based (i.e. git, svn and native) repositories, resources with file names in application* are shared between all client applications (so application.properties, application.yml, application-*.properties etc.). You can use resources with these file names to configure global defaults and have them overridden by application-specific files as necessary.

The #_property_overrides[property overrides] feature can also be used for setting global defaults, and with placeholders applications are allowed to override them locally.

[Tip]Tip

With the "native" profile (local file system backend) it is recommended that you use an explicit search location that isn’t part of the server’s own configuration. Otherwise the application* resources in the default search locations are removed because they are part of the server.

Vault Server

When using Vault as a backend you can share configuration with all applications by placing configuration in secret/application. For example, if you run this Vault command

$ vault write secret/application foo=bar baz=bam

All applications using the config server will have the properties foo and baz available to them.

5.1.6 Composite Environment Repositories

In some scenarios you may wish to pull configuration data from multiple environment repositories. To do this just enable multiple profiles in your config server’s application properties or YAML file. If, for example, you want to pull configuration data from a Git repository as well as a SVN repository you would set the following properties for your configuration server.

spring:
  profiles:
    active: git, svn
  cloud:
    config:
      server:
        svn:
          uri: file:///path/to/svn/repo
          order: 2
        git:
          uri: file:///path/to/git/repo
          order: 1

In addition to each repo specifying a URI, you can also specify an order property. The order property allows you to specify the priority order for all your repositories. The lower the numerical value of the order property the higher priority it will have. The priority order of a repository will help resolve any potential conflicts between repositories that contain values for the same properties.

[Note]Note

Any type of failure when retrieving values from an environment repositoy will result in a failure for the entire composite environment.

[Note]Note

When using a composite environment it is important that all repos contain the same label(s). If you have an environment similar to the one above and you request configuration data with the label master but the SVN repo does not contain a branch called master the entire request will fail.

Custom Composite Environment Repositories

It is also possible to provide your own EnvironmentRepository bean to be included as part of a composite environment in addition to using one of the environment repositories from Spring Cloud. To do this your bean must implement the EnvironmentRepository interface. If you would like to control the priority of you custom EnvironmentRepository within the composite environment you should also implement the Ordered interface and override the getOrdered method. If you do not implement the Ordered interface then your EnvironmentRepository will be given the lowest priority.

5.1.7 Property Overrides

The Config Server has an "overrides" feature that allows the operator to provide configuration properties to all applications that cannot be accidentally changed by the application using the normal Spring Boot hooks. To declare overrides just add a map of name-value pairs to spring.cloud.config.server.overrides. For example

spring:
  cloud:
    config:
      server:
        overrides:
          foo: bar

will cause all applications that are config clients to read foo=bar independent of their own configuration. (Of course an application can use the data in the Config Server in any way it likes, so overrides are not enforceable, but they do provide useful default behaviour if they are Spring Cloud Config clients.)

[Tip]Tip

Normal, Spring environment placeholders with "${}" can be escaped (and resolved on the client) by using backslash ("\") to escape the "$" or the "{", e.g. \${app.foo:bar} resolves to "bar" unless the app provides its own "app.foo". Note that in YAML you don’t need to escape the backslash itself, but in properties files you do, when you configure the overrides on the server.

You can change the priority of all overrides in the client to be more like default values, allowing applications to supply their own values in environment variables or System properties, by setting the flag spring.cloud.config.overrideNone=true (default is false) in the remote repository.

5.2 Health Indicator

Config Server comes with a Health Indicator that checks if the configured EnvironmentRepository is working. By default it asks the EnvironmentRepository for an application named app, the default profile and the default label provided by the EnvironmentRepository implementation.

You can configure the Health Indicator to check more applications along with custom profiles and custom labels, e.g.

spring:
  cloud:
    config:
      server:
        health:
          repositories:
            myservice:
              label: mylabel
            myservice-dev:
              name: myservice
              profiles: development

You can disable the Health Indicator by setting spring.cloud.config.server.health.enabled=false.

5.3 Security

You are free to secure your Config Server in any way that makes sense to you (from physical network security to OAuth2 bearer tokens), and Spring Security and Spring Boot make it easy to do pretty much anything.

To use the default Spring Boot configured HTTP Basic security, just include Spring Security on the classpath (e.g. through spring-boot-starter-security). The default is a username of "user" and a randomly generated password, which isn’t going to be very useful in practice, so we recommend you configure the password (via security.user.password) and encrypt it (see below for instructions on how to do that).

5.4 Encryption and Decryption

[Important]Important

Prerequisites: to use the encryption and decryption features you need the full-strength JCE installed in your JVM (it’s not there by default). You can download the "Java Cryptography Extension (JCE) Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files" from Oracle, and follow instructions for installation (essentially replace the 2 policy files in the JRE lib/security directory with the ones that you downloaded).

If the remote property sources contain encrypted content (values starting with {cipher}) they will be decrypted before sending to clients over HTTP. The main advantage of this set up is that the property values don’t have to be in plain text when they are "at rest" (e.g. in a git repository). If a value cannot be decrypted it is removed from the property source and an additional property is added with the same key, but prefixed with "invalid." and a value that means "not applicable" (usually "<n/a>"). This is largely to prevent cipher text being used as a password and accidentally leaking.

If you are setting up a remote config repository for config client applications it might contain an application.yml like this, for instance:

application.yml. 

spring:
  datasource:
    username: dbuser
    password: '{cipher}FKSAJDFGYOS8F7GLHAKERGFHLSAJ'

Encrypted values in a .properties file must not be wrapped in quotes, otherwise the value will not be decrypted:

application.properties. 

spring.datasource.username: dbuser
spring.datasource.password: {cipher}FKSAJDFGYOS8F7GLHAKERGFHLSAJ

You can safely push this plain text to a shared git repository and the secret password is protected.

The server also exposes /encrypt and /decrypt endpoints (on the assumption that these will be secured and only accessed by authorized agents). If you are editing a remote config file you can use the Config Server to encrypt values by POSTing to the /encrypt endpoint, e.g.

$ curl localhost:8888/encrypt -d mysecret
682bc583f4641835fa2db009355293665d2647dade3375c0ee201de2a49f7bda
[Note]Note

If the value you are encrypting has characters in it that need to be URL encoded you should use the --data-urlencode option to curl to make sure they are encoded properly.

[Tip]Tip

Be sure not to include any of the curl command statistics in the encrypted value. Outputting the value to a file can help avoid this problem.

The inverse operation is also available via /decrypt (provided the server is configured with a symmetric key or a full key pair):

$ curl localhost:8888/decrypt -d 682bc583f4641835fa2db009355293665d2647dade3375c0ee201de2a49f7bda
mysecret
[Tip]Tip

If you are testing like this with curl, then use --data-urlencode (instead of -d) or set an explicit Content-Type: text/plain to make sure curl encodes the data correctly when there are special characters ('+' is particularly tricky).

Take the encrypted value and add the {cipher} prefix before you put it in the YAML or properties file, and before you commit and push it to a remote, potentially insecure store.

The /encrypt and /decrypt endpoints also both accept paths of the form /*/{name}/{profiles} which can be used to control cryptography per application (name) and profile when clients call into the main Environment resource.

[Note]Note

to control the cryptography in this granular way you must also provide a @Bean of type TextEncryptorLocator that creates a different encryptor per name and profiles. The one that is provided by default does not do this (so all encryptions use the same key).

The spring command line client (with Spring Cloud CLI extensions installed) can also be used to encrypt and decrypt, e.g.

$ spring encrypt mysecret --key foo
682bc583f4641835fa2db009355293665d2647dade3375c0ee201de2a49f7bda
$ spring decrypt --key foo 682bc583f4641835fa2db009355293665d2647dade3375c0ee201de2a49f7bda
mysecret

To use a key in a file (e.g. an RSA public key for encryption) prepend the key value with "@" and provide the file path, e.g.

$ spring encrypt mysecret --key @${HOME}/.ssh/id_rsa.pub
AQAjPgt3eFZQXwt8tsHAVv/QHiY5sI2dRcR+...

The key argument is mandatory (despite having a -- prefix).

5.5 Key Management

The Config Server can use a symmetric (shared) key or an asymmetric one (RSA key pair). The asymmetric choice is superior in terms of security, but it is often more convenient to use a symmetric key since it is just a single property value to configure.

To configure a symmetric key you just need to set encrypt.key to a secret String (or use an enviroment variable ENCRYPT_KEY to keep it out of plain text configuration files).

To configure an asymmetric key you can either set the key as a PEM-encoded text value (in encrypt.key), or via a keystore (e.g. as created by the keytool utility that comes with the JDK). The keystore properties are encrypt.keyStore.* with * equal to

  • location (a Resource location),
  • password (to unlock the keystore) and
  • alias (to identify which key in the store is to be used).

The encryption is done with the public key, and a private key is needed for decryption. Thus in principle you can configure only the public key in the server if you only want to do encryption (and are prepared to decrypt the values yourself locally with the private key). In practice you might not want to do that because it spreads the key management process around all the clients, instead of concentrating it in the server. On the other hand it’s a useful option if your config server really is relatively insecure and only a handful of clients need the encrypted properties.

5.6 Creating a Key Store for Testing

To create a keystore for testing you can do something like this:

$ keytool -genkeypair -alias mytestkey -keyalg RSA \
  -dname "CN=Web Server,OU=Unit,O=Organization,L=City,S=State,C=US" \
  -keypass changeme -keystore server.jks -storepass letmein

Put the server.jks file in the classpath (for instance) and then in your application.yml for the Config Server:

encrypt:
  keyStore:
    location: classpath:/server.jks
    password: letmein
    alias: mytestkey
    secret: changeme

5.7 Using Multiple Keys and Key Rotation

In addition to the {cipher} prefix in encrypted property values, the Config Server looks for {name:value} prefixes (zero or many) before the start of the (Base64 encoded) cipher text. The keys are passed to a TextEncryptorLocator which can do whatever logic it needs to locate a TextEncryptor for the cipher. If you have configured a keystore (encrypt.keystore.location) the default locator will look for keys in the store with aliases as supplied by the "key" prefix, i.e. with a cipher text like this:

foo:
  bar: `{cipher}{key:testkey}...`

the locator will look for a key named "testkey". A secret can also be supplied via a {secret:…​} value in the prefix, but if it is not the default is to use the keystore password (which is what you get when you build a keytore and don’t specify a secret). If you do supply a secret it is recommended that you also encrypt the secrets using a custom SecretLocator.

Key rotation is hardly ever necessary on cryptographic grounds if the keys are only being used to encrypt a few bytes of configuration data (i.e. they are not being used elsewhere), but occasionally you might need to change the keys if there is a security breach for instance. In that case all the clients would need to change their source config files (e.g. in git) and use a new {key:…​} prefix in all the ciphers, checking beforehand of course that the key alias is available in the Config Server keystore.

[Tip]Tip

the {name:value} prefixes can also be added to plaintext posted to the /encrypt endpoint, if you want to let the Config Server handle all encryption as well as decryption.

5.8 Serving Encrypted Properties

Sometimes you want the clients to decrypt the configuration locally, instead of doing it in the server. In that case you can still have /encrypt and /decrypt endpoints (if you provide the encrypt.* configuration to locate a key), but you need to explicitly switch off the decryption of outgoing properties using spring.cloud.config.server.encrypt.enabled=false. If you don’t care about the endpoints, then it should work if you configure neither the key nor the enabled flag.

6. Serving Alternative Formats

The default JSON format from the environment endpoints is perfect for consumption by Spring applications because it maps directly onto the Environment abstraction. If you prefer you can consume the same data as YAML or Java properties by adding a suffix to the resource path (".yml", ".yaml" or ".properties"). This can be useful for consumption by applications that do not care about the structure of the JSON endpoints, or the extra metadata they provide, for example an application that is not using Spring might benefit from the simplicity of this approach.

The YAML and properties representations have an additional flag (provided as a boolean query parameter resolvePlaceholders) to signal that placeholders in the source documents, in the standard Spring ${…​} form, should be resolved in the output where possible before rendering. This is a useful feature for consumers that don’t know about the Spring placeholder conventions.

[Note]Note

there are limitations in using the YAML or properties formats, mainly in relation to the loss of metadata. The JSON is structured as an ordered list of property sources, for example, with names that correlate with the source. The YAML and properties forms are coalesced into a single map, even if the origin of the values has multiple sources, and the names of the original source files are lost. The YAML representation is not necessarily a faithful representation of the YAML source in a backing repository either: it is constructed from a list of flat property sources, and assumptions have to be made about the form of the keys.

7. Serving Plain Text

Instead of using the Environment abstraction (or one of the alternative representations of it in YAML or properties format) your applications might need generic plain text configuration files, tailored to their environment. The Config Server provides these through an additional endpoint at /{name}/{profile}/{label}/{path} where "name", "profile" and "label" have the same meaning as the regular environment endpoint, but "path" is a file name (e.g. log.xml). The source files for this endpoint are located in the same way as for the environment endpoints: the same search path is used as for properties or YAML files, but instead of aggregating all matching resources, only the first one to match is returned.

After a resource is located, placeholders in the normal format (${…​}) are resolved using the effective Environment for the application name, profile and label supplied. In this way the resource endpoint is tightly integrated with the environment endpoints. Example, if you have this layout for a GIT (or SVN) repository:

application.yml
nginx.conf

where nginx.conf looks like this:

server {
    listen              80;
    server_name         ${nginx.server.name};
}

and application.yml like this:

nginx:
  server:
    name: example.com
---
spring:
  profiles: development
nginx:
  server:
    name: develop.com

then the /foo/default/master/nginx.conf resource looks like this:

server {
    listen              80;
    server_name         example.com;
}

and /foo/development/master/nginx.conf like this:

server {
    listen              80;
    server_name         develop.com;
}
[Note]Note

just like the source files for environment configuration, the "profile" is used to resolve the file name, so if you want a profile-specific file then /*/development/*/logback.xml will be resolved by a file called logback-development.xml (in preference to logback.xml).

8. Embedding the Config Server

The Config Server runs best as a standalone application, but if you need to you can embed it in another application. Just use the @EnableConfigServer annotation. An optional property that can be useful in this case is spring.cloud.config.server.bootstrap which is a flag to indicate that the server should configure itself from its own remote repository. The flag is off by default because it can delay startup, but when embedded in another application it makes sense to initialize the same way as any other application.

[Note]Note

It should be obvious, but remember that if you use the bootstrap flag the config server will need to have its name and repository URI configured in bootstrap.yml.

To change the location of the server endpoints you can (optionally) set spring.cloud.config.server.prefix, e.g. "/config", to serve the resources under a prefix. The prefix should start but not end with a "/". It is applied to the @RequestMappings in the Config Server (i.e. underneath the Spring Boot prefixes server.servletPath and server.contextPath).

If you want to read the configuration for an application directly from the backend repository (instead of from the config server) that’s basically an embedded config server with no endpoints. You can switch off the endpoints entirely if you don’t use the @EnableConfigServer annotation (just set spring.cloud.config.server.bootstrap=true).

9. Push Notifications and Spring Cloud Bus

Many source code repository providers (like Github, Gitlab or Bitbucket for instance) will notify you of changes in a repository through a webhook. You can configure the webhook via the provider’s user interface as a URL and a set of events in which you are interested. For instance Github will POST to the webhook with a JSON body containing a list of commits, and a header "X-Github-Event" equal to "push". If you add a dependency on the spring-cloud-config-monitor library and activate the Spring Cloud Bus in your Config Server, then a "/monitor" endpoint is enabled.

When the webhook is activated the Config Server will send a RefreshRemoteApplicationEvent targeted at the applications it thinks might have changed. The change detection can be strategized, but by default it just looks for changes in files that match the application name (e.g. "foo.properties" is targeted at the "foo" application, and "application.properties" is targeted at all applications). The strategy if you want to override the behaviour is PropertyPathNotificationExtractor which accepts the request headers and body as parameters and returns a list of file paths that changed.

The default configuration works out of the box with Github, Gitlab or Bitbucket. In addition to the JSON notifications from Github, Gitlab or Bitbucket you can trigger a change notification by POSTing to "/monitor" with a form-encoded body parameters path={name}. This will broadcast to applications matching the "{name}" pattern (can contain wildcards).

[Note]Note

the RefreshRemoteApplicationEvent will only be transmitted if the spring-cloud-bus is activated in the Config Server and in the client application.

[Note]Note

the default configuration also detects filesystem changes in local git repositories (the webhook is not used in that case but as soon as you edit a config file a refresh will be broadcast).

10. Spring Cloud Config Client

A Spring Boot application can take immediate advantage of the Spring Config Server (or other external property sources provided by the application developer), and it will also pick up some additional useful features related to Environment change events.

10.1 Config First Bootstrap

This is the default behaviour for any application which has the Spring Cloud Config Client on the classpath. When a config client starts up it binds to the Config Server (via the bootstrap configuration property spring.cloud.config.uri) and initializes Spring Environment with remote property sources.

The net result of this is that all client apps that want to consume the Config Server need a bootstrap.yml (or an environment variable) with the server address in spring.cloud.config.uri (defaults to "http://localhost:8888").

10.2 Discovery First Bootstrap

If you are using a `DiscoveryClient implementation, such as Spring Cloud Netflix and Eureka Service Discovery or Spring Cloud Consul (Spring Cloud Zookeeper does not support this yet), then you can have the Config Server register with the Discovery Service if you want to, but in the default "Config First" mode, clients won’t be able to take advantage of the registration.

If you prefer to use DiscoveryClient to locate the Config Server, you can do that by setting spring.cloud.config.discovery.enabled=true (default "false"). The net result of that is that client apps all need a bootstrap.yml (or an environment variable) with the appropriate discovery configuration. For example, with Spring Cloud Netflix, you need to define the Eureka server address, e.g. in eureka.client.serviceUrl.defaultZone. The price for using this option is an extra network round trip on start up to locate the service registration. The benefit is that the Config Server can change its co-ordinates, as long as the Discovery Service is a fixed point. The default service id is "configserver" but you can change that on the client with spring.cloud.config.discovery.serviceId (and on the server in the usual way for a service, e.g. by setting spring.application.name).

The discovery client implementations all support some kind of metadata map (e.g. for Eureka we have eureka.instance.metadataMap). Some additional properties of the Config Server may need to be configured in its service registration metadata so that clients can connect correctly. If the Config Server is secured with HTTP Basic you can configure the credentials as "username" and "password". And if the Config Server has a context path you can set "configPath". Example, for a Config Server that is a Eureka client:

bootstrap.yml. 

eureka:
  instance:
    ...
    metadataMap:
      user: osufhalskjrtl
      password: lviuhlszvaorhvlo5847
      configPath: /config

10.3 Config Client Fail Fast

In some cases, it may be desirable to fail startup of a service if it cannot connect to the Config Server. If this is the desired behavior, set the bootstrap configuration property spring.cloud.config.failFast=true and the client will halt with an Exception.

10.4 Config Client Retry

If you expect that the config server may occasionally be unavailable when your app starts, you can ask it to keep trying after a failure. First you need to set spring.cloud.config.failFast=true, and then you need to add spring-retry and spring-boot-starter-aop to your classpath. The default behaviour is to retry 6 times with an initial backoff interval of 1000ms and an exponential multiplier of 1.1 for subsequent backoffs. You can configure these properties (and others) using spring.cloud.config.retry.* configuration properties.

[Tip]Tip

To take full control of the retry add a @Bean of type RetryOperationsInterceptor with id "configServerRetryInterceptor". Spring Retry has a RetryInterceptorBuilder that makes it easy to create one.

10.5 Locating Remote Configuration Resources

The Config Service serves property sources from /{name}/{profile}/{label}, where the default bindings in the client app are

  • "name" = ${spring.application.name}
  • "profile" = ${spring.profiles.active} (actually Environment.getActiveProfiles())
  • "label" = "master"

All of them can be overridden by setting spring.cloud.config.* (where * is "name", "profile" or "label"). The "label" is useful for rolling back to previous versions of configuration; with the default Config Server implementation it can be a git label, branch name or commit id. Label can also be provided as a comma-separated list, in which case the items in the list are tried on-by-one until one succeeds. This can be useful when working on a feature branch, for instance, when you might want to align the config label with your branch, but make it optional (e.g. spring.cloud.config.label=myfeature,develop).

10.6 Security

If you use HTTP Basic security on the server then clients just need to know the password (and username if it isn’t the default). You can do that via the config server URI, or via separate username and password properties, e.g.

bootstrap.yml. 

spring:
  cloud:
    config:
     uri: https://user:[email protected]

or

bootstrap.yml. 

spring:
  cloud:
    config:
     uri: https://myconfig.mycompany.com
     username: user
     password: secret

The spring.cloud.config.password and spring.cloud.config.username values override anything that is provided in the URI.

If you deploy your apps on Cloud Foundry then the best way to provide the password is through service credentials, e.g. in the URI, since then it doesn’t even need to be in a config file. An example which works locally and for a user-provided service on Cloud Foundry named "configserver":

bootstrap.yml. 

spring:
  cloud:
    config:
     uri: ${vcap.services.configserver.credentials.uri:http://user:password@localhost:8888}

If you use another form of security you might need to provide a RestTemplate to the ConfigServicePropertySourceLocator (e.g. by grabbing it in the bootstrap context and injecting one).

10.6.1 Health Indicator

The Config Client supplies a Spring Boot Health Indicator that attempts to load configuration from Config Server. The health indicator can be disabled by setting health.config.enabled=false. The response is also cached for performance reasons. The default cache time to live is 5 minutes. To change that value set the health.config.time-to-live property (in milliseconds).

10.6.2 Providing A Custom RestTemplate

In some cases you might need to customize the requests made to the config server from the client. Typically this involves passing special Authorization headers to authenticate requests to the server. To provide a custom RestTemplate follow the steps below.

  1. Create a new configuration bean with an implementation of PropertySourceLocator.

CustomConfigServiceBootstrapConfiguration.java. 

@Configuration
public class CustomConfigServiceBootstrapConfiguration {
    @Bean
    public ConfigServicePropertySourceLocator configServicePropertySourceLocator() {
        ConfigClientProperties clientProperties = configClientProperties();
       ConfigServicePropertySourceLocator configServicePropertySourceLocator =  new ConfigServicePropertySourceLocator(clientProperties);
        configServicePropertySourceLocator.setRestTemplate(customRestTemplate(clientProperties));
        return configServicePropertySourceLocator;
    }
}

  1. In resources/META-INF create a file called spring.factories and specify your custom configuration.

spring.factories. 

org.springframework.cloud.bootstrap.BootstrapConfiguration = com.my.config.client.CustomConfigServiceBootstrapConfiguration

10.6.3 Vault

When using Vault as a backend to your config server the client will need to supply a token for the server to retrieve values from Vault. This token can be provided within the client by setting spring.cloud.config.token in bootstrap.yml.

bootstrap.yml. 

spring:
  cloud:
    config:
      token: YourVaultToken

10.7 Vault

10.7.1 Nested Keys In Vault

Vault supports the ability to nest keys in a value stored in Vault. For example

echo -n '{"appA": {"secret": "appAsecret"}, "bar": "baz"}' | vault write secret/myapp -

This command will write a JSON object to your Vault. To access these values in Spring you would use the traditional dot(.) annotation. For example

@Value("${appA.secret}")
String name = "World";

The above code would set the name variable to appAsecret.

Part III. Spring Cloud Netflix

Dalston.SR5

This project provides Netflix OSS integrations for Spring Boot apps through autoconfiguration and binding to the Spring Environment and other Spring programming model idioms. With a few simple annotations you can quickly enable and configure the common patterns inside your application and build large distributed systems with battle-tested Netflix components. The patterns provided include Service Discovery (Eureka), Circuit Breaker (Hystrix), Intelligent Routing (Zuul) and Client Side Load Balancing (Ribbon).

11. Service Discovery: Eureka Clients

Service Discovery is one of the key tenets of a microservice based architecture. Trying to hand configure each client or some form of convention can be very difficult to do and can be very brittle. Eureka is the Netflix Service Discovery Server and Client. The server can be configured and deployed to be highly available, with each server replicating state about the registered services to the others.

11.1 How to Include Eureka Client

To include Eureka Client in your project use the starter with group org.springframework.cloud and artifact id spring-cloud-starter-eureka. See the Spring Cloud Project page for details on setting up your build system with the current Spring Cloud Release Train.

11.2 Registering with Eureka

When a client registers with Eureka, it provides meta-data about itself such as host and port, health indicator URL, home page etc. Eureka receives heartbeat messages from each instance belonging to a service. If the heartbeat fails over a configurable timetable, the instance is normally removed from the registry.

Example eureka client:

@Configuration
@ComponentScan
@EnableAutoConfiguration
@EnableEurekaClient
@RestController
public class Application {

    @RequestMapping("/")
    public String home() {
        return "Hello world";
    }

    public static void main(String[] args) {
        new SpringApplicationBuilder(Application.class).web(true).run(args);
    }

}

(i.e. utterly normal Spring Boot app). In this example we use @EnableEurekaClient explicitly, but with only Eureka available you could also use @EnableDiscoveryClient. Configuration is required to locate the Eureka server. Example:

application.yml. 

eureka:
  client:
    serviceUrl:
      defaultZone: http://localhost:8761/eureka/

where "defaultZone" is a magic string fallback value that provides the service URL for any client that doesn’t express a preference (i.e. it’s a useful default).

The default application name (service ID), virtual host and non-secure port, taken from the Environment, are ${spring.application.name}, ${spring.application.name} and ${server.port} respectively.

@EnableEurekaClient makes the app into both a Eureka "instance" (i.e. it registers itself) and a "client" (i.e. it can query the registry to locate other services). The instance behaviour is driven by eureka.instance.* configuration keys, but the defaults will be fine if you ensure that your application has a spring.application.name (this is the default for the Eureka service ID, or VIP).

See EurekaInstanceConfigBean and EurekaClientConfigBean for more details of the configurable options.

11.3 Authenticating with the Eureka Server

HTTP basic authentication will be automatically added to your eureka client if one of the eureka.client.serviceUrl.defaultZone URLs has credentials embedded in it (curl style, like http://user:password@localhost:8761/eureka). For more complex needs you can create a @Bean of type DiscoveryClientOptionalArgs and inject ClientFilter instances into it, all of which will be applied to the calls from the client to the server.

[Note]Note

Because of a limitation in Eureka it isn’t possible to support per-server basic auth credentials, so only the first set that are found will be used.

11.4 Status Page and Health Indicator

The status page and health indicators for a Eureka instance default to "/info" and "/health" respectively, which are the default locations of useful endpoints in a Spring Boot Actuator application. You need to change these, even for an Actuator application if you use a non-default context path or servlet path (e.g. server.servletPath=/foo) or management endpoint path (e.g. management.contextPath=/admin). Example:

application.yml. 

eureka:
  instance:
    statusPageUrlPath: ${management.context-path}/info
    healthCheckUrlPath: ${management.context-path}/health

These links show up in the metadata that is consumed by clients, and used in some scenarios to decide whether to send requests to your application, so it’s helpful if they are accurate.

11.5 Registering a Secure Application

If your app wants to be contacted over HTTPS you can set two flags in the EurekaInstanceConfig, viz eureka.instance.[nonSecurePortEnabled,securePortEnabled]=[false,true] respectively. This will make Eureka publish instance information showing an explicit preference for secure communication. The Spring Cloud DiscoveryClient will always return a URI starting with https for a service configured this way, and the Eureka (native) instance information will have a secure health check URL.

Because of the way Eureka works internally, it will still publish a non-secure URL for status and home page unless you also override those explicitly. You can use placeholders to configure the eureka instance urls, e.g.

application.yml. 

eureka:
  instance:
    statusPageUrl: https://${eureka.hostname}/info
    healthCheckUrl: https://${eureka.hostname}/health
    homePageUrl: https://${eureka.hostname}/

(Note that ${eureka.hostname} is a native placeholder only available in later versions of Eureka. You could achieve the same thing with Spring placeholders as well, e.g. using ${eureka.instance.hostName}.)

[Note]Note

If your app is running behind a proxy, and the SSL termination is in the proxy (e.g. if you run in Cloud Foundry or other platforms as a service) then you will need to ensure that the proxy "forwarded" headers are intercepted and handled by the application. An embedded Tomcat container in a Spring Boot app does this automatically if it has explicit configuration for the 'X-Forwarded-\*` headers. A sign that you got this wrong will be that the links rendered by your app to itself will be wrong (the wrong host, port or protocol).

11.6 Eureka’s Health Checks

By default, Eureka uses the client heartbeat to determine if a client is up. Unless specified otherwise the Discovery Client will not propagate the current health check status of the application per the Spring Boot Actuator. Which means that after successful registration Eureka will always announce that the application is in 'UP' state. This behaviour can be altered by enabling Eureka health checks, which results in propagating application status to Eureka. As a consequence every other application won’t be sending traffic to application in state other then 'UP'.

application.yml. 

eureka:
  client:
    healthcheck:
      enabled: true

[Warning]Warning

eureka.client.healthcheck.enabled=true should only be set in application.yml. Setting the value in bootstrap.yml will cause undesirable side effects like registering in eureka with an UNKNOWN status.

If you require more control over the health checks, you may consider implementing your own com.netflix.appinfo.HealthCheckHandler.

11.7 Eureka Metadata for Instances and Clients

It’s worth spending a bit of time understanding how the Eureka metadata works, so you can use it in a way that makes sense in your platform. There is standard metadata for things like hostname, IP address, port numbers, status page and health check. These are published in the service registry and used by clients to contact the services in a straightforward way. Additional metadata can be added to the instance registration in the eureka.instance.metadataMap, and this will be accessible in the remote clients, but in general will not change the behaviour of the client, unless it is made aware of the meaning of the metadata. There are a couple of special cases described below where Spring Cloud already assigns meaning to the metadata map.

11.7.1 Using Eureka on Cloudfoundry

Cloudfoundry has a global router so that all instances of the same app have the same hostname (it’s the same in other PaaS solutions with a similar architecture). This isn’t necessarily a barrier to using Eureka, but if you use the router (recommended, or even mandatory depending on the way your platform was set up), you need to explicitly set the hostname and port numbers (secure or non-secure) so that they use the router. You might also want to use instance metadata so you can distinguish between the instances on the client (e.g. in a custom load balancer). By default, the eureka.instance.instanceId is vcap.application.instance_id. For example:

application.yml. 

eureka:
  instance:
    hostname: ${vcap.application.uris[0]}
    nonSecurePort: 80

Depending on the way the security rules are set up in your Cloudfoundry instance, you might be able to register and use the IP address of the host VM for direct service-to-service calls. This feature is not (yet) available on Pivotal Web Services (PWS).

11.7.2 Using Eureka on AWS

If the application is planned to be deployed to an AWS cloud, then the Eureka instance will have to be configured to be AWS aware and this can be done by customizing the EurekaInstanceConfigBean the following way:

@Bean
@Profile("!default")
public EurekaInstanceConfigBean eurekaInstanceConfig(InetUtils inetUtils) {
  EurekaInstanceConfigBean b = new EurekaInstanceConfigBean(inetUtils);
  AmazonInfo info = AmazonInfo.Builder.newBuilder().autoBuild("eureka");
  b.setDataCenterInfo(info);
  return b;
}

11.7.3 Changing the Eureka Instance ID

A vanilla Netflix Eureka instance is registered with an ID that is equal to its host name (i.e. only one service per host). Spring Cloud Eureka provides a sensible default that looks like this: ${spring.cloud.client.hostname}:${spring.application.name}:${spring.application.instance_id:${server.port}}}. For example myhost:myappname:8080.

Using Spring Cloud you can override this by providing a unique identifier in eureka.instance.instanceId. For example:

application.yml. 

eureka:
  instance:
    instanceId: ${spring.application.name}:${vcap.application.instance_id:${spring.application.instance_id:${random.value}}}

With this metadata, and multiple service instances deployed on localhost, the random value will kick in there to make the instance unique. In Cloudfoundry the vcap.application.instance_id will be populated automatically in a Spring Boot application, so the random value will not be needed.

11.8 Using the EurekaClient

Once you have an app that is @EnableDiscoveryClient (or @EnableEurekaClient) you can use it to discover service instances from the Eureka Server. One way to do that is to use the native com.netflix.discovery.EurekaClient (as opposed to the Spring Cloud DiscoveryClient), e.g.

@Autowired
private EurekaClient discoveryClient;

public String serviceUrl() {
    InstanceInfo instance = discoveryClient.getNextServerFromEureka("STORES", false);
    return instance.getHomePageUrl();
}
[Tip]Tip

Don’t use the EurekaClient in @PostConstruct method or in a @Scheduled method (or anywhere where the ApplicationContext might not be started yet). It is initialized in a SmartLifecycle (with phase=0) so the earliest you can rely on it being available is in another SmartLifecycle with higher phase.

11.9 Alternatives to the native Netflix EurekaClient

You don’t have to use the raw Netflix EurekaClient and usually it is more convenient to use it behind a wrapper of some sort. Spring Cloud has support for Feign (a REST client builder) and also Spring RestTemplate using the logical Eureka service identifiers (VIPs) instead of physical URLs. To configure Ribbon with a fixed list of physical servers you can simply set <client>.ribbon.listOfServers to a comma-separated list of physical addresses (or hostnames), where <client> is the ID of the client.

You can also use the org.springframework.cloud.client.discovery.DiscoveryClient which provides a simple API for discovery clients that is not specific to Netflix, e.g.

@Autowired
private DiscoveryClient discoveryClient;

public String serviceUrl() {
    List<ServiceInstance> list = discoveryClient.getInstances("STORES");
    if (list != null && list.size() > 0 ) {
        return list.get(0).getUri();
    }
    return null;
}

11.10 Why is it so Slow to Register a Service?

Being an instance also involves a periodic heartbeat to the registry (via the client’s serviceUrl) with default duration 30 seconds. A service is not available for discovery by clients until the instance, the server and the client all have the same metadata in their local cache (so it could take 3 heartbeats). You can change the period using eureka.instance.leaseRenewalIntervalInSeconds and this will speed up the process of getting clients connected to other services. In production it’s probably better to stick with the default because there are some computations internally in the server that make assumptions about the lease renewal period.

11.11 Zones

If you have deployed Eureka clients to multiple zones than you may prefer that those clients leverage services within the same zone before trying services in another zone. To do this you need to configure your Eureka clients correctly.

First, you need to make sure you have Eureka servers deployed to each zone and that they are peers of each other. See the section on zones and regions for more information.

Next you need to tell Eureka which zone your service is in. You can do this using the metadataMap property. For example if service 1 is deployed to both zone 1 and zone 2 you would need to set the following Eureka properties in service 1

Service 1 in Zone 1

eureka.instance.metadataMap.zone = zone1
eureka.client.preferSameZoneEureka = true

Service 1 in Zone 2

eureka.instance.metadataMap.zone = zone2
eureka.client.preferSameZoneEureka = true

12. Service Discovery: Eureka Server

12.1 How to Include Eureka Server

To include Eureka Server in your project use the starter with group org.springframework.cloud and artifact id spring-cloud-starter-eureka-server. See the Spring Cloud Project page for details on setting up your build system with the current Spring Cloud Release Train.

12.2 How to Run a Eureka Server

Example eureka server;

@SpringBootApplication
@EnableEurekaServer
public class Application {

    public static void main(String[] args) {
        new SpringApplicationBuilder(Application.class).web(true).run(args);
    }

}

The server has a home page with a UI, and HTTP API endpoints per the normal Eureka functionality under /eureka/*.

Eureka background reading: see flux capacitor and google group discussion.

[Tip]Tip

Due to Gradle’s dependency resolution rules and the lack of a parent bom feature, simply depending on spring-cloud-starter-eureka-server can cause failures on application startup. To remedy this the Spring Boot Gradle plugin must be added and the Spring cloud starter parent bom must be imported like so:

build.gradle. 

buildscript {
  dependencies {
    classpath("org.springframework.boot:spring-boot-gradle-plugin:1.3.5.RELEASE")
  }
}

apply plugin: "spring-boot"

dependencyManagement {
  imports {
    mavenBom "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-dependencies:Brixton.RELEASE"
  }
}

12.3 High Availability, Zones and Regions

The Eureka server does not have a backend store, but the service instances in the registry all have to send heartbeats to keep their registrations up to date (so this can be done in memory). Clients also have an in-memory cache of eureka registrations (so they don’t have to go to the registry for every single request to a service).

By default every Eureka server is also a Eureka client and requires (at least one) service URL to locate a peer. If you don’t provide it the service will run and work, but it will shower your logs with a lot of noise about not being able to register with the peer.

See also below for details of Ribbon support on the client side for Zones and Regions.

12.4 Standalone Mode

The combination of the two caches (client and server) and the heartbeats make a standalone Eureka server fairly resilient to failure, as long as there is some sort of monitor or elastic runtime keeping it alive (e.g. Cloud Foundry). In standalone mode, you might prefer to switch off the client side behaviour, so it doesn’t keep trying and failing to reach its peers. Example:

application.yml (Standalone Eureka Server). 

server:
  port: 8761

eureka:
  instance:
    hostname: localhost
  client:
    registerWithEureka: false
    fetchRegistry: false
    serviceUrl:
      defaultZone: http://${eureka.instance.hostname}:${server.port}/eureka/

Notice that the serviceUrl is pointing to the same host as the local instance.

12.5 Peer Awareness

Eureka can be made even more resilient and available by running multiple instances and asking them to register with each other. In fact, this is the default behaviour, so all you need to do to make it work is add a valid serviceUrl to a peer, e.g.

application.yml (Two Peer Aware Eureka Servers). 

---
spring:
  profiles: peer1
eureka:
  instance:
    hostname: peer1
  client:
    serviceUrl:
      defaultZone: http://peer2/eureka/

---
spring:
  profiles: peer2
eureka:
  instance:
    hostname: peer2
  client:
    serviceUrl:
      defaultZone: http://peer1/eureka/

In this example we have a YAML file that can be used to run the same server on 2 hosts (peer1 and peer2), by running it in different Spring profiles. You could use this configuration to test the peer awareness on a single host (there’s not much value in doing that in production) by manipulating /etc/hosts to resolve the host names. In fact, the eureka.instance.hostname is not needed if you are running on a machine that knows its own hostname (it is looked up using java.net.InetAddress by default).

You can add multiple peers to a system, and as long as they are all connected to each other by at least one edge, they will synchronize the registrations amongst themselves. If the peers are physically separated (inside a data centre or between multiple data centres) then the system can in principle survive split-brain type failures.

12.6 Prefer IP Address

In some cases, it is preferable for Eureka to advertise the IP Adresses of services rather than the hostname. Set eureka.instance.preferIpAddress to true and when the application registers with eureka, it will use its IP Address rather than its hostname.

13. Circuit Breaker: Hystrix Clients

Netflix has created a library called Hystrix that implements the circuit breaker pattern. In a microservice architecture it is common to have multiple layers of service calls.

Figure 13.1. Microservice Graph

HystrixGraph

A service failure in the lower level of services can cause cascading failure all the way up to the user. When calls to a particular service is greater than circuitBreaker.requestVolumeThreshold (default: 20 requests) and failue percentage is greater than circuitBreaker.errorThresholdPercentage (default: >50%) in a rolling window defined by metrics.rollingStats.timeInMilliseconds (default: 10 seconds), the circuit opens and the call is not made. In cases of error and an open circuit a fallback can be provided by the developer.

Figure 13.2. Hystrix fallback prevents cascading failures

HystrixFallback

Having an open circuit stops cascading failures and allows overwhelmed or failing services time to heal. The fallback can be another Hystrix protected call, static data or a sane empty value. Fallbacks may be chained so the first fallback makes some other business call which in turn falls back to static data.

13.1 How to Include Hystrix

To include Hystrix in your project use the starter with group org.springframework.cloud and artifact id spring-cloud-starter-hystrix. See the Spring Cloud Project page for details on setting up your build system with the current Spring Cloud Release Train.

Example boot app:

@SpringBootApplication
@EnableCircuitBreaker
public class Application {

    public static void main(String[] args) {
        new SpringApplicationBuilder(Application.class).web(true).run(args);
    }

}

@Component
public class StoreIntegration {

    @HystrixCommand(fallbackMethod = "defaultStores")
    public Object getStores(Map<String, Object> parameters) {
        //do stuff that might fail
    }

    public Object defaultStores(Map<String, Object> parameters) {
        return /* something useful */;
    }
}

The @HystrixCommand is provided by a Netflix contrib library called "javanica". Spring Cloud automatically wraps Spring beans with that annotation in a proxy that is connected to the Hystrix circuit breaker. The circuit breaker calculates when to open and close the circuit, and what to do in case of a failure.

To configure the @HystrixCommand you can use the commandProperties attribute with a list of @HystrixProperty annotations. See here for more details. See the Hystrix wiki for details on the properties available.

13.2 Propagating the Security Context or using Spring Scopes

If you want some thread local context to propagate into a @HystrixCommand the default declaration will not work because it executes the command in a thread pool (in case of timeouts). You can switch Hystrix to use the same thread as the caller using some configuration, or directly in the annotation, by asking it to use a different "Isolation Strategy". For example:

@HystrixCommand(fallbackMethod = "stubMyService",
    commandProperties = {
      @HystrixProperty(name="execution.isolation.strategy", value="SEMAPHORE")
    }
)
...

The same thing applies if you are using @SessionScope or @RequestScope. You will know when you need to do this because of a runtime exception that says it can’t find the scoped context.

You also have the option to set the hystrix.shareSecurityContext property to true. Doing so will auto configure an Hystrix concurrency strategy plugin hook who will transfer the SecurityContext from your main thread to the one used by the Hystrix command. Hystrix does not allow multiple hystrix concurrency strategy to be registered so an extension mechanism is available by declaring your own HystrixConcurrencyStrategy as a Spring bean. Spring Cloud will lookup for your implementation within the Spring context and wrap it inside its own plugin.

13.3 Health Indicator

The state of the connected circuit breakers are also exposed in the /health endpoint of the calling application.

{
    "hystrix": {
        "openCircuitBreakers": [
            "StoreIntegration::getStoresByLocationLink"
        ],
        "status": "CIRCUIT_OPEN"
    },
    "status": "UP"
}

13.4 Hystrix Metrics Stream

To enable the Hystrix metrics stream include a dependency on spring-boot-starter-actuator. This will expose the /hystrix.stream as a management endpoint.

    <dependency>
        <groupId>org.springframework.boot</groupId>
        <artifactId>spring-boot-starter-actuator</artifactId>
    </dependency>

14. Circuit Breaker: Hystrix Dashboard

One of the main benefits of Hystrix is the set of metrics it gathers about each HystrixCommand. The Hystrix Dashboard displays the health of each circuit breaker in an efficient manner.

Figure 14.1. Hystrix Dashboard

Hystrix

15. Hystrix Timeouts And Ribbon Clients

When using Hystrix commands that wrap Ribbon clients you want to make sure your Hystrix timeout is configured to be longer than the configured Ribbon timeout, including any potential retries that might be made. For example, if your Ribbon connection timeout is one second and the Ribbon client might retry the request three times, than your Hystrix timeout should be slightly more than three seconds.

15.1 How to Include Hystrix Dashboard

To include the Hystrix Dashboard in your project use the starter with group org.springframework.cloud and artifact id spring-cloud-starter-hystrix-dashboard. See the Spring Cloud Project page for details on setting up your build system with the current Spring Cloud Release Train.

To run the Hystrix Dashboard annotate your Spring Boot main class with @EnableHystrixDashboard. You then visit /hystrix and point the dashboard to an individual instances /hystrix.stream endpoint in a Hystrix client application.

[Note]Note

When connecting to a /hystrix.stream endpoint which uses HTTPS the certificate used by the server must be trusted by the JVM. If the certificate is not trusted you must import the certificate into the JVM in order for the Hystrix Dashboard to make a successful connection to the stream endpoint.

15.2 Turbine

Looking at an individual instances Hystrix data is not very useful in terms of the overall health of the system. Turbine is an application that aggregates all of the relevant /hystrix.stream endpoints into a combined /turbine.stream for use in the Hystrix Dashboard. Individual instances are located via Eureka. Running Turbine is as simple as annotating your main class with the @EnableTurbine annotation (e.g. using spring-cloud-starter-turbine to set up the classpath). All of the documented configuration properties from the Turbine 1 wiki apply. The only difference is that the turbine.instanceUrlSuffix does not need the port prepended as this is handled automatically unless turbine.instanceInsertPort=false.

[Note]Note

By default, Turbine looks for the /hystrix.stream endpoint on a registered instance by looking up its homePageUrl entry in Eureka, then appending /hystrix.stream to it. This means that if spring-boot-actuator is running on its own port (which is the default), the call to /hystrix.stream will fail. To make turbine find the Hystrix stream at the correct port, you need to add management.port to the instances' metadata:

eureka:
  instance:
    metadata-map:
      management.port: ${management.port:8081}

The configuration key turbine.appConfig is a list of eureka serviceIds that turbine will use to lookup instances. The turbine stream is then used in the Hystrix dashboard using a url that looks like: http://my.turbine.sever:8080/turbine.stream?cluster=CLUSTERNAME (the cluster parameter can be omitted if the name is "default"). The cluster parameter must match an entry in turbine.aggregator.clusterConfig. Values returned from eureka are uppercase, thus we expect this example to work if there is an app registered with Eureka called "customers":

turbine:
  aggregator:
    clusterConfig: CUSTOMERS
  appConfig: customers

The clusterName can be customized by a SPEL expression in turbine.clusterNameExpression with root an instance of InstanceInfo. The default value is appName, which means that the Eureka serviceId ends up as the cluster key (i.e. the InstanceInfo for customers has an appName of "CUSTOMERS"). A different example would be turbine.clusterNameExpression=aSGName, which would get the cluster name from the AWS ASG name. Another example:

turbine:
  aggregator:
    clusterConfig: SYSTEM,USER
  appConfig: customers,stores,ui,admin
  clusterNameExpression: metadata['cluster']

In this case, the cluster name from 4 services is pulled from their metadata map, and is expected to have values that include "SYSTEM" and "USER".

To use the "default" cluster for all apps you need a string literal expression (with single quotes, and escaped with double quotes if it is in YAML as well):

turbine:
  appConfig: customers,stores
  clusterNameExpression: "'default'"

Spring Cloud provides a spring-cloud-starter-turbine that has all the dependencies you need to get a Turbine server running. Just create a Spring Boot application and annotate it with @EnableTurbine.

[Note]Note

by default Spring Cloud allows Turbine to use the host and port to allow multiple processes per host, per cluster. If you want the native Netflix behaviour built into Turbine that does not allow multiple processes per host, per cluster (the key to the instance id is the hostname), then set the property turbine.combineHostPort=false.

15.3 Turbine Stream

In some environments (e.g. in a PaaS setting), the classic Turbine model of pulling metrics from all the distributed Hystrix commands doesn’t work. In that case you might want to have your Hystrix commands push metrics to Turbine, and Spring Cloud enables that with messaging. All you need to do on the client is add a dependency to spring-cloud-netflix-hystrix-stream and the spring-cloud-starter-stream-* of your choice (see Spring Cloud Stream documentation for details on the brokers, and how to configure the client credentials, but it should work out of the box for a local broker).

On the server side Just create a Spring Boot application and annotate it with @EnableTurbineStream and by default it will come up on port 8989 (point your Hystrix dashboard to that port, any path). You can customize the port using either server.port or turbine.stream.port. If you have spring-boot-starter-web and spring-boot-starter-actuator on the classpath as well, then you can open up the Actuator endpoints on a separate port (with Tomcat by default) by providing a management.port which is different.

You can then point the Hystrix Dashboard to the Turbine Stream Server instead of individual Hystrix streams. If Turbine Stream is running on port 8989 on myhost, then put http://myhost:8989 in the stream input field in the Hystrix Dashboard. Circuits will be prefixed by their respective serviceId, followed by a dot, then the circuit name.

Spring Cloud provides a spring-cloud-starter-turbine-stream that has all the dependencies you need to get a Turbine Stream server running - just add the Stream binder of your choice, e.g. spring-cloud-starter-stream-rabbit. You need Java 8 to run the app because it is Netty-based.

16. Client Side Load Balancer: Ribbon

Ribbon is a client side load balancer which gives you a lot of control over the behaviour of HTTP and TCP clients. Feign already uses Ribbon, so if you are using @FeignClient then this section also applies.

A central concept in Ribbon is that of the named client. Each load balancer is part of an ensemble of components that work together to contact a remote server on demand, and the ensemble has a name that you give it as an application developer (e.g. using the @FeignClient annotation). Spring Cloud creates a new ensemble as an ApplicationContext on demand for each named client using RibbonClientConfiguration. This contains (amongst other things) an ILoadBalancer, a RestClient, and a ServerListFilter.

16.1 How to Include Ribbon

To include Ribbon in your project use the starter with group org.springframework.cloud and artifact id spring-cloud-starter-ribbon. See the Spring Cloud Project page for details on setting up your build system with the current Spring Cloud Release Train.

16.2 Customizing the Ribbon Client

You can configure some bits of a Ribbon client using external properties in <client>.ribbon.*, which is no different than using the Netflix APIs natively, except that you can use Spring Boot configuration files. The native options can be inspected as static fields in CommonClientConfigKey (part of ribbon-core).

Spring Cloud also lets you take full control of the client by declaring additional configuration (on top of the RibbonClientConfiguration) using @RibbonClient. Example:

@Configuration
@RibbonClient(name = "foo", configuration = FooConfiguration.class)
public class TestConfiguration {
}

In this case the client is composed from the components already in RibbonClientConfiguration together with any in FooConfiguration (where the latter generally will override the former).

[Warning]Warning

The FooConfiguration has to be @Configuration but take care that it is not in a @ComponentScan for the main application context, otherwise it will be shared by all the @RibbonClients. If you use @ComponentScan (or @SpringBootApplication) you need to take steps to avoid it being included (for instance put it in a separate, non-overlapping package, or specify the packages to scan explicitly in the @ComponentScan).

Spring Cloud Netflix provides the following beans by default for ribbon (BeanType beanName: ClassName):

  • IClientConfig ribbonClientConfig: DefaultClientConfigImpl
  • IRule ribbonRule: ZoneAvoidanceRule
  • IPing ribbonPing: NoOpPing
  • ServerList<Server> ribbonServerList: ConfigurationBasedServerList
  • ServerListFilter<Server> ribbonServerListFilter: ZonePreferenceServerListFilter
  • ILoadBalancer ribbonLoadBalancer: ZoneAwareLoadBalancer
  • ServerListUpdater ribbonServerListUpdater: PollingServerListUpdater

Creating a bean of one of those type and placing it in a @RibbonClient configuration (such as FooConfiguration above) allows you to override each one of the beans described. Example:

@Configuration
public class FooConfiguration {
    @Bean
    public IPing ribbonPing(IClientConfig config) {
        return new PingUrl();
    }
}

This replaces the NoOpPing with PingUrl.

16.3 Customizing the Ribbon Client using properties

Starting with version 1.2.0, Spring Cloud Netflix now supports customizing Ribbon clients using properties to be compatible with the Ribbon documentation.

This allows you to change behavior at start up time in different environments.

The supported properties are listed below and should be prefixed by <clientName>.ribbon.:

  • NFLoadBalancerClassName: should implement ILoadBalancer
  • NFLoadBalancerRuleClassName: should implement IRule
  • NFLoadBalancerPingClassName: should implement IPing
  • NIWSServerListClassName: should implement ServerList
  • NIWSServerListFilterClassName should implement ServerListFilter
[Note]Note

Classes defined in these properties have precedence over beans defined using @RibbonClient(configuration=MyRibbonConfig.class) and the defaults provided by Spring Cloud Netflix.

To set the IRule for a service name users you could set the following:

application.yml. 

users:
  ribbon:
    NFLoadBalancerRuleClassName: com.netflix.loadbalancer.WeightedResponseTimeRule

See the Ribbon documentation for implementations provided by Ribbon.

16.4 Using Ribbon with Eureka

When Eureka is used in conjunction with Ribbon (i.e., both are on the classpath) the ribbonServerList is overridden with an extension of DiscoveryEnabledNIWSServerList which populates the list of servers from Eureka. It also replaces the IPing interface with NIWSDiscoveryPing which delegates to Eureka to determine if a server is up. The ServerList that is installed by default is a DomainExtractingServerList and the purpose of this is to make physical metadata available to the load balancer without using AWS AMI metadata (which is what Netflix relies on). By default the server list will be constructed with "zone" information as provided in the instance metadata (so on the remote clients set eureka.instance.metadataMap.zone), and if that is missing it can use the domain name from the server hostname as a proxy for zone (if the flag approximateZoneFromHostname is set). Once the zone information is available it can be used in a ServerListFilter. By default it will be used to locate a server in the same zone as the client because the default is a ZonePreferenceServerListFilter. The zone of the client is determined the same way as the remote instances by default, i.e. via eureka.instance.metadataMap.zone.

[Note]Note

The orthodox "archaius" way to set the client zone is via a configuration property called "@zone", and Spring Cloud will use that in preference to all other settings if it is available (note that the key will have to be quoted in YAML configuration).

[Note]Note

If there is no other source of zone data then a guess is made based on the client configuration (as opposed to the instance configuration). We take eureka.client.availabilityZones, which is a map from region name to a list of zones, and pull out the first zone for the instance’s own region (i.e. the eureka.client.region, which defaults to "us-east-1" for comatibility with native Netflix).

16.5 Example: How to Use Ribbon Without Eureka

Eureka is a convenient way to abstract the discovery of remote servers so you don’t have to hard code their URLs in clients, but if you prefer not to use it, Ribbon and Feign are still quite amenable. Suppose you have declared a @RibbonClient for "stores", and Eureka is not in use (and not even on the classpath). The Ribbon client defaults to a configured server list, and you can supply the configuration like this

application.yml. 

stores:
  ribbon:
    listOfServers: example.com,google.com

16.6 Example: Disable Eureka use in Ribbon

Setting the property ribbon.eureka.enabled = false will explicitly disable the use of Eureka in Ribbon.

application.yml. 

ribbon:
  eureka:
   enabled: false

16.7 Using the Ribbon API Directly

You can also use the LoadBalancerClient directly. Example:

public class MyClass {
    @Autowired
    private LoadBalancerClient loadBalancer;

    public void doStuff() {
        ServiceInstance instance = loadBalancer.choose("stores");
        URI storesUri = URI.create(String.format("http://%s:%s", instance.getHost(), instance.getPort()));
        // ... do something with the URI
    }
}

16.8 Caching of Ribbon Configuration

Each Ribbon named client has a corresponding child Application Context that Spring Cloud maintains, this application context is lazily loaded up on the first request to the named client. This lazy loading behavior can be changed to instead eagerly load up these child Application contexts at startup by specifying the names of the Ribbon clients.

application.yml. 

ribbon:
  eager-load:
    enabled: true
    clients: client1, client2, client3

17. Declarative REST Client: Feign

Feign is a declarative web service client. It makes writing web service clients easier. To use Feign create an interface and annotate it. It has pluggable annotation support including Feign annotations and JAX-RS annotations. Feign also supports pluggable encoders and decoders. Spring Cloud adds support for Spring MVC annotations and for using the same HttpMessageConverters used by default in Spring Web. Spring Cloud integrates Ribbon and Eureka to provide a load balanced http client when using Feign.

17.1 How to Include Feign

To include Feign in your project use the starter with group org.springframework.cloud and artifact id spring-cloud-starter-feign. See the Spring Cloud Project page for details on setting up your build system with the current Spring Cloud Release Train.

Example spring boot app

@Configuration
@ComponentScan
@EnableAutoConfiguration
@EnableEurekaClient
@EnableFeignClients
public class Application {

    public static void main(String[] args) {
        SpringApplication.run(Application.class, args);
    }

}

StoreClient.java. 

@FeignClient("stores")
public interface StoreClient {
    @RequestMapping(method = RequestMethod.GET, value = "/stores")
    List<Store> getStores();

    @RequestMapping(method = RequestMethod.POST, value = "/stores/{storeId}", consumes = "application/json")
    Store update(@PathVariable("storeId") Long storeId, Store store);
}

In the @FeignClient annotation the String value ("stores" above) is an arbitrary client name, which is used to create a Ribbon load balancer (see below for details of Ribbon support). You can also specify a URL using the url attribute (absolute value or just a hostname). The name of the bean in the application context is the fully qualified name of the interface. To specify your own alias value you can use the qualifier value of the @FeignClient annotation.

The Ribbon client above will want to discover the physical addresses for the "stores" service. If your application is a Eureka client then it will resolve the service in the Eureka service registry. If you don’t want to use Eureka, you can simply configure a list of servers in your external configuration (see above for example).

17.2 Overriding Feign Defaults

A central concept in Spring Cloud’s Feign support is that of the named client. Each feign client is part of an ensemble of components that work together to contact a remote server on demand, and the ensemble has a name that you give it as an application developer using the @FeignClient annotation. Spring Cloud creates a new ensemble as an ApplicationContext on demand for each named client using FeignClientsConfiguration. This contains (amongst other things) an feign.Decoder, a feign.Encoder, and a feign.Contract.

Spring Cloud lets you take full control of the feign client by declaring additional configuration (on top of the FeignClientsConfiguration) using @FeignClient. Example:

@FeignClient(name = "stores", configuration = FooConfiguration.class)
public interface StoreClient {
    //..
}

In this case the client is composed from the components already in FeignClientsConfiguration together with any in FooConfiguration (where the latter will override the former).

[Note]Note

FooConfiguration does not need to be annotated with @Configuration. However, if it is, then take care to exclude it from any @ComponentScan that would otherwise include this configuration as it will become the default source for feign.Decoder, feign.Encoder, feign.Contract, etc., when specified. This can be avoided by putting it in a separate, non-overlapping package from any @ComponentScan or @SpringBootApplication, or it can be explicitly excluded in @ComponentScan.

[Note]Note

The serviceId attribute is now deprecated in favor of the name attribute.

[Warning]Warning

Previously, using the url attribute, did not require the name attribute. Using name is now required.

Placeholders are supported in the name and url attributes.

@FeignClient(name = "${feign.name}", url = "${feign.url}")
public interface StoreClient {
    //..
}

Spring Cloud Netflix provides the following beans by default for feign (BeanType beanName: ClassName):

  • Decoder feignDecoder: ResponseEntityDecoder (which wraps a SpringDecoder)
  • Encoder feignEncoder: SpringEncoder
  • Logger feignLogger: Slf4jLogger
  • Contract feignContract: SpringMvcContract
  • Feign.Builder feignBuilder: HystrixFeign.Builder
  • Client feignClient: if Ribbon is enabled it is a LoadBalancerFeignClient, otherwise the default feign client is used.

The OkHttpClient and ApacheHttpClient feign clients can be used by setting feign.okhttp.enabled or feign.httpclient.enabled to true, respectively, and having them on the classpath.

Spring Cloud Netflix does not provide the following beans by default for feign, but still looks up beans of these types from the application context to create the feign client:

  • Logger.Level
  • Retryer
  • ErrorDecoder
  • Request.Options
  • Collection<RequestInterceptor>
  • SetterFactory

Creating a bean of one of those type and placing it in a @FeignClient configuration (such as FooConfiguration above) allows you to override each one of the beans described. Example:

@Configuration
public class FooConfiguration {
    @Bean
    public Contract feignContract() {
        return new feign.Contract.Default();
    }

    @Bean
    public BasicAuthRequestInterceptor basicAuthRequestInterceptor() {
        return new BasicAuthRequestInterceptor("user", "password");
    }
}

This replaces the SpringMvcContract with feign.Contract.Default and adds a RequestInterceptor to the collection of RequestInterceptor.

Default configurations can be specified in the @EnableFeignClients attribute defaultConfiguration in a similar manner as described above. The difference is that this configuration will apply to all feign clients.

[Note]Note

If you need to use ThreadLocal bound variables in your RequestInterceptor`s you will need to either set the thread isolation strategy for Hystrix to `SEMAPHORE or disable Hystrix in Feign.

application.yml

# To disable Hystrix in Feign
feign:
  hystrix:
    enabled: false

# To set thread isolation to SEMAPHORE
hystrix:
  command:
    default:
      execution:
        isolation:
          strategy: SEMAPHORE

17.3 Creating Feign Clients Manually

In some cases it might be necessary to customize your Feign Clients in a way that is not possible using the methods above. In this case you can create Clients using the Feign Builder API. Below is an example which creates two Feign Clients with the same interface but configures each one with a separate request interceptor.

@Import(FeignClientsConfiguration.class)
class FooController {

	private FooClient fooClient;

	private FooClient adminClient;

    @Autowired
	public FooController(
			Decoder decoder, Encoder encoder, Client client) {
		this.fooClient = Feign.builder().client(client)
				.encoder(encoder)
				.decoder(decoder)
				.requestInterceptor(new BasicAuthRequestInterceptor("user", "user"))
				.target(FooClient.class, "http://PROD-SVC");
		this.adminClient = Feign.builder().client(client)
				.encoder(encoder)
				.decoder(decoder)
				.requestInterceptor(new BasicAuthRequestInterceptor("admin", "admin"))
				.target(FooClient.class, "http://PROD-SVC");
    }
}
[Note]Note

In the above example FeignClientsConfiguration.class is the default configuration provided by Spring Cloud Netflix.

[Note]Note

PROD-SVC is the name of the service the Clients will be making requests to.

17.4 Feign Hystrix Support

If Hystrix is on the classpath and feign.hystrix.enabled=true, Feign will wrap all methods with a circuit breaker. Returning a com.netflix.hystrix.HystrixCommand is also available. This lets you use reactive patterns (with a call to .toObservable() or .observe() or asynchronous use (with a call to .queue()).

To disable Hystrix support on a per-client basis create a vanilla Feign.Builder with the "prototype" scope, e.g.:

@Configuration
public class FooConfiguration {
    @Bean
	@Scope("prototype")
	public Feign.Builder feignBuilder() {
		return Feign.builder();
	}
}
[Warning]Warning

Prior to the Spring Cloud Dalston release, if Hystrix was on the classpath Feign would have wrapped all methods in a circuit breaker by default. This default behavior was changed in Spring Cloud Dalston in favor for an opt-in approach.

17.5 Feign Hystrix Fallbacks

Hystrix supports the notion of a fallback: a default code path that is executed when they circuit is open or there is an error. To enable fallbacks for a given @FeignClient set the fallback attribute to the class name that implements the fallback. You also need to declare your implementation as a Spring bean.

@FeignClient(name = "hello", fallback = HystrixClientFallback.class)
protected interface HystrixClient {
    @RequestMapping(method = RequestMethod.GET, value = "/hello")
    Hello iFailSometimes();
}

static class HystrixClientFallback implements HystrixClient {
    @Override
    public Hello iFailSometimes() {
        return new Hello("fallback");
    }
}

If one needs access to the cause that made the fallback trigger, one can use the fallbackFactory attribute inside @FeignClient.

@FeignClient(name = "hello", fallbackFactory = HystrixClientFallbackFactory.class)
protected interface HystrixClient {
	@RequestMapping(method = RequestMethod.GET, value = "/hello")
	Hello iFailSometimes();
}

@Component
static class HystrixClientFallbackFactory implements FallbackFactory<HystrixClient> {
	@Override
	public HystrixClient create(Throwable cause) {
		return new HystrixClientWithFallBackFactory() {
			@Override
			public Hello iFailSometimes() {
				return new Hello("fallback; reason was: " + cause.getMessage());
			}
		};
	}
}
[Warning]Warning

There is a limitation with the implementation of fallbacks in Feign and how Hystrix fallbacks work. Fallbacks are currently not supported for methods that return com.netflix.hystrix.HystrixCommand and rx.Observable.

17.6 Feign and @Primary

When using Feign with Hystrix fallbacks, there are multiple beans in the ApplicationContext of the same type. This will cause @Autowired to not work because there isn’t exactly one bean, or one marked as primary. To work around this, Spring Cloud Netflix marks all Feign instances as @Primary, so Spring Framework will know which bean to inject. In some cases, this may not be desirable. To turn off this behavior set the primary attribute of @FeignClient to false.

@FeignClient(name = "hello", primary = false)
public interface HelloClient {
	// methods here
}

17.7 Feign Inheritance Support

Feign supports boilerplate apis via single-inheritance interfaces. This allows grouping common operations into convenient base interfaces.

UserService.java. 

public interface UserService {

    @RequestMapping(method = RequestMethod.GET, value ="/users/{id}")
    User getUser(@PathVariable("id") long id);
}

UserResource.java. 

@RestController
public class UserResource implements UserService {

}

UserClient.java. 

package project.user;

@FeignClient("users")
public interface UserClient extends UserService {

}

[Note]Note

It is generally not advisable to share an interface between a server and a client. It introduces tight coupling, and also actually doesn’t work with Spring MVC in its current form (method parameter mapping is not inherited).

17.8 Feign request/response compression

You may consider enabling the request or response GZIP compression for your Feign requests. You can do this by enabling one of the properties:

feign.compression.request.enabled=true
feign.compression.response.enabled=true

Feign request compression gives you settings similar to what you may set for your web server:

feign.compression.request.enabled=true
feign.compression.request.mime-types=text/xml,application/xml,application/json
feign.compression.request.min-request-size=2048

These properties allow you to be selective about the compressed media types and minimum request threshold length.

17.9 Feign logging

A logger is created for each Feign client created. By default the name of the logger is the full class name of the interface used to create the Feign client. Feign logging only responds to the DEBUG level.

application.yml. 

logging.level.project.user.UserClient: DEBUG

The Logger.Level object that you may configure per client, tells Feign how much to log. Choices are:

  • NONE, No logging (DEFAULT).
  • BASIC, Log only the request method and URL and the response status code and execution time.
  • HEADERS, Log the basic information along with request and response headers.
  • FULL, Log the headers, body, and metadata for both requests and responses.

For example, the following would set the Logger.Level to FULL:

@Configuration
public class FooConfiguration {
    @Bean
    Logger.Level feignLoggerLevel() {
        return Logger.Level.FULL;
    }
}

18. External Configuration: Archaius

Archaius is the Netflix client side configuration library. It is the library used by all of the Netflix OSS components for configuration. Archaius is an extension of the Apache Commons Configuration project. It allows updates to configuration by either polling a source for changes or for a source to push changes to the client. Archaius uses Dynamic<Type>Property classes as handles to properties.

Archaius Example. 

class ArchaiusTest {
    DynamicStringProperty myprop = DynamicPropertyFactory
            .getInstance()
            .getStringProperty("my.prop");

    void doSomething() {
        OtherClass.someMethod(myprop.get());
    }
}

Archaius has its own set of configuration files and loading priorities. Spring applications should generally not use Archaius directly, but the need to configure the Netflix tools natively remains. Spring Cloud has a Spring Environment Bridge so Archaius can read properties from the Spring Environment. This allows Spring Boot projects to use the normal configuration toolchain, while allowing them to configure the Netflix tools, for the most part, as documented.

19. Router and Filter: Zuul

Routing in an integral part of a microservice architecture. For example, / may be mapped to your web application, /api/users is mapped to the user service and /api/shop is mapped to the shop service. Zuul is a JVM based router and server side load balancer by Netflix.

Netflix uses Zuul for the following:

  • Authentication
  • Insights
  • Stress Testing
  • Canary Testing
  • Dynamic Routing
  • Service Migration
  • Load Shedding
  • Security
  • Static Response handling
  • Active/Active traffic management

Zuul’s rule engine allows rules and filters to be written in essentially any JVM language, with built in support for Java and Groovy.

[Note]Note

The configuration property zuul.max.host.connections has been replaced by two new properties, zuul.host.maxTotalConnections and zuul.host.maxPerRouteConnections which default to 200 and 20 respectively.

[Note]Note

Default Hystrix isolation pattern (ExecutionIsolationStrategy) for all routes is SEMAPHORE. zuul.ribbonIsolationStrategy can be changed to THREAD if this isolation pattern is preferred.

19.1 How to Include Zuul

To include Zuul in your project use the starter with group org.springframework.cloud and artifact id spring-cloud-starter-zuul. See the Spring Cloud Project page for details on setting up your build system with the current Spring Cloud Release Train.

19.2 Embedded Zuul Reverse Proxy

Spring Cloud has created an embedded Zuul proxy to ease the development of a very common use case where a UI application wants to proxy calls to one or more back end services. This feature is useful for a user interface to proxy to the backend services it requires, avoiding the need to manage CORS and authentication concerns independently for all the backends.

To enable it, annotate a Spring Boot main class with @EnableZuulProxy, and this forwards local calls to the appropriate service. By convention, a service with the ID "users", will receive requests from the proxy located at /users (with the prefix stripped). The proxy uses Ribbon to locate an instance to forward to via discovery, and all requests are executed in a hystrix command, so failures will show up in Hystrix metrics, and once the circuit is open the proxy will not try to contact the service.

[Note]Note

the Zuul starter does not include a discovery client, so for routes based on service IDs you need to provide one of those on the classpath as well (e.g. Eureka is one choice).

To skip having a service automatically added, set zuul.ignored-services to a list of service id patterns. If a service matches a pattern that is ignored, but also included in the explicitly configured routes map, then it will be unignored. Example:

application.yml. 

 zuul:
  ignoredServices: '*'
  routes:
    users: /myusers/**

In this example, all services are ignored except "users".

To augment or change the proxy routes, you can add external configuration like the following:

application.yml. 

 zuul:
  routes:
    users: /myusers/**

This means that http calls to "/myusers" get forwarded to the "users" service (for example "/myusers/101" is forwarded to "/101").

To get more fine-grained control over a route you can specify the path and the serviceId independently:

application.yml. 

 zuul:
  routes:
    users:
      path: /myusers/**
      serviceId: users_service

This means that http calls to "/myusers" get forwarded to the "users_service" service. The route has to have a "path" which can be specified as an ant-style pattern, so "/myusers/*" only matches one level, but "/myusers/**" matches hierarchically.

The location of the backend can be specified as either a "serviceId" (for a service from discovery) or a "url" (for a physical location), e.g.

application.yml. 

 zuul:
  routes:
    users:
      path: /myusers/**
      url: http://example.com/users_service

These simple url-routes don’t get executed as a HystrixCommand nor can you loadbalance multiple URLs with Ribbon. To achieve this, specify a service-route and configure a Ribbon client for the serviceId (this currently requires disabling Eureka support in Ribbon: see above for more information), e.g.

application.yml. 

zuul:
  routes:
    users:
      path: /myusers/**
      serviceId: users

ribbon:
  eureka:
    enabled: false

users:
  ribbon:
    listOfServers: example.com,google.com

You can provide convention between serviceId and routes using regexmapper. It uses regular expression named groups to extract variables from serviceId and inject them into a route pattern.

ApplicationConfiguration.java. 

@Bean
public PatternServiceRouteMapper serviceRouteMapper() {
    return new PatternServiceRouteMapper(
        "(?<name>^.+)-(?<version>v.+$)",
        "${version}/${name}");
}

This means that a serviceId "myusers-v1" will be mapped to route "/v1/myusers/**". Any regular expression is accepted but all named groups must be present in both servicePattern and routePattern. If servicePattern does not match a serviceId, the default behavior is used. In the example above, a serviceId "myusers" will be mapped to route "/myusers/**" (no version detected) This feature is disable by default and only applies to discovered services.

To add a prefix to all mappings, set zuul.prefix to a value, such as /api. The proxy prefix is stripped from the request before the request is forwarded by default (switch this behaviour off with zuul.stripPrefix=false). You can also switch off the stripping of the service-specific prefix from individual routes, e.g.

application.yml. 

 zuul:
  routes:
    users:
      path: /myusers/**
      stripPrefix: false

[Note]Note

zuul.stripPrefix only applies to the prefix set in zuul.prefix. It does not have any effect on prefixes defined within a given route’s path.

In this example, requests to "/myusers/101" will be forwarded to "/myusers/101" on the "users" service.

The zuul.routes entries actually bind to an object of type ZuulProperties. If you look at the properties of that object you will see that it also has a "retryable" flag. Set that flag to "true" to have the Ribbon client automatically retry failed requests (and if you need to you can modify the parameters of the retry operations using the Ribbon client configuration).

The X-Forwarded-Host header is added to the forwarded requests by default. To turn it off set zuul.addProxyHeaders = false. The prefix path is stripped by default, and the request to the backend picks up a header "X-Forwarded-Prefix" ("/myusers" in the examples above).

An application with @EnableZuulProxy could act as a standalone server if you set a default route ("/"), for example zuul.route.home: / would route all traffic (i.e. "/**") to the "home" service.

If more fine-grained ignoring is needed, you can specify specific patterns to ignore. These patterns are evaluated at the start of the route location process, which means prefixes should be included in the pattern to warrant a match. Ignored patterns span all services and supersede any other route specification.

application.yml. 

 zuul:
  ignoredPatterns: /**/admin/**
  routes:
    users: /myusers/**

This means that all calls such as "/myusers/101" will be forwarded to "/101" on the "users" service. But calls including "/admin/" will not resolve.

[Warning]Warning

If you need your routes to have their order preserved you need to use a YAML file as the ordering will be lost using a properties file. For example:

application.yml. 

 zuul:
  routes:
    users:
      path: /myusers/**
    legacy:
      path: /**

If you were to use a properties file, the legacy path may end up in front of the users path rendering the users path unreachable.

19.3 Zuul Http Client

The default HTTP client used by zuul is now backed by the Apache HTTP Client instead of the deprecated Ribbon RestClient. To use RestClient or to use the okhttp3.OkHttpClient set ribbon.restclient.enabled=true or ribbon.okhttp.enabled=true respectively.

19.4 Cookies and Sensitive Headers

It’s OK to share headers between services in the same system, but you probably don’t want sensitive headers leaking downstream into external servers. You can specify a list of ignored headers as part of the route configuration. Cookies play a special role because they have well-defined semantics in browsers, and they are always to be treated as sensitive. If the consumer of your proxy is a browser, then cookies for downstream services also cause problems for the user because they all get jumbled up (all downstream services look like they come from the same place).

If you are careful with the design of your services, for example if only one of the downstream services sets cookies, then you might be able to let them flow from the backend all the way up to the caller. Also, if your proxy sets cookies and all your back end services are part of the same system, it can be natural to simply share them (and for instance use Spring Session to link them up to some shared state). Other than that, any cookies that get set by downstream services are likely to be not very useful to the caller, so it is recommended that you make (at least) "Set-Cookie" and "Cookie" into sensitive headers for routes that are not part of your domain. Even for routes that are part of your domain, try to think carefully about what it means before allowing cookies to flow between them and the proxy.

The sensitive headers can be configured as a comma-separated list per route, e.g.

application.yml. 

 zuul:
  routes:
    users:
      path: /myusers/**
      sensitiveHeaders: Cookie,Set-Cookie,Authorization
      url: https://downstream

[Note]Note

this is the default value for sensitiveHeaders, so you don’t need to set it unless you want it to be different. N.B. this is new in Spring Cloud Netflix 1.1 (in 1.0 the user had no control over headers and all cookies flow in both directions).

The sensitiveHeaders are a blacklist and the default is not empty, so to make Zuul send all headers (except the "ignored" ones) you would have to explicitly set it to the empty list. This is necessary if you want to pass cookie or authorization headers to your back end. Example:

application.yml. 

 zuul:
  routes:
    users:
      path: /myusers/**
      sensitiveHeaders:
      url: https://downstream

Sensitive headers can also be set globally by setting zuul.sensitiveHeaders. If sensitiveHeaders is set on a route, this will override the global sensitiveHeaders setting.

19.5 Ignored Headers

In addition to the per-route sensitive headers, you can set a global value for zuul.ignoredHeaders for values that should be discarded (both request and response) during interactions with downstream services. By default these are empty, if Spring Security is not on the classpath, and otherwise they are initialized to a set of well-known "security" headers (e.g. involving caching) as specified by Spring Security. The assumption in this case is that the downstream services might add these headers too, and we want the values from the proxy. To not discard these well known security headers in case Spring Security is on the classpath you can set zuul.ignoreSecurityHeaders to false. This can be useful if you disabled the HTTP Security response headers in Spring Security and want the values provided by downstream services

19.6 The Routes Endpoint

If you are using @EnableZuulProxy with tha Spring Boot Actuator you will enable (by default) an additional endpoint, available via HTTP as /routes. A GET to this endpoint will return a list of the mapped routes. A POST will force a refresh of the existing routes (e.g. in case there have been changes in the service catalog). You can disable this endpoint by setting endpoints.routes.enabled to false.

[Note]Note

the routes should respond automatically to changes in the service catalog, but the POST to /routes is a way to force the change to happen immediately.

19.7 Strangulation Patterns and Local Forwards

A common pattern when migrating an existing application or API is to "strangle" old endpoints, slowly replacing them with different implementations. The Zuul proxy is a useful tool for this because you can use it to handle all traffic from clients of the old endpoints, but redirect some of the requests to new ones.

Example configuration:

application.yml. 

 zuul:
  routes:
    first:
      path: /first/**
      url: http://first.example.com
    second:
      path: /second/**
      url: forward:/second
    third:
      path: /third/**
      url: forward:/3rd
    legacy:
      path: /**
      url: http://legacy.example.com

In this example we are strangling the "legacy" app which is mapped to all requests that do not match one of the other patterns. Paths in /first/** have been extracted into a new service with an external URL. And paths in /second/** are forwarded so they can be handled locally, e.g. with a normal Spring @RequestMapping. Paths in /third/** are also forwarded, but with a different prefix (i.e. /third/foo is forwarded to /3rd/foo).

[Note]Note

The ignored patterns aren’t completely ignored, they just aren’t handled by the proxy (so they are also effectively forwarded locally).

19.8 Uploading Files through Zuul

If you @EnableZuulProxy you can use the proxy paths to upload files and it should just work as long as the files are small. For large files there is an alternative path which bypasses the Spring DispatcherServlet (to avoid multipart processing) in "/zuul/*". I.e. if zuul.routes.customers=/customers/** then you can POST large files to "/zuul/customers/*". The servlet path is externalized via zuul.servletPath. Extremely large files will also require elevated timeout settings if the proxy route takes you through a Ribbon load balancer, e.g.

application.yml. 

hystrix.command.default.execution.isolation.thread.timeoutInMilliseconds: 60000
ribbon:
  ConnectTimeout: 3000
  ReadTimeout: 60000

Note that for streaming to work with large files, you need to use chunked encoding in the request (which some browsers do not do by default). E.g. on the command line:

$ curl -v -H "Transfer-Encoding: chunked" \
    -F "[email protected]" localhost:9999/zuul/simple/file

19.9 Query String Encoding

When processing the incoming request, query params are decoded so they can be available for possible modifications in Zuul filters. They are then re-encoded when building the backend request in the route filters. The result can be different than the original input if it was encoded using Javascript’s encodeURIComponent() method for example. While this causes no issues in most cases, some web servers can be picky with the encoding of complex query string.

To force the original encoding of the query string, it is possible to pass a special flag to ZuulProperties so that the query string is taken as is with the HttpServletRequest::getQueryString method :

application.yml. 

 zuul:
  forceOriginalQueryStringEncoding: true

Note: This special flag only works with SimpleHostRoutingFilter and you loose the ability to easily override query parameters with RequestContext.getCurrentContext().setRequestQueryParams(someOverriddenParameters) since the query string is now fetched directly on the original HttpServletRequest.

19.10 Plain Embedded Zuul

You can also run a Zuul server without the proxying, or switch on parts of the proxying platform selectively, if you use @EnableZuulServer (instead of @EnableZuulProxy). Any beans that you add to the application of type ZuulFilter will be installed automatically, as they are with @EnableZuulProxy, but without any of the proxy filters being added automatically.

In this case the routes into the Zuul server are still specified by configuring "zuul.routes.*", but there is no service discovery and no proxying, so the "serviceId" and "url" settings are ignored. For example:

application.yml. 

 zuul:
  routes:
    api: /api/**

maps all paths in "/api/**" to the Zuul filter chain.

19.11 Disable Zuul Filters

Zuul for Spring Cloud comes with a number of ZuulFilter beans enabled by default in both proxy and server mode. See the zuul filters package for the possible filters that are enabled. If you want to disable one, simply set zuul.<SimpleClassName>.<filterType>.disable=true. By convention, the package after filters is the Zuul filter type. For example to disable org.springframework.cloud.netflix.zuul.filters.post.SendResponseFilter set zuul.SendResponseFilter.post.disable=true.

19.12 Providing Hystrix Fallbacks For Routes

When a circuit for a given route in Zuul is tripped you can provide a fallback response by creating a bean of type ZuulFallbackProvider. Within this bean you need to specify the route ID the fallback is for and provide a ClientHttpResponse to return as a fallback. Here is a very simple ZuulFallbackProvider implementation.

class MyFallbackProvider implements ZuulFallbackProvider {
    @Override
    public String getRoute() {
        return "customers";
    }

    @Override
    public ClientHttpResponse fallbackResponse() {
        return new ClientHttpResponse() {
            @Override
            public HttpStatus getStatusCode() throws IOException {
                return HttpStatus.OK;
            }

            @Override
            public int getRawStatusCode() throws IOException {
                return 200;
            }

            @Override
            public String getStatusText() throws IOException {
                return "OK";
            }

            @Override
            public void close() {

            }

            @Override
            public InputStream getBody() throws IOException {
                return new ByteArrayInputStream("fallback".getBytes());
            }

            @Override
            public HttpHeaders getHeaders() {
                HttpHeaders headers = new HttpHeaders();
                headers.setContentType(MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON);
                return headers;
            }
        };
    }
}

And here is what the route configuration would look like.

zuul:
  routes:
    customers: /customers/**

If you would like to provide a default fallback for all routes than you can create a bean of type ZuulFallbackProvider and have the getRoute method return * or null.

class MyFallbackProvider implements ZuulFallbackProvider {
    @Override
    public String getRoute() {
        return "*";
    }

    @Override
    public ClientHttpResponse fallbackResponse() {
        return new ClientHttpResponse() {
            @Override
            public HttpStatus getStatusCode() throws IOException {
                return HttpStatus.OK;
            }

            @Override
            public int getRawStatusCode() throws IOException {
                return 200;
            }

            @Override
            public String getStatusText() throws IOException {
                return "OK";
            }

            @Override
            public void close() {

            }

            @Override
            public InputStream getBody() throws IOException {
                return new ByteArrayInputStream("fallback".getBytes());
            }

            @Override
            public HttpHeaders getHeaders() {
                HttpHeaders headers = new HttpHeaders();
                headers.setContentType(MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON);
                return headers;
            }
        };
    }
}

19.13 Zuul Developer Guide

For a general overview of how Zuul works, please see the Zuul Wiki.

19.13.1 The Zuul Servlet

Zuul is implemented as a Servlet. For the general cases, Zuul is embedded into the Spring Dispatch mechanism. This allows Spring MVC to be in control of the routing. In this case, Zuul is configured to buffer requests. If there is a need to go through Zuul without buffering requests (e.g. for large file uploads), the Servlet is also installed outside of the Spring Dispatcher. By default, this is located at /zuul. This path can be changed with the zuul.servlet-path property.

19.13.2 Zuul RequestContext

To pass information between filters, Zuul uses a RequestContext. Its data is held in a ThreadLocal specific to each request. Information about where to route requests, errors and the actual HttpServletRequest and HttpServletResponse are stored there. The RequestContext extends ConcurrentHashMap, so anything can be stored in the context. FilterConstants contains the keys that are used by the filters installed by Spring Cloud Netflix (more on these later).

19.13.3 @EnableZuulProxy vs. @EnableZuulServer

Spring Cloud Netflix installs a number of filters based on which annotation was used to enable Zuul. @EnableZuulProxy is a superset of @EnableZuulServer. In other words, @EnableZuulProxy contains all filters installed by @EnableZuulServer. The additional filters in the "proxy" enable routing functionality. If you want a "blank" Zuul, you should use @EnableZuulServer.

19.13.4 @EnableZuulServer Filters

Creates a SimpleRouteLocator that loads route definitions from Spring Boot configuration files.

The following filters are installed (as normal Spring Beans):

Pre filters:

  • ServletDetectionFilter: Detects if the request is through the Spring Dispatcher. Sets boolean with key FilterConstants.IS_DISPATCHER_SERVLET_REQUEST_KEY.
  • FormBodyWrapperFilter: Parses form data and reencodes it for downstream requests.
  • DebugFilter: if the debug request parameter is set, this filter sets RequestContext.setDebugRouting() and RequestContext.setDebugRequest() to true.

Route filters:

  • SendForwardFilter: This filter forwards requests using the Servlet RequestDispatcher. The forwarding location is stored in the RequestContext attribute FilterConstants.FORWARD_TO_KEY. This is useful for forwarding to endpoints in the current application.

Post filters:

  • SendResponseFilter: Writes responses from proxied requests to the current response.

Error filters:

  • SendErrorFilter: Forwards to /error (by default) if RequestContext.getThrowable() is not null. The default forwarding path (/error) can be changed by setting the error.path property.

19.13.5 @EnableZuulProxy Filters

Creates a DiscoveryClientRouteLocator that loads route definitions from a DiscoveryClient (like Eureka), as well as from properties. A route is created for each serviceId from the DiscoveryClient. As new services are added, the routes will be refreshed.

In addition to the filters described above, the following filters are installed (as normal Spring Beans):

Pre filters:

  • PreDecorationFilter: This filter determines where and how to route based on the supplied RouteLocator. It also sets various proxy-related headers for downstream requests.

Route filters:

  • RibbonRoutingFilter: This filter uses Ribbon, Hystrix and pluggable HTTP clients to send requests. Service ids are found in the RequestContext attribute FilterConstants.SERVICE_ID_KEY. This filter can use different HTTP clients. They are:

    • Apache HttpClient. This is the default client.
    • Squareup OkHttpClient v3. This is enabled by having the com.squareup.okhttp3:okhttp library on the classpath and setting ribbon.okhttp.enabled=true.
    • Netflix Ribbon HTTP client. This is enabled by setting ribbon.restclient.enabled=true. This client has limitations, such as it doesn’t support the PATCH method, but also has built-in retry.
  • SimpleHostRoutingFilter: This filter sends requests to predetermined URLs via an Apache HttpClient. URLs are found in RequestContext.getRouteHost().

19.13.6 Custom Zuul Filter examples

Most of the following "How to Write" examples below are included Sample Zuul Filters project. There are also examples of manipulating the request or response body in that repository.

19.13.7 How to Write a Pre Filter

Pre filters are used to set up data in the RequestContext for use in filters downstream. The main use case is to set information required for route filters.

public class QueryParamPreFilter extends ZuulFilter {
	@Override
	public int filterOrder() {
		return PRE_DECORATION_FILTER_ORDER - 1; // run before PreDecoration
	}

	@Override
	public String filterType() {
		return PRE_TYPE;
	}

	@Override
	public boolean shouldFilter() {
		RequestContext ctx = RequestContext.getCurrentContext();
		return !ctx.containsKey(FORWARD_TO_KEY) // a filter has already forwarded
				&& !ctx.containsKey(SERVICE_ID_KEY); // a filter has already determined serviceId
	}
    @Override
    public Object run() {
        RequestContext ctx = RequestContext.getCurrentContext();
		HttpServletRequest request = ctx.getRequest();
		if (request.getParameter("foo") != null) {
		    // put the serviceId in `RequestContext`
    		ctx.put(SERVICE_ID_KEY, request.getParameter("foo"));
    	}
        return null;
    }
}

The filter above populates SERVICE_ID_KEY from the foo request parameter. In reality, it’s not a good idea to do that kind of direct mapping, but the service id should be looked up from the value of foo instead.

Now that SERVICE_ID_KEY is populated, PreDecorationFilter won’t run and RibbonRoutingFilter will. If you wanted to route to a full URL instead, call ctx.setRouteHost(url) instead.

To modify the path that routing filters will forward to, set the REQUEST_URI_KEY.

19.13.8 How to Write a Route Filter

Route filters are run after pre filters and are used to make requests to other services. Much of the work here is to translate request and response data to and from the client required model.

public class OkHttpRoutingFilter extends ZuulFilter {
	@Autowired
	private ProxyRequestHelper helper;

	@Override
	public String filterType() {
		return ROUTE_TYPE;
	}

	@Override
	public int filterOrder() {
		return SIMPLE_HOST_ROUTING_FILTER_ORDER - 1;
	}

	@Override
	public boolean shouldFilter() {
		return RequestContext.getCurrentContext().getRouteHost() != null
				&& RequestContext.getCurrentContext().sendZuulResponse();
	}

    @Override
    public Object run() {
		OkHttpClient httpClient = new OkHttpClient.Builder()
				// customize
				.build();

		RequestContext context = RequestContext.getCurrentContext();
		HttpServletRequest request = context.getRequest();

		String method = request.getMethod();

		String uri = this.helper.buildZuulRequestURI(request);

		Headers.Builder headers = new Headers.Builder();
		Enumeration<String> headerNames = request.getHeaderNames();
		while (headerNames.hasMoreElements()) {
			String name = headerNames.nextElement();
			Enumeration<String> values = request.getHeaders(name);

			while (values.hasMoreElements()) {
				String value = values.nextElement();
				headers.add(name, value);
			}
		}

		InputStream inputStream = request.getInputStream();

		RequestBody requestBody = null;
		if (inputStream != null && HttpMethod.permitsRequestBody(method)) {
			MediaType mediaType = null;
			if (headers.get("Content-Type") != null) {
				mediaType = MediaType.parse(headers.get("Content-Type"));
			}
			requestBody = RequestBody.create(mediaType, StreamUtils.copyToByteArray(inputStream));
		}

		Request.Builder builder = new Request.Builder()
				.headers(headers.build())
				.url(uri)
				.method(method, requestBody);

		Response response = httpClient.newCall(builder.build()).execute();

		LinkedMultiValueMap<String, String> responseHeaders = new LinkedMultiValueMap<>();

		for (Map.Entry<String, List<String>> entry : response.headers().toMultimap().entrySet()) {
			responseHeaders.put(entry.getKey(), entry.getValue());
		}

		this.helper.setResponse(response.code(), response.body().byteStream(),
				responseHeaders);
		context.setRouteHost(null); // prevent SimpleHostRoutingFilter from running
		return null;
    }
}

The above filter translates Servlet request information into OkHttp3 request information, executes an HTTP request, then translates OkHttp3 reponse information to the Servlet response. WARNING: this filter might have bugs and not function correctly.

19.13.9 How to Write a Post Filter

Post filters typically manipulate the response. In the filter below, we add a random UUID as the X-Foo header. Other manipulations, such as transforming the response body, are much more complex and compute-intensive.

public class AddResponseHeaderFilter extends ZuulFilter {
	@Override
	public String filterType() {
		return POST_TYPE;
	}

	@Override
	public int filterOrder() {
		return SEND_RESPONSE_FILTER_ORDER - 1;
	}

	@Override
	public boolean shouldFilter() {
		return true;
	}

	@Override
	public Object run() {
		RequestContext context = RequestContext.getCurrentContext();
    	HttpServletResponse servletResponse = context.getResponse();
		servletResponse.addHeader("X-Foo", UUID.randomUUID().toString());
		return null;
	}
}

19.13.10 How Zuul Errors Work

If an exception is thrown during any portion of the Zuul filter lifecycle, the error filters are executed. The SendErrorFilter is only run if RequestContext.getThrowable() is not null. It then sets specific javax.servlet.error.* attributes in the request and forwards the request to the Spring Boot error page.

19.13.11 Zuul Eager Application Context Loading

Zuul internally uses Ribbon for calling the remote url’s and Ribbon clients are by default lazily loaded up by Spring Cloud on first call. This behavior can be changed for Zuul using the following configuration and will result in the child Ribbon related Application contexts being eagerly loaded up at application startup time.

application.yml. 

zuul:
  ribbon:
    eager-load:
      enabled: true

20. Polyglot support with Sidecar

Do you have non-jvm languages you want to take advantage of Eureka, Ribbon and Config Server? The Spring Cloud Netflix Sidecar was inspired by Netflix Prana. It includes a simple http api to get all of the instances (ie host and port) for a given service. You can also proxy service calls through an embedded Zuul proxy which gets its route entries from Eureka. The Spring Cloud Config Server can be accessed directly via host lookup or through the Zuul Proxy. The non-jvm app should implement a health check so the Sidecar can report to eureka if the app is up or down.

To include Sidecar in your project use the dependency with group org.springframework.cloud and artifact id spring-cloud-netflix-sidecar.

To enable the Sidecar, create a Spring Boot application with @EnableSidecar. This annotation includes @EnableCircuitBreaker, @EnableDiscoveryClient, and @EnableZuulProxy. Run the resulting application on the same host as the non-jvm application.

To configure the side car add sidecar.port and sidecar.health-uri to application.yml. The sidecar.port property is the port the non-jvm app is listening on. This is so the Sidecar can properly register the app with Eureka. The sidecar.health-uri is a uri accessible on the non-jvm app that mimicks a Spring Boot health indicator. It should return a json document like the following:

health-uri-document. 

{
  "status":"UP"
}

Here is an example application.yml for a Sidecar application:

application.yml. 

server:
  port: 5678
spring:
  application:
    name: sidecar

sidecar:
  port: 8000
  health-uri: http://localhost:8000/health.json

The api for the DiscoveryClient.getInstances() method is /hosts/{serviceId}. Here is an example response for /hosts/customers that returns two instances on different hosts. This api is accessible to the non-jvm app (if the sidecar is on port 5678) at http://localhost:5678/hosts/{serviceId}.

/hosts/customers. 

[
    {
        "host": "myhost",
        "port": 9000,
        "uri": "http://myhost:9000",
        "serviceId": "CUSTOMERS",
        "secure": false
    },
    {
        "host": "myhost2",
        "port": 9000,
        "uri": "http://myhost2:9000",
        "serviceId": "CUSTOMERS",
        "secure": false
    }
]

The Zuul proxy automatically adds routes for each service known in eureka to /<serviceId>, so the customers service is available at /customers. The Non-jvm app can access the customer service via http://localhost:5678/customers (assuming the sidecar is listening on port 5678).

If the Config Server is registered with Eureka, non-jvm application can access it via the Zuul proxy. If the serviceId of the ConfigServer is configserver and the Sidecar is on port 5678, then it can be accessed at http://localhost:5678/configserver

Non-jvm app can take advantage of the Config Server’s ability to return YAML documents. For example, a call to http://sidecar.local.spring.io:5678/configserver/default-master.yml might result in a YAML document like the following

eureka:
  client:
    serviceUrl:
      defaultZone: http://localhost:8761/eureka/
  password: password
info:
  description: Spring Cloud Samples
  url: https://github.com/spring-cloud-samples

21. RxJava with Spring MVC

Spring Cloud Netflix includes RxJava.

RxJava is a Java VM implementation of Reactive Extensions: a library for composing asynchronous and event-based programs by using observable sequences.

Spring Cloud Netflix provides support for returning rx.Single objects from Spring MVC Controllers. It also supports using rx.Observable objects for Server-sent events (SSE). This can be very convenient if your internal APIs are already built using RxJava (see Section 17.4, “Feign Hystrix Support” for examples).

Here are some examples of using rx.Single:

@RequestMapping(method = RequestMethod.GET, value = "/single")
public Single<String> single() {
	return Single.just("single value");
}

@RequestMapping(method = RequestMethod.GET, value = "/singleWithResponse")
public ResponseEntity<Single<String>> singleWithResponse() {
	return new ResponseEntity<>(Single.just("single value"),
			HttpStatus.NOT_FOUND);
}

@RequestMapping(method = RequestMethod.GET, value = "/singleCreatedWithResponse")
public Single<ResponseEntity<String>> singleOuterWithResponse() {
	return Single.just(new ResponseEntity<>("single value", HttpStatus.CREATED));
}

@RequestMapping(method = RequestMethod.GET, value = "/throw")
public Single<Object> error() {
	return Single.error(new RuntimeException("Unexpected"));
}

If you have an Observable, rather than a single, you can use .toSingle() or .toList().toSingle(). Here are some examples:

@RequestMapping(method = RequestMethod.GET, value = "/single")
public Single<String> single() {
    return Observable.just("single value").toSingle();
}

@RequestMapping(method = RequestMethod.GET, value = "/multiple")
public Single<List<String>> multiple() {
    return Observable.just("multiple", "values").toList().toSingle();
}

@RequestMapping(method = RequestMethod.GET, value = "/responseWithObservable")
public ResponseEntity<Single<String>> responseWithObservable() {

    Observable<String> observable = Observable.just("single value");
    HttpHeaders headers = new HttpHeaders();
    headers.setContentType(APPLICATION_JSON_UTF8);
    return new ResponseEntity<>(observable.toSingle(), headers, HttpStatus.CREATED);
}

@RequestMapping(method = RequestMethod.GET, value = "/timeout")
public Observable<String> timeout() {
    return Observable.timer(1, TimeUnit.MINUTES).map(new Func1<Long, String>() {
        @Override
        public String call(Long aLong) {
            return "single value";
        }
    });
}

If you have a streaming endpoint and client, SSE could be an option. To convert rx.Observable to a Spring SseEmitter use RxResponse.sse(). Here are some examples:

@RequestMapping(method = RequestMethod.GET, value = "/sse")
public SseEmitter single() {
	return RxResponse.sse(Observable.just("single value"));
}

@RequestMapping(method = RequestMethod.GET, value = "/messages")
public SseEmitter messages() {
	return RxResponse.sse(Observable.just("message 1", "message 2", "message 3"));
}

@RequestMapping(method = RequestMethod.GET, value = "/events")
public SseEmitter event() {
	return RxResponse.sse(APPLICATION_JSON_UTF8,
			Observable.just(new EventDto("Spring io", getDate(2016, 5, 19)),
					new EventDto("SpringOnePlatform", getDate(2016, 8, 1))));
}

22. Metrics: Spectator, Servo, and Atlas

When used together, Spectator/Servo and Atlas provide a near real-time operational insight platform.

Spectator and Servo are Netflix’s metrics collection libraries. Atlas is a Netflix metrics backend to manage dimensional time series data.

Servo served Netflix for several years and is still usable, but is gradually being phased out in favor of Spectator, which is only designed to work with Java 8. Spring Cloud Netflix provides support for both, but Java 8 based applications are encouraged to use Spectator.

22.1 Dimensional vs. Hierarchical Metrics

Spring Boot Actuator metrics are hierarchical and metrics are separated only by name. These names often follow a naming convention that embeds key/value attribute pairs (dimensions) into the name separated by periods. Consider the following metrics for two endpoints, root and star-star:

{
    "counter.status.200.root": 20,
    "counter.status.400.root": 3,
    "counter.status.200.star-star": 5,
}

The first metric gives us a normalized count of successful requests against the root endpoint per unit of time. But what if the system had 20 endpoints and you want to get a count of successful requests against all the endpoints? Some hierarchical metrics backends would allow you to specify a wild card such as counter.status.200.* that would read all 20 metrics and aggregate the results. Alternatively, you could provide a HandlerInterceptorAdapter that intercepts and records a metric like counter.status.200.all for all successful requests irrespective of the endpoint, but now you must write 20+1 different metrics. Similarly if you want to know the total number of successful requests for all endpoints in the service, you could specify a wild card such as counter.status.2*.*.

Even in the presence of wildcarding support on a hierarchical metrics backend, naming consistency can be difficult. Specifically the position of these tags in the name string can slip with time, breaking queries. For example, suppose we add an additional dimension to the hierarchical metrics above for HTTP method. Then counter.status.200.root becomes counter.status.200.method.get.root, etc. Our counter.status.200.* suddenly no longer has the same semantic meaning. Furthermore, if the new dimension is not applied uniformly across the codebase, certain queries may become impossible. This can quickly get out of hand.

Netflix metrics are tagged (a.k.a. dimensional). Each metric has a name, but this single named metric can contain multiple statistics and 'tag' key/value pairs that allows more querying flexibility. In fact, the statistics themselves are recorded in a special tag.

Recorded with Netflix Servo or Spectator, a timer for the root endpoint described above contains 4 statistics per status code, where the count statistic is identical to Spring Boot Actuator’s counter. In the event that we have encountered an HTTP 200 and 400 thus far, there will be 8 available data points:

{
    "root(status=200,stastic=count)": 20,
    "root(status=200,stastic=max)": 0.7265630630000001,
    "root(status=200,stastic=totalOfSquares)": 0.04759702862580789,
    "root(status=200,stastic=totalTime)": 0.2093076914666667,
    "root(status=400,stastic=count)": 1,
    "root(status=400,stastic=max)": 0,
    "root(status=400,stastic=totalOfSquares)": 0,
    "root(status=400,stastic=totalTime)": 0,
}

22.2 Default Metrics Collection

Without any additional dependencies or configuration, a Spring Cloud based service will autoconfigure a Servo MonitorRegistry and begin collecting metrics on every Spring MVC request. By default, a Servo timer with the name rest will be recorded for each MVC request which is tagged with:

  1. HTTP method
  2. HTTP status (e.g. 200, 400, 500)
  3. URI (or "root" if the URI is empty), sanitized for Atlas
  4. The exception class name, if the request handler threw an exception
  5. The caller, if a request header with a key matching netflix.metrics.rest.callerHeader is set on the request. There is no default key for netflix.metrics.rest.callerHeader. You must add it to your application properties if you wish to collect caller information.

Set the netflix.metrics.rest.metricName property to change the name of the metric from rest to a name you provide.

If Spring AOP is enabled and org.aspectj:aspectjweaver is present on your runtime classpath, Spring Cloud will also collect metrics on every client call made with RestTemplate. A Servo timer with the name of restclient will be recorded for each MVC request which is tagged with:

  1. HTTP method
  2. HTTP status (e.g. 200, 400, 500), "CLIENT_ERROR" if the response returned null, or "IO_ERROR" if an IOException occurred during the execution of the RestTemplate method
  3. URI, sanitized for Atlas
  4. Client name
[Warning]Warning

Avoid using hardcoded url parameters within RestTemplate. When targeting dynamic endpoints use URL variables. This will avoid potential "GC Overhead Limit Reached" issues where ServoMonitorCache treats each url as a unique key.

// recommended
String orderid = "1";
restTemplate.getForObject("http://testeurekabrixtonclient/orders/{orderid}", String.class, orderid)

// avoid
restTemplate.getForObject("http://testeurekabrixtonclient/orders/1", String.class)

22.3 Metrics Collection: Spectator

To enable Spectator metrics, include a dependency on spring-boot-starter-spectator:

    <dependency>
        <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
        <artifactId>spring-cloud-starter-spectator</artifactId>
    </dependency>

In Spectator parlance, a meter is a named, typed, and tagged configuration and a metric represents the value of a given meter at a point in time. Spectator meters are created and controlled by a registry, which currently has several different implementations. Spectator provides 4 meter types: counter, timer, gauge, and distribution summary.

Spring Cloud Spectator integration configures an injectable com.netflix.spectator.api.Registry instance for you. Specifically, it configures a ServoRegistry instance in order to unify the collection of REST metrics and the exporting of metrics to the Atlas backend under a single Servo API. Practically, this means that your code may use a mixture of Servo monitors and Spectator meters and both will be scooped up by Spring Boot Actuator MetricReader instances and both will be shipped to the Atlas backend.

22.3.1 Spectator Counter

A counter is used to measure the rate at which some event is occurring.

// create a counter with a name and a set of tags
Counter counter = registry.counter("counterName", "tagKey1", "tagValue1", ...);
counter.increment(); // increment when an event occurs
counter.increment(10); // increment by a discrete amount

The counter records a single time-normalized statistic.

22.3.2 Spectator Timer

A timer is used to measure how long some event is taking. Spring Cloud automatically records timers for Spring MVC requests and conditionally RestTemplate requests, which can later be used to create dashboards for request related metrics like latency:

Figure 22.1. Request Latency

RequestLatency

// create a timer with a name and a set of tags
Timer timer = registry.timer("timerName", "tagKey1", "tagValue1", ...);

// execute an operation and time it at the same time
T result = timer.record(() -> fooReturnsT());

// alternatively, if you must manually record the time
Long start = System.nanoTime();
T result = fooReturnsT();
timer.record(System.nanoTime() - start, TimeUnit.NANOSECONDS);

The timer simultaneously records 4 statistics: count, max, totalOfSquares, and totalTime. The count statistic will always match the single normalized value provided by a counter if you had called increment() once on the counter for each time you recorded a timing, so it is rarely necessary to count and time separately for a single operation.

For long running operations, Spectator provides a special LongTaskTimer.

22.3.3 Spectator Gauge

Gauges are used to determine some current value like the size of a queue or number of threads in a running state. Since gauges are sampled, they provide no information about how these values fluctuate between samples.

The normal use of a gauge involves registering the gauge once in initialization with an id, a reference to the object to be sampled, and a function to get or compute a numeric value based on the object. The reference to the object is passed in separately and the Spectator registry will keep a weak reference to the object. If the object is garbage collected, then Spectator will automatically drop the registration. See the note in Spectator’s documentation about potential memory leaks if this API is misused.

// the registry will automatically sample this gauge periodically
registry.gauge("gaugeName", pool, Pool::numberOfRunningThreads);

// manually sample a value in code at periodic intervals -- last resort!
registry.gauge("gaugeName", Arrays.asList("tagKey1", "tagValue1", ...), 1000);

22.3.4 Spectator Distribution Summaries

A distribution summary is used to track the distribution of events. It is similar to a timer, but more general in that the size does not have to be a period of time. For example, a distribution summary could be used to measure the payload sizes of requests hitting a server.

// the registry will automatically sample this gauge periodically
DistributionSummary ds = registry.distributionSummary("dsName", "tagKey1", "tagValue1", ...);
ds.record(request.sizeInBytes());

22.4 Metrics Collection: Servo

[Warning]Warning

If your code is compiled on Java 8, please use Spectator instead of Servo as Spectator is destined to replace Servo entirely in the long term.

In Servo parlance, a monitor is a named, typed, and tagged configuration and a metric represents the value of a given monitor at a point in time. Servo monitors are logically equivalent to Spectator meters. Servo monitors are created and controlled by a MonitorRegistry. In spite of the above warning, Servo does have a wider array of monitor options than Spectator has meters.

Spring Cloud integration configures an injectable com.netflix.servo.MonitorRegistry instance for you. Once you have created the appropriate Monitor type in Servo, the process of recording data is wholly similar to Spectator.

22.4.1 Creating Servo Monitors

If you are using the Servo MonitorRegistry instance provided by Spring Cloud (specifically, an instance of DefaultMonitorRegistry), Servo provides convenience classes for retrieving counters and timers. These convenience classes ensure that only one Monitor is registered for each unique combination of name and tags.

To manually create a Monitor type in Servo, especially for the more exotic monitor types for which convenience methods are not provided, instantiate the appropriate type by providing a MonitorConfig instance:

MonitorConfig config = MonitorConfig.builder("timerName").withTag("tagKey1", "tagValue1").build();

// somewhere we should cache this Monitor by MonitorConfig
Timer timer = new BasicTimer(config);
monitorRegistry.register(timer);

22.5 Metrics Backend: Atlas

Atlas was developed by Netflix to manage dimensional time series data for near real-time operational insight. Atlas features in-memory data storage, allowing it to gather and report very large numbers of metrics, very quickly.

Atlas captures operational intelligence. Whereas business intelligence is data gathered for analyzing trends over time, operational intelligence provides a picture of what is currently happening within a system.

Spring Cloud provides a spring-cloud-starter-atlas that has all the dependencies you need. Then just annotate your Spring Boot application with @EnableAtlas and provide a location for your running Atlas server with the netflix.atlas.uri property.

22.5.1 Global tags

Spring Cloud enables you to add tags to every metric sent to the Atlas backend. Global tags can be used to separate metrics by application name, environment, region, etc.

Each bean implementing AtlasTagProvider will contribute to the global tag list:

@Bean
AtlasTagProvider atlasCommonTags(
    @Value("${spring.application.name}") String appName) {
  return () -> Collections.singletonMap("app", appName);
}

22.5.2 Using Atlas

To bootstrap a in-memory standalone Atlas instance:

$ curl -LO https://github.com/Netflix/atlas/releases/download/v1.4.2/atlas-1.4.2-standalone.jar
$ java -jar atlas-1.4.2-standalone.jar
[Tip]Tip

An Atlas standalone node running on an r3.2xlarge (61GB RAM) can handle roughly 2 million metrics per minute for a given 6 hour window.

Once running and you have collected a handful of metrics, verify that your setup is correct by listing tags on the Atlas server:

$ curl http://ATLAS/api/v1/tags
[Tip]Tip

After executing several requests against your service, you can gather some very basic information on the request latency of every request by pasting the following url in your browser: http://ATLAS/api/v1/graph?q=name,rest,:eq,:avg

The Atlas wiki contains a compilation of sample queries for various scenarios.

Make sure to check out the alerting philosophy and docs on using double exponential smoothing to generate dynamic alert thresholds.

22.6 Retrying Failed Requests

Spring Cloud Netflix offers a variety of ways to make HTTP requests. You can use a load balanced RestTemplate, Ribbon, or Feign. No matter how you choose to your HTTP requests, there is always a chance the request may fail. When a request fails you may want to have the request retried automatically. To accomplish this when using Sping Cloud Netflix you need to include Spring Retry on your application’s classpath. When Spring Retry is present load balanced RestTemplates, Feign, and Zuul will automatically retry any failed requests (assuming you configuration allows it to).

22.6.1 Configuration

Anytime Ribbon is used with Spring Retry you can control the retry functionality by configuring certain Ribbon properties. The properties you can use are client.ribbon.MaxAutoRetries, client.ribbon.MaxAutoRetriesNextServer, and client.ribbon.OkToRetryOnAllOperations. See the Ribbon documentation for a description of what there properties do.

In addition you may want to retry requests when certain status codes are returned in the response. You can list the response codes you would like the Ribbon client to retry using the property clientName.ribbon.retryableStatusCodes. For example

clientName:
  ribbon:
    retryableStatusCodes: 404,502

You can also create a bean of type LoadBalancedRetryPolicy and implement the retryableStatusCode method to determine whether you want to retry a request given the status code.

22.6.2 Zuul

You can turn off Zuul’s retry functionality by setting zuul.retryable to false. You can also disable retry functionality on route by route basis by setting zuul.routes.routename.retryable to false.

Part IV. Spring Cloud Stream

This section goes into more detail about how you can work with Spring Cloud Stream. It covers topics such as creating and running stream applications.

23. Introducing Spring Cloud Stream

Spring Cloud Stream is a framework for building message-driven microservice applications. Spring Cloud Stream builds upon Spring Boot to create standalone, production-grade Spring applications, and uses Spring Integration to provide connectivity to message brokers. It provides opinionated configuration of middleware from several vendors, introducing the concepts of persistent publish-subscribe semantics, consumer groups, and partitions.

You can add the @EnableBinding annotation to your application to get immediate connectivity to a message broker, and you can add @StreamListener to a method to cause it to receive events for stream processing. The following is a simple sink application which receives external messages.

@SpringBootApplication
@EnableBinding(Sink.class)
public class VoteRecordingSinkApplication {

  public static void main(String[] args) {
    SpringApplication.run(VoteRecordingSinkApplication.class, args);
  }

  @StreamListener(Sink.INPUT)
  public void processVote(Vote vote) {
      votingService.recordVote(vote);
  }
}

The @EnableBinding annotation takes one or more interfaces as parameters (in this case, the parameter is a single Sink interface). An interface declares input and/or output channels. Spring Cloud Stream provides the interfaces Source, Sink, and Processor; you can also define your own interfaces.

The following is the definition of the Sink interface:

public interface Sink {
  String INPUT = "input";

  @Input(Sink.INPUT)
  SubscribableChannel input();
}

The @Input annotation identifies an input channel, through which received messages enter the application; the @Output annotation identifies an output channel, through which published messages leave the application. The @Input and @Output annotations can take a channel name as a parameter; if a name is not provided, the name of the annotated method will be used.

Spring Cloud Stream will create an implementation of the interface for you. You can use this in the application by autowiring it, as in the following example of a test case.

@RunWith(SpringJUnit4ClassRunner.class)
@SpringApplicationConfiguration(classes = VoteRecordingSinkApplication.class)
@WebAppConfiguration
@DirtiesContext
public class StreamApplicationTests {

  @Autowired
  private Sink sink;

  @Test
  public void contextLoads() {
    assertNotNull(this.sink.input());
  }
}

24. Main Concepts

Spring Cloud Stream provides a number of abstractions and primitives that simplify the writing of message-driven microservice applications. This section gives an overview of the following:

  • Spring Cloud Stream’s application model
  • The Binder abstraction
  • Persistent publish-subscribe support
  • Consumer group support
  • Partitioning support
  • A pluggable Binder API

24.1 Application Model

A Spring Cloud Stream application consists of a middleware-neutral core. The application communicates with the outside world through input and output channels injected into it by Spring Cloud Stream. Channels are connected to external brokers through middleware-specific Binder implementations.

Figure 24.1. Spring Cloud Stream Application

SCSt with binder

24.1.1 Fat JAR

Spring Cloud Stream applications can be run in standalone mode from your IDE for testing. To run a Spring Cloud Stream application in production, you can create an executable (or "fat") JAR by using the standard Spring Boot tooling provided for Maven or Gradle.

24.2 The Binder Abstraction

Spring Cloud Stream provides Binder implementations for Kafka and Rabbit MQ. Spring Cloud Stream also includes a TestSupportBinder, which leaves a channel unmodified so that tests can interact with channels directly and reliably assert on what is received. You can use the extensible API to write your own Binder.

Spring Cloud Stream uses Spring Boot for configuration, and the Binder abstraction makes it possible for a Spring Cloud Stream application to be flexible in how it connects to middleware. For example, deployers can dynamically choose, at runtime, the destinations (e.g., the Kafka topics or RabbitMQ exchanges) to which channels connect. Such configuration can be provided through external configuration properties and in any form supported by Spring Boot (including application arguments, environment variables, and application.yml or application.properties files). In the sink example from the Chapter 23, Introducing Spring Cloud Stream section, setting the application property spring.cloud.stream.bindings.input.destination to raw-sensor-data will cause it to read from the raw-sensor-data Kafka topic, or from a queue bound to the raw-sensor-data RabbitMQ exchange.

Spring Cloud Stream automatically detects and uses a binder found on the classpath. You can easily use different types of middleware with the same code: just include a different binder at build time. For more complex use cases, you can also package multiple binders with your application and have it choose the binder, and even whether to use different binders for different channels, at runtime.

24.3 Persistent Publish-Subscribe Support

Communication between applications follows a publish-subscribe model, where data is broadcast through shared topics. This can be seen in the following figure, which shows a typical deployment for a set of interacting Spring Cloud Stream applications.

Figure 24.2. Spring Cloud Stream Publish-Subscribe

SCSt sensors

Data reported by sensors to an HTTP endpoint is sent to a common destination named raw-sensor-data. From the destination, it is independently processed by a microservice application that computes time-windowed averages and by another microservice application that ingests the raw data into HDFS. In order to process the data, both applications declare the topic as their input at runtime.

The publish-subscribe communication model reduces the complexity of both the producer and the consumer, and allows new applications to be added to the topology without disruption of the existing flow. For example, downstream from the average-calculating application, you can add an application that calculates the highest temperature values for display and monitoring. You can then add another application that interprets the same flow of averages for fault detection. Doing all communication through shared topics rather than point-to-point queues reduces coupling between microservices.

While the concept of publish-subscribe messaging is not new, Spring Cloud Stream takes the extra step of making it an opinionated choice for its application model. By using native middleware support, Spring Cloud Stream also simplifies use of the publish-subscribe model across different platforms.

24.4 Consumer Groups

While the publish-subscribe model makes it easy to connect applications through shared topics, the ability to scale up by creating multiple instances of a given application is equally important. When doing this, different instances of an application are placed in a competing consumer relationship, where only one of the instances is expected to handle a given message.

Spring Cloud Stream models this behavior through the concept of a consumer group. (Spring Cloud Stream consumer groups are similar to and inspired by Kafka consumer groups.) Each consumer binding can use the spring.cloud.stream.bindings.<channelName>.group property to specify a group name. For the consumers shown in the following figure, this property would be set as spring.cloud.stream.bindings.<channelName>.group=hdfsWrite or spring.cloud.stream.bindings.<channelName>.group=average.

Figure 24.3. Spring Cloud Stream Consumer Groups

SCSt groups

All groups which subscribe to a given destination receive a copy of published data, but only one member of each group receives a given message from that destination. By default, when a group is not specified, Spring Cloud Stream assigns the application to an anonymous and independent single-member consumer group that is in a publish-subscribe relationship with all other consumer groups.

24.4.1 Durability

Consistent with the opinionated application model of Spring Cloud Stream, consumer group subscriptions are durable. That is, a binder implementation ensures that group subscriptions are persistent, and once at least one subscription for a group has been created, the group will receive messages, even if they are sent while all applications in the group are stopped.

[Note]Note

Anonymous subscriptions are non-durable by nature. For some binder implementations (e.g., RabbitMQ), it is possible to have non-durable group subscriptions.

In general, it is preferable to always specify a consumer group when binding an application to a given destination. When scaling up a Spring Cloud Stream application, you must specify a consumer group for each of its input bindings. This prevents the application’s instances from receiving duplicate messages (unless that behavior is desired, which is unusual).

24.5 Partitioning Support

Spring Cloud Stream provides support for partitioning data between multiple instances of a given application. In a partitioned scenario, the physical communication medium (e.g., the broker topic) is viewed as being structured into multiple partitions. One or more producer application instances send data to multiple consumer application instances and ensure that data identified by common characteristics are processed by the same consumer instance.

Spring Cloud Stream provides a common abstraction for implementing partitioned processing use cases in a uniform fashion. Partitioning can thus be used whether the broker itself is naturally partitioned (e.g., Kafka) or not (e.g., RabbitMQ).

Figure 24.4. Spring Cloud Stream Partitioning

SCSt partitioning

Partitioning is a critical concept in stateful processing, where it is critiical, for either performance or consistency reasons, to ensure that all related data is processed together. For example, in the time-windowed average calculation example, it is important that all measurements from any given sensor are processed by the same application instance.

[Note]Note

To set up a partitioned processing scenario, you must configure both the data-producing and the data-consuming ends.

25. Programming Model

This section describes Spring Cloud Stream’s programming model. Spring Cloud Stream provides a number of predefined annotations for declaring bound input and output channels as well as how to listen to channels.

25.1 Declaring and Binding Channels

25.1.1 Triggering Binding Via @EnableBinding

You can turn a Spring application into a Spring Cloud Stream application by applying the @EnableBinding annotation to one of the application’s configuration classes. The @EnableBinding annotation itself is meta-annotated with @Configuration and triggers the configuration of Spring Cloud Stream infrastructure:

...
@Import(...)
@Configuration
@EnableIntegration
public @interface EnableBinding {
    ...
    Class<?>[] value() default {};
}

The @EnableBinding annotation can take as parameters one or more interface classes that contain methods which represent bindable components (typically message channels).

[Note]Note

In Spring Cloud Stream 1.0, the only supported bindable components are the Spring Messaging MessageChannel and its extensions SubscribableChannel and PollableChannel. Future versions should extend this support to other types of components, using the same mechanism. In this documentation, we will continue to refer to channels.

25.1.2 @Input and @Output

A Spring Cloud Stream application can have an arbitrary number of input and output channels defined in an interface as @Input and @Output methods:

public interface Barista {

    @Input
    SubscribableChannel orders();

    @Output
    MessageChannel hotDrinks();

    @Output
    MessageChannel coldDrinks();
}

Using this interface as a parameter to @EnableBinding will trigger the creation of three bound channels named orders, hotDrinks, and coldDrinks, respectively.

@EnableBinding(Barista.class)
public class CafeConfiguration {

   ...
}

Customizing Channel Names

Using the @Input and @Output annotations, you can specify a customized channel name for the channel, as shown in the following example:

public interface Barista {
    ...
    @Input("inboundOrders")
    SubscribableChannel orders();
}

In this example, the created bound channel will be named inboundOrders.

Source, Sink, and Processor

For easy addressing of the most common use cases, which involve either an input channel, an output channel, or both, Spring Cloud Stream provides three predefined interfaces out of the box.

Source can be used for an application which has a single outbound channel.

public interface Source {

  String OUTPUT = "output";

  @Output(Source.OUTPUT)
  MessageChannel output();

}

Sink can be used for an application which has a single inbound channel.

public interface Sink {

  String INPUT = "input";

  @Input(Sink.INPUT)
  SubscribableChannel input();

}

Processor can be used for an application which has both an inbound channel and an outbound channel.

public interface Processor extends Source, Sink {
}

Spring Cloud Stream provides no special handling for any of these interfaces; they are only provided out of the box.

25.1.3 Accessing Bound Channels

Injecting the Bound Interfaces

For each bound interface, Spring Cloud Stream will generate a bean that implements the interface. Invoking a @Input-annotated or @Output-annotated method of one of these beans will return the relevant bound channel.

The bean in the following example sends a message on the output channel when its hello method is invoked. It invokes output() on the injected Source bean to retrieve the target channel.

@Component
public class SendingBean {

    private Source source;

    @Autowired
    public SendingBean(Source source) {
        this.source = source;
    }

    public void sayHello(String name) {
         source.output().send(MessageBuilder.withPayload(name).build());
    }
}

Injecting Channels Directly

Bound channels can be also injected directly:

@Component
public class SendingBean {

    private MessageChannel output;

    @Autowired
    public SendingBean(MessageChannel output) {
        this.output = output;
    }

    public void sayHello(String name) {
         output.send(MessageBuilder.withPayload(name).build());
    }
}

If the name of the channel is customized on the declaring annotation, that name should be used instead of the method name. Given the following declaration:

public interface CustomSource {
    ...
    @Output("customOutput")
    MessageChannel output();
}

The channel will be injected as shown in the following example:

@Component
public class SendingBean {

    private MessageChannel output;

    @Autowired
    public SendingBean(@Qualifier("customOutput") MessageChannel output) {
        this.output = output;
    }

    public void sayHello(String name) {
         this.output.send(MessageBuilder.withPayload(name).build());
    }
}

25.1.4 Producing and Consuming Messages

You can write a Spring Cloud Stream application using either Spring Integration annotations or Spring Cloud Stream’s @StreamListener annotation. The @StreamListener annotation is modeled after other Spring Messaging annotations (such as @MessageMapping, @JmsListener, @RabbitListener, etc.) but adds content type management and type coercion features.

Native Spring Integration Support

Because Spring Cloud Stream is based on Spring Integration, Stream completely inherits Integration’s foundation and infrastructure as well as the component itself. For example, you can attach the output channel of a Source to a MessageSource:

@EnableBinding(Source.class)
public class TimerSource {

  @Value("${format}")
  private String format;

  @Bean
  @InboundChannelAdapter(value = Source.OUTPUT, poller = @Poller(fixedDelay = "${fixedDelay}", maxMessagesPerPoll = "1"))
  public MessageSource<String> timerMessageSource() {
    return () -> new GenericMessage<>(new SimpleDateFormat(format).format(new Date()));
  }
}

Or you can use a processor’s channels in a transformer:

@EnableBinding(Processor.class)
public class TransformProcessor {
  @Transformer(inputChannel = Processor.INPUT, outputChannel = Processor.OUTPUT)
  public Object transform(String message) {
    return message.toUpperCase();
  }
}

Spring Integration Error Channel Support

Spring Cloud Stream supports publishing error messages received by the Spring Integration global error channel. Error messages sent to the errorChannel can be published to a specific destination at the broker by configuring a binding for the outbound target named error. For example, to publish error messages to a broker destination named "myErrors", provide the following property: spring.cloud.stream.bindings.error.destination=myErrors

Using @StreamListener for Automatic Content Type Handling

Complementary to its Spring Integration support, Spring Cloud Stream provides its own @StreamListener annotation, modeled after other Spring Messaging annotations (e.g. @MessageMapping, @JmsListener, @RabbitListener, etc.). The @StreamListener annotation provides a simpler model for handling inbound messages, especially when dealing with use cases that involve content type management and type coercion.

Spring Cloud Stream provides an extensible MessageConverter mechanism for handling data conversion by bound channels and for, in this case, dispatching to methods annotated with @StreamListener. The following is an example of an application which processes external Vote events:

@EnableBinding(Sink.class)
public class VoteHandler {

  @Autowired
  VotingService votingService;

  @StreamListener(Sink.INPUT)
  public void handle(Vote vote) {
    votingService.record(vote);
  }
}

The distinction between @StreamListener and a Spring Integration @ServiceActivator is seen when considering an inbound Message that has a String payload and a contentType header of application/json. In the case of @StreamListener, the MessageConverter mechanism will use the contentType header to parse the String payload into a Vote object.

As with other Spring Messaging methods, method arguments can be annotated with @Payload, @Headers and @Header.

[Note]Note

For methods which return data, you must use the @SendTo annotation to specify the output binding destination for data returned by the method:

@EnableBinding(Processor.class)
public class TransformProcessor {

  @Autowired
  VotingService votingService;

  @StreamListener(Processor.INPUT)
  @SendTo(Processor.OUTPUT)
  public VoteResult handle(Vote vote) {
    return votingService.record(vote);
  }
}

Using @StreamListener for dispatching messages to multiple methods

Since version 1.2, Spring Cloud Stream supports dispatching messages to multiple @StreamListener methods registered on an input channel, based on a condition.

In order to be eligible to support conditional dispatching, a method must satisfy the follow conditions:

  • it must not return a value
  • it must be an individual message handling method (reactive API methods are not supported)

The condition is specified via a SpEL expression in the condition attribute of the annotation and is evaluated for each message. All the handlers that match the condition will be invoked in the same thread and no assumption must be made about the order in which the invocations take place.

An example of using @StreamListener with dispatching conditions can be seen below. In this example, all the messages bearing a header type with the value foo will be dispatched to the receiveFoo method, and all the messages bearing a header type with the value bar will be dispatched to the receiveBar method.

@EnableBinding(Sink.class)
@EnableAutoConfiguration
public static class TestPojoWithAnnotatedArguments {

    @StreamListener(target = Sink.INPUT, condition = "headers['type']=='foo'")
    public void receiveFoo(@Payload FooPojo fooPojo) {
       // handle the message
    }

    @StreamListener(target = Sink.INPUT, condition = "headers['type']=='bar'")
    public void receiveBar(@Payload BarPojo barPojo) {
       // handle the message
    }
}
[Note]Note

Dispatching via @StreamListener conditions is only supported for handlers of individual messages, and not for reactive programming support (described below).

25.1.5 Reactive Programming Support

Spring Cloud Stream also supports the use of reactive APIs where incoming and outgoing data is handled as continuous data flows. Support for reactive APIs is available via the spring-cloud-stream-reactive, which needs to be added explicitly to your project.

The programming model with reactive APIs is declarative, where instead of specifying how each individual message should be handled, you can use operators that describe functional transformations from inbound to outbound data flows.

Spring Cloud Stream supports the following reactive APIs:

  • Reactor
  • RxJava 1.x

In the future, it is intended to support a more generic model based on Reactive Streams.

The reactive programming model is also using the @StreamListener annotation for setting up reactive handlers. The differences are that:

  • the @StreamListener annotation must not specify an input or output, as they are provided as arguments and return values from the method;
  • the arguments of the method must be annotated with @Input and @Output indicating which input or output will the incoming and respectively outgoing data flows connect to;
  • the return value of the method, if any, will be annotated with @Output, indicating the input where data shall be sent.
[Note]Note

Reactive programming support requires Java 1.8.

[Note]Note

As of Spring Cloud Stream 1.1.1 and later (starting with release train Brooklyn.SR2), reactive programming support requires the use of Reactor 3.0.4.RELEASE and higher. Earlier Reactor versions (including 3.0.1.RELEASE, 3.0.2.RELEASE and 3.0.3.RELEASE) are not supported. spring-cloud-stream-reactive will transitively retrieve the proper version, but it is possible for the project structure to manage the version of the io.projectreactor:reactor-core to an earlier release, especially when using Maven. This is the case for projects generated via Spring Initializr with Spring Boot 1.x, which will override the Reactor version to 2.0.8.RELEASE. In such cases you must ensure that the proper version of the artifact is released. This can be simply achieved by adding a direct dependency on io.projectreactor:reactor-core with a version of 3.0.4.RELEASE or later to your project.

[Note]Note

The use of term reactive is currently referring to the reactive APIs being used and not to the execution model being reactive (i.e. the bound endpoints are still using a 'push' rather than 'pull' model). While some backpressure support is provided by the use of Reactor, we do intend on the long run to support entirely reactive pipelines by the use of native reactive clients for the connected middleware.

Reactor-based handlers

A Reactor based handler can have the following argument types:

  • For arguments annotated with @Input, it supports the Reactor type Flux. The parameterization of the inbound Flux follows the same rules as in the case of individual message handling: it can be the entire Message, a POJO which can be the Message payload, or a POJO which is the result of a transformation based on the Message content-type header. Multiple inputs are provided;
  • For arguments annotated with Output, it supports the type FluxSender which connects a Flux produced by the method with an output. Generally speaking, specifying outputs as arguments is only recommended when the method can have multiple outputs;

A Reactor based handler supports a return type of Flux, case in which it must be annotated with @Output. We recommend using the return value of the method when a single output flux is available.

Here is an example of a simple Reactor-based Processor.

@EnableBinding(Processor.class)
@EnableAutoConfiguration
public static class UppercaseTransformer {

  @StreamListener
  @Output(Processor.OUTPUT)
  public Flux<String> receive(@Input(Processor.INPUT) Flux<String> input) {
    return input.map(s -> s.toUpperCase());
  }
}

The same processor using output arguments looks like this:

@EnableBinding(Processor.class)
@EnableAutoConfiguration
public static class UppercaseTransformer {

  @StreamListener
  public void receive(@Input(Processor.INPUT) Flux<String> input,
     @Output(Processor.OUTPUT) FluxSender output) {
     output.send(input.map(s -> s.toUpperCase()));
  }
}

RxJava 1.x support

RxJava 1.x handlers follow the same rules as Reactor-based one, but will use Observable and ObservableSender arguments and return types.

So the first example above will become:

@EnableBinding(Processor.class)
@EnableAutoConfiguration
public static class UppercaseTransformer {

  @StreamListener
  @Output(Processor.OUTPUT)
  public Observable<String> receive(@Input(Processor.INPUT) Observable<String> input) {
    return input.map(s -> s.toUpperCase());
  }
}

The second example above will become:

@EnableBinding(Processor.class)
@EnableAutoConfiguration
public static class UppercaseTransformer {

  @StreamListener
  public void receive(@Input(Processor.INPUT) Observable<String> input,
     @Output(Processor.OUTPUT) ObservableSender output) {
     output.send(input.map(s -> s.toUpperCase()));
  }
}

25.1.6 Aggregation

Spring Cloud Stream provides support for aggregating multiple applications together, connecting their input and output channels directly and avoiding the additional cost of exchanging messages via a broker. As of version 1.0 of Spring Cloud Stream, aggregation is supported only for the following types of applications:

  • sources - applications with a single output channel named output, typically having a single binding of the type org.springframework.cloud.stream.messaging.Source
  • sinks - applications with a single input channel named input, typically having a single binding of the type org.springframework.cloud.stream.messaging.Sink
  • processors - applications with a single input channel named input and a single output channel named output, typically having a single binding of the type org.springframework.cloud.stream.messaging.Processor.

They can be aggregated together by creating a sequence of interconnected applications, in which the output channel of an element in the sequence is connected to the input channel of the next element, if it exists. A sequence can start with either a source or a processor, it can contain an arbitrary number of processors and must end with either a processor or a sink.

Depending on the nature of the starting and ending element, the sequence may have one or more bindable channels, as follows:

  • if the sequence starts with a source and ends with a sink, all communication between the applications is direct and no channels will be bound
  • if the sequence starts with a processor, then its input channel will become the input channel of the aggregate and will be bound accordingly
  • if the sequence ends with a processor, then its output channel will become the output channel of the aggregate and will be bound accordingly

Aggregation is performed using the AggregateApplicationBuilder utility class, as in the following example. Let’s consider a project in which we have source, processor and a sink, which may be defined in the project, or may be contained in one of the project’s dependencies.

[Note]Note

Each component (source, sink or processor) in an aggregate application must be provided in a separate package if the configuration classes use @SpringBootApplication. This is required to avoid cross-talk between applications, due to the classpath scanning performed by @SpringBootApplication on the configuration classes inside the same package. In the example below, it can be seen that the Source, Processor and Sink application classes are grouped in separate packages. A possible alternative is to provide the source, sink or processor configuration in a separate @Configuration class, avoid the use of @SpringBootApplication/@ComponentScan and use those for aggregation.

package com.app.mysink;

@SpringBootApplication
@EnableBinding(Sink.class)
public class SinkApplication {

	private static Logger logger = LoggerFactory.getLogger(SinkApplication.class);

	@ServiceActivator(inputChannel=Sink.INPUT)
	public void loggerSink(Object payload) {
		logger.info("Received: " + payload);
	}
}
package com.app.myprocessor;

@SpringBootApplication
@EnableBinding(Processor.class)
public class ProcessorApplication {

	@Transformer
	public String loggerSink(String payload) {
		return payload.toUpperCase();
	}
}
package com.app.mysource;

@SpringBootApplication
@EnableBinding(Source.class)
public class SourceApplication {

	@Bean
	@InboundChannelAdapter(value = Source.OUTPUT)
	public String timerMessageSource() {
		return new SimpleDateFormat().format(new Date());
	}
}

Each configuration can be used for running a separate component, but in this case they can be aggregated together as follows:

package com.app;

@SpringBootApplication
public class SampleAggregateApplication {

	public static void main(String[] args) {
		new AggregateApplicationBuilder()
			.from(SourceApplication.class).args("--fixedDelay=5000")
			.via(ProcessorApplication.class)
			.to(SinkApplication.class).args("--debug=true").run(args);
	}
}

The starting component of the sequence is provided as argument to the from() method. The ending component of the sequence is provided as argument to the to() method. Intermediate processors are provided as argument to the via() method. Multiple processors of the same type can be chained together (e.g. for pipelining transformations with different configurations). For each component, the builder can provide runtime arguments for Spring Boot configuration.

Configuring aggregate application

Spring Cloud Stream supports passing properties for the individual applications inside the aggregate application using 'namespace' as prefix.

The namespace can be set for applications as follows:

@SpringBootApplication
public class SampleAggregateApplication {

	public static void main(String[] args) {
		new AggregateApplicationBuilder()
			.from(SourceApplication.class).namespace("source").args("--fixedDelay=5000")
			.via(ProcessorApplication.class).namespace("processor1")
			.to(SinkApplication.class).namespace("sink").args("--debug=true").run(args);
	}
}

Once the 'namespace' is set for the individual applications, the application properties with the namespace as prefix can be passed to the aggregate application using any supported property source (commandline, environment properties etc.,)

For instance, to override the default fixedDelay and debug properties of 'source' and 'sink' applications:

java -jar target/MyAggregateApplication-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT.jar --source.fixedDelay=10000 --sink.debug=false

Configuring binding service properties for non self contained aggregate application

The non self-contained aggregate application is bound to external broker via either or both the inbound/outbound components (typically, message channels) of the aggregate application while the applications inside the aggregate application are directly bound. For example: a source application’s output and a processor application’s input are directly bound while the processor’s output channel is bound to an external destination at the broker. When passing the binding service properties for non-self contained aggregate application, it is required to pass the binding service properties to the aggregate application instead of setting them as 'args' to individual child application. For instance,

@SpringBootApplication
public class SampleAggregateApplication {

	public static void main(String[] args) {
		new AggregateApplicationBuilder()
			.from(SourceApplication.class).namespace("source").args("--fixedDelay=5000")
			.via(ProcessorApplication.class).namespace("processor1").args("--debug=true").run(args);
	}
}

The binding properties like --spring.cloud.stream.bindings.output.destination=processor-output need to be specified as one of the external configuration properties (cmdline arg etc.,).

26. Binders

Spring Cloud Stream provides a Binder abstraction for use in connecting to physical destinations at the external middleware. This section provides information about the main concepts behind the Binder SPI, its main components, and implementation-specific details.

26.1 Producers and Consumers

Figure 26.1. Producers and Consumers

producers consumers

A producer is any component that sends messages to a channel. The channel can be bound to an external message broker via a Binder implementation for that broker. When invoking the bindProducer() method, the first parameter is the name of the destination within the broker, the second parameter is the local channel instance to which the producer will send messages, and the third parameter contains properties (such as a partition key expression) to be used within the adapter that is created for that channel.

A consumer is any component that receives messages from a channel. As with a producer, the consumer’s channel can be bound to an external message broker. When invoking the bindConsumer() method, the first parameter is the destination name, and a second parameter provides the name of a logical group of consumers. Each group that is represented by consumer bindings for a given destination receives a copy of each message that a producer sends to that destination (i.e., publish-subscribe semantics). If there are multiple consumer instances bound using the same group name, then messages will be load-balanced across those consumer instances so that each message sent by a producer is consumed by only a single consumer instance within each group (i.e., queueing semantics).

26.2 Binder SPI

The Binder SPI consists of a number of interfaces, out-of-the box utility classes and discovery strategies that provide a pluggable mechanism for connecting to external middleware.

The key point of the SPI is the Binder interface which is a strategy for connecting inputs and outputs to external middleware.

public interface Binder<T, C extends ConsumerProperties, P extends ProducerProperties> {
	Binding<T> bindConsumer(String name, String group, T inboundBindTarget, C consumerProperties);

	Binding<T> bindProducer(String name, T outboundBindTarget, P producerProperties);
}

The interface is parameterized, offering a number of extension points:

  • input and output bind targets - as of version 1.0, only MessageChannel is supported, but this is intended to be used as an extension point in the future;
  • extended consumer and producer properties - allowing specific Binder implementations to add supplemental properties which can be supported in a type-safe manner.

A typical binder implementation consists of the following

  • a class that implements the Binder interface;
  • a Spring @Configuration class that creates a bean of the type above along with the middleware connection infrastructure;
  • a META-INF/spring.binders file found on the classpath containing one or more binder definitions, e.g.
kafka:\
org.springframework.cloud.stream.binder.kafka.config.KafkaBinderConfiguration

26.3 Binder Detection

Spring Cloud Stream relies on implementations of the Binder SPI to perform the task of connecting channels to message brokers. Each Binder implementation typically connects to one type of messaging system.

26.3.1 Classpath Detection

By default, Spring Cloud Stream relies on Spring Boot’s auto-configuration to configure the binding process. If a single Binder implementation is found on the classpath, Spring Cloud Stream will use it automatically. For example, a Spring Cloud Stream project that aims to bind only to RabbitMQ can simply add the following dependency:

<dependency>
  <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
  <artifactId>spring-cloud-stream-binder-rabbit</artifactId>
</dependency>

For the specific maven coordinates of other binder dependencies, please refer to the documentation of that binder implementation.

26.4 Multiple Binders on the Classpath

When multiple binders are present on the classpath, the application must indicate which binder is to be used for each channel binding. Each binder configuration contains a META-INF/spring.binders, which is a simple properties file:

rabbit:\
org.springframework.cloud.stream.binder.rabbit.config.RabbitServiceAutoConfiguration

Similar files exist for the other provided binder implementations (e.g., Kafka), and custom binder implementations are expected to provide them, as well. The key represents an identifying name for the binder implementation, whereas the value is a comma-separated list of configuration classes that each contain one and only one bean definition of type org.springframework.cloud.stream.binder.Binder.

Binder selection can either be performed globally, using the spring.cloud.stream.defaultBinder property (e.g., spring.cloud.stream.defaultBinder=rabbit) or individually, by configuring the binder on each channel binding. For instance, a processor application (that has channels with the names input and output for read/write respectively) which reads from Kafka and writes to RabbitMQ can specify the following configuration:

spring.cloud.stream.bindings.input.binder=kafka
spring.cloud.stream.bindings.output.binder=rabbit

26.5 Connecting to Multiple Systems

By default, binders share the application’s Spring Boot auto-configuration, so that one instance of each binder found on the classpath will be created. If your application should connect to more than one broker of the same type, you can specify multiple binder configurations, each with different environment settings.

[Note]Note

Turning on explicit binder configuration will disable the default binder configuration process altogether. If you do this, all binders in use must be included in the configuration. Frameworks that intend to use Spring Cloud Stream transparently may create binder configurations that can be referenced by name, but will not affect the default binder configuration. In order to do so, a binder configuration may have its defaultCandidate flag set to false, e.g. spring.cloud.stream.binders.<configurationName>.defaultCandidate=false. This denotes a configuration that will exist independently of the default binder configuration process.

For example, this is the typical configuration for a processor application which connects to two RabbitMQ broker instances:

spring:
  cloud:
    stream:
      bindings:
        input:
          destination: foo
          binder: rabbit1
        output:
          destination: bar
          binder: rabbit2
      binders:
        rabbit1:
          type: rabbit
          environment:
            spring:
              rabbitmq:
                host: <host1>
        rabbit2:
          type: rabbit
          environment:
            spring:
              rabbitmq:
                host: <host2>

26.6 Binder configuration properties

The following properties are available when creating custom binder configurations. They must be prefixed with spring.cloud.stream.binders.<configurationName>.

type

The binder type. It typically references one of the binders found on the classpath, in particular a key in a META-INF/spring.binders file.

By default, it has the same value as the configuration name.

inheritEnvironment

Whether the configuration will inherit the environment of the application itself.

Default true.

environment

Root for a set of properties that can be used to customize the environment of the binder. When this is configured, the context in which the binder is being created is not a child of the application context. This allows for complete separation between the binder components and the application components.

Default empty.

defaultCandidate

Whether the binder configuration is a candidate for being considered a default binder, or can be used only when explicitly referenced. This allows adding binder configurations without interfering with the default processing.

Default true.

27. Configuration Options

Spring Cloud Stream supports general configuration options as well as configuration for bindings and binders. Some binders allow additional binding properties to support middleware-specific features.

Configuration options can be provided to Spring Cloud Stream applications via any mechanism supported by Spring Boot. This includes application arguments, environment variables, and YAML or .properties files.

27.1 Spring Cloud Stream Properties

spring.cloud.stream.instanceCount

The number of deployed instances of an application. Must be set for partitioning and if using Kafka.

Default: 1.

spring.cloud.stream.instanceIndex
The instance index of the application: a number from 0 to instanceCount-1. Used for partitioning and with Kafka. Automatically set in Cloud Foundry to match the application’s instance index.
spring.cloud.stream.dynamicDestinations

A list of destinations that can be bound dynamically (for example, in a dynamic routing scenario). If set, only listed destinations can be bound.

Default: empty (allowing any destination to be bound).

spring.cloud.stream.defaultBinder

The default binder to use, if multiple binders are configured. See Multiple Binders on the Classpath.

Default: empty.

spring.cloud.stream.overrideCloudConnectors

This property is only applicable when the cloud profile is active and Spring Cloud Connectors are provided with the application. If the property is false (the default), the binder will detect a suitable bound service (e.g. a RabbitMQ service bound in Cloud Foundry for the RabbitMQ binder) and will use it for creating connections (usually via Spring Cloud Connectors). When set to true, this property instructs binders to completely ignore the bound services and rely on Spring Boot properties (e.g. relying on the spring.rabbitmq.* properties provided in the environment for the RabbitMQ binder). The typical usage of this property is to be nested in a customized environment when connecting to multiple systems.

Default: false.

27.2 Binding Properties

Binding properties are supplied using the format spring.cloud.stream.bindings.<channelName>.<property>=<value>. The <channelName> represents the name of the channel being configured (e.g., output for a Source).

To avoid repetition, Spring Cloud Stream supports setting values for all channels, in the format spring.cloud.stream.default.<property>=<value>.

In what follows, we indicate where we have omitted the spring.cloud.stream.bindings.<channelName>. prefix and focus just on the property name, with the understanding that the prefix will be included at runtime.

27.2.1 Properties for Use of Spring Cloud Stream

The following binding properties are available for both input and output bindings and must be prefixed with spring.cloud.stream.bindings.<channelName>., e.g. spring.cloud.stream.bindings.input.destination=ticktock.

Default values can be set by using the prefix spring.cloud.stream.default, e.g. spring.cloud.stream.default.contentType=application/json.

destination
The target destination of a channel on the bound middleware (e.g., the RabbitMQ exchange or Kafka topic). If the channel is bound as a consumer, it could be bound to multiple destinations and the destination names can be specified as comma separated String values. If not set, the channel name is used instead. The default value of this property cannot be overridden.
group

The consumer group of the channel. Applies only to inbound bindings. See Consumer Groups.

Default: null (indicating an anonymous consumer).

contentType

The content type of the channel.

Default: null (so that no type coercion is performed).

binder

The binder used by this binding. See Section 26.4, “Multiple Binders on the Classpath” for details.

Default: null (the default binder will be used, if one exists).

27.2.2 Consumer properties

The following binding properties are available for input bindings only and must be prefixed with spring.cloud.stream.bindings.<channelName>.consumer., e.g. spring.cloud.stream.bindings.input.consumer.concurrency=3.

Default values can be set by using the prefix spring.cloud.stream.default.consumer, e.g. spring.cloud.stream.default.consumer.headerMode=raw.

concurrency

The concurrency of the inbound consumer.

Default: 1.

partitioned

Whether the consumer receives data from a partitioned producer.

Default: false.

headerMode

When set to raw, disables header parsing on input. Effective only for messaging middleware that does not support message headers natively and requires header embedding. Useful when inbound data is coming from outside Spring Cloud Stream applications.

Default: embeddedHeaders.

maxAttempts

If processing fails, the number of attempts to process the message (including the first). Set to 1 to disable retry.

Default: 3.

backOffInitialInterval

The backoff initial interval on retry.

Default: 1000.

backOffMaxInterval

The maximum backoff interval.

Default: 10000.

backOffMultiplier

The backoff multiplier.

Default: 2.0.

instanceIndex

When set to a value greater than equal to zero, allows customizing the instance index of this consumer (if different from spring.cloud.stream.instanceIndex). When set to a negative value, it will default to spring.cloud.stream.instanceIndex.

Default: -1.

instanceCount

When set to a value greater than equal to zero, allows customizing the instance count of this consumer (if different from spring.cloud.stream.instanceCount). When set to a negative value, it will default to spring.cloud.stream.instanceCount.

Default: -1.

27.2.3 Producer Properties

The following binding properties are available for output bindings only and must be prefixed with spring.cloud.stream.bindings.<channelName>.producer., e.g. spring.cloud.stream.bindings.input.producer.partitionKeyExpression=payload.id.

Default values can be set by using the prefix spring.cloud.stream.default.producer, e.g. spring.cloud.stream.default.producer.partitionKeyExpression=payload.id.

partitionKeyExpression

A SpEL expression that determines how to partition outbound data. If set, or if partitionKeyExtractorClass is set, outbound data on this channel will be partitioned, and partitionCount must be set to a value greater than 1 to be effective. The two options are mutually exclusive. See Section 24.5, “Partitioning Support”.

Default: null.

partitionKeyExtractorClass

A PartitionKeyExtractorStrategy implementation. If set, or if partitionKeyExpression is set, outbound data on this channel will be partitioned, and partitionCount must be set to a value greater than 1 to be effective. The two options are mutually exclusive. See Section 24.5, “Partitioning Support”.

Default: null.

partitionSelectorClass

A PartitionSelectorStrategy implementation. Mutually exclusive with partitionSelectorExpression. If neither is set, the partition will be selected as the hashCode(key) % partitionCount, where key is computed via either partitionKeyExpression or partitionKeyExtractorClass.

Default: null.

partitionSelectorExpression

A SpEL expression for customizing partition selection. Mutually exclusive with partitionSelectorClass. If neither is set, the partition will be selected as the hashCode(key) % partitionCount, where key is computed via either partitionKeyExpression or partitionKeyExtractorClass.

Default: null.

partitionCount

The number of target partitions for the data, if partitioning is enabled. Must be set to a value greater than 1 if the producer is partitioned. On Kafka, interpreted as a hint; the larger of this and the partition count of the target topic is used instead.

Default: 1.

requiredGroups
A comma-separated list of groups to which the producer must ensure message delivery even if they start after it has been created (e.g., by pre-creating durable queues in RabbitMQ).
headerMode

When set to raw, disables header embedding on output. Effective only for messaging middleware that does not support message headers natively and requires header embedding. Useful when producing data for non-Spring Cloud Stream applications.

Default: embeddedHeaders.

useNativeEncoding

When set to true, the outbound message is serialized directly by client library, which must be configured correspondingly (e.g. setting an appropriate Kafka producer value serializer). When this configuration is being used, the outbound message marshalling is not based on the contentType of the binding. When native encoding is used, it is the responsibility of the consumer to use appropriate decoder (ex: Kafka consumer value de-serializer) to deserialize the inbound message. Also, when native encoding/decoding is used the headerMode property is ignored and headers will not be embedded into the message.

Default: false.

27.3 Using dynamically bound destinations

Besides the channels defined via @EnableBinding, Spring Cloud Stream allows applications to send messages to dynamically bound destinations. This is useful, for example, when the target destination needs to be determined at runtime. Applications can do so by using the BinderAwareChannelResolver bean, registered automatically by the @EnableBinding annotation.

The property 'spring.cloud.stream.dynamicDestinations' can be used for restricting the dynamic destination names to a set known beforehand (whitelisting). If the property is not set, any destination can be bound dynamicaly.

The BinderAwareChannelResolver can be used directly as in the following example, in which a REST controller uses a path variable to decide the target channel.

@EnableBinding
@Controller
public class SourceWithDynamicDestination {

	@Autowired
	private BinderAwareChannelResolver resolver;

	@RequestMapping(path = "/{target}", method = POST, consumes = "*/*")
	@ResponseStatus(HttpStatus.ACCEPTED)
	public void handleRequest(@RequestBody String body, @PathVariable("target") target,
	       @RequestHeader(HttpHeaders.CONTENT_TYPE) Object contentType) {
		sendMessage(body, target, contentType);
	}

	private void sendMessage(String body, String target, Object contentType) {
		resolver.resolveDestination(target).send(MessageBuilder.createMessage(body,
				new MessageHeaders(Collections.singletonMap(MessageHeaders.CONTENT_TYPE, contentType))));
	}
}

After starting the application on the default port 8080, when sending the following data:

curl -H "Content-Type: application/json" -X POST -d "customer-1" http://localhost:8080/customers

curl -H "Content-Type: application/json" -X POST -d "order-1" http://localhost:8080/orders

The destinations 'customers' and 'orders' are created in the broker (for example: exchange in case of Rabbit or topic in case of Kafka) with the names 'customers' and 'orders', and the data is published to the appropriate destinations.

The BinderAwareChannelResolver is a general purpose Spring Integration DestinationResolver and can be injected in other components. For example, in a router using a SpEL expression based on the target field of an incoming JSON message.

@EnableBinding
@Controller
public class SourceWithDynamicDestination {

	@Autowired
	private BinderAwareChannelResolver resolver;


	@RequestMapping(path = "/", method = POST, consumes = "application/json")
	@ResponseStatus(HttpStatus.ACCEPTED)
	public void handleRequest(@RequestBody String body, @RequestHeader(HttpHeaders.CONTENT_TYPE) Object contentType) {
		sendMessage(body, contentType);
	}

	private void sendMessage(Object body, Object contentType) {
		routerChannel().send(MessageBuilder.createMessage(body,
				new MessageHeaders(Collections.singletonMap(MessageHeaders.CONTENT_TYPE, contentType))));
	}

	@Bean(name = "routerChannel")
	public MessageChannel routerChannel() {
		return new DirectChannel();
	}

	@Bean
	@ServiceActivator(inputChannel = "routerChannel")
	public ExpressionEvaluatingRouter router() {
        ExpressionEvaluatingRouter router =
            new ExpressionEvaluatingRouter(new SpelExpressionParser().parseExpression("payload.target"));
		router.setDefaultOutputChannelName("default-output");
		router.setChannelResolver(resolver);
		return router;
	}
}

28. Content Type and Transformation

To allow you to propagate information about the content type of produced messages, Spring Cloud Stream attaches, by default, a contentType header to outbound messages. For middleware that does not directly support headers, Spring Cloud Stream provides its own mechanism of automatically wrapping outbound messages in an envelope of its own. For middleware that does support headers, Spring Cloud Stream applications may receive messages with a given content type from non-Spring Cloud Stream applications.

Spring Cloud Stream can handle messages based on this information in two ways:

  • Through its contentType settings on inbound and outbound channels
  • Through its argument mapping performed for methods annotated with @StreamListener

Spring Cloud Stream allows you to declaratively configure type conversion for inputs and outputs using the spring.cloud.stream.bindings.<channelName>.content-type property of a binding. Note that general type conversion may also be accomplished easily by using a transformer inside your application. Currently, Spring Cloud Stream natively supports the following type conversions commonly used in streams:

  • JSON to/from POJO
  • JSON to/from org.springframework.tuple.Tuple
  • Object to/from byte[] : Either the raw bytes serialized for remote transport, bytes emitted by an application, or converted to bytes using Java serialization(requires the object to be Serializable)
  • String to/from byte[]
  • Object to plain text (invokes the object’s toString() method)

Where JSON represents either a byte array or String payload containing JSON. Currently, Objects may be converted from a JSON byte array or String. Converting to JSON always produces a String.

If no content-type property is set on an outbound channel, Spring Cloud Stream will serialize the payload using a serializer based on the Kryo serialization framework. Deserializing messages at the destination requires the payload class to be present on the receiver’s classpath.

28.1 MIME types

content-type values are parsed as media types, e.g., application/json or text/plain;charset=UTF-8. MIME types are especially useful for indicating how to convert to String or byte[] content. Spring Cloud Stream also uses MIME type format to represent Java types, using the general type application/x-java-object with a type parameter. For example, application/x-java-object;type=java.util.Map or application/x-java-object;type=com.bar.Foo can be set as the content-type property of an input binding. In addition, Spring Cloud Stream provides custom MIME types, notably, application/x-spring-tuple to specify a Tuple.

28.2 MIME types and Java types

The type conversions Spring Cloud Stream provides out of the box are summarized in the following table: 'Source Payload' means the payload before conversion and 'Target Payload' means the 'payload' after conversion. The type conversion can occur either on the 'producer' side (output) or at the 'consumer' side (input).

Source PayloadTarget Payloadcontent-type header (source message)content-type header (after conversion)Comments

POJO

JSON String

ignored

application/json

 

Tuple

JSON String

ignored

application/json

JSON is tailored for Tuple

POJO

String (toString())

ignored

text/plain, java.lang.String

 

POJO

byte[] (java.io serialized)

ignored

application/x-java-serialized-object

 

JSON byte[] or String

POJO

application/json (or none)

application/x-java-object

 

byte[] or String

Serializable

application/x-java-serialized-object

application/x-java-object

 

JSON byte[] or String

Tuple

application/json (or none)

application/x-spring-tuple

 

byte[]

String

any

text/plain, java.lang.String

will apply any Charset specified in the content-type header

String

byte[]

any

application/octet-stream

will apply any Charset specified in the content-type header

[Note]Note

Conversion applies to payloads that require type conversion. For example, if an application produces an XML string with outputType=application/json, the payload will not be converted from XML to JSON. This is because the payload send to the outbound channel is already a String so no conversion will be applied at runtime. It is also important to note that when using the default serialization mechanism, the payload class must be shared between the sending and receiving application, and compatible with the binary content. This can create issues when application code changes independently in the two applications, as the binary format and code may become incompatible.

[Tip]Tip

While conversion is supported for both inbound and outbound channels, it is especially recommended to be used for the conversion of outbound messages. For the conversion of inbound messages, especially when the target is a POJO, the @StreamListener support will perform the conversion automatically.

28.3 Customizing message conversion

Besides the conversions that it supports out of the box, Spring Cloud Stream also supports registering your own message conversion implementations. This allows you to send and receive data in a variety of custom formats, including binary, and associate them with specific contentTypes. Spring Cloud Stream registers all the beans of type org.springframework.messaging.converter.MessageConverter as custom message converters along with the out of the box message converters.

If your message converter needs to work with a specific content-type and target class (for both input and output), then the message converter needs to extend org.springframework.messaging.converter.AbstractMessageConverter. For conversion when using @StreamListener, a message converter that implements org.springframework.messaging.converter.MessageConverter would suffice.

Here is an example of creating a message converter bean (with the content-type application/bar) inside a Spring Cloud Stream application:

@EnableBinding(Sink.class)
@SpringBootApplication
public static class SinkApplication {

  ...

  @Bean
  public MessageConverter customMessageConverter() {
    return new MyCustomMessageConverter();
  }
public class MyCustomMessageConverter extends AbstractMessageConverter {

	public MyCustomMessageConverter() {
		super(new MimeType("application", "bar"));
	}

	@Override
  protected boolean supports(Class<?> clazz) {
    return (Bar.class == clazz);
  }

	@Override
	protected Object convertFromInternal(Message<?> message, Class<?> targetClass, Object conversionHint) {
		Object payload = message.getPayload();
		return (payload instanceof Bar ? payload : new Bar((byte[]) payload));
	}
}

Spring Cloud Stream also provides support for Avro-based converters and schema evolution. See the specific section for details.

28.4 @StreamListener and Message Conversion

The @StreamListener annotation provides a convenient way for converting incoming messages without the need to specify the content type of an input channel. During the dispatching process to methods annotated with @StreamListener, a conversion will be applied automatically if the argument requires it.

For example, let’s consider a message with the String content {"greeting":"Hello, world"} and a content-type header of application/json is received on the input channel. Let us consider the following application that receives it:

public class GreetingMessage {

  String greeting;

  public String getGreeting() {
    return greeting;
  }

  public void setGreeting(String greeting) {
    this.greeting = greeting;
  }
}

@EnableBinding(Sink.class)
@EnableAutoConfiguration
public static class GreetingSink {

		@StreamListener(Sink.INPUT)
		public void receive(Greeting greeting) {
			// handle Greeting
		}
	}

The argument of the method will be populated automatically with the POJO containing the unmarshalled form of the JSON String.

29. Schema evolution support

Spring Cloud Stream provides support for schema-based message converters through its spring-cloud-stream-schema module. Currently, the only serialization format supported out of the box for schema-based message converters is Apache Avro, with more formats to be added in future versions.

29.1 Apache Avro Message Converters

The spring-cloud-stream-schema module contains two types of message converters that can be used for Apache Avro serialization:

  • converters using the class information of the serialized/deserialized objects, or a schema with a location known at startup;
  • converters using a schema registry - they locate the schemas at runtime, as well as dynamically registering new schemas as domain objects evolve.

29.2 Converters with schema support

The AvroSchemaMessageConverter supports serializing and deserializing messages either using a predefined schema or by using the schema information available in the class (either reflectively, or contained in the SpecificRecord). If the target type of the conversion is a GenericRecord, then a schema must be set.

For using it, you can simply add it to the application context, optionally specifying one ore more MimeTypes to associate it with. The default MimeType is application/avro.

Here is an example of configuring it in a sink application registering the Apache Avro MessageConverter, without a predefined schema:

@EnableBinding(Sink.class)
@SpringBootApplication
public static class SinkApplication {

  ...

  @Bean
  public MessageConverter userMessageConverter() {
      return new AvroSchemaMessageConverter(MimeType.valueOf("avro/bytes"));
  }
}

Conversely, here is an application that registers a converter with a predefined schema, to be found on the classpath:

@EnableBinding(Sink.class)
@SpringBootApplication
public static class SinkApplication {

  ...

  @Bean
  public MessageConverter userMessageConverter() {
      AvroSchemaMessageConverter converter = new AvroSchemaMessageConverter(MimeType.valueOf("avro/bytes"));
      converter.setSchemaLocation(new ClassPathResource("schemas/User.avro"));
      return converter;
  }
}

In order to understand the schema registry client converter, we will describe the schema registry support first.

29.3 Schema Registry Support

Most serialization models, especially the ones that aim for portability across different platforms and languages, rely on a schema that describes how the data is serialized in the binary payload. In order to serialize the data and then to interpret it, both the sending and receiving sides must have access to a schema that describes the binary format. In certain cases, the schema can be inferred from the payload type on serialization, or from the target type on deserialization, but in a lot of cases applications benefit from having access to an explicit schema that describes the binary data format. A schema registry allows you to store schema information in a textual format (typically JSON) and makes that information accessible to various applications that need it to receive and send data in binary format. A schema is referenceable as a tuple consisting of:

  • a subject that is the logical name of the schema;
  • the schema version;
  • the schema format which describes the binary format of the data.

29.4 Schema Registry Server

Spring Cloud Stream provides a schema registry server implementation. In order to use it, you can simply add the spring-cloud-stream-schema-server artifact to your project and use the @EnableSchemaRegistryServer annotation, adding the schema registry server REST controller to your application. This annotation is intended to be used with Spring Boot web applications, and the listening port of the server is controlled by the server.port setting. The spring.cloud.stream.schema.server.path setting can be used to control the root path of the schema server (especially when it is embedded in other applications). The spring.cloud.stream.schema.server.allowSchemaDeletion boolean setting enables the deletion of schema. By default this is disabled.

The schema registry server uses a relational database to store the schemas. By default, it uses an embedded database. You can customize the schema storage using the Spring Boot SQL database and JDBC configuration options.

A Spring Boot application enabling the schema registry looks as follows:

@SpringBootApplication
@EnableSchemaRegistryServer
public class SchemaRegistryServerApplication {
	public static void main(String[] args) {
		SpringApplication.run(SchemaRegistryServerApplication.class, args);
	}
}

29.4.1 Schema Registry Server API

The Schema Registry Server API consists of the following operations:

POST /

Register a new schema.

Accepts JSON payload with the following fields:

  • subject the schema subject;
  • format the schema format;
  • definition the schema definition.

Response is a schema object in JSON format, with the following fields:

  • id the schema id;
  • subject the schema subject;
  • format the schema format;
  • version the schema version;
  • definition the schema definition.

GET /{subject}/{format}/{version}

Retrieve an existing schema by its subject, format and version.

Response is a schema object in JSON format, with the following fields:

  • id the schema id;
  • subject the schema subject;
  • format the schema format;
  • version the schema version;
  • definition the schema definition.

GET /{subject}/{format}

Retrieve a list of existing schema by its subject and format.

Response is a list of schemas with each schema object in JSON format, with the following fields:

  • id the schema id;
  • subject the schema subject;
  • format the schema format;
  • version the schema version;
  • definition the schema definition.

GET /schemas/{id}

Retrieve an existing schema by its id.

Response is a schema object in JSON format, with the following fields:

  • id the schema id;
  • subject the schema subject;
  • format the schema format;
  • version the schema version;
  • definition the schema definition.

DELETE /{subject}/{format}/{version}

Delete an existing schema by its subject, format and version.

DELETE /schemas/{id}

Delete an existing schema by its id.

DELETE /{subject}

Delete existing schemas by their subject.

[Note]Note

This note applies to users of Spring Cloud Stream 1.1.0.RELEASE only. Spring Cloud Stream 1.1.0.RELEASE used the table name schema for storing Schema objects, which is a keyword in a number of database implementations. To avoid any conflicts in the future, starting with 1.1.1.RELEASE we have opted for the name SCHEMA_REPOSITORY for the storage table. Any Spring Cloud Stream 1.1.0.RELEASE users that are upgrading are advised to migrate their existing schemas to the new table before upgrading.

29.5 Schema Registry Client

The client-side abstraction for interacting with schema registry servers is the SchemaRegistryClient interface, with the following structure:

public interface SchemaRegistryClient {

	SchemaRegistrationResponse register(String subject, String format, String schema);

	String fetch(SchemaReference schemaReference);

	String fetch(Integer id);

}

Spring Cloud Stream provides out of the box implementations for interacting with its own schema server, as well as for interacting with the Confluent Schema Registry.

A client for the Spring Cloud Stream schema registry can be configured using the @EnableSchemaRegistryClient as follows:

  @EnableBinding(Sink.class)
  @SpringBootApplication
  @EnableSchemaRegistryClient
  public static class AvroSinkApplication {
    ...
  }
[Note]Note

The default converter is optimized to cache not only the schemas from the remote server but also the parse() and toString() methods that are quite expensive. Because of this, it uses a DefaultSchemaRegistryClient that does not caches responses. If you intend to use the client directly on your code, you can request a bean that also caches responses to be created. To do that, just add the property spring.cloud.stream.schemaRegistryClient.cached=true to your application properties.

29.5.1 Schema Registry Client properties

The Schema Registry Client supports the following properties:

spring.cloud.stream.schemaRegistryClient.endpoint
The location of the schema-server. Use a full URL when setting this, including protocol (http or https) , port and context path.
Default
http://localhost:8990/
spring.cloud.stream.schemaRegistryClient.cached
Whether the client should cache schema server responses. Normally set to false, as the caching happens in the message converter. Clients using the schema registry client should set this to true.
Default
true

29.6 Avro Schema Registry Client Message Converters

For Spring Boot applications that have a SchemaRegistryClient bean registered with the application context, Spring Cloud Stream will auto-configure an Apache Avro message converter that uses the schema registry client for schema management. This eases schema evolution, as applications that receive messages can get easy access to a writer schema that can be reconciled with their own reader schema.

For outbound messages, the MessageConverter will be activated if the content type of the channel is set to application/*+avro, e.g.:

spring.cloud.stream.bindings.output.contentType=application/*+avro

During the outbound conversion, the message converter will try to infer the schemas of the outbound messages based on their type and register them to a subject based on the payload type using the SchemaRegistryClient. If an identical schema is already found, then a reference to it will be retrieved. If not, the schema will be registered and a new version number will be provided. The message will be sent with a contentType header using the scheme application/[prefix].[subject].v[version]+avro, where prefix is configurable and subject is deduced from the payload type.

For example, a message of the type User may be sent as a binary payload with a content type of application/vnd.user.v2+avro, where user is the subject and 2 is the version number.

When receiving messages, the converter will infer the schema reference from the header of the incoming message and will try to retrieve it. The schema will be used as the writer schema in the deserialization process.

29.6.1 Avro Schema Registry Message Converter properties

If you have enabled Avro based schema registry client by setting spring.cloud.stream.bindings.output.contentType=application/*+avro you can customize the behavior of the registration with the following properties.

spring.cloud.stream.schema.avro.dynamicSchemaGenerationEnabled
Enable if you want the converter to use reflection to infer a Schema from a POJO.
Default
false
spring.cloud.stream.schema.avro.readerSchema
Avro compares schema versions by looking at a writer schema (origin payload) and a reader schema (your application payload), check Avro documentation for more information. If set, this overrides any lookups at the schema server and uses the local schema as the reader schema.
Default
null
spring.cloud.stream.schema.avro.schemaLocations
Register any .avsc files listed in this property with the Schema Server.
Default
empty
spring.cloud.stream.schema.avro.prefix
The prefix to be used on the Content-Type header.
Default
vnd

29.7 Schema Registration and Resolution

To better understand how Spring Cloud Stream registers and resolves new schemas, as well as its use of Avro schema comparison features, we will provide two separate subsections below: one for the registration, and one for the resolution of schemas.

29.7.1 Schema Registration Process (Serialization)

The first part of the registration process is extracting a schema from the payload that is being sent over a channel. Avro types such as SpecificRecord or GenericRecord already contain a schema, which can be retrieved immediately from the instance. In the case of POJOs a schema will be inferred if the property spring.cloud.stream.schema.avro.dynamicSchemaGenerationEnabled is set to true (the default).

Figure 29.1. Schema Writer Resolution Process

schema resolution

Once a schema is obtained, the converter will then load its metadata (version) from the remote server. First it queries a local cache, and if not found it then submits the data to the server that will reply with versioning information. The converter will always cache the results to avoid the overhead of querying the Schema Server for every new message that needs to be serialized.

Figure 29.2. Schema Registration Process

registration

With the schema version information, the converter sets the contentType header of the message to carry the version information such as application/vnd.user.v1+avro

29.7.2 Schema Resolution Process (Deserialization)

When reading messages that contain version information (i.e. a contentType header with a scheme like above), the converter will query the Schema server to fetch the writer schema of the message. Once it has found the correct schema of the incoming message, it then retrieves the reader schema and using Avro’s schema resolution support reads it into the reader definition (setting defaults and missing properties).

Figure 29.3. Schema Reading Resolution Process

schema reading

[Note]Note

It’s important to understand the difference between a writer schema (the application that wrote the message) and a reader schema (the receiving application). Please take a moment to read the Avro terminology and understand the process. Spring Cloud Stream will always fetch the writer schema to determine how to read a message. If you want to get Avro’s schema evolution support working you need to make sure that a readerSchema was properly set for your application.

30. Inter-Application Communication

30.1 Connecting Multiple Application Instances

While Spring Cloud Stream makes it easy for individual Spring Boot applications to connect to messaging systems, the typical scenario for Spring Cloud Stream is the creation of multi-application pipelines, where microservice applications send data to each other. You can achieve this scenario by correlating the input and output destinations of adjacent applications.

Supposing that a design calls for the Time Source application to send data to the Log Sink application, you can use a common destination named ticktock for bindings within both applications.

Time Source (that has the channel name output) will set the following property:

spring.cloud.stream.bindings.output.destination=ticktock

Log Sink (that has the channel name input) will set the following property:

spring.cloud.stream.bindings.input.destination=ticktock

30.2 Instance Index and Instance Count

When scaling up Spring Cloud Stream applications, each instance can receive information about how many other instances of the same application exist and what its own instance index is. Spring Cloud Stream does this through the spring.cloud.stream.instanceCount and spring.cloud.stream.instanceIndex properties. For example, if there are three instances of a HDFS sink application, all three instances will have spring.cloud.stream.instanceCount set to 3, and the individual applications will have spring.cloud.stream.instanceIndex set to 0, 1, and 2, respectively.

When Spring Cloud Stream applications are deployed via Spring Cloud Data Flow, these properties are configured automatically; when Spring Cloud Stream applications are launched independently, these properties must be set correctly. By default, spring.cloud.stream.instanceCount is 1, and spring.cloud.stream.instanceIndex is 0.

In a scaled-up scenario, correct configuration of these two properties is important for addressing partitioning behavior (see below) in general, and the two properties are always required by certain binders (e.g., the Kafka binder) in order to ensure that data are split correctly across multiple consumer instances.

30.3 Partitioning

30.3.1 Configuring Output Bindings for Partitioning

An output binding is configured to send partitioned data by setting one and only one of its partitionKeyExpression or partitionKeyExtractorClass properties, as well as its partitionCount property. For example, the following is a valid and typical configuration:

spring.cloud.stream.bindings.output.producer.partitionKeyExpression=payload.id
spring.cloud.stream.bindings.output.producer.partitionCount=5

Based on the above example configuration, data will be sent to the target partition using the following logic.

A partition key’s value is calculated for each message sent to a partitioned output channel based on the partitionKeyExpression. The partitionKeyExpression is a SpEL expression which is evaluated against the outbound message for extracting the partitioning key.

If a SpEL expression is not sufficient for your needs, you can instead calculate the partition key value by setting the property partitionKeyExtractorClass to a class which implements the org.springframework.cloud.stream.binder.PartitionKeyExtractorStrategy interface. While the SpEL expression should usually suffice, more complex cases may use the custom implementation strategy. In that case, the property 'partitionKeyExtractorClass' can be set as follows:

spring.cloud.stream.bindings.output.producer.partitionKeyExtractorClass=com.example.MyKeyExtractor
spring.cloud.stream.bindings.output.producer.partitionCount=5

Once the message key is calculated, the partition selection process will determine the target partition as a value between 0 and partitionCount - 1. The default calculation, applicable in most scenarios, is based on the formula key.hashCode() % partitionCount. This can be customized on the binding, either by setting a SpEL expression to be evaluated against the 'key' (via the partitionSelectorExpression property) or by setting a org.springframework.cloud.stream.binder.PartitionSelectorStrategy implementation (via the partitionSelectorClass property).

The binding level properties for 'partitionSelectorExpression' and 'partitionSelectorClass' can be specified similar to the way 'partitionKeyExpression' and 'partitionKeyExtractorClass' properties are specified in the above examples. Additional properties can be configured for more advanced scenarios, as described in the following section.

Spring-managed custom PartitionKeyExtractorClass implementations

In the example above, a custom strategy such as MyKeyExtractor is instantiated by the Spring Cloud Stream directly. In some cases, it is necessary for such a custom strategy implementation to be created as a Spring bean, for being able to be managed by Spring, so that it can perform dependency injection, property binding, etc. This can be done by configuring it as a @Bean in the application context and using the fully qualified class name as the bean’s name, as in the following example.

@Bean(name="com.example.MyKeyExtractor")
public MyKeyExtractor extractor() {
    return new MyKeyExtractor();
}

As a Spring bean, the custom strategy benefits from the full lifecycle of a Spring bean. For example, if the implementation need access to the application context directly, it can make implement 'ApplicationContextAware'.

Configuring Input Bindings for Partitioning

An input binding (with the channel name input) is configured to receive partitioned data by setting its partitioned property, as well as the instanceIndex and instanceCount properties on the application itself, as in the following example:

spring.cloud.stream.bindings.input.consumer.partitioned=true
spring.cloud.stream.instanceIndex=3
spring.cloud.stream.instanceCount=5

The instanceCount value represents the total number of application instances between which the data need to be partitioned, and the instanceIndex must be a unique value across the multiple instances, between 0 and instanceCount - 1. The instance index helps each application instance to identify the unique partition (or, in the case of Kafka, the partition set) from which it receives data. It is important to set both values correctly in order to ensure that all of the data is consumed and that the application instances receive mutually exclusive datasets.

While a scenario which using multiple instances for partitioned data processing may be complex to set up in a standalone case, Spring Cloud Dataflow can simplify the process significantly by populating both the input and output values correctly as well as relying on the runtime infrastructure to provide information about the instance index and instance count.

31. Testing

Spring Cloud Stream provides support for testing your microservice applications without connecting to a messaging system. You can do that by using the TestSupportBinder provided by the spring-cloud-stream-test-support library, which can be added as a test dependency to the application:

   <dependency>
       <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
       <artifactId>spring-cloud-stream-test-support</artifactId>
       <scope>test</scope>
   </dependency>
[Note]Note

The TestSupportBinder uses the Spring Boot autoconfiguration mechanism to supersede the other binders found on the classpath. Therefore, when adding a binder as a dependency, make sure that the test scope is being used.

The TestSupportBinder allows users to interact with the bound channels and inspect what messages are sent and received by the application

For outbound message channels, the TestSupportBinder registers a single subscriber and retains the messages emitted by the application in a MessageCollector. They can be retrieved during tests and have assertions made against them.

The user can also send messages to inbound message channels, so that the consumer application can consume the messages. The following example shows how to test both input and output channels on a processor.

@RunWith(SpringRunner.class)
@SpringBootTest(webEnvironment= SpringBootTest.WebEnvironment.RANDOM_PORT)
public class ExampleTest {

  @Autowired
  private Processor processor;

  @Autowired
  private MessageCollector messageCollector;

  @Test
  @SuppressWarnings("unchecked")
  public void testWiring() {
    Message<String> message = new GenericMessage<>("hello");
    processor.input().send(message);
    Message<String> received = (Message<String>) messageCollector.forChannel(processor.output()).poll();
    assertThat(received.getPayload(), equalTo("hello world"));
  }


  @SpringBootApplication
  @EnableBinding(Processor.class)
  public static class MyProcessor {

    @Autowired
    private Processor channels;

    @Transformer(inputChannel = Processor.INPUT, outputChannel = Processor.OUTPUT)
    public String transform(String in) {
      return in + " world";
    }
  }
}

In the example above, we are creating an application that has an input and an output channel, bound through the Processor interface. The bound interface is injected into the test so we can have access to both channels. We are sending a message on the input channel and we are using the MessageCollector provided by Spring Cloud Stream’s test support to capture the message has been sent to the output channel as a result. Once we have received the message, we can validate that the component functions correctly.

32. Health Indicator

Spring Cloud Stream provides a health indicator for binders. It is registered under the name of binders and can be enabled or disabled by setting the management.health.binders.enabled property.

33. Metrics Emitter

Spring Cloud Stream provides a module called spring-cloud-stream-metrics that can be used to emit any available metric from Spring Boot metrics endpoint to a named channel. This module allow operators to collect metrics from stream applications without relying on polling their endpoints.

The module is activated when you set the destination name for metrics binding, e.g. spring.cloud.stream.bindings.applicationMetrics.destination=<DESTINATION_NAME>. applicationMetrics can be configured in a similar fashion to any other producer binding. The default contentType setting of applicationMetrics is application/json.

The following properties can be used for customizing the emission of metrics:

spring.cloud.stream.metrics.key
The name of the metric being emitted. Should be an unique value per application.
Default
${spring.application.name:${vcap.application.name:${spring.config.name:application}}}
spring.cloud.stream.metrics.prefix

Prefix string to be prepended to the metrics key.

Default: ``

spring.cloud.stream.metrics.properties

Just like the includes option, it allows white listing application properties that will be added to the metrics payload

Default: null.

A detailed overview of the metrics export process can be found in the Spring Boot reference documentation. Spring Cloud Stream provides a metric exporter named application that can be configured via regular Spring Boot metrics configuration properties.

The exporter can be configured either by using the global Spring Boot configuration settings for exporters, or by using exporter-specific properties. For using the global configuration settings, the properties should be prefixed by spring.metric.export (e.g. spring.metric.export.includes=integration**). These configuration options will apply to all exporters (unless they have been configured differently). Alternatively, if it is intended to use configuration settings that are different from the other exporters (e.g. for restricting the number of metrics published), the Spring Cloud Stream provided metrics exporter can be configured using the prefix spring.metrics.export.triggers.application (e.g. spring.metrics.export.triggers.application.includes=integration**).

[Note]Note

Due to Spring Boot’s relaxed binding the value of a property being included can be slightly different than the original value.

As a rule of thumb, the metric exporter will attempt to normalize all the properties in a consistent format using the dot notation (e.g. JAVA_HOME becomes java.home).

The goal of normalization is to make downstream consumers of those metrics capable of receiving property names consistently, regardless of how they are set on the monitored application (--spring.application.name or SPRING_APPLICATION_NAME would always yield spring.application.name).

Below is a sample of the data published to the channel in JSON format by the following command:

java -jar time-source.jar \
    --spring.cloud.stream.bindings.applicationMetrics.destination=someMetrics \
    --spring.cloud.stream.metrics.properties=spring.application** \
    --spring.metrics.export.includes=integration.channel.input**,integration.channel.output**

The resulting JSON is:

{
   "name":"time-source",
   "metrics":[
      {
         "name":"integration.channel.output.errorRate.mean",
         "value":0.0,
         "timestamp":"2017-04-11T16:56:35.790Z"
      },
      {
         "name":"integration.channel.output.errorRate.max",
         "value":0.0,
         "timestamp":"2017-04-11T16:56:35.790Z"
      },
      {
         "name":"integration.channel.output.errorRate.min",
         "value":0.0,
         "timestamp":"2017-04-11T16:56:35.790Z"
      },
      {
         "name":"integration.channel.output.errorRate.stdev",
         "value":0.0,
         "timestamp":"2017-04-11T16:56:35.790Z"
      },
      {
         "name":"integration.channel.output.errorRate.count",
         "value":0.0,
         "timestamp":"2017-04-11T16:56:35.790Z"
      },
      {
         "name":"integration.channel.output.sendCount",
         "value":6.0,
         "timestamp":"2017-04-11T16:56:35.790Z"
      },
      {
         "name":"integration.channel.output.sendRate.mean",
         "value":0.994885872292989,
         "timestamp":"2017-04-11T16:56:35.790Z"
      },
      {
         "name":"integration.channel.output.sendRate.max",
         "value":1.006247080013156,
         "timestamp":"2017-04-11T16:56:35.790Z"
      },
      {
         "name":"integration.channel.output.sendRate.min",
         "value":1.0012035220116378,
         "timestamp":"2017-04-11T16:56:35.790Z"
      },
      {
         "name":"integration.channel.output.sendRate.stdev",
         "value":6.505181111084848E-4,
         "timestamp":"2017-04-11T16:56:35.790Z"
      },
      {
         "name":"integration.channel.output.sendRate.count",
         "value":6.0,
         "timestamp":"2017-04-11T16:56:35.790Z"
      }
   ],
   "createdTime":"2017-04-11T20:56:35.790Z",
   "properties":{
      "spring.application.name":"time-source",
      "spring.application.index":"0"
   }
}

34. Samples

For Spring Cloud Stream samples, please refer to the spring-cloud-stream-samples repository on GitHub.

35. Getting Started

To get started with creating Spring Cloud Stream applications, visit the Spring Initializr and create a new Maven project named "GreetingSource". Select Spring Boot {supported-spring-boot-version} in the dropdown. In the Search for dependencies text box type Stream Rabbit or Stream Kafka depending on what binder you want to use.

Next, create a new class, GreetingSource, in the same package as the GreetingSourceApplication class. Give it the following code:

import org.springframework.cloud.stream.annotation.EnableBinding;
import org.springframework.cloud.stream.messaging.Source;
import org.springframework.integration.annotation.InboundChannelAdapter;

@EnableBinding(Source.class)
public class GreetingSource {

    @InboundChannelAdapter(Source.OUTPUT)
    public String greet() {
        return "hello world " + System.currentTimeMillis();
    }
}

The @EnableBinding annotation is what triggers the creation of Spring Integration infrastructure components. Specifically, it will create a Kafka connection factory, a Kafka outbound channel adapter, and the message channel defined inside the Source interface:

public interface Source {

  String OUTPUT = "output";

  @Output(Source.OUTPUT)
  MessageChannel output();

}

The auto-configuration also creates a default poller, so that the greet() method will be invoked once per second. The standard Spring Integration @InboundChannelAdapter annotation sends a message to the source’s output channel, using the return value as the payload of the message.

To test-drive this setup, run a Kafka message broker. An easy way to do this is to use a Docker image:

# On OS X
$ docker run -p 2181:2181 -p 9092:9092 --env ADVERTISED_HOST=`docker-machine ip \`docker-machine active\`` --env ADVERTISED_PORT=9092 spotify/kafka

# On Linux
$ docker run -p 2181:2181 -p 9092:9092 --env ADVERTISED_HOST=localhost --env ADVERTISED_PORT=9092 spotify/kafka

Build the application:

./mvnw clean package

The consumer application is coded in a similar manner. Go back to Initializr and create another project, named LoggingSink. Then create a new class, LoggingSink, in the same package as the class LoggingSinkApplication and with the following code:

import org.springframework.cloud.stream.annotation.EnableBinding;
import org.springframework.cloud.stream.annotation.StreamListener;
import org.springframework.cloud.stream.messaging.Sink;

@EnableBinding(Sink.class)
public class LoggingSink {

    @StreamListener(Sink.INPUT)
    public void log(String message) {
        System.out.println(message);
    }
}

Build the application:

./mvnw clean package

To connect the GreetingSource application to the LoggingSink application, each application must share the same destination name. Starting up both applications as shown below, you will see the consumer application printing "hello world" and a timestamp to the console:

cd GreetingSource
java -jar target/GreetingSource-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT.jar --spring.cloud.stream.bindings.output.destination=mydest

cd LoggingSink
java -jar target/LoggingSink-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT.jar --server.port=8090 --spring.cloud.stream.bindings.input.destination=mydest

(The different server port prevents collisions of the HTTP port used to service the Spring Boot Actuator endpoints in the two applications.)

The output of the LoggingSink application will look something like the following:

[           main] s.b.c.e.t.TomcatEmbeddedServletContainer : Tomcat started on port(s): 8090 (http)
[           main] com.example.LoggingSinkApplication       : Started LoggingSinkApplication in 6.828 seconds (JVM running for 7.371)
hello world 1458595076731
hello world 1458595077732
hello world 1458595078733
hello world 1458595079734
hello world 1458595080735

Part V. Binder Implementations

36. Apache Kafka Binder

36.1 Usage

For using the Apache Kafka binder, you just need to add it to your Spring Cloud Stream application, using the following Maven coordinates:

<dependency>
  <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
  <artifactId>spring-cloud-stream-binder-kafka</artifactId>
</dependency>

Alternatively, you can also use the Spring Cloud Stream Kafka Starter.

<dependency>
  <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
  <artifactId>spring-cloud-starter-stream-kafka</artifactId>
</dependency>

36.2 Apache Kafka Binder Overview

A simplified diagram of how the Apache Kafka binder operates can be seen below.

Figure 36.1. Kafka Binder

kafka binder

The Apache Kafka Binder implementation maps each destination to an Apache Kafka topic. The consumer group maps directly to the same Apache Kafka concept. Partitioning also maps directly to Apache Kafka partitions as well.

36.3 Configuration Options

This section contains the configuration options used by the Apache Kafka binder.

For common configuration options and properties pertaining to binder, refer to the core documentation.

36.3.1 Kafka Binder Properties

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.brokers

A list of brokers to which the Kafka binder will connect.

Default: localhost.

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.defaultBrokerPort

brokers allows hosts specified with or without port information (e.g., host1,host2:port2). This sets the default port when no port is configured in the broker list.

Default: 9092.

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.zkNodes

A list of ZooKeeper nodes to which the Kafka binder can connect.

Default: localhost.

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.defaultZkPort

zkNodes allows hosts specified with or without port information (e.g., host1,host2:port2). This sets the default port when no port is configured in the node list.

Default: 2181.

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.configuration

Key/Value map of client properties (both producers and consumer) passed to all clients created by the binder. Due to the fact that these properties will be used by both producers and consumers, usage should be restricted to common properties, especially security settings.

Default: Empty map.

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.headers

The list of custom headers that will be transported by the binder.

Default: empty.

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.offsetUpdateTimeWindow

The frequency, in milliseconds, with which offsets are saved. Ignored if 0.

Default: 10000.

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.offsetUpdateCount

The frequency, in number of updates, which which consumed offsets are persisted. Ignored if 0. Mutually exclusive with offsetUpdateTimeWindow.

Default: 0.

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.requiredAcks

The number of required acks on the broker.

Default: 1.

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.minPartitionCount

Effective only if autoCreateTopics or autoAddPartitions is set. The global minimum number of partitions that the binder will configure on topics on which it produces/consumes data. It can be superseded by the partitionCount setting of the producer or by the value of instanceCount * concurrency settings of the producer (if either is larger).

Default: 1.

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.replicationFactor

The replication factor of auto-created topics if autoCreateTopics is active.

Default: 1.

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.autoCreateTopics

If set to true, the binder will create new topics automatically. If set to false, the binder will rely on the topics being already configured. In the latter case, if the topics do not exist, the binder will fail to start. Of note, this setting is independent of the auto.topic.create.enable setting of the broker and it does not influence it: if the server is set to auto-create topics, they may be created as part of the metadata retrieval request, with default broker settings.

Default: true.

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.autoAddPartitions

If set to true, the binder will create add new partitions if required. If set to false, the binder will rely on the partition size of the topic being already configured. If the partition count of the target topic is smaller than the expected value, the binder will fail to start.

Default: false.

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.socketBufferSize

Size (in bytes) of the socket buffer to be used by the Kafka consumers.

Default: 2097152.

36.3.2 Kafka Consumer Properties

The following properties are available for Kafka consumers only and must be prefixed with spring.cloud.stream.kafka.bindings.<channelName>.consumer..

autoRebalanceEnabled

When true, topic partitions will be automatically rebalanced between the members of a consumer group. When false, each consumer will be assigned a fixed set of partitions based on spring.cloud.stream.instanceCount and spring.cloud.stream.instanceIndex. This requires both spring.cloud.stream.instanceCount and spring.cloud.stream.instanceIndex properties to be set appropriately on each launched instance. The property spring.cloud.stream.instanceCount must typically be greater than 1 in this case.

Default: true.

autoCommitOffset

Whether to autocommit offsets when a message has been processed. If set to false, a header with the key kafka_acknowledgment of the type org.springframework.kafka.support.Acknowledgment header will be present in the inbound message. Applications may use this header for acknowledging messages. See the examples section for details. When this property is set to false, Kafka binder will set the ack mode to org.springframework.kafka.listener.AbstractMessageListenerContainer.AckMode.MANUAL.

Default: true.

autoCommitOnError

Effective only if autoCommitOffset is set to true. If set to false it suppresses auto-commits for messages that result in errors, and will commit only for successful messages, allows a stream to automatically replay from the last successfully processed message, in case of persistent failures. If set to true, it will always auto-commit (if auto-commit is enabled). If not set (default), it effectively has the same value as enableDlq, auto-committing erroneous messages if they are sent to a DLQ, and not committing them otherwise.

Default: not set.

recoveryInterval

The interval between connection recovery attempts, in milliseconds.

Default: 5000.

resetOffsets

Whether to reset offsets on the consumer to the value provided by startOffset.

Default: false.

startOffset

The starting offset for new groups, or when resetOffsets is true. Allowed values: earliest, latest. If the consumer group is set explicitly for the consumer 'binding' (via spring.cloud.stream.bindings.<channelName>.group), then 'startOffset' is set to earliest; otherwise it is set to latest for the anonymous consumer group.

Default: null (equivalent to earliest).

enableDlq

When set to true, it will send enable DLQ behavior for the consumer. By default, messages that result in errors will be forwarded to a topic named error.<destination>.<group>. The DLQ topic name can be configurable via the property dlqName. This provides an alternative option to the more common Kafka replay scenario for the case when the number of errors is relatively small and replaying the entire original topic may be too cumbersome.

Default: false.

configuration

Map with a key/value pair containing generic Kafka consumer properties.

Default: Empty map.

dlqName

The name of the DLQ topic to receive the error messages.

Default: null (If not specified, messages that result in errors will be forwarded to a topic named error.<destination>.<group>).

36.3.3 Kafka Producer Properties

The following properties are available for Kafka producers only and must be prefixed with spring.cloud.stream.kafka.bindings.<channelName>.producer..

bufferSize

Upper limit, in bytes, of how much data the Kafka producer will attempt to batch before sending.

Default: 16384.

sync

Whether the producer is synchronous.

Default: false.

batchTimeout

How long the producer will wait before sending in order to allow more messages to accumulate in the same batch. (Normally the producer does not wait at all, and simply sends all the messages that accumulated while the previous send was in progress.) A non-zero value may increase throughput at the expense of latency.

Default: 0.

messageKeyExpression

A SpEL expression evaluated against the outgoing message used to populate the key of the produced Kafka message. For example headers.key or payload.myKey.

Default: none.

configuration

Map with a key/value pair containing generic Kafka producer properties.

Default: Empty map.

[Note]Note

The Kafka binder will use the partitionCount setting of the producer as a hint to create a topic with the given partition count (in conjunction with the minPartitionCount, the maximum of the two being the value being used). Exercise caution when configuring both minPartitionCount for a binder and partitionCount for an application, as the larger value will be used. If a topic already exists with a smaller partition count and autoAddPartitions is disabled (the default), then the binder will fail to start. If a topic already exists with a smaller partition count and autoAddPartitions is enabled, new partitions will be added. If a topic already exists with a larger number of partitions than the maximum of (minPartitionCount and partitionCount), the existing partition count will be used.

36.3.4 Usage examples

In this section, we illustrate the use of the above properties for specific scenarios.

Example: Setting autoCommitOffset false and relying on manual acking.

This example illustrates how one may manually acknowledge offsets in a consumer application.

This example requires that spring.cloud.stream.kafka.bindings.input.consumer.autoCommitOffset is set to false. Use the corresponding input channel name for your example.

@SpringBootApplication
@EnableBinding(Sink.class)
public class ManuallyAcknowdledgingConsumer {

 public static void main(String[] args) {
     SpringApplication.run(ManuallyAcknowdledgingConsumer.class, args);
 }

 @StreamListener(Sink.INPUT)
 public void process(Message<?> message) {
     Acknowledgment acknowledgment = message.getHeaders().get(KafkaHeaders.ACKNOWLEDGMENT, Acknowledgment.class);
     if (acknowledgment != null) {
         System.out.println("Acknowledgment provided");
         acknowledgment.acknowledge();
     }
 }
}

Example: security configuration

Apache Kafka 0.9 supports secure connections between client and brokers. To take advantage of this feature, follow the guidelines in the Apache Kafka Documentation as well as the Kafka 0.9 security guidelines from the Confluent documentation. Use the spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.configuration option to set security properties for all clients created by the binder.

For example, for setting security.protocol to SASL_SSL, set:

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.configuration.security.protocol=SASL_SSL

All the other security properties can be set in a similar manner.

When using Kerberos, follow the instructions in the reference documentation for creating and referencing the JAAS configuration.

Spring Cloud Stream supports passing JAAS configuration information to the application using a JAAS configuration file and using Spring Boot properties.

Using JAAS configuration files

The JAAS, and (optionally) krb5 file locations can be set for Spring Cloud Stream applications by using system properties. Here is an example of launching a Spring Cloud Stream application with SASL and Kerberos using a JAAS configuration file:

 java -Djava.security.auth.login.config=/path.to/kafka_client_jaas.conf -jar log.jar \
   --spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.brokers=secure.server:9092 \
   --spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.zkNodes=secure.zookeeper:2181 \
   --spring.cloud.stream.bindings.input.destination=stream.ticktock \
   --spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.configuration.security.protocol=SASL_PLAINTEXT
Using Spring Boot properties

As an alternative to having a JAAS configuration file, Spring Cloud Stream provides a mechanism for setting up the JAAS configuration for Spring Cloud Stream applications using Spring Boot properties.

The following properties can be used for configuring the login context of the Kafka client.

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.jaas.loginModule

The login module name. Not necessary to be set in normal cases.

Default: com.sun.security.auth.module.Krb5LoginModule.

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.jaas.controlFlag

The control flag of the login module.

Default: required.

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.jaas.options

Map with a key/value pair containing the login module options.

Default: Empty map.

Here is an example of launching a Spring Cloud Stream application with SASL and Kerberos using Spring Boot configuration properties:

 java --spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.brokers=secure.server:9092 \
   --spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.zkNodes=secure.zookeeper:2181 \
   --spring.cloud.stream.bindings.input.destination=stream.ticktock \
   --spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.autoCreateTopics=false \
   --spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.configuration.security.protocol=SASL_PLAINTEXT \
   --spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.jaas.options.useKeyTab=true \
   --spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.jaas.options.storeKey=true \
   --spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.jaas.options.keyTab=/etc/security/keytabs/kafka_client.keytab \
   --spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.jaas.options.principal=kafka-client-1@EXAMPLE.COM

This represents the equivalent of the following JAAS file:

KafkaClient {
    com.sun.security.auth.module.Krb5LoginModule required
    useKeyTab=true
    storeKey=true
    keyTab="/etc/security/keytabs/kafka_client.keytab"
    principal="[email protected]";
};

If the topics required already exist on the broker, or will be created by an administrator, autocreation can be turned off and only client JAAS properties need to be sent. As an alternative to setting spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.autoCreateTopics you can simply remove the broker dependency from the application. See the section called “Excluding Kafka broker jar from the classpath of the binder based application” for details.

[Note]Note

Do not mix JAAS configuration files and Spring Boot properties in the same application. If the -Djava.security.auth.login.config system property is already present, Spring Cloud Stream will ignore the Spring Boot properties.

[Note]Note

Exercise caution when using the autoCreateTopics and autoAddPartitions if using Kerberos. Usually applications may use principals that do not have administrative rights in Kafka and Zookeeper, and relying on Spring Cloud Stream to create/modify topics may fail. In secure environments, we strongly recommend creating topics and managing ACLs administratively using Kafka tooling.

Using the binder with Apache Kafka 0.10

The default Kafka support in Spring Cloud Stream Kafka binder is for Kafka version 0.10.1.1. The binder also supports connecting to other 0.10 based versions and 0.9 clients. In order to do this, when you create the project that contains your application, include spring-cloud-starter-stream-kafka as you normally would do for the default binder. Then add these dependencies at the top of the <dependencies> section in the pom.xml file to override the dependencies.

Here is an example for downgrading your application to 0.10.0.1. Since it is still on the 0.10 line, the default spring-kafka and spring-integration-kafka versions can be retained.

<dependency>
  <groupId>org.apache.kafka</groupId>
  <artifactId>kafka_2.11</artifactId>
  <version>0.10.0.1</version>
  <exclusions>
    <exclusion>
      <groupId>org.slf4j</groupId>
      <artifactId>slf4j-log4j12</artifactId>
    </exclusion>
  </exclusions>
</dependency>
<dependency>
  <groupId>org.apache.kafka</groupId>
  <artifactId>kafka-clients</artifactId>
  <version>0.10.0.1</version>
</dependency>

Here is another example of using 0.9.0.1 version.

<dependency>
  <groupId>org.springframework.kafka</groupId>
  <artifactId>spring-kafka</artifactId>
  <version>1.0.5.RELEASE</version>
</dependency>
<dependency>
  <groupId>org.springframework.integration</groupId>
  <artifactId>spring-integration-kafka</artifactId>
  <version>2.0.1.RELEASE</version>
</dependency>
<dependency>
  <groupId>org.apache.kafka</groupId>
  <artifactId>kafka_2.11</artifactId>
  <version>0.9.0.1</version>
  <exclusions>
    <exclusion>
      <groupId>org.slf4j</groupId>
      <artifactId>slf4j-log4j12</artifactId>
    </exclusion>
  </exclusions>
</dependency>
<dependency>
  <groupId>org.apache.kafka</groupId>
  <artifactId>kafka-clients</artifactId>
  <version>0.9.0.1</version>
</dependency>
[Note]Note

The versions above are provided only for the sake of the example. For best results, we recommend using the most recent 0.10-compatible versions of the projects.

Excluding Kafka broker jar from the classpath of the binder based application

The Apache Kafka Binder uses the administrative utilities which are part of the Apache Kafka server library to create and reconfigure topics. If the inclusion of the Apache Kafka server library and its dependencies is not necessary at runtime because the application will rely on the topics being configured administratively, the Kafka binder allows for Apache Kafka server dependency to be excluded from the application.

If you use non default versions for Kafka dependencies as advised above, all you have to do is not to include the kafka broker dependency. If you use the default Kafka version, then ensure that you exclude the kafka broker jar from the spring-cloud-starter-stream-kafka dependency as following.

<dependency>
  <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
  <artifactId>spring-cloud-starter-stream-kafka</artifactId>
  <exclusions>
    <exclusion>
      <groupId>org.apache.kafka</groupId>
      <artifactId>kafka_2.11</artifactId>
    </exclusion>
  </exclusions>
</dependency>

If you exclude the Apache Kafka server dependency and the topic is not present on the server, then the Apache Kafka broker will create the topic if auto topic creation is enabled on the server. Please keep in mind that if you are relying on this, then the Kafka server will use the default number of partitions and replication factors. On the other hand, if auto topic creation is disabled on the server, then care must be taken before running the application to create the topic with the desired number of partitions.

If you want to have full control over how partitions are allocated, then leave the default settings as they are, i.e. do not exclude the kafka broker jar and ensure that spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.autoCreateTopics is set to true, which is the default.

36.4 Dead-Letter Topic Processing

Because it can’t be anticipated how users would want to dispose of dead-lettered messages, the framework does not provide any standard mechanism to handle them. If the reason for the dead-lettering is transient, you may wish to route the messages back to the original topic. However, if the problem is a permanent issue, that could cause an infinite loop. The following spring-boot application is an example of how to route those messages back to the original topic, but moves them to a third "parking lot" topic after three attempts. The application is simply another spring-cloud-stream application that reads from the dead-letter topic. It terminates when no messages are received for 5 seconds.

The examples assume the original destination is so8400out and the consumer group is so8400.

There are several considerations.

  • Consider only running the rerouting when the main application is not running. Otherwise, the retries for transient errors will be used up very quickly.
  • Alternatively, use a two-stage approach - use this application to route to a third topic, and another to route from there back to the main topic.
  • Since this technique uses a message header to keep track of retries, it won’t work with headerMode=raw. In that case, consider adding some data to the payload (that can be ignored by the main application).
  • x-retries has to be added to the headers property spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.headers=x-retries on both this, and the main application so that the header is transported between the applications.
  • Since kafka is publish/subscribe, replayed messages will be sent to each consumer group, even those that successfully processed a message the first time around.

application.properties. 

spring.cloud.stream.bindings.input.group=so8400replay
spring.cloud.stream.bindings.input.destination=error.so8400out.so8400

spring.cloud.stream.bindings.output.destination=so8400out
spring.cloud.stream.bindings.output.producer.partitioned=true

spring.cloud.stream.bindings.parkingLot.destination=so8400in.parkingLot
spring.cloud.stream.bindings.parkingLot.producer.partitioned=true

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.configuration.auto.offset.reset=earliest

spring.cloud.stream.kafka.binder.headers=x-retries

Application. 

@SpringBootApplication
@EnableBinding(TwoOutputProcessor.class)
public class ReRouteDlqKApplication implements CommandLineRunner {

    private static final String X_RETRIES_HEADER = "x-retries";

    public static void main(String[] args) {
        SpringApplication.run(ReRouteDlqKApplication.class, args).close();
    }

    private final AtomicInteger processed = new AtomicInteger();

    @Autowired
    private MessageChannel parkingLot;

    @StreamListener(Processor.INPUT)
    @SendTo(Processor.OUTPUT)
    public Message<?> reRoute(Message<?> failed) {
        processed.incrementAndGet();
        Integer retries = failed.getHeaders().get(X_RETRIES_HEADER, Integer.class);
        if (retries == null) {
            System.out.println("First retry for " + failed);
            return MessageBuilder.fromMessage(failed)
                    .setHeader(X_RETRIES_HEADER, new Integer(1))
                    .setHeader(BinderHeaders.PARTITION_OVERRIDE,
                            failed.getHeaders().get(KafkaHeaders.RECEIVED_PARTITION_ID))
                    .build();
        }
        else if (retries.intValue() < 3) {
            System.out.println("Another retry for " + failed);
            return MessageBuilder.fromMessage(failed)
                    .setHeader(X_RETRIES_HEADER, new Integer(retries.intValue() + 1))
                    .setHeader(BinderHeaders.PARTITION_OVERRIDE,
                            failed.getHeaders().get(KafkaHeaders.RECEIVED_PARTITION_ID))
                    .build();
        }
        else {
            System.out.println("Retries exhausted for " + failed);
            parkingLot.send(MessageBuilder.fromMessage(failed)
                    .setHeader(BinderHeaders.PARTITION_OVERRIDE,
                            failed.getHeaders().get(KafkaHeaders.RECEIVED_PARTITION_ID))
                    .build());
        }
        return null;
    }

    @Override
    public void run(String... args) throws Exception {
        while (true) {
            int count = this.processed.get();
            Thread.sleep(5000);
            if (count == this.processed.get()) {
                System.out.println("Idle, terminating");
                return;
            }
        }
    }

    public interface TwoOutputProcessor extends Processor {

        @Output("parkingLot")
        MessageChannel parkingLot();

    }

}

37. RabbitMQ Binder

37.1 Usage

For using the RabbitMQ binder, you just need to add it to your Spring Cloud Stream application, using the following Maven coordinates:

<dependency>
  <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
  <artifactId>spring-cloud-stream-binder-rabbit</artifactId>
</dependency>

Alternatively, you can also use the Spring Cloud Stream RabbitMQ Starter.

<dependency>
  <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
  <artifactId>spring-cloud-starter-stream-rabbit</artifactId>
</dependency>

37.2 RabbitMQ Binder Overview

A simplified diagram of how the RabbitMQ binder operates can be seen below.

Figure 37.1. RabbitMQ Binder

rabbit binder

The RabbitMQ Binder implementation maps each destination to a TopicExchange. For each consumer group, a Queue will be bound to that TopicExchange. Each consumer instance have a corresponding RabbitMQ Consumer instance for its group’s Queue. For partitioned producers/consumers the queues are suffixed with the partition index and use the partition index as routing key.

Using the autoBindDlq option, you can optionally configure the binder to create and configure dead-letter queues (DLQs) (and a dead-letter exchange DLX). The dead letter queue has the name of the destination, appended with .dlq. If retry is enabled (maxAttempts > 1) failed messages will be delivered to the DLQ. If retry is disabled (maxAttempts = 1), you should set requeueRejected to false (default) so that a failed message will be routed to the DLQ, instead of being requeued. In addition, republishToDlq causes the binder to publish a failed message to the DLQ (instead of rejecting it); this enables additional information to be added to the message in headers, such as the stack trace in the x-exception-stacktrace header. This option does not need retry enabled; you can republish a failed message after just one attempt. Starting with version 1.2, you can configure the delivery mode of republished messsages; see property republishDeliveryMode.

[Important]Important

Setting requeueRejected to true will cause the message to be requeued and redelivered continually, which is likely not what you want unless the failure issue is transient. In general, it’s better to enable retry within the binder by setting maxAttempts to greater than one, or set republishToDlq to true.

See Section 37.3.1, “RabbitMQ Binder Properties” for more information about these properties.

The framework does not provide any standard mechanism to consume dead-letter messages (or to re-route them back to the primary queue). Some options are described in Section 37.5, “Dead-Letter Queue Processing”.

[Note]Note

When multiple RabbitMQ binders are used in a Spring Cloud Stream application, it is important to disable 'RabbitAutoConfiguration' to avoid the same configuration from RabbitAutoConfiguration being applied to the two binders.

37.3 Configuration Options

This section contains settings specific to the RabbitMQ Binder and bound channels.

For general binding configuration options and properties, please refer to the Spring Cloud Stream core documentation.

37.3.1 RabbitMQ Binder Properties

By default, the RabbitMQ binder uses Spring Boot’s ConnectionFactory, and it therefore supports all Spring Boot configuration options for RabbitMQ. (For reference, consult the Spring Boot documentation.) RabbitMQ configuration options use the spring.rabbitmq prefix.

In addition to Spring Boot options, the RabbitMQ binder supports the following properties:

spring.cloud.stream.rabbit.binder.adminAddresses

A comma-separated list of RabbitMQ management plugin URLs. Only used when nodes contains more than one entry. Each entry in this list must have a corresponding entry in spring.rabbitmq.addresses.

Default: empty.

spring.cloud.stream.rabbit.binder.nodes

A comma-separated list of RabbitMQ node names. When more than one entry, used to locate the server address where a queue is located. Each entry in this list must have a corresponding entry in spring.rabbitmq.addresses.

Default: empty.

spring.cloud.stream.rabbit.binder.compressionLevel

Compression level for compressed bindings. See java.util.zip.Deflater.

Default: 1 (BEST_LEVEL).

37.3.2 RabbitMQ Consumer Properties

The following properties are available for Rabbit consumers only and must be prefixed with spring.cloud.stream.rabbit.bindings.<channelName>.consumer..

acknowledgeMode

The acknowledge mode.

Default: AUTO.

autoBindDlq

Whether to automatically declare the DLQ and bind it to the binder DLX.

Default: false.

bindingRoutingKey

The routing key with which to bind the queue to the exchange (if bindQueue is true). for partitioned destinations -<instanceIndex> will be appended.

Default: #.

bindQueue

Whether to bind the queue to the destination exchange; set to false if you have set up your own infrastructure and have previously created/bound the queue.

Default: true.

deadLetterQueueName

name of the DLQ

Default: prefix+destination.dlq

deadLetterExchange

a DLX to assign to the queue; if autoBindDlq is true

Default: 'prefix+DLX'

deadLetterRoutingKey

a dead letter routing key to assign to the queue; if autoBindDlq is true

Default: destination

declareExchange

Whether to declare the exchange for the destination.

Default: true.

delayedExchange

Whether to declare the exchange as a Delayed Message Exchange - requires the delayed message exchange plugin on the broker. The x-delayed-type argument is set to the exchangeType.

Default: false.

dlqDeadLetterExchange

if a DLQ is declared, a DLX to assign to that queue

Default: none

dlqDeadLetterRoutingKey

if a DLQ is declared, a dead letter routing key to assign to that queue; default none

Default: none

dlqExpires

how long before an unused dead letter queue is deleted (ms)

Default: no expiration

dlqMaxLength

maximum number of messages in the dead letter queue

Default: no limit

dlqMaxLengthBytes

maximum number of total bytes in the dead letter queue from all messages

Default: no limit

dlqMaxPriority

maximum priority of messages in the dead letter queue (0-255)

Default: none

dlqTtl

default time to live to apply to the dead letter queue when declared (ms)

Default: no limit

durableSubscription

Whether subscription should be durable. Only effective if group is also set.

Default: true.

exchangeAutoDelete

If declareExchange is true, whether the exchange should be auto-delete (removed after the last queue is removed).

Default: true.

exchangeDurable

If declareExchange is true, whether the exchange should be durable (survives broker restart).

Default: true.

exchangeType

The exchange type; direct, fanout or topic for non-partitioned destinations; direct or topic for partitioned destinations.

Default: topic.

expires

how long before an unused queue is deleted (ms)

Default: no expiration

headerPatterns

Patterns for headers to be mapped from inbound messages.

Default: ['*'] (all headers).

maxConcurrency

the maximum number of consumers

Default: 1.

maxLength

maximum number of messages in the queue

Default: no limit

maxLengthBytes

maximum number of total bytes in the queue from all messages

Default: no limit

maxPriority
maximum priority of messages in the queue (0-255)
Default
none
prefetch

Prefetch count.

Default: 1.

prefix

A prefix to be added to the name of the destination and queues.

Default: "".

recoveryInterval

The interval between connection recovery attempts, in milliseconds.

Default: 5000.

requeueRejected

Whether delivery failures should be requeued when retry is disabled or republishToDlq is false.

Default: false.

republishDeliveryMode

When republishToDlq is true, specify the delivery mode of the republished message.

Default: DeliveryMode.PERSISTENT

republishToDlq

By default, messages which fail after retries are exhausted are rejected. If a dead-letter queue (DLQ) is configured, RabbitMQ will route the failed message (unchanged) to the DLQ. If set to true, the binder will republish failed messages to the DLQ with additional headers, including the exception message and stack trace from the cause of the final failure.

Default: false

transacted

Whether to use transacted channels.

Default: false.

ttl

default time to live to apply to the queue when declared (ms)

Default: no limit

txSize

The number of deliveries between acks.

Default: 1.

37.3.3 Rabbit Producer Properties

The following properties are available for Rabbit producers only and must be prefixed with spring.cloud.stream.rabbit.bindings.<channelName>.producer..

autoBindDlq

Whether to automatically declare the DLQ and bind it to the binder DLX.

Default: false.

batchingEnabled

Whether to enable message batching by producers.

Default: false.

batchSize

The number of messages to buffer when batching is enabled.

Default: 100.

batchBufferLimit
Default: 10000.
batchTimeout
Default: 5000.
bindingRoutingKey

The routing key with which to bind the queue to the exchange (if bindQueue is true). Only applies to non-partitioned destinations. Only applies if requiredGroups are provided and then only to those groups.

Default: #.

bindQueue

Whether to bind the queue to the destination exchange; set to false if you have set up your own infrastructure and have previously created/bound the queue. Only applies if requiredGroups are provided and then only to those groups.

Default: true.

compress

Whether data should be compressed when sent.

Default: false.

deadLetterQueueName

name of the DLQ Only applies if requiredGroups are provided and then only to those groups.

Default: prefix+destination.dlq

deadLetterExchange

a DLX to assign to the queue; if autoBindDlq is true Only applies if requiredGroups are provided and then only to those groups.

Default: 'prefix+DLX'

deadLetterRoutingKey

a dead letter routing key to assign to the queue; if autoBindDlq is true Only applies if requiredGroups are provided and then only to those groups.

Default: destination

declareExchange

Whether to declare the exchange for the destination.

Default: true.

delay

A SpEL expression to evaluate the delay to apply to the message (x-delay header) - has no effect if the exchange is not a delayed message exchange.

Default: No x-delay header is set.

delayedExchange

Whether to declare the exchange as a Delayed Message Exchange - requires the delayed message exchange plugin on the broker. The x-delayed-type argument is set to the exchangeType.

Default: false.

deliveryMode

Delivery mode.

Default: PERSISTENT.

dlqDeadLetterExchange

if a DLQ is declared, a DLX to assign to that queue Only applies if requiredGroups are provided and then only to those groups.

Default: none

dlqDeadLetterRoutingKey

if a DLQ is declared, a dead letter routing key to assign to that queue; default none Only applies if requiredGroups are provided and then only to those groups.

Default: none

dlqExpires

how long before an unused dead letter queue is deleted (ms) Only applies if requiredGroups are provided and then only to those groups.

Default: no expiration

dlqMaxLength

maximum number of messages in the dead letter queue Only applies if requiredGroups are provided and then only to those groups.

Default: no limit

dlqMaxLengthBytes

maximum number of total bytes in the dead letter queue from all messages Only applies if requiredGroups are provided and then only to those groups.

Default: no limit

dlqMaxPriority

maximum priority of messages in the dead letter queue (0-255) Only applies if requiredGroups are provided and then only to those groups.

Default: none

dlqTtl

default time to live to apply to the dead letter queue when declared (ms) Only applies if requiredGroups are provided and then only to those groups.

Default: no limit

exchangeAutoDelete

If declareExchange is true, whether the exchange should be auto-delete (removed after the last queue is removed).

Default: true.

exchangeDurable

If declareExchange is true, whether the exchange should be durable (survives broker restart).

Default: true.

exchangeType

The exchange type; direct, fanout or topic for non-partitioned destinations; direct or topic for partitioned destinations.

Default: topic.

expires

how long before an unused queue is deleted (ms) Only applies if requiredGroups are provided and then only to those groups.

Default: no expiration

headerPatterns

Patterns for headers to be mapped to outbound messages.

Default: ['*'] (all headers).

maxLength

maximum number of messages in the queue Only applies if requiredGroups are provided and then only to those groups.

Default: no limit

maxLengthBytes

maximum number of total bytes in the queue from all messages Only applies if requiredGroups are provided and then only to those groups.

Default: no limit

maxPriority
maximum priority of messages in the queue (0-255) Only applies if requiredGroups are provided and then only to those groups.
Default
none
prefix

A prefix to be added to the name of the destination exchange.

Default: "".

routingKeyExpression

A SpEL expression to determine the routing key to use when publishing messages.

Default: destination or destination-<partition> for partitioned destinations.

transacted

Whether to use transacted channels.

Default: false.

ttl

default time to live to apply to the queue when declared (ms) Only applies if requiredGroups are provided and then only to those groups.

Default: no limit

[Note]Note

In the case of RabbitMQ, content type headers can be set by external applications. Spring Cloud Stream supports them as part of an extended internal protocol used for any type of transport (including transports, such as Kafka, that do not normally support headers).

37.4 Retry With the RabbitMQ Binder

37.4.1 Overview

When retry is enabled within the binder, the listener container thread is suspended for any back off periods that are configured. This might be important when strict ordering is required with a single consumer but for other use cases it prevents other messages from being processed on that thread. An alternative to using binder retry is to set up dead lettering with time to live on the dead-letter queue (DLQ), as well as dead-letter configuration on the DLQ itself. See Section 37.3.1, “RabbitMQ Binder Properties” for more information about the properties discussed here. Example configuration to enable this feature:

  • Set autoBindDlq to true - the binder will create a DLQ; you can optionally specify a name in deadLetterQueueName
  • Set dlqTtl to the back off time you want to wait between redeliveries
  • Set the dlqDeadLetterExchange to the default exchange - expired messages from the DLQ will be routed to the original queue since the default deadLetterRoutingKey is the queue name (destination.group)

To force a message to be dead-lettered, either throw an AmqpRejectAndDontRequeueException, or set requeueRejected to true and throw any exception.

The loop will continue without end, which is fine for transient problems but you may want to give up after some number of attempts. Fortunately, RabbitMQ provides the x-death header which allows you to determine how many cycles have occurred.

To acknowledge a message after giving up, throw an ImmediateAcknowledgeAmqpException.

37.4.2 Putting it All Together

---
spring.cloud.stream.bindings.input.destination=myDestination
spring.cloud.stream.bindings.input.group=consumerGroup
#disable binder retries
spring.cloud.stream.bindings.input.consumer.max-attempts=1
#dlx/dlq setup
spring.cloud.stream.rabbit.bindings.input.consumer.auto-bind-dlq=true
spring.cloud.stream.rabbit.bindings.input.consumer.dlq-ttl=5000
spring.cloud.stream.rabbit.bindings.input.consumer.dlq-dead-letter-exchange=
---

This configuration creates an exchange myDestination with queue myDestination.consumerGroup bound to a topic exchange with a wildcard routing key #. It creates a DLQ bound to a direct exchange DLX with routing key myDestination.consumerGroup. When messages are rejected, they are routed to the DLQ. After 5 seconds, the message expires and is routed to the original queue using the queue name as the routing key.

Spring Boot application. 

@SpringBootApplication
@EnableBinding(Sink.class)
public class XDeathApplication {

    public static void main(String[] args) {
        SpringApplication.run(XDeathApplication.class, args);
    }

    @StreamListener(Sink.INPUT)
    public void listen(String in, @Header(name = "x-death", required = false) Map<?,?> death) {
        if (death != null && death.get("count").equals(3L)) {
            // giving up - don't send to DLX
            throw new ImmediateAcknowledgeAmqpException("Failed after 4 attempts");
        }
        throw new AmqpRejectAndDontRequeueException("failed");
    }

}

Notice that the count property in the x-death header is a Long.

37.5 Dead-Letter Queue Processing

Because it can’t be anticipated how users would want to dispose of dead-lettered messages, the framework does not provide any standard mechanism to handle them. If the reason for the dead-lettering is transient, you may wish to route the messages back to the original queue. However, if the problem is a permanent issue, that could cause an infinite loop. The following spring-boot application is an example of how to route those messages back to the original queue, but moves them to a third "parking lot" queue after three attempts. The second example utilizes the RabbitMQ Delayed Message Exchange to introduce a delay to the requeued message. In this example, the delay increases for each attempt. These examples use a @RabbitListener to receive messages from the DLQ, you could also use RabbitTemplate.receive() in a batch process.

The examples assume the original destination is so8400in and the consumer group is so8400.

37.5.1 Non-Partitioned Destinations

The first two examples are when the destination is not partitioned.

@SpringBootApplication
public class ReRouteDlqApplication {

    private static final String ORIGINAL_QUEUE = "so8400in.so8400";

    private static final String DLQ = ORIGINAL_QUEUE + ".dlq";

    private static final String PARKING_LOT = ORIGINAL_QUEUE + ".parkingLot";

    private static final String X_RETRIES_HEADER = "x-retries";

    public static void main(String[] args) throws Exception {
        ConfigurableApplicationContext context = SpringApplication.run(ReRouteDlqApplication.class, args);
        System.out.println("Hit enter to terminate");
        System.in.read();
        context.close();
    }

    @Autowired
    private RabbitTemplate rabbitTemplate;

    @RabbitListener(queues = DLQ)
    public void rePublish(Message failedMessage) {
        Integer retriesHeader = (Integer) failedMessage.getMessageProperties().getHeaders().get(X_RETRIES_HEADER);
        if (retriesHeader == null) {
            retriesHeader = Integer.valueOf(0);
        }
        if (retriesHeader < 3) {
            failedMessage.getMessageProperties().getHeaders().put(X_RETRIES_HEADER, retriesHeader + 1);
            this.rabbitTemplate.send(ORIGINAL_QUEUE, failedMessage);
        }
        else {
            this.rabbitTemplate.send(PARKING_LOT, failedMessage);
        }
    }

    @Bean
    public Queue parkingLot() {
        return new Queue(PARKING_LOT);
    }

}
@SpringBootApplication
public class ReRouteDlqApplication {

    private static final String ORIGINAL_QUEUE = "so8400in.so8400";

    private static final String DLQ = ORIGINAL_QUEUE + ".dlq";

    private static final String PARKING_LOT = ORIGINAL_QUEUE + ".parkingLot";

    private static final String X_RETRIES_HEADER = "x-retries";

    private static final String DELAY_EXCHANGE = "dlqReRouter";

    public static void main(String[] args) throws Exception {
        ConfigurableApplicationContext context = SpringApplication.run(ReRouteDlqApplication.class, args);
        System.out.println("Hit enter to terminate");
        System.in.read();
        context.close();
    }

    @Autowired
    private RabbitTemplate rabbitTemplate;

    @RabbitListener(queues = DLQ)
    public void rePublish(Message failedMessage) {
        Map<String, Object> headers = failedMessage.getMessageProperties().getHeaders();
        Integer retriesHeader = (Integer) headers.get(X_RETRIES_HEADER);
        if (retriesHeader == null) {
            retriesHeader = Integer.valueOf(0);
        }
        if (retriesHeader < 3) {
            headers.put(X_RETRIES_HEADER, retriesHeader + 1);
            headers.put("x-delay", 5000 * retriesHeader);
            this.rabbitTemplate.send(DELAY_EXCHANGE, ORIGINAL_QUEUE, failedMessage);
        }
        else {
            this.rabbitTemplate.send(PARKING_LOT, failedMessage);
        }
    }

    @Bean
    public DirectExchange delayExchange() {
        DirectExchange exchange = new DirectExchange(DELAY_EXCHANGE);
        exchange.setDelayed(true);
        return exchange;
    }

    @Bean
    public Binding bindOriginalToDelay() {
        return BindingBuilder.bind(new Queue(ORIGINAL_QUEUE)).to(delayExchange()).with(ORIGINAL_QUEUE);
    }

    @Bean
    public Queue parkingLot() {
        return new Queue(PARKING_LOT);
    }

}

37.5.2 Partitioned Destinations

With partitioned destinations, there is one DLQ for all partitions and we determine the original queue from the headers.

republishToDlq=false

When republishToDlq is false, RabbitMQ publishes the message to the DLX/DLQ with an x-death header containing information about the original destination.

@SpringBootApplication
public class ReRouteDlqApplication {

	private static final String ORIGINAL_QUEUE = "so8400in.so8400";

	private static final String DLQ = ORIGINAL_QUEUE + ".dlq";

	private static final String PARKING_LOT = ORIGINAL_QUEUE + ".parkingLot";

	private static final String X_DEATH_HEADER = "x-death";

	private static final String X_RETRIES_HEADER = "x-retries";

	public static void main(String[] args) throws Exception {
		ConfigurableApplicationContext context = SpringApplication.run(ReRouteDlqApplication.class, args);
		System.out.println("Hit enter to terminate");
		System.in.read();
		context.close();
	}

	@Autowired
	private RabbitTemplate rabbitTemplate;

	@SuppressWarnings("unchecked")
	@RabbitListener(queues = DLQ)
	public void rePublish(Message failedMessage) {
		Map<String, Object> headers = failedMessage.getMessageProperties().getHeaders();
		Integer retriesHeader = (Integer) headers.get(X_RETRIES_HEADER);
		if (retriesHeader == null) {
			retriesHeader = Integer.valueOf(0);
		}
		if (retriesHeader < 3) {
			headers.put(X_RETRIES_HEADER, retriesHeader + 1);
			List<Map<String, ?>> xDeath = (List<Map<String, ?>>) headers.get(X_DEATH_HEADER);
			String exchange = (String) xDeath.get(0).get("exchange");
			List<String> routingKeys = (List<String>) xDeath.get(0).get("routing-keys");
			this.rabbitTemplate.send(exchange, routingKeys.get(0), failedMessage);
		}
		else {
			this.rabbitTemplate.send(PARKING_LOT, failedMessage);
		}
	}

	@Bean
	public Queue parkingLot() {
		return new Queue(PARKING_LOT);
	}

}

republishToDlq=true

When republishToDlq is true, the republishing recoverer adds the original exchange and routing key to headers.

@SpringBootApplication
public class ReRouteDlqApplication {

	private static final String ORIGINAL_QUEUE = "so8400in.so8400";

	private static final String DLQ = ORIGINAL_QUEUE + ".dlq";

	private static final String PARKING_LOT = ORIGINAL_QUEUE + ".parkingLot";

	private static final String X_RETRIES_HEADER = "x-retries";

	private static final String X_ORIGINAL_EXCHANGE_HEADER = RepublishMessageRecoverer.X_ORIGINAL_EXCHANGE;

	private static final String X_ORIGINAL_ROUTING_KEY_HEADER = RepublishMessageRecoverer.X_ORIGINAL_ROUTING_KEY;

	public static void main(String[] args) throws Exception {
		ConfigurableApplicationContext context = SpringApplication.run(ReRouteDlqApplication.class, args);
		System.out.println("Hit enter to terminate");
		System.in.read();
		context.close();
	}

	@Autowired
	private RabbitTemplate rabbitTemplate;

	@RabbitListener(queues = DLQ)
	public void rePublish(Message failedMessage) {
		Map<String, Object> headers = failedMessage.getMessageProperties().getHeaders();
		Integer retriesHeader = (Integer) headers.get(X_RETRIES_HEADER);
		if (retriesHeader == null) {
			retriesHeader = Integer.valueOf(0);
		}
		if (retriesHeader < 3) {
			headers.put(X_RETRIES_HEADER, retriesHeader + 1);
			String exchange = (String) headers.get(X_ORIGINAL_EXCHANGE_HEADER);
			String originalRoutingKey = (String) headers.get(X_ORIGINAL_ROUTING_KEY_HEADER);
			this.rabbitTemplate.send(exchange, originalRoutingKey, failedMessage);
		}
		else {
			this.rabbitTemplate.send(PARKING_LOT, failedMessage);
		}
	}

	@Bean
	public Queue parkingLot() {
		return new Queue(PARKING_LOT);
	}

}

Part VI. Spring Cloud Bus

Spring Cloud Bus links nodes of a distributed system with a lightweight message broker. This can then be used to broadcast state changes (e.g. configuration changes) or other management instructions. A key idea is that the Bus is like a distributed Actuator for a Spring Boot application that is scaled out, but it can also be used as a communication channel between apps. Starters are provided for an AMQP broker as the transport or for Kafka, but the same basic feature set (and some more depending on the transport) is on the roadmap for other transports.

[Note]Note

Spring Cloud is released under the non-restrictive Apache 2.0 license. If you would like to contribute to this section of the documentation or if you find an error, please find the source code and issue trackers in the project at github.

38. Quick Start

Spring Cloud Bus works by adding Spring Boot autconfiguration if it detects itself on the classpath. All you need to do to enable the bus is to add spring-cloud-starter-bus-amqp or spring-cloud-starter-bus-kafka to your dependency management and Spring Cloud takes care of the rest. Make sure the broker (RabbitMQ or Kafka) is available and configured: running on localhost you shouldn’t have to do anything, but if you are running remotely use Spring Cloud Connectors, or Spring Boot conventions to define the broker credentials, e.g. for Rabbit

application.yml. 

spring:
  rabbitmq:
    host: mybroker.com
    port: 5672
    username: user
    password: secret

The bus currently supports sending messages to all nodes listening or all nodes for a particular service (as defined by Eureka). More selector criteria may be added in the future (ie. only service X nodes in data center Y, etc…​). There are also some http endpoints under the /bus/* actuator namespace. There are currently two implemented. The first, /bus/env, sends key/value pairs to update each node’s Spring Environment. The second, /bus/refresh, will reload each application’s configuration, just as if they had all been pinged on their /refresh endpoint.

[Note]Note

The Bus starters cover Rabbit and Kafka, because those are the two most common implementations, but Spring Cloud Stream is quite flexible and binder will work combined with spring-cloud-bus.

39. Addressing an Instance

The HTTP endpoints accept a "destination" parameter, e.g. "/bus/refresh?destination=customers:9000", where the destination is an ApplicationContext ID. If the ID is owned by an instance on the Bus then it will process the message and all other instances will ignore it. Spring Boot sets the ID for you in the ContextIdApplicationContextInitializer to a combination of the spring.application.name, active profiles and server.port by default.

40. Addressing all instances of a service

The "destination" parameter is used in a Spring PathMatcher (with the path separator as a colon :) to determine if an instance will process the message. Using the example from above, "/bus/refresh?destination=customers:**" will target all instances of the "customers" service regardless of the profiles and ports set as the ApplicationContext ID.

41. Application Context ID must be unique

The bus tries to eliminate processing an event twice, once from the original ApplicationEvent and once from the queue. To do this, it checks the sending application context id againts the current application context id. If multiple instances of a service have the same application context id, events will not be processed. Running on a local machine, each service will be on a different port and that will be part of the application context id. Cloud Foundry supplies an index to differentiate. To ensure that the application context id is the unique, set spring.application.index to something unique for each instance of a service. For example, in lattice, set spring.application.index=${INSTANCE_INDEX} in application.properties (or bootstrap.properties if using configserver).

42. Customizing the Message Broker

Spring Cloud Bus uses Spring Cloud Stream to broadcast the messages so to get messages to flow you only need to include the binder implementation of your choice in the classpath. There are convenient starters specifically for the bus with AMQP (RabbitMQ) and Kafka (spring-cloud-starter-bus-[amqp,kafka]). Generally speaking Spring Cloud Stream relies on Spring Boot autoconfiguration conventions for configuring middleware, so for instance the AMQP broker address can be changed with spring.rabbitmq.* configuration properties. Spring Cloud Bus has a handful of native configuration properties in spring.cloud.bus.* (e.g. spring.cloud.bus.destination is the name of the topic to use the the externall middleware). Normally the defaults will suffice.

To lean more about how to customize the message broker settings consult the Spring Cloud Stream documentation.

43. Tracing Bus Events

Bus events (subclasses of RemoteApplicationEvent) can be traced by setting spring.cloud.bus.trace.enabled=true. If you do this then the Spring Boot TraceRepository (if it is present) will show each event sent and all the acks from each service instance. Example (from the /trace endpoint):

{
  "timestamp": "2015-11-26T10:24:44.411+0000",
  "info": {
    "signal": "spring.cloud.bus.ack",
    "type": "RefreshRemoteApplicationEvent",
    "id": "c4d374b7-58ea-4928-a312-31984def293b",
    "origin": "stores:8081",
    "destination": "*:**"
  }
  },
  {
  "timestamp": "2015-11-26T10:24:41.864+0000",
  "info": {
    "signal": "spring.cloud.bus.sent",
    "type": "RefreshRemoteApplicationEvent",
    "id": "c4d374b7-58ea-4928-a312-31984def293b",
    "origin": "customers:9000",
    "destination": "*:**"
  }
  },
  {
  "timestamp": "2015-11-26T10:24:41.862+0000",
  "info": {
    "signal": "spring.cloud.bus.ack",
    "type": "RefreshRemoteApplicationEvent",
    "id": "c4d374b7-58ea-4928-a312-31984def293b",
    "origin": "customers:9000",
    "destination": "*:**"
  }
}

This trace shows that a RefreshRemoteApplicationEvent was sent from customers:9000, broadcast to all services, and it was received (acked) by customers:9000 and stores:8081.

To handle the ack signals yourself you could add an @EventListener for the AckRemoteApplicationEvent and SentApplicationEvent types to your app (and enable tracing). Or you could tap into the TraceRepository and mine the data from there.

[Note]Note

Any Bus application can trace acks, but sometimes it will be useful to do this in a central service that can do more complex queries on the data. Or forward it to a specialized tracing service.

44. Broadcasting Your Own Events

The Bus can carry any event of type RemoteApplicationEvent, but the default transport is JSON and the deserializer needs to know which types are going to be used ahead of time. To register a new type it needs to be in a subpackage of org.springframework.cloud.bus.event.

To customise the event name you can use @JsonTypeName on your custom class or rely on the default strategy which is to use the simple name of the class. Note that both the producer and the consumer will need access to the class definition.

44.1 Registering events in custom packages

If you cannot or don’t want to use a subpackage of org.springframework.cloud.bus.event for your custom events, you must specify which packages to scan for events of type RemoteApplicationEvent using @RemoteApplicationEventScan. Packages specified with @RemoteApplicationEventScan include subpackages.

For example, if you have a custom event called FooEvent:

package com.acme;

public class FooEvent extends RemoteApplicationEvent {
    ...
}

you can register this event with the deserializer in the following way:

package com.acme;

@Configuration
@RemoteApplicationEventScan
public class BusConfiguration {
    ...
}

Without specifying a value, the package of the class where @RemoteApplicationEventScan is used will be registered. In this example com.acme will be registered using the package of BusConfiguration.

You can also explicitly specify the packages to scan using the value, basePackages or basePackageClasses properties on @RemoteApplicationEventScan. For example:

package com.acme;

@Configuration
//@RemoteApplicationEventScan({"com.acme", "foo.bar"})
//@RemoteApplicationEventScan(basePackages = {"com.acme", "foo.bar", "fizz.buzz"})
@RemoteApplicationEventScan(basePackageClasses = BusConfiguration.class)
public class BusConfiguration {
    ...
}

All examples of @RemoteApplicationEventScan above are equivalent, in that the com.acme package will be registered by explicitly specifying the packages on @RemoteApplicationEventScan. Note, you can specify multiple base packages to scan.

Part VII. Spring Cloud Sleuth

Adrian Cole, Spencer Gibb, Marcin Grzejszczak, Dave Syer

Dalston.SR5

45. Introduction

Spring Cloud Sleuth implements a distributed tracing solution for Spring Cloud.

45.1 Terminology

Spring Cloud Sleuth borrows Dapper’s terminology.

Span: The basic unit of work. For example, sending an RPC is a new span, as is sending a response to an RPC. Span’s are identified by a unique 64-bit ID for the span and another 64-bit ID for the trace the span is a part of. Spans also have other data, such as descriptions, timestamped events, key-value annotations (tags), the ID of the span that caused them, and process ID’s (normally IP address).

Spans are started and stopped, and they keep track of their timing information. Once you create a span, you must stop it at some point in the future.

[Tip]Tip

The initial span that starts a trace is called a root span. The value of span id of that span is equal to trace id.

Trace: A set of spans forming a tree-like structure. For example, if you are running a distributed big-data store, a trace might be formed by a put request.

Annotation: is used to record existence of an event in time. Some of the core annotations used to define the start and stop of a request are:

  • cs - Client Sent - The client has made a request. This annotation depicts the start of the span.
  • sr - Server Received - The server side got the request and will start processing it. If one subtracts the cs timestamp from this timestamp one will receive the network latency.
  • ss - Server Sent - Annotated upon completion of request processing (when the response got sent back to the client). If one subtracts the sr timestamp from this timestamp one will receive the time needed by the server side to process the request.
  • cr - Client Received - Signifies the end of the span. The client has successfully received the response from the server side. If one subtracts the cs timestamp from this timestamp one will receive the whole time needed by the client to receive the response from the server.

Visualization of what Span and Trace will look in a system together with the Zipkin annotations:

Trace Info propagation

Each color of a note signifies a span (7 spans - from A to G). If you have such information in the note:

Trace Id = X
Span Id = D
Client Sent

That means that the current span has Trace-Id set to X, Span-Id set to D. It also has emitted Client Sent event.

This is how the visualization of the parent / child relationship of spans would look like:

Parent child relationship

45.2 Purpose

In the following sections the example from the image above will be taken into consideration.

45.2.1 Distributed tracing with Zipkin

Altogether there are 7 spans . If you go to traces in Zipkin you will see this number in the second trace:

Traces

However if you pick a particular trace then you will see 4 spans:

Traces Info propagation
[Note]Note

When picking a particular trace you will see merged spans. That means that if there were 2 spans sent to Zipkin with Server Received and Server Sent / Client Received and Client Sent annotations then they will presented as a single span.

Why is there a difference between the 7 and 4 spans in this case?

  • 2 spans come from http:/start span. It has the Server Received (SR) and Server Sent (SS) annotations.
  • 2 spans come from the RPC call from service1 to service2 to the http:/foo endpoint. It has the Client Sent (CS) and Client Received (CR) annotations on service1 side. It also has Server Received (SR) and Server Sent (SS) annotations on the service2 side. Physically there are 2 spans but they form 1 logical span related to an RPC call.
  • 2 spans come from the RPC call from service2 to service3 to the http:/bar endpoint. It has the Client Sent (CS) and Client Received (CR) annotations on service2 side. It also has Server Received (SR) and Server Sent (SS) annotations on the service3 side. Physically there are 2 spans but they form 1 logical span related to an RPC call.
  • 2 spans come from the RPC call from service2 to service4 to the http:/baz endpoint. It has the Client Sent (CS) and Client Received (CR) annotations on service2 side. It also has Server Received (SR) and Server Sent (SS) annotations on the service4 side. Physically there are 2 spans but they form 1 logical span related to an RPC call.

So if we count the physical spans we have 1 from http:/start, 2 from service1 calling service2, 2 form service2 calling service3 and 2 from service2 calling service4. Altogether 7 spans.

Logically we see the information of Total Spans: 4 because we have 1 span related to the incoming request to service1 and 3 spans related to RPC calls.

45.2.2 Visualizing errors

Zipkin allows you to visualize errors in your trace. When an exception was thrown and wasn’t caught then we’re setting proper tags on the span which Zipkin can properly colorize. You could see in the list of traces one trace that was in red color. That’s because there was an exception thrown.

If you click that trace then you’ll see a similar picture

Error Traces

Then if you click on one of the spans you’ll see the following

Error Traces Info propagation

As you can see you can easily see the reason for an error and the whole stacktrace related to it.

45.2.3 Live examples

Figure 45.1. Click Pivotal Web Services icon to see it live!

Zipkin deployed on Pivotal Web Services

The dependency graph in Zipkin would look like this:

Dependencies

Figure 45.2. Click Pivotal Web Services icon to see it live!

Zipkin deployed on Pivotal Web Services

45.2.4 Log correlation

When grepping the logs of those four applications by trace id equal to e.g. 2485ec27856c56f4 one would get the following:

service1.log:2016-02-26 11:15:47.561  INFO [service1,2485ec27856c56f4,2485ec27856c56f4,true] 68058 --- [nio-8081-exec-1] i.s.c.sleuth.docs.service1.Application   : Hello from service1. Calling service2
service2.log:2016-02-26 11:15:47.710  INFO [service2,2485ec27856c56f4,9aa10ee6fbde75fa,true] 68059 --- [nio-8082-exec-1] i.s.c.sleuth.docs.service2.Application   : Hello from service2. Calling service3 and then service4
service3.log:2016-02-26 11:15:47.895  INFO [service3,2485ec27856c56f4,1210be13194bfe5,true] 68060 --- [nio-8083-exec-1] i.s.c.sleuth.docs.service3.Application   : Hello from service3
service2.log:2016-02-26 11:15:47.924  INFO [service2,2485ec27856c56f4,9aa10ee6fbde75fa,true] 68059 --- [nio-8082-exec-1] i.s.c.sleuth.docs.service2.Application   : Got response from service3 [Hello from service3]
service4.log:2016-02-26 11:15:48.134  INFO [service4,2485ec27856c56f4,1b1845262ffba49d,true] 68061 --- [nio-8084-exec-1] i.s.c.sleuth.docs.service4.Application   : Hello from service4
service2.log:2016-02-26 11:15:48.156  INFO [service2,2485ec27856c56f4,9aa10ee6fbde75fa,true] 68059 --- [nio-8082-exec-1] i.s.c.sleuth.docs.service2.Application   : Got response from service4 [Hello from service4]
service1.log:2016-02-26 11:15:48.182  INFO [service1,2485ec27856c56f4,2485ec27856c56f4,true] 68058 --- [nio-8081-exec-1] i.s.c.sleuth.docs.service1.Application   : Got response from service2 [Hello from service2, response from service3 [Hello from service3] and from service4 [Hello from service4]]

If you’re using a log aggregating tool like Kibana, Splunk etc. you can order the events that took place. An example of Kibana would look like this:

Log correlation with Kibana

If you want to use Logstash here is the Grok pattern for Logstash:

filter {
       # pattern matching logback pattern
       grok {
              match => { "message" => "%{TIMESTAMP_ISO8601:timestamp}\s+%{LOGLEVEL:severity}\s+\[%{DATA:service},%{DATA:trace},%{DATA:span},%{DATA:exportable}\]\s+%{DATA:pid}\s+---\s+\[%{DATA:thread}\]\s+%{DATA:class}\s+:\s+%{GREEDYDATA:rest}" }
       }
}
[Note]Note

If you want to use Grok together with the logs from Cloud Foundry you have to use this pattern:

filter {
       # pattern matching logback pattern
       grok {
              match => { "message" => "(?m)OUT\s+%{TIMESTAMP_ISO8601:timestamp}\s+%{LOGLEVEL:severity}\s+\[%{DATA:service},%{DATA:trace},%{DATA:span},%{DATA:exportable}\]\s+%{DATA:pid}\s+---\s+\[%{DATA:thread}\]\s+%{DATA:class}\s+:\s+%{GREEDYDATA:rest}" }
       }
}

JSON Logback with Logstash

Often you do not want to store your logs in a text file but in a JSON file that Logstash can immediately pick. To do that you have to do the following (for readability we’re passing the dependencies in the groupId:artifactId:version notation.

Dependencies setup

  • Ensure that Logback is on the classpath (ch.qos.logback:logback-core)
  • Add Logstash Logback encode - example for version 4.6 : net.logstash.logback:logstash-logback-encoder:4.6

Logback setup

Below you can find an example of a Logback configuration (file named logback-spring.xml) that:

  • logs information from the application in a JSON format to a build/${spring.application.name}.json file
  • has commented out two additional appenders - console and standard log file
  • has the same logging pattern as the one presented in the previous section
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<configuration>
	<include resource="org/springframework/boot/logging/logback/defaults.xml"/><springProperty scope="context" name="springAppName" source="spring.application.name"/>
	<!-- Example for logging into the build folder of your project -->
	<property name="LOG_FILE" value="${BUILD_FOLDER:-build}/${springAppName}"/><!-- You can override this to have a custom pattern -->
	<property name="CONSOLE_LOG_PATTERN"
			  value="%clr(%d{yyyy-MM-dd HH:mm:ss.SSS}){faint} %clr(${LOG_LEVEL_PATTERN:-%5p}) %clr(${PID:- }){magenta} %clr(---){faint} %clr([%15.15t]){faint} %clr(%-40.40logger{39}){cyan} %clr(:){faint} %m%n${LOG_EXCEPTION_CONVERSION_WORD:-%wEx}"/>

	<!-- Appender to log to console -->
	<appender name="console" class="ch.qos.logback.core.ConsoleAppender">
		<filter class="ch.qos.logback.classic.filter.ThresholdFilter">
			<!-- Minimum logging level to be presented in the console logs-->
			<level>DEBUG</level>
		</filter>
		<encoder>
			<pattern>${CONSOLE_LOG_PATTERN}</pattern>
			<charset>utf8</charset>
		</encoder>
	</appender>

	<!-- Appender to log to file --><appender name="flatfile" class="ch.qos.logback.core.rolling.RollingFileAppender">
		<file>${LOG_FILE}</file>
		<rollingPolicy class="ch.qos.logback.core.rolling.TimeBasedRollingPolicy">
			<fileNamePattern>${LOG_FILE}.%d{yyyy-MM-dd}.gz</fileNamePattern>
			<maxHistory>7</maxHistory>
		</rollingPolicy>
		<encoder>
			<pattern>${CONSOLE_LOG_PATTERN}</pattern>
			<charset>utf8</charset>
		</encoder>
	</appender><!-- Appender to log to file in a JSON format -->
	<appender name="logstash" class="ch.qos.logback.core.rolling.RollingFileAppender">
		<file>${LOG_FILE}.json</file>
		<rollingPolicy class="ch.qos.logback.core.rolling.TimeBasedRollingPolicy">
			<fileNamePattern>${LOG_FILE}.json.%d{yyyy-MM-dd}.gz</fileNamePattern>
			<maxHistory>7</maxHistory>
		</rollingPolicy>
		<encoder class="net.logstash.logback.encoder.LoggingEventCompositeJsonEncoder">
			<providers>
				<timestamp>
					<timeZone>UTC</timeZone>
				</timestamp>
				<pattern>
					<pattern>
						{
						"severity": "%level",
						"service": "${springAppName:-}",
						"trace": "%X{X-B3-TraceId:-}",
						"span": "%X{X-B3-SpanId:-}",
						"parent": "%X{X-B3-ParentSpanId:-}",
						"exportable": "%X{X-Span-Export:-}",
						"pid": "${PID:-}",
						"thread": "%thread",
						"class": "%logger{40}",
						"rest": "%message"
						}
					</pattern>
				</pattern>
			</providers>
		</encoder>
	</appender><root level="INFO">
		<appender-ref ref="console"/>
		<!-- uncomment this to have also JSON logs -->
		<!--<appender-ref ref="logstash"/>-->
		<!--<appender-ref ref="flatfile"/>-->
	</root>
</configuration>
[Note]Note

If you’re using a custom logback-spring.xml then you have to pass the spring.application.name in bootstrap instead of application property file. Otherwise your custom logback file won’t read the property properly.

45.2.5 Propagating Span Context

The span context is the state that must get propagated to any child Spans across process boundaries. Part of the Span Context is the Baggage. The trace and span IDs are a required part of the span context. Baggage is an optional part.

Baggage is a set of key:value pairs stored in the span context. Baggage travels together with the trace and is attached to every span. Spring Cloud Sleuth will understand that a header is baggage related if the HTTP header is prefixed with baggage- and for messaging it starts with baggage_.

[Important]Important

There’s currently no limitation of the count or size of baggage items. However, keep in mind that too many can decrease system throughput or increase RPC latency. In extreme cases, it could crash the app due to exceeding transport-level message or header capacity.

Example of setting baggage on a span:

Span initialSpan = this.tracer.createSpan("span");
initialSpan.setBaggageItem("foo", "bar");
initialSpan.setBaggageItem("UPPER_CASE", "someValue");

Baggage vs. Span Tags

Baggage travels with the trace (i.e. every child span contains the baggage of its parent). Zipkin has no knowledge of baggage and will not even receive that information.

Tags are attached to a specific span - they are presented for that particular span only. However you can search by tag to find the trace, where there exists a span having the searched tag value.

If you want to be able to lookup a span based on baggage, you should add corresponding entry as a tag in the root span.

@Autowired Tracer tracer;

Span span = tracer.getCurrentSpan();
String baggageKey = "key";
String baggageValue = "foo";
span.setBaggageItem(baggageKey, baggageValue);
tracer.addTag(baggageKey, baggageValue);

45.3 Adding to the project

45.3.1 Only Sleuth (log correlation)

If you want to profit only from Spring Cloud Sleuth without the Zipkin integration just add the spring-cloud-starter-sleuth module to your project.

Maven. 

<dependencyManagement> 1
         <dependencies>
             <dependency>
                 <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
                 <artifactId>spring-cloud-dependencies</artifactId>
                 <version>${release.train.version}</version>
                 <type>pom</type>
                 <scope>import</scope>
             </dependency>
         </dependencies>
   </dependencyManagement>

   <dependency> 2
       <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
       <artifactId>spring-cloud-starter-sleuth</artifactId>
   </dependency>

1

In order not to pick versions by yourself it’s much better if you add the dependency management via the Spring BOM

2

Add the dependency to spring-cloud-starter-sleuth

Gradle. 

dependencyManagement { 1
    imports {
        mavenBom "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-dependencies:${releaseTrainVersion}"
    }
}

dependencies { 2
    compile "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-starter-sleuth"
}

1

In order not to pick versions by yourself it’s much better if you add the dependency management via the Spring BOM

2

Add the dependency to spring-cloud-starter-sleuth

45.3.2 Sleuth with Zipkin via HTTP

If you want both Sleuth and Zipkin just add the spring-cloud-starter-zipkin dependency.

Maven. 

<dependencyManagement> 1
         <dependencies>
             <dependency>
                 <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
                 <artifactId>spring-cloud-dependencies</artifactId>
                 <version>${release.train.version}</version>
                 <type>pom</type>
                 <scope>import</scope>
             </dependency>
         </dependencies>
   </dependencyManagement>

   <dependency> 2
       <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
       <artifactId>spring-cloud-starter-zipkin</artifactId>
   </dependency>

1

In order not to pick versions by yourself it’s much better if you add the dependency management via the Spring BOM

2

Add the dependency to spring-cloud-starter-zipkin

Gradle. 

dependencyManagement { 1
    imports {
        mavenBom "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-dependencies:${releaseTrainVersion}"
    }
}

dependencies { 2
    compile "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-starter-zipkin"
}

1

In order not to pick versions by yourself it’s much better if you add the dependency management via the Spring BOM

2

Add the dependency to spring-cloud-starter-zipkin

45.3.3 Sleuth with Zipkin via Spring Cloud Stream

If you want both Sleuth and Zipkin just add the spring-cloud-sleuth-stream dependency.

Maven. 

<dependencyManagement> 1
         <dependencies>
             <dependency>
                 <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
                 <artifactId>spring-cloud-dependencies</artifactId>
                 <version>${release.train.version}</version>
                 <type>pom</type>
                 <scope>import</scope>
             </dependency>
         </dependencies>
   </dependencyManagement>

   <dependency> 2
       <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
       <artifactId>spring-cloud-sleuth-stream</artifactId>
   </dependency>
   <dependency> 3
       <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
       <artifactId>spring-cloud-starter-sleuth</artifactId>
   </dependency>
   <!-- EXAMPLE FOR RABBIT BINDING -->
   <dependency> 4
       <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
       <artifactId>spring-cloud-stream-binder-rabbit</artifactId>
   </dependency>

1

In order not to pick versions by yourself it’s much better if you add the dependency management via the Spring BOM

2

Add the dependency to spring-cloud-sleuth-stream

3

Add the dependency to spring-cloud-starter-sleuth - that way all dependant dependencies will be downloaded

4

Add a binder (e.g. Rabbit binder) to tell Spring Cloud Stream what it should bind to

Gradle. 

dependencyManagement { 1
    imports {
        mavenBom "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-dependencies:${releaseTrainVersion}"
    }
}

dependencies {
    compile "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-sleuth-stream" 2
    compile "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-starter-sleuth" 3
    // Example for Rabbit binding
    compile "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-stream-binder-rabbit" 4
}

1

In order not to pick versions by yourself it’s much better if you add the dependency management via the Spring BOM

2

Add the dependency to spring-cloud-sleuth-stream

3

Add the dependency to spring-cloud-starter-sleuth - that way all dependant dependencies will be downloaded

4

Add a binder (e.g. Rabbit binder) to tell Spring Cloud Stream what it should bind to

45.3.4 Spring Cloud Sleuth Stream Zipkin Collector

If you want to start a Spring Cloud Sleuth Stream Zipkin collector just add the spring-cloud-sleuth-zipkin-stream dependency

Maven. 

<dependencyManagement> 1
         <dependencies>
             <dependency>
                 <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
                 <artifactId>spring-cloud-dependencies</artifactId>
                 <version>${release.train.version}</version>
                 <type>pom</type>
                 <scope>import</scope>
             </dependency>
         </dependencies>
   </dependencyManagement>

   <dependency> 2
       <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
       <artifactId>spring-cloud-sleuth-zipkin-stream</artifactId>
   </dependency>
   <dependency> 3
       <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
       <artifactId>spring-cloud-starter-sleuth</artifactId>
   </dependency>
   <!-- EXAMPLE FOR RABBIT BINDING -->
   <dependency> 4
       <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
       <artifactId>spring-cloud-stream-binder-rabbit</artifactId>
   </dependency>

1

In order not to pick versions by yourself it’s much better if you add the dependency management via the Spring BOM

2

Add the dependency to spring-cloud-sleuth-zipkin-stream

3

Add the dependency to spring-cloud-starter-sleuth - that way all dependant dependencies will be downloaded

4

Add a binder (e.g. Rabbit binder) to tell Spring Cloud Stream what it should bind to

Gradle. 

dependencyManagement { 1
    imports {
        mavenBom "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-dependencies:${releaseTrainVersion}"
    }
}

dependencies {
    compile "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-sleuth-zipkin-stream" 2
    compile "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-starter-sleuth" 3
    // Example for Rabbit binding
    compile "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-stream-binder-rabbit" 4
}

1

In order not to pick versions by yourself it’s much better if you add the dependency management via the Spring BOM

2

Add the dependency to spring-cloud-sleuth-zipkin-stream

3

Add the dependency to spring-cloud-starter-sleuth - that way all dependant dependencies will be downloaded

4

Add a binder (e.g. Rabbit binder) to tell Spring Cloud Stream what it should bind to

and then just annotate your main class with @EnableZipkinStreamServer annotation:

package example;

import org.springframework.boot.SpringApplication;
import org.springframework.boot.autoconfigure.SpringBootApplication;
import org.springframework.cloud.sleuth.zipkin.stream.EnableZipkinStreamServer;

@SpringBootApplication
@EnableZipkinStreamServer
public class ZipkinStreamServerApplication {

	public static void main(String[] args) throws Exception {
		SpringApplication.run(ZipkinStreamServerApplication.class, args);
	}

}

46. Additional resources

Marcin Grzejszczak talking about Spring Cloud Sleuth and Zipkin

click here to see the video

47. Features

  • Adds trace and span ids to the Slf4J MDC, so you can extract all the logs from a given trace or span in a log aggregator. Example logs:

    2016-02-02 15:30:57.902  INFO [bar,6bfd228dc00d216b,6bfd228dc00d216b,false] 23030 --- [nio-8081-exec-3] ...
    2016-02-02 15:30:58.372 ERROR [bar,6bfd228dc00d216b,6bfd228dc00d216b,false] 23030 --- [nio-8081-exec-3] ...
    2016-02-02 15:31:01.936  INFO [bar,46ab0d418373cbc9,46ab0d418373cbc9,false] 23030 --- [nio-8081-exec-4] ...

    notice the [appname,traceId,spanId,exportable] entries from the MDC:

    • spanId - the id of a specific operation that took place
    • appname - the name of the application that logged the span
    • traceId - the id of the latency graph that contains the span
    • exportable - whether the log should be exported to Zipkin or not. When would you like the span not to be exportable? In the case in which you want to wrap some operation in a Span and have it written to the logs only.
  • Provides an abstraction over common distributed tracing data models: traces, spans (forming a DAG), annotations, key-value annotations. Loosely based on HTrace, but Zipkin (Dapper) compatible.
  • Sleuth records timing information to aid in latency analysis. Using sleuth, you can pinpoint causes of latency in your applications. Sleuth is written to not log too much, and to not cause your production application to crash.

    • propagates structural data about your call-graph in-band, and the rest out-of-band.
    • includes opinionated instrumentation of layers such as HTTP
    • includes sampling policy to manage volume
    • can report to a Zipkin system for query and visualization
  • Instruments common ingress and egress points from Spring applications (servlet filter, async endpoints, rest template, scheduled actions, message channels, zuul filters, feign client).
  • Sleuth includes default logic to join a trace across http or messaging boundaries. For example, http propagation works via Zipkin-compatible request headers. This propagation logic is defined and customized via SpanInjector and SpanExtractor implementations.
  • Sleuth gives you the possibility to propagate context (also known as baggage) between processes. That means that if you set on a Span a baggage element then it will be sent downstream either via HTTP or messaging to other processes.
  • Provides a way to create / continue spans and add tags and logs via annotations.
  • Provides simple metrics of accepted / dropped spans.
  • If spring-cloud-sleuth-zipkin then the app will generate and collect Zipkin-compatible traces. By default it sends them via HTTP to a Zipkin server on localhost (port 9411). Configure the location of the service using spring.zipkin.baseUrl.
  • If spring-cloud-sleuth-stream then the app will generate and collect traces via Spring Cloud Stream. Your app automatically becomes a producer of tracer messages that are sent over your broker of choice (e.g. RabbitMQ, Apache Kafka, Redis).
[Important]Important

If using Zipkin or Stream, configure the percentage of spans exported using spring.sleuth.sampler.percentage (default 0.1, i.e. 10%). Otherwise you might think that Sleuth is not working cause it’s omitting some spans.

[Note]Note

the SLF4J MDC is always set and logback users will immediately see the trace and span ids in logs per the example above. Other logging systems have to configure their own formatter to get the same result. The default is logging.pattern.level set to %5p [${spring.zipkin.service.name:${spring.application.name:-}},%X{X-B3-TraceId:-},%X{X-B3-SpanId:-},%X{X-Span-Export:-}] (this is a Spring Boot feature for logback users). This means that if you’re not using SLF4J this pattern WILL NOT be automatically applied.

48. Sampling

In distributed tracing the data volumes can be very high so sampling can be important (you usually don’t need to export all spans to get a good picture of what is happening). Spring Cloud Sleuth has a Sampler strategy that you can implement to take control of the sampling algorithm. Samplers do not stop span (correlation) ids from being generated, but they do prevent the tags and events being attached and exported. By default you get a strategy that continues to trace if a span is already active, but new ones are always marked as non-exportable. If all your apps run with this sampler you will see traces in logs, but not in any remote store. For testing the default is often enough, and it probably is all you need if you are only using the logs (e.g. with an ELK aggregator). If you are exporting span data to Zipkin or Spring Cloud Stream, there is also an AlwaysSampler that exports everything and a PercentageBasedSampler that samples a fixed fraction of spans.

[Note]Note

the PercentageBasedSampler is the default if you are using spring-cloud-sleuth-zipkin or spring-cloud-sleuth-stream. You can configure the exports using spring.sleuth.sampler.percentage. The passed value needs to be a double from 0.0 to 1.0 so it’s not a percentage. For backwards compatibility reasons we’re not changing the property name.

A sampler can be installed just by creating a bean definition, e.g:

@Bean
public Sampler defaultSampler() {
	return new AlwaysSampler();
}
[Tip]Tip

You can set the HTTP header X-B3-Flags to 1 or when doing messaging you can set spanFlags header to 1. Then the current span will be forced to be exportable regardless of the sampling decision.

49. Instrumentation

Spring Cloud Sleuth instruments all your Spring application automatically, so you shouldn’t have to do anything to activate it. The instrumentation is added using a variety of technologies according to the stack that is available, e.g. for a servlet web application we use a Filter, and for Spring Integration we use ChannelInterceptors.

You can customize the keys used in span tags. To limit the volume of span data, by default an HTTP request will be tagged only with a handful of metadata like the status code, host and URL. You can add request headers by configuring spring.sleuth.keys.http.headers (a list of header names).

[Note]Note

Remember that tags are only collected and exported if there is a Sampler that allows it (by default there is not, so there is no danger of accidentally collecting too much data without configuring something).

[Note]Note

Currently the instrumentation in Spring Cloud Sleuth is eager - it means that we’re actively trying to pass the tracing context between threads. Also timing events are captured even when sleuth isn’t exporting data to a tracing system. This approach may change in the future towards being lazy on this matter.

50. Span lifecycle

You can do the following operations on the Span by means of org.springframework.cloud.sleuth.Tracer interface:

  • start - when you start a span its name is assigned and start timestamp is recorded.
  • close - the span gets finished (the end time of the span is recorded) and if the span is exportable then it will be eligible for collection to Zipkin. The span is also removed from the current thread.
  • continue - a new instance of span will be created whereas it will be a copy of the one that it continues.
  • detach - the span doesn’t get stopped or closed. It only gets removed from the current thread.
  • create with explicit parent - you can create a new span and set an explicit parent to it
[Tip]Tip

Spring creates the instance of Tracer for you. In order to use it all you need is to just autowire it.

50.1 Creating and closing spans

You can manually create spans by using the Tracer interface.

// Start a span. If there was a span present in this thread it will become
// the `newSpan`'s parent.
Span newSpan = this.tracer.createSpan("calculateTax");
try {
	// ...
	// You can tag a span
	this.tracer.addTag("taxValue", taxValue);
	// ...
	// You can log an event on a span
	newSpan.logEvent("taxCalculated");
} finally {
	// Once done remember to close the span. This will allow collecting
	// the span to send it to Zipkin
	this.tracer.close(newSpan);
}

In this example we could see how to create a new instance of span. Assuming that there already was a span present in this thread then it would become the parent of that span.

[Important]Important

Always clean after you create a span! Don’t forget to close a span if you want to send it to Zipkin.

[Important]Important

If your span contains a name greater than 50 chars, then that name will be truncated to 50 chars. Your names have to be explicit and concrete. Big names lead to latency issues and sometimes even thrown exceptions.

50.2 Continuing spans

Sometimes you don’t want to create a new span but you want to continue one. Example of such a situation might be (of course it all depends on the use-case):

  • AOP - If there was already a span created before an aspect was reached then you might not want to create a new span.
  • Hystrix - executing a Hystrix command is most likely a logical part of the current processing. It’s in fact only a technical implementation detail that you wouldn’t necessarily want to reflect in tracing as a separate being.

The continued instance of span is equal to the one that it continues:

Span continuedSpan = this.tracer.continueSpan(spanToContinue);
assertThat(continuedSpan).isEqualTo(spanToContinue);

To continue a span you can use the Tracer interface.

// let's assume that we're in a thread Y and we've received
// the `initialSpan` from thread X
Span continuedSpan = this.tracer.continueSpan(initialSpan);
try {
	// ...
	// You can tag a span
	this.tracer.addTag("taxValue", taxValue);
	// ...
	// You can log an event on a span
	continuedSpan.logEvent("taxCalculated");
} finally {
	// Once done remember to detach the span. That way you'll
	// safely remove it from the current thread without closing it
	this.tracer.detach(continuedSpan);
}
[Important]Important

Always clean after you create a span! Don’t forget to detach a span if some work was done started in one thread (e.g. thread X) and it’s waiting for other threads (e.g. Y, Z) to finish. Then the spans in the threads Y, Z should be detached at the end of their work. When the results are collected the span in thread X should be closed.

50.3 Creating spans with an explicit parent

There is a possibility that you want to start a new span and provide an explicit parent of that span. Let’s assume that the parent of a span is in one thread and you want to start a new span in another thread. The startSpan method of the Tracer interface is the method you are looking for.

// let's assume that we're in a thread Y and we've received
// the `initialSpan` from thread X. `initialSpan` will be the parent
// of the `newSpan`
Span newSpan = this.tracer.createSpan("calculateCommission", initialSpan);
try {
	// ...
	// You can tag a span
	this.tracer.addTag("commissionValue", commissionValue);
	// ...
	// You can log an event on a span
	newSpan.logEvent("commissionCalculated");
} finally {
	// Once done remember to close the span. This will allow collecting
	// the span to send it to Zipkin. The tags and events set on the
	// newSpan will not be present on the parent
	this.tracer.close(newSpan);
}
[Important]Important

After having created such a span remember to close it. Otherwise you will see a lot of warnings in your logs related to the fact that you have a span present in the current thread other than the one you’re trying to close. What’s worse your spans won’t get closed properly thus will not get collected to Zipkin.

51. Naming spans

Picking a span name is not a trivial task. Span name should depict an operation name. The name should be low cardinality (e.g. not include identifiers).

Since there is a lot of instrumentation going on some of the span names will be artificial like:

  • controller-method-name when received by a Controller with a method name conrollerMethodName
  • async for asynchronous operations done via wrapped Callable and Runnable.
  • @Scheduled annotated methods will return the simple name of the class.

Fortunately, for the asynchronous processing you can provide explicit naming.

51.1 @SpanName annotation

You can name the span explicitly via the @SpanName annotation.

@SpanName("calculateTax")
class TaxCountingRunnable implements Runnable {

	@Override public void run() {
		// perform logic
	}
}

In this case, when processed in the following manner:

Runnable runnable = new TraceRunnable(tracer, spanNamer, new TaxCountingRunnable());
Future<?> future = executorService.submit(runnable);
// ... some additional logic ...
future.get();

The span will be named calculateTax.

51.2 toString() method

It’s pretty rare to create separate classes for Runnable or Callable. Typically one creates an anonymous instance of those classes. You can’t annotate such classes thus to override that, if there is no @SpanName annotation present, we’re checking if the class has a custom implementation of the toString() method.

So executing such code:

Runnable runnable = new TraceRunnable(tracer, spanNamer, new Runnable() {
	@Override public void run() {
		// perform logic
	}

	@Override public String toString() {
		return "calculateTax";
	}
});
Future<?> future = executorService.submit(runnable);
// ... some additional logic ...
future.get();

will lead in creating a span named calculateTax.

52. Managing spans with annotations

52.1 Rationale

The main arguments for this features are

  • api-agnostic means to collaborate with a span

    • use of annotations allows users to add to a span with no library dependency on a span api. This allows Sleuth to change its core api less impact to user code.
  • reduced surface area for basic span operations.

    • without this feature one has to use the span api, which has lifecycle commands that could be used incorrectly. By only exposing scope, tag and log functionality, users can collaborate without accidentally breaking span lifecycle.
  • collaboration with runtime generated code

    • with libraries such as Spring Data / Feign the implementations of interfaces are generated at runtime thus span wrapping of objects was tedious. Now you can provide annotations over interfaces and arguments of those interfaces

52.2 Creating new spans

If you really don’t want to take care of creating local spans manually you can profit from the @NewSpan annotation. Also we give you the @SpanTag annotation to add tags in an automated fashion.

Let’s look at some examples of usage.

@NewSpan
void testMethod();

Annotating the method without any parameter will lead to a creation of a new span whose name will be equal to annotated method name.

@NewSpan("customNameOnTestMethod4")
void testMethod4();

If you provide the value in the annotation (either directly or via the name parameter) then the created span will have the name as the provided value.

// method declaration
@NewSpan(name = "customNameOnTestMethod5")
void testMethod5(@SpanTag("testTag") String param);

// and method execution
this.testBean.testMethod5("test");

You can combine both the name and a tag. Let’s focus on the latter. In this case whatever the value of the annotated method’s parameter runtime value will be - that will be the value of the tag. In our sample the tag key will be testTag and the tag value will be test.

@NewSpan(name = "customNameOnTestMethod3")
@Override
public void testMethod3() {
}

You can place the @NewSpan annotation on both the class and an interface. If you override the interface’s method and provide a different value of the @NewSpan annotation then the most concrete one wins (in this case customNameOnTestMethod3 will be set).

52.3 Continuing spans

If you want to just add tags and annotations to an existing span it’s enough to use the @ContinueSpan annotation as presented below. Note that in contrast with the @NewSpan annotation you can also add logs via the log parameter:

// method declaration
@ContinueSpan(log = "testMethod11")
void testMethod11(@SpanTag("testTag11") String param);

// method execution
this.testBean.testMethod11("test");

That way the span will get continued and:

  • logs with name testMethod11.before and testMethod11.after will be created
  • if an exception will be thrown a log testMethod11.afterFailure will also be created
  • tag with key testTag11 and value test will be created

52.4 More advanced tag setting

There are 3 different ways to add tags to a span. All of them are controlled by the SpanTag annotation. Precedence is:

  • try with the bean of TagValueResolver type and provided name
  • if one hasn’t provided the bean name, try to evaluate an expression. We’re searching for a TagValueExpressionResolver bean. The default implementation uses SPEL expression resolution.
  • if one hasn’t provided any expression to evaluate just return a toString() value of the parameter

52.4.1 Custom extractor

The value of the tag for following method will be computed by an implementation of TagValueResolver interface. Its class name has to be passed as the value of the resolver attribute.

Having such an annotated method:

@NewSpan
public void getAnnotationForTagValueResolver(@SpanTag(key = "test", resolver = TagValueResolver.class) String test) {
}

and such a TagValueResolver bean implementation

@Bean(name = "myCustomTagValueResolver")
public TagValueResolver tagValueResolver() {
	return parameter -> "Value from myCustomTagValueResolver";
}

Will lead to setting of a tag value equal to Value from myCustomTagValueResolver.

52.4.2 Resolving expressions for value

Having such an annotated method:

@NewSpan
public void getAnnotationForTagValueExpression(@SpanTag(key = "test", expression = "length() + ' characters'") String test) {
}

and no custom implementation of a TagValueExpressionResolver will lead to evaluation of the SPEL expression and a tag with value 4 characters will be set on the span. If you want to use some other expression resolution mechanism you can create your own implementation of the bean.

52.4.3 Using toString method

Having such an annotated method:

@NewSpan
public void getAnnotationForArgumentToString(@SpanTag("test") Long param) {
}

if executed with a value of 15 will lead to setting of a tag with a String value of "15".

53. Customizations

Thanks to the SpanInjector and SpanExtractor you can customize the way spans are created and propagated.

There are currently two built-in ways to pass tracing information between processes:

  • via Spring Integration
  • via HTTP

Span ids are extracted from Zipkin-compatible (B3) headers (either Message or HTTP headers), to start or join an existing trace. Trace information is injected into any outbound requests so the next hop can extract them.

The key change in comparison to the previous versions of Sleuth is that Sleuth is implementing the Open Tracing’s TextMap notion. In Sleuth it’s called SpanTextMap. Basically the idea is that any means of communication (e.g. message, http request, etc.) can be abstracted via a SpanTextMap. This abstraction defines how one can insert data into the carrier and how to retrieve it from there. Thanks to this if you want to instrument a new HTTP library that uses a FooRequest as a mean of sending HTTP requests then you have to create an implementation of a SpanTextMap that delegates calls to FooRequest in terms of retrieval and insertion of HTTP headers.

53.1 Spring Integration

For Spring Integration there are 2 interfaces responsible for creation of a Span from a Message. These are:

  • MessagingSpanTextMapExtractor
  • MessagingSpanTextMapInjector

You can override them by providing your own implementation.

53.2 HTTP

For HTTP there are 2 interfaces responsible for creation of a Span from a Message. These are:

  • HttpSpanExtractor
  • HttpSpanInjector

You can override them by providing your own implementation.

53.3 Example

Let’s assume that instead of the standard Zipkin compatible tracing HTTP header names you have

  • for trace id - correlationId
  • for span id - mySpanId

This is a an example of a SpanExtractor

static class CustomHttpSpanExtractor implements HttpSpanExtractor {

	@Override public Span joinTrace(SpanTextMap carrier) {
		Map<String, String> map = TextMapUtil.asMap(carrier);
		long traceId = Span.hexToId(map.get("correlationid"));
		long spanId = Span.hexToId(map.get("myspanid"));
		// extract all necessary headers
		Span.SpanBuilder builder = Span.builder().traceId(traceId).spanId(spanId);
		// build rest of the Span
		return builder.build();
	}
}

static class CustomHttpSpanInjector implements HttpSpanInjector {

	@Override
	public void inject(Span span, SpanTextMap carrier) {
		carrier.put("correlationId", span.traceIdString());
		carrier.put("mySpanId", Span.idToHex(span.getSpanId()));
	}
}

And you could register it like this:

@Bean
HttpSpanInjector customHttpSpanInjector() {
	return new CustomHttpSpanInjector();
}

@Bean
HttpSpanExtractor customHttpSpanExtractor() {
	return new CustomHttpSpanExtractor();
}

Spring Cloud Sleuth does not add trace/span related headers to the Http Response for security reasons. If you need the headers then a custom SpanInjector that injects the headers into the Http Response and a Servlet filter which makes use of this can be added the following way:

static class CustomHttpServletResponseSpanInjector extends ZipkinHttpSpanInjector {

	@Override
	public void inject(Span span, SpanTextMap carrier) {
		super.inject(span, carrier);
		carrier.put(Span.TRACE_ID_NAME, span.traceIdString());
		carrier.put(Span.SPAN_ID_NAME, Span.idToHex(span.getSpanId()));
	}
}

static class HttpResponseInjectingTraceFilter extends GenericFilterBean {

	private final Tracer tracer;
	private final HttpSpanInjector spanInjector;

	public HttpResponseInjectingTraceFilter(Tracer tracer, HttpSpanInjector spanInjector) {
		this.tracer = tracer;
		this.spanInjector = spanInjector;
	}

	@Override
	public void doFilter(ServletRequest request, ServletResponse servletResponse, FilterChain filterChain) throws IOException, ServletException {
		HttpServletResponse response = (HttpServletResponse) servletResponse;
		Span currentSpan = this.tracer.getCurrentSpan();
		this.spanInjector.inject(currentSpan, new HttpServletResponseTextMap(response));
		filterChain.doFilter(request, response);
	}

	 class HttpServletResponseTextMap implements SpanTextMap {

		 private final HttpServletResponse delegate;

		 HttpServletResponseTextMap(HttpServletResponse delegate) {
			 this.delegate = delegate;
		 }

		 @Override
		 public Iterator<Map.Entry<String, String>> iterator() {
			 Map<String, String> map = new HashMap<>();
			 for (String header : this.delegate.getHeaderNames()) {
				map.put(header, this.delegate.getHeader(header));
			 }
			 return map.entrySet().iterator();
		 }

		 @Override
		 public void put(String key, String value) {
			this.delegate.addHeader(key, value);
		 }
	 }
}

And you could register them like this:

@Bean HttpSpanInjector customHttpServletResponseSpanInjector() {
	return new CustomHttpServletResponseSpanInjector();
}

@Bean
HttpResponseInjectingTraceFilter responseInjectingTraceFilter(Tracer tracer) {
	return new HttpResponseInjectingTraceFilter(tracer, customHttpServletResponseSpanInjector());
}

53.4 TraceFilter

You can also modify the behaviour of the TraceFilter - the component that is responsible for processing the input HTTP request and adding tags basing on the HTTP response. You can customize the tags, or modify the response headers by registering your own instance of the TraceFilter bean.

In the following example we will register the TraceFilter bean and we will add the ZIPKIN-TRACE-ID response header containing the current Span’s trace id. Also we will add to the Span a tag with key custom and a value tag.

@Bean
TraceFilter myTraceFilter(BeanFactory beanFactory, final Tracer tracer) {
	return new TraceFilter(beanFactory) {
		@Override protected void addResponseTags(HttpServletResponse response,
				Throwable e) {
			// execute the default behaviour
			super.addResponseTags(response, e);
			// for readability we're returning trace id in a hex form
			response.addHeader("ZIPKIN-TRACE-ID",
					Span.idToHex(tracer.getCurrentSpan().getTraceId()));
			// we can also add some custom tags
			tracer.addTag("custom", "tag");
		}
	};
}

53.5 Custom SA tag in Zipkin

Sometimes you want to create a manual Span that will wrap a call to an external service which is not instrumented. What you can do is to create a span with the peer.service tag that will contain a value of the service that you want to call. Below you can see an example of a call to Redis that is wrapped in such a span.

org.springframework.cloud.sleuth.Span newSpan = tracer.createSpan("redis");
try {
	newSpan.tag("redis.op", "get");
	newSpan.tag("lc", "redis");
	newSpan.logEvent(org.springframework.cloud.sleuth.Span.CLIENT_SEND);
	// call redis service e.g
	// return (SomeObj) redisTemplate.opsForHash().get("MYHASH", someObjKey);
} finally {
	newSpan.tag("peer.service", "redisService");
	newSpan.tag("peer.ipv4", "1.2.3.4");
	newSpan.tag("peer.port", "1234");
	newSpan.logEvent(org.springframework.cloud.sleuth.Span.CLIENT_RECV);
	tracer.close(newSpan);
}
[Important]Important

Remember not to add both peer.service tag and the SA tag! You have to add only peer.service.

53.6 Custom service name

By default Sleuth assumes that when you send a span to Zipkin, you want the span’s service name to be equal to spring.application.name value. That’s not always the case though. There are situations in which you want to explicitly provide a different service name for all spans coming from your application. To achieve that it’s enough to just pass the following property to your application to override that value (example for foo service name):

spring.zipkin.service.name: foo

53.7 Customization of reported spans

Before reporting spans to e.g. Zipkin you can be interested in modifying that span in some way. You can achieve that by using the SpanAdjuster interface.

Example of usage:

In Sleuth we’re generating spans with a fixed name. Some users want to modify the name depending on values of tags. Implementation of the SpanAdjuster interface can be used to alter that name. Example:

@Bean
SpanAdjuster customSpanAdjuster() {
    return span -> span.toBuilder().name(scrub(span.getName())).build();
}

This will lead in changing the name of the reported span just before it gets sent to Zipkin.

[Important]Important

Your SpanReporter should inject the SpanAdjuster and allow span manipulation before the actual reporting is done.

53.8 Host locator

In order to define the host that is corresponding to a particular span we need to resolve the host name and port. The default approach is to take it from server properties. If those for some reason are not set then we’re trying to retrieve the host name from the network interfaces.

If you have the discovery client enabled and prefer to retrieve the host address from the registered instance in a service registry then you have to set the property (it’s applicable for both HTTP and Stream based span reporting).

spring.zipkin.locator.discovery.enabled: true

54. Span Data as Messages

You can accumulate and send span data over Spring Cloud Stream by including the spring-cloud-sleuth-stream jar as a dependency, and adding a Channel Binder implementation (e.g. spring-cloud-starter-stream-rabbit for RabbitMQ or spring-cloud-starter-stream-kafka for Kafka). This will automatically turn your app into a producer of messages with payload type Spans. The channel name to which the spans will be sent is called sleuth.

54.1 Zipkin Consumer

There is a special convenience annotation for setting up a message consumer for the Span data and pushing it into a Zipkin SpanStore. This application

@SpringBootApplication
@EnableZipkinStreamServer
public class Consumer {
	public static void main(String[] args) {
		SpringApplication.run(Consumer.class, args);
	}
}

will listen for the Span data on whatever transport you provide via a Spring Cloud Stream Binder (e.g. include spring-cloud-starter-stream-rabbit for RabbitMQ, and similar starters exist for Redis and Kafka). If you add the following UI dependency

<groupId>io.zipkin.java</groupId>
<artifactId>zipkin-autoconfigure-ui</artifactId>

Then you’ll have your app a Zipkin server, which hosts the UI and api on port 9411.

The default SpanStore is in-memory (good for demos and getting started quickly). For a more robust solution you can add MySQL and spring-boot-starter-jdbc to your classpath and enable the JDBC SpanStore via configuration, e.g.:

spring:
  rabbitmq:
    host: ${RABBIT_HOST:localhost}
  datasource:
    schema: classpath:/mysql.sql
    url: jdbc:mysql://${MYSQL_HOST:localhost}/test
    username: root
    password: root
# Switch this on to create the schema on startup:
    initialize: true
    continueOnError: true
  sleuth:
    enabled: false
zipkin:
  storage:
    type: mysql
[Note]Note

The @EnableZipkinStreamServer is also annotated with @EnableZipkinServer so the process will also expose the standard Zipkin server endpoints for collecting spans over HTTP, and for querying in the Zipkin Web UI.

54.2 Custom Consumer

A custom consumer can also easily be implemented using spring-cloud-sleuth-stream and binding to the SleuthSink. Example:

@EnableBinding(SleuthSink.class)
@SpringBootApplication(exclude = SleuthStreamAutoConfiguration.class)
@MessageEndpoint
public class Consumer {

    @ServiceActivator(inputChannel = SleuthSink.INPUT)
    public void sink(Spans input) throws Exception {
        // ... process spans
    }
}
[Note]Note

the sample consumer application above explicitly excludes SleuthStreamAutoConfiguration so it doesn’t send messages to itself, but this is optional (you might actually want to trace requests into the consumer app).

In order to customize the polling mechanism you can create a bean of PollerMetadata type with name equal to StreamSpanReporter.POLLER. Here you can find an example of such a configuration.

@Configuration
public static class CustomPollerConfiguration {

	@Bean(name = StreamSpanReporter.POLLER)
	PollerMetadata customPoller() {
		PollerMetadata poller = new PollerMetadata();
		poller.setMaxMessagesPerPoll(500);
		poller.setTrigger(new PeriodicTrigger(5000L));
		return poller;
	}
}

55. Metrics

Currently Spring Cloud Sleuth registers very simple metrics related to spans. It’s using the Spring Boot’s metrics support to calculate the number of accepted and dropped spans. Each time a span gets sent to Zipkin the number of accepted spans will increase. If there’s an error then the number of dropped spans will get increased.

56. Integrations

56.1 Runnable and Callable

If you’re wrapping your logic in Runnable or Callable it’s enough to wrap those classes in their Sleuth representative.

Example for Runnable:

Runnable runnable = new Runnable() {
	@Override
	public void run() {
		// do some work
	}

	@Override
	public String toString() {
		return "spanNameFromToStringMethod";
	}
};
// Manual `TraceRunnable` creation with explicit "calculateTax" Span name
Runnable traceRunnable = new TraceRunnable(tracer, spanNamer, runnable, "calculateTax");
// Wrapping `Runnable` with `Tracer`. The Span name will be taken either from the
// `@SpanName` annotation or from `toString` method
Runnable traceRunnableFromTracer = tracer.wrap(runnable);

Example for Callable:

Callable<String> callable = new Callable<String>() {
	@Override
	public String call() throws Exception {
		return someLogic();
	}

	@Override
	public String toString() {
		return "spanNameFromToStringMethod";
	}
};
// Manual `TraceCallable` creation with explicit "calculateTax" Span name
Callable<String> traceCallable = new TraceCallable<>(tracer, spanNamer, callable, "calculateTax");
// Wrapping `Callable` with `Tracer`. The Span name will be taken either from the
// `@SpanName` annotation or from `toString` method
Callable<String> traceCallableFromTracer = tracer.wrap(callable);

That way you will ensure that a new Span is created and closed for each execution.

56.2 Hystrix

56.2.1 Custom Concurrency Strategy

We’re registering a custom HystrixConcurrencyStrategy that wraps all Callable instances into their Sleuth representative - the TraceCallable. The strategy either starts or continues a span depending on the fact whether tracing was already going on before the Hystrix command was called. To disable the custom Hystrix Concurrency Strategy set the spring.sleuth.hystrix.strategy.enabled to false.

56.2.2 Manual Command setting

Assuming that you have the following HystrixCommand:

HystrixCommand<String> hystrixCommand = new HystrixCommand<String>(setter) {
	@Override
	protected String run() throws Exception {
		return someLogic();
	}
};

In order to pass the tracing information you have to wrap the same logic in the Sleuth version of the HystrixCommand which is the TraceCommand:

TraceCommand<String> traceCommand = new TraceCommand<String>(tracer, traceKeys, setter) {
	@Override
	public String doRun() throws Exception {
		return someLogic();
	}
};

56.3 RxJava

We’re registering a custom RxJavaSchedulersHook that wraps all Action0 instances into their Sleuth representative - the TraceAction. The hook either starts or continues a span depending on the fact whether tracing was already going on before the Action was scheduled. To disable the custom RxJavaSchedulersHook set the spring.sleuth.rxjava.schedulers.hook.enabled to false.

You can define a list of regular expressions for thread names, for which you don’t want a Span to be created. Just provide a comma separated list of regular expressions in the spring.sleuth.rxjava.schedulers.ignoredthreads property.

56.4 HTTP integration

Features from this section can be disabled by providing the spring.sleuth.web.enabled property with value equal to false.

56.4.1 HTTP Filter

Via the TraceFilter all sampled incoming requests result in creation of a Span. That Span’s name is http: + the path to which the request was sent. E.g. if the request was sent to /foo/bar then the name will be http:/foo/bar. You can configure which URIs you would like to skip via the spring.sleuth.web.skipPattern property. If you have ManagementServerProperties on classpath then its value of contextPath gets appended to the provided skip pattern.

56.4.2 HandlerInterceptor

Since we want the span names to be precise we’re using a TraceHandlerInterceptor that either wraps an existing HandlerInterceptor or is added directly to the list of existing HandlerInterceptors. The TraceHandlerInterceptor adds a special request attribute to the given HttpServletRequest. If the the TraceFilter doesn’t see this attribute set it will create a "fallback" span which is an additional span created on the server side so that the trace is presented properly in the UI. Seeing that most likely signifies that there is a missing instrumentation. In that case please file an issue in Spring Cloud Sleuth.

56.4.3 Async Servlet support

If your controller returns a Callable or a WebAsyncTask Spring Cloud Sleuth will continue the existing span instead of creating a new one.

56.5 HTTP client integration

56.5.1 Synchronous Rest Template

We’re injecting a RestTemplate interceptor that ensures that all the tracing information is passed to the requests. Each time a call is made a new Span is created. It gets closed upon receiving the response. In order to block the synchronous RestTemplate features just set spring.sleuth.web.client.enabled to false.

[Important]Important

You have to register RestTemplate as a bean so that the interceptors will get injected. If you create a RestTemplate instance with a new keyword then the instrumentation WILL NOT work.

56.5.2 Asynchronous Rest Template

[Important]Important

A traced version of an AsyncRestTemplate bean is registered for you out of the box. If you have your own bean you have to wrap it in a TraceAsyncRestTemplate representation. The best solution is to only customize the ClientHttpRequestFactory and / or AsyncClientHttpRequestFactory. If you have your own AsyncRestTemplate and you don’t wrap it your calls WILL NOT GET TRACED.

Custom instrumentation is set to create and close Spans upon sending and receiving requests. You can customize the ClientHttpRequestFactory and the AsyncClientHttpRequestFactory by registering your beans. Remember to use tracing compatible implementations (e.g. don’t forget to wrap ThreadPoolTaskScheduler in a TraceAsyncListenableTaskExecutor). Example of custom request factories:

@EnableAutoConfiguration
@Configuration
public static class TestConfiguration {

	@Bean
	ClientHttpRequestFactory mySyncClientFactory() {
		return new MySyncClientHttpRequestFactory();
	}

	@Bean
	AsyncClientHttpRequestFactory myAsyncClientFactory() {
		return new MyAsyncClientHttpRequestFactory();
	}
}

To block the AsyncRestTemplate features set spring.sleuth.web.async.client.enabled to false. To disable creation of the default TraceAsyncClientHttpRequestFactoryWrapper set spring.sleuth.web.async.client.factory.enabled to false. If you don’t want to create AsyncRestClient at all set spring.sleuth.web.async.client.template.enabled to false.

Multiple Asynchronous Rest Templates

Sometimes you need to use multiple implementations of Asynchronous Rest Template. In the following snippet you can see an example of how to set up such a custom AsyncRestTemplate.

@Configuration
@EnableAutoConfiguration
static class Config {
	@Autowired Tracer tracer;
	@Autowired HttpTraceKeysInjector httpTraceKeysInjector;
	@Autowired HttpSpanInjector spanInjector;

	@Bean(name = "customAsyncRestTemplate")
	public AsyncRestTemplate traceAsyncRestTemplate(@Qualifier("customHttpRequestFactoryWrapper")
			TraceAsyncClientHttpRequestFactoryWrapper wrapper) {
		return new TraceAsyncRestTemplate(wrapper, this.tracer);
	}

	@Bean(name = "customHttpRequestFactoryWrapper")
	public TraceAsyncClientHttpRequestFactoryWrapper traceAsyncClientHttpRequestFactory() {
		return new TraceAsyncClientHttpRequestFactoryWrapper(this.tracer,
				this.spanInjector,
				asyncClientFactory(),
				clientHttpRequestFactory(),
				this.httpTraceKeysInjector);
	}

	private ClientHttpRequestFactory clientHttpRequestFactory() {
		ClientHttpRequestFactory clientHttpRequestFactory = new CustomClientHttpRequestFactory();
		//CUSTOMIZE HERE
		return clientHttpRequestFactory;
	}

	private AsyncClientHttpRequestFactory asyncClientFactory() {
		AsyncClientHttpRequestFactory factory = new CustomAsyncClientHttpRequestFactory();
		//CUSTOMIZE HERE
		return factory;
	}
}

56.5.3 Traverson

If you’re using the Traverson library it’s enough for you to inject a RestTemplate as a bean into your Traverson object. Since RestTemplate is already intercepted, you will get full support of tracing in your client. Below you can find a pseudo code of how to do that:

@Autowired RestTemplate restTemplate;

Traverson traverson = new Traverson(URI.create("http://some/address"),
    MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON, MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON_UTF8).setRestOperations(restTemplate);
// use Traverson

56.6 Feign

By default Spring Cloud Sleuth provides integration with feign via the TraceFeignClientAutoConfiguration. You can disable it entirely by setting spring.sleuth.feign.enabled to false. If you do so then no Feign related instrumentation will take place.

Part of Feign instrumentation is done via a FeignBeanPostProcessor. You can disable it by providing the spring.sleuth.feign.processor.enabled equal to false. If you set it like this then Spring Cloud Sleuth will not instrument any of your custom Feign components. All the default instrumentation however will be still there.

56.7 Asynchronous communication

56.7.1 @Async annotated methods

In Spring Cloud Sleuth we’re instrumenting async related components so that the tracing information is passed between threads. You can disable this behaviour by setting the value of spring.sleuth.async.enabled to false.

If you annotate your method with @Async then we’ll automatically create a new Span with the following characteristics:

  • the Span name will be the annotated method name
  • the Span will be tagged with that method’s class name and the method name too

56.7.2 @Scheduled annotated methods

In Spring Cloud Sleuth we’re instrumenting scheduled method execution so that the tracing information is passed between threads. You can disable this behaviour by setting the value of spring.sleuth.scheduled.enabled to false.

If you annotate your method with @Scheduled then we’ll automatically create a new Span with the following characteristics:

  • the Span name will be the annotated method name
  • the Span will be tagged with that method’s class name and the method name too

If you want to skip Span creation for some @Scheduled annotated classes you can set the spring.sleuth.scheduled.skipPattern with a regular expression that will match the fully qualified name of the @Scheduled annotated class.

[Tip]Tip

If you are using spring-cloud-sleuth-stream and spring-cloud-netflix-hystrix-stream together, Span will be created for each Hystrix metrics and sent to Zipkin. This may be annoying. You can prevent this by setting spring.sleuth.scheduled.skipPattern=org.springframework.cloud.netflix.hystrix.stream.HystrixStreamTask

56.7.3 Executor, ExecutorService and ScheduledExecutorService

We’re providing LazyTraceExecutor, TraceableExecutorService and TraceableScheduledExecutorService. Those implementations are creating Spans each time a new task is submitted, invoked or scheduled.

Here you can see an example of how to pass tracing information with TraceableExecutorService when working with CompletableFuture:

CompletableFuture<Long> completableFuture = CompletableFuture.supplyAsync(() -> {
	// perform some logic
	return 1_000_000L;
}, new TraceableExecutorService(executorService,
		// 'calculateTax' explicitly names the span - this param is optional
		tracer, traceKeys, spanNamer, "calculateTax"));
[Important]Important

Sleuth doesn’t work with parallelStream() out of the box. If you want to have the tracing information propagated through the stream you have to use the approach with supplyAsync(…​) as presented above.

Customization of Executors

Sometimes you need to set up a custom instance of the AsyncExecutor. In the following snippet you can see an example of how to set up such a custom Executor.

@Configuration
@EnableAutoConfiguration
@EnableAsync
static class CustomExecutorConfig extends AsyncConfigurerSupport {

	@Autowired BeanFactory beanFactory;

	@Override public Executor getAsyncExecutor() {
		ThreadPoolTaskExecutor executor = new ThreadPoolTaskExecutor();
		// CUSTOMIZE HERE
		executor.setCorePoolSize(7);
		executor.setMaxPoolSize(42);
		executor.setQueueCapacity(11);
		executor.setThreadNamePrefix("MyExecutor-");
		// DON'T FORGET TO INITIALIZE
		executor.initialize();
		return new LazyTraceExecutor(this.beanFactory, executor);
	}
}

56.8 Messaging

Spring Cloud Sleuth integrates with Spring Integration. It creates spans for publish and subscribe events. To disable Spring Integration instrumentation, set spring.sleuth.integration.enabled to false.

You can provide the spring.sleuth.integration.patterns pattern to explicitly provide the names of channels that you want to include for tracing. By default all channels are included.

[Important]Important

When using the Executor to build a Spring Integration IntegrationFlow remember to use the untraced version of the Executor. Decorating Spring Integration Executor Channel with TraceableExecutorService will cause the spans to be improperly closed.

56.9 Zuul

We’re registering Zuul filters to propagate the tracing information (the request header is enriched with tracing data). To disable Zuul support set the spring.sleuth.zuul.enabled property to false.

57. Running examples

You can find the running examples deployed in the Pivotal Web Services. Check them out in the following links:

Part VIII. Spring Cloud Consul

Dalston.SR5

This project provides Consul integrations for Spring Boot apps through autoconfiguration and binding to the Spring Environment and other Spring programming model idioms. With a few simple annotations you can quickly enable and configure the common patterns inside your application and build large distributed systems with Consul based components. The patterns provided include Service Discovery, Control Bus and Configuration. Intelligent Routing (Zuul) and Client Side Load Balancing (Ribbon), Circuit Breaker (Hystrix) are provided by integration with Spring Cloud Netflix.

58. Install Consul

Please see the installation documentation for instructions on how to install Consul.

59. Consul Agent

A Consul Agent client must be available to all Spring Cloud Consul applications. By default, the Agent client is expected to be at localhost:8500. See the Agent documentation for specifics on how to start an Agent client and how to connect to a cluster of Consul Agent Servers. For development, after you have installed consul, you may start a Consul Agent using the following command:

./src/main/bash/local_run_consul.sh

This will start an agent in server mode on port 8500, with the ui available at http://localhost:8500

60. Service Discovery with Consul

Service Discovery is one of the key tenets of a microservice based architecture. Trying to hand configure each client or some form of convention can be very difficult to do and can be very brittle. Consul provides Service Discovery services via an HTTP API and DNS. Spring Cloud Consul leverages the HTTP API for service registration and discovery. This does not prevent non-Spring Cloud applications from leveraging the DNS interface. Consul Agents servers are run in a cluster that communicates via a gossip protocol and uses the Raft consensus protocol.

60.1 How to activate

To activate Consul Service Discovery use the starter with group org.springframework.cloud and artifact id spring-cloud-starter-consul-discovery. See the Spring Cloud Project page for details on setting up your build system with the current Spring Cloud Release Train.

60.2 Registering with Consul

When a client registers with Consul, it provides meta-data about itself such as host and port, id, name and tags. An HTTP Check is created by default that Consul hits the /health endpoint every 10 seconds. If the health check fails, the service instance is marked as critical.

Example Consul client:

@SpringBootApplication
@EnableDiscoveryClient
@RestController
public class Application {

    @RequestMapping("/")
    public String home() {
        return "Hello world";
    }

    public static void main(String[] args) {
        new SpringApplicationBuilder(Application.class).web(true).run(args);
    }

}

(i.e. utterly normal Spring Boot app). If the Consul client is located somewhere other than localhost:8500, the configuration is required to locate the client. Example:

application.yml. 

spring:
  cloud:
    consul:
      host: localhost
      port: 8500

[Caution]Caution

If you use Spring Cloud Consul Config, the above values will need to be placed in bootstrap.yml instead of application.yml.

The default service name, instance id and port, taken from the Environment, are ${spring.application.name}, the Spring Context ID and ${server.port} respectively.

@EnableDiscoveryClient make the app into both a Consul "service" (i.e. it registers itself) and a "client" (i.e. it can query Consul to locate other services).

60.3 HTTP Health Check

The health check for a Consul instance defaults to "/health", which is the default locations of a useful endpoint in a Spring Boot Actuator application. You need to change these, even for an Actuator application if you use a non-default context path or servlet path (e.g. server.servletPath=/foo) or management endpoint path (e.g. management.context-path=/admin). The interval that Consul uses to check the health endpoint may also be configured. "10s" and "1m" represent 10 seconds and 1 minute respectively. Example:

application.yml. 

spring:
  cloud:
    consul:
      discovery:
        healthCheckPath: ${management.context-path}/health
        healthCheckInterval: 15s

60.3.1 Metadata and Consul tags

Consul does not yet support metadata on services. Spring Cloud’s ServiceInstance has a Map<String, String> metadata field. Spring Cloud Consul uses Consul tags to approximate metadata until Consul officially supports metadata. Tags with the form key=value will be split and used as a Map key and value respectively. Tags without the equal = sign, will be used as both the key and value.

application.yml. 

spring:
  cloud:
    consul:
      discovery:
        tags: foo=bar, baz

The above configuration will result in a map with foo→bar and baz→baz.

60.3.2 Making the Consul Instance ID Unique

By default a consul instance is registered with an ID that is equal to its Spring Application Context ID. By default, the Spring Application Context ID is ${spring.application.name}:comma,separated,profiles:${server.port}. For most cases, this will allow multiple instances of one service to run on one machine. If further uniqueness is required, Using Spring Cloud you can override this by providing a unique identifier in spring.cloud.consul.discovery.instanceId. For example:

application.yml. 

spring:
  cloud:
    consul:
      discovery:
        instanceId: ${spring.application.name}:${vcap.application.instance_id:${spring.application.instance_id:${random.value}}}

With this metadata, and multiple service instances deployed on localhost, the random value will kick in there to make the instance unique. In Cloudfoundry the vcap.application.instance_id will be populated automatically in a Spring Boot application, so the random value will not be needed.

60.4 Using the DiscoveryClient

Spring Cloud has support for Feign (a REST client builder) and also Spring RestTemplate using the logical service names instead of physical URLs.

You can also use the org.springframework.cloud.client.discovery.DiscoveryClient which provides a simple API for discovery clients that is not specific to Netflix, e.g.

@Autowired
private DiscoveryClient discoveryClient;

public String serviceUrl() {
    List<ServiceInstance> list = discoveryClient.getInstances("STORES");
    if (list != null && list.size() > 0 ) {
        return list.get(0).getUri();
    }
    return null;
}

61. Distributed Configuration with Consul

Consul provides a Key/Value Store for storing configuration and other metadata. Spring Cloud Consul Config is an alternative to the Config Server and Client. Configuration is loaded into the Spring Environment during the special "bootstrap" phase. Configuration is stored in the /config folder by default. Multiple PropertySource instances are created based on the application’s name and the active profiles that mimicks the Spring Cloud Config order of resolving properties. For example, an application with the name "testApp" and with the "dev" profile will have the following property sources created:

config/testApp,dev/
config/testApp/
config/application,dev/
config/application/

The most specific property source is at the top, with the least specific at the bottom. Properties is the config/application folder are applicable to all applications using consul for configuration. Properties in the config/testApp folder are only available to the instances of the service named "testApp".

Configuration is currently read on startup of the application. Sending a HTTP POST to /refresh will cause the configuration to be reloaded. Watching the key value store (which Consul supports) is not currently possible, but will be a future addition to this project.

61.1 How to activate

To get started with Consul Configuration use the starter with group org.springframework.cloud and artifact id spring-cloud-starter-consul-config. See the Spring Cloud Project page for details on setting up your build system with the current Spring Cloud Release Train.

This will enable auto-configuration that will setup Spring Cloud Consul Config.

61.2 Customizing

Consul Config may be customized using the following properties:

bootstrap.yml. 

spring:
  cloud:
    consul:
      config:
        enabled: true
        prefix: configuration
        defaultContext: apps
        profileSeparator: '::'

  • enabled setting this value to "false" disables Consul Config
  • prefix sets the base folder for configuration values
  • defaultContext sets the folder name used by all applications
  • profileSeparator sets the value of the separator used to separate the profile name in property sources with profiles

61.3 Config Watch

The Consul Config Watch takes advantage of the ability of consul to watch a key prefix. The Config Watch makes a blocking Consul HTTP API call to determine if any relevant configuration data has changed for the current application. If there is new configuration data a Refresh Event is published. This is equivalent to calling the /refresh actuator endpoint.

To change the frequency of when the Config Watch is called change spring.cloud.consul.config.watch.delay. The default value is 1000, which is in milliseconds.

To disable the Config Watch set spring.cloud.consul.config.watch.enabled=false.

61.4 YAML or Properties with Config

It may be more convenient to store a blob of properties in YAML or Properties format as opposed to individual key/value pairs. Set the spring.cloud.consul.config.format property to YAML or PROPERTIES. For example to use YAML:

bootstrap.yml. 

spring:
  cloud:
    consul:
      config:
        format: YAML

YAML must be set in the appropriate data key in consul. Using the defaults above the keys would look like:

config/testApp,dev/data
config/testApp/data
config/application,dev/data
config/application/data

You could store a YAML document in any of the keys listed above.

You can change the data key using spring.cloud.consul.config.data-key.

61.5 git2consul with Config

git2consul is a Consul community project that loads files from a git repository to individual keys into Consul. By default the names of the keys are names of the files. YAML and Properties files are supported with file extensions of .yml and .properties respectively. Set the spring.cloud.consul.config.format property to FILES. For example:

bootstrap.yml. 

spring:
  cloud:
    consul:
      config:
        format: FILES

Given the following keys in /config, the development profile and an application name of foo:

.gitignore
application.yml
bar.properties
foo-development.properties
foo-production.yml
foo.properties
master.ref

the following property sources would be created:

config/foo-development.properties
config/foo.properties
config/application.yml

The value of each key needs to be a properly formatted YAML or Properties file.

61.6 Fail Fast

It may be convenient in certain circumstances (like local development or certain test scenarios) to not fail if consul isn’t available for configuration. Setting spring.cloud.consul.config.failFast=false in bootstrap.yml will cause the configuration module to log a warning rather than throw an exception. This will allow the application to continue startup normally.

62. Consul Retry

If you expect that the consul agent may occasionally be unavailable when your app starts, you can ask it to keep trying after a failure. You need to add spring-retry and spring-boot-starter-aop to your classpath. The default behaviour is to retry 6 times with an initial backoff interval of 1000ms and an exponential multiplier of 1.1 for subsequent backoffs. You can configure these properties (and others) using spring.cloud.consul.retry.* configuration properties. This works with both Spring Cloud Consul Config and Discovery registration.

[Tip]Tip

To take full control of the retry add a @Bean of type RetryOperationsInterceptor with id "consulRetryInterceptor". Spring Retry has a RetryInterceptorBuilder that makes it easy to create one.

63. Spring Cloud Bus with Consul

63.1 How to activate

To get started with the Consul Bus use the starter with group org.springframework.cloud and artifact id spring-cloud-starter-consul-bus. See the Spring Cloud Project page for details on setting up your build system with the current Spring Cloud Release Train.

See the Spring Cloud Bus documentation for the available actuator endpoints and howto send custom messages.

64. Circuit Breaker with Hystrix

Applications can use the Hystrix Circuit Breaker provided by the Spring Cloud Netflix project by including this starter in the projects pom.xml: spring-cloud-starter-hystrix. Hystrix doesn’t depend on the Netflix Discovery Client. The @EnableHystrix annotation should be placed on a configuration class (usually the main class). Then methods can be annotated with @HystrixCommand to be protected by a circuit breaker. See the documentation for more details.

65. Hystrix metrics aggregation with Turbine and Consul

Turbine (provided by the Spring Cloud Netflix project), aggregates multiple instances Hystrix metrics streams, so the dashboard can display an aggregate view. Turbine uses the DiscoveryClient interface to lookup relevant instances. To use Turbine with Spring Cloud Consul, configure the Turbine application in a manner similar to the following examples:

pom.xml. 

<dependency>
    <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
    <artifactId>spring-cloud-netflix-turbine</artifactId>
</dependency>
<dependency>
    <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
    <artifactId>spring-cloud-starter-consul-discovery</artifactId>
</dependency>

Notice that the Turbine dependency is not a starter. The turbine starter includes support for Netflix Eureka.

application.yml. 

spring.application.name: turbine
applications: consulhystrixclient
turbine:
  aggregator:
    clusterConfig: ${applications}
  appConfig: ${applications}

The clusterConfig and appConfig sections must match, so it’s useful to put the comma-separated list of service ID’s into a separate configuration property.

Turbine.java. 

@EnableTurbine
@EnableDiscoveryClient
@SpringBootApplication
public class Turbine {
    public static void main(String[] args) {
        SpringApplication.run(DemoturbinecommonsApplication.class, args);
    }
}

Part IX. Spring Cloud Zookeeper

This project provides Zookeeper integrations for Spring Boot apps through autoconfiguration and binding to the Spring Environment and other Spring programming model idioms. With a few simple annotations you can quickly enable and configure the common patterns inside your application and build large distributed systems with Zookeeper based components. The patterns provided include Service Discovery and Configuration. Intelligent Routing (Zuul) and Client Side Load Balancing (Ribbon), Circuit Breaker (Hystrix) are provided by integration with Spring Cloud Netflix.

66. Install Zookeeper

Please see the installation documentation for instructions on how to install Zookeeper.

67. Service Discovery with Zookeeper

Service Discovery is one of the key tenets of a microservice based architecture. Trying to hand configure each client or some form of convention can be very difficult to do and can be very brittle. Curator(A java library for Zookeeper) provides Service Discovery services via Service Discovery Extension. Spring Cloud Zookeeper leverages this extension for service registration and discovery.

67.1 How to activate

Including a dependency on org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-starter-zookeeper-discovery will enable auto-configuration that will setup Spring Cloud Zookeeper Discovery.

[Note]Note

You still need to include org.springframework.boot:spring-boot-starter-web for web functionality.

67.2 Registering with Zookeeper

When a client registers with Zookeeper, it provides meta-data about itself such as host and port, id and name.

Example Zookeeper client:

@SpringBootApplication
@EnableDiscoveryClient
@RestController
public class Application {

    @RequestMapping("/")
    public String home() {
        return "Hello world";
    }

    public static void main(String[] args) {
        new SpringApplicationBuilder(Application.class).web(true).run(args);
    }

}

(i.e. utterly normal Spring Boot app). If Zookeeper is located somewhere other than localhost:2181, the configuration is required to locate the server. Example:

application.yml. 

spring:
  cloud:
    zookeeper:
      connect-string: localhost:2181

[Caution]Caution

If you use Spring Cloud Zookeeper Config, the above values will need to be placed in bootstrap.yml instead of application.yml.

The default service name, instance id and port, taken from the Environment, are ${spring.application.name}, the Spring Context ID and ${server.port} respectively.

@EnableDiscoveryClient makes the app into both a Zookeeper "service" (i.e. it registers itself) and a "client" (i.e. it can query Zookeeper to locate other services).

67.3 Using the DiscoveryClient

Spring Cloud has support for Feign (a REST client builder) and also Spring RestTemplate using the logical service names instead of physical URLs.

You can also use the org.springframework.cloud.client.discovery.DiscoveryClient which provides a simple API for discovery clients that is not specific to Netflix, e.g.

@Autowired
private DiscoveryClient discoveryClient;

public String serviceUrl() {
    List<ServiceInstance> list = discoveryClient.getInstances("STORES");
    if (list != null && list.size() > 0 ) {
        return list.get(0).getUri().toString();
    }
    return null;
}

68. Using Spring Cloud Zookeeper with Spring Cloud Netflix Components

Spring Cloud Netflix supplies useful tools that work regardless of which DiscoveryClient implementation is used. Feign, Turbine, Ribbon and Zuul all work with Spring Cloud Zookeeper.

68.1 Ribbon with Zookeeper

Spring Cloud Zookeeper provides an implementation of Ribbon’s ServerList. When the spring-cloud-starter-zookeeper-discovery is used, Ribbon is auto-configured to use the ZookeeperServerList by default.

69. Spring Cloud Zookeeper and Service Registry

Spring Cloud Zookeeper implements the ServiceRegistry interface allowing developers to register arbitrary service in a programmatic way.

The ServiceInstanceRegistration class offers a builder() method to create a Registration object that can be used by the ServiceRegistry.

@Autowired
private ZookeeperServiceRegistry serviceRegistry;

public void registerThings() {
    ZookeeperRegistration registration = ServiceInstanceRegistration.builder()
            .defaultUriSpec()
            .address("anyUrl")
            .port(10)
            .name("/a/b/c/d/anotherservice")
            .build();
    this.serviceRegistry.register(registration);
}

69.1 Instance Status

Netflix Eureka supports having instances registered with the server that are OUT_OF_SERVICE and not returned as active service instances. This is very useful for behaviors such as blue/green deployments. The Curator Service Discovery recipe does not support this behavior. Taking advantage of the flexible payload has let Spring Cloud Zookeeper implement OUT_OF_SERVICE by updating some specific metadata and then filtering on that metadata in the Ribbon ZookeeperServerList. The ZookeeperServerList filters out all non-null instance statuses that do not equal UP. If the instance status field is empty, it is considered UP for backwards compatibility. To change the status of an instance POST OUT_OF_SERVICE to the ServiceRegistry instance status actuator endpoint.

----
$ echo -n OUT_OF_SERVICE | http POST http://localhost:8081/service-registry/instance-status
----
NOTE: The above example uses the `http` command from https://httpie.org

70. Zookeeper Dependencies

70.1 Using the Zookeeper Dependencies

Spring Cloud Zookeeper gives you a possibility to provide dependencies of your application as properties. As dependencies you can understand other applications that are registered in Zookeeper and which you would like to call via Feign (a REST client builder) and also Spring RestTemplate.

You can also benefit from the Zookeeper Dependency Watchers functionality that lets you control and monitor what is the state of your dependencies and decide what to do with that.

70.2 How to activate Zookeeper Dependencies

  • Including a dependency on org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-starter-zookeeper-discovery will enable auto-configuration that will setup Spring Cloud Zookeeper Dependencies.
  • If you have to have the spring.cloud.zookeeper.dependencies section properly set up - check the subsequent section for more details then the feature is active
  • You can have the dependencies turned off even if you’ve provided the dependencies in your properties. Just set the property spring.cloud.zookeeper.dependency.enabled to false (defaults to true).

70.3 Setting up Zookeeper Dependencies

Let’s take a closer look at an example of dependencies representation:

application.yml. 

spring.application.name: yourServiceName
spring.cloud.zookeeper:
  dependencies:
    newsletter:
      path: /path/where/newsletter/has/registered/in/zookeeper
      loadBalancerType: ROUND_ROBIN
      contentTypeTemplate: application/vnd.newsletter.$version+json
      version: v1
      headers:
        header1:
            - value1
        header2:
            - value2
      required: false
      stubs: org.springframework:foo:stubs
    mailing:
      path: /path/where/mailing/has/registered/in/zookeeper
      loadBalancerType: ROUND_ROBIN
      contentTypeTemplate: application/vnd.mailing.$version+json
      version: v1
      required: true

Let’s now go through each part of the dependency one by one. The root property name is spring.cloud.zookeeper.dependencies.

70.3.1 Aliases

Below the root property you have to represent each dependency has by an alias due to the constraints of Ribbon (the application id has to be placed in the URL thus you can’t pass any complex path like /foo/bar/name). The alias will be the name that you will use instead of serviceId for DiscoveryClient, Feign or RestTemplate.

In the aforementioned examples the aliases are newsletter and mailing. Example of Feign usage with newsletter would be:

@FeignClient("newsletter")
public interface NewsletterService {
        @RequestMapping(method = RequestMethod.GET, value = "/newsletter")
        String getNewsletters();
}

70.3.2 Path

Represented by path yaml property.

Path is the path under which the dependency is registered under Zookeeper. Like presented before Ribbon operates on URLs thus this path is not compliant with its requirement. That is why Spring Cloud Zookeeper maps the alias to the proper path.

70.3.3 Load balancer type

Represented by loadBalancerType yaml property.

If you know what kind of load balancing strategy has to be applied when calling this particular dependency then you can provide it in the yaml file and it will be automatically applied. You can choose one of the following load balancing strategies

  • STICKY - once chosen the instance will always be called
  • RANDOM - picks an instance randomly
  • ROUND_ROBIN - iterates over instances over and over again

70.3.4 Content-Type template and version

Represented by contentTypeTemplate and version yaml property.

If you version your api via the Content-Type header then you don’t want to add this header to each of your requests. Also if you want to call a new version of the API you don’t want to roam around your code to bump up the API version. That’s why you can provide a contentTypeTemplate with a special $version placeholder. That placeholder will be filled by the value of the version yaml property. Let’s take a look at an example.

Having the following contentTypeTemplate:

application/vnd.newsletter.$version+json

and the following version:

v1

Will result in setting up of a Content-Type header for each request:

application/vnd.newsletter.v1+json

70.3.5 Default headers

Represented by headers map in yaml

Sometimes each call to a dependency requires setting up of some default headers. In order not to do that in code you can set them up in the yaml file. Having the following headers section:

headers:
    Accept:
        - text/html
        - application/xhtml+xml
    Cache-Control:
        - no-cache

Results in adding the Accept and Cache-Control headers with appropriate list of values in your HTTP request.

70.3.6 Obligatory dependencies

Represented by required property in yaml

If one of your dependencies is required to be up and running when your application is booting then it’s enough to set up the required: true property in the yaml file.

If your application can’t localize the required dependency during boot time it will throw an exception and the Spring Context will fail to set up. In other words your application won’t be able to start if the required dependency is not registered in Zookeeper.

You can read more about Spring Cloud Zookeeper Presence Checker in the following sections.

70.3.7 Stubs

You can provide a colon separated path to the JAR containing stubs of the dependency. Example

stubs: org.springframework:foo:stubs

means that for a particular dependencies can be found under:

  • groupId: org.springframework
  • artifactId: foo
  • classifier: stubs - this is the default value

This is actually equal to

stubs: org.springframework:foo

since stubs is the default classifier.

70.4 Configuring Spring Cloud Zookeeper Dependencies

There is a bunch of properties that you can set to enable / disable parts of Zookeeper Dependencies functionalities.

  • spring.cloud.zookeeper.dependencies - if you don’t set this property you won’t benefit from Zookeeper Dependencies
  • spring.cloud.zookeeper.dependency.ribbon.enabled (enabled by default) - Ribbon requires explicit global configuration or a particular one for a dependency. By turning on this property runtime load balancing strategy resolution is possible and you can profit from the loadBalancerType section of the Zookeeper Dependencies. The configuration that needs this property has an implementation of LoadBalancerClient that delegates to the ILoadBalancer presented in the next bullet
  • spring.cloud.zookeeper.dependency.ribbon.loadbalancer (enabled by default) - thanks to this property the custom ILoadBalancer knows that the part of the URI passed to Ribbon might actually be the alias that has to be resolved to a proper path in Zookeeper. Without this property you won’t be able to register applications under nested paths.
  • spring.cloud.zookeeper.dependency.headers.enabled (enabled by default) - this property registers such a RibbonClient that automatically will append appropriate headers and content types with version as presented in the Dependency configuration. Without this setting of those two parameters will not be operational.
  • spring.cloud.zookeeper.dependency.resttemplate.enabled (enabled by default) - when enabled will modify the request headers of @LoadBalanced annotated RestTemplate so that it passes headers and content type with version set in Dependency configuration. Wihtout this setting of those two parameters will not be operational.

71. Spring Cloud Zookeeper Dependency Watcher

The Dependency Watcher mechanism allows you to register listeners to your dependencies. The functionality is in fact an implementation of the Observator pattern. When a dependency changes its state (UP or DOWN) then some custom logic can be applied.

71.1 How to activate

Spring Cloud Zookeeper Dependencies functionality needs to be enabled to profit from Dependency Watcher mechanism.

71.2 Registering a listener

In order to register a listener you have to implement an interface org.springframework.cloud.zookeeper.discovery.watcher.DependencyWatcherListener and register it as a bean. The interface gives you one method:

    void stateChanged(String dependencyName, DependencyState newState);

If you want to register a listener for a particular dependency then the dependencyName would be the discriminator for your concrete implementation. newState will provide you with information whether your dependency has changed to CONNECTED or DISCONNECTED.

71.3 Presence Checker

Bound with Dependency Watcher is the functionality called Presence Checker. It allows you to provide custom behaviour upon booting of your application to react accordingly to the state of your dependencies.

The default implementation of the abstract org.springframework.cloud.zookeeper.discovery.watcher.presence.DependencyPresenceOnStartupVerifier class is the org.springframework.cloud.zookeeper.discovery.watcher.presence.DefaultDependencyPresenceOnStartupVerifier which works in the following way.

  • If the dependency is marked us required and it’s not in Zookeeper then upon booting your application will throw an exception and shutdown
  • If dependency is not required the org.springframework.cloud.zookeeper.discovery.watcher.presence.LogMissingDependencyChecker will log that application is missing at WARN level

The functionality can be overriden since the DefaultDependencyPresenceOnStartupVerifier is registered only when there is no bean of DependencyPresenceOnStartupVerifier.

72. Distributed Configuration with Zookeeper

Zookeeper provides a hierarchical namespace that allows clients to store arbitrary data, such as configuration data. Spring Cloud Zookeeper Config is an alternative to the Config Server and Client. Configuration is loaded into the Spring Environment during the special "bootstrap" phase. Configuration is stored in the /config namespace by default. Multiple PropertySource instances are created based on the application’s name and the active profiles that mimicks the Spring Cloud Config order of resolving properties. For example, an application with the name "testApp" and with the "dev" profile will have the following property sources created:

config/testApp,dev
config/testApp
config/application,dev
config/application

The most specific property source is at the top, with the least specific at the bottom. Properties is the config/application namespace are applicable to all applications using zookeeper for configuration. Properties in the config/testApp namespace are only available to the instances of the service named "testApp".

Configuration is currently read on startup of the application. Sending a HTTP POST to /refresh will cause the configuration to be reloaded. Watching the configuration namespace (which Zookeeper supports) is not currently implemented, but will be a future addition to this project.

72.1 How to activate

Including a dependency on org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-starter-zookeeper-config will enable auto-configuration that will setup Spring Cloud Zookeeper Config.

72.2 Customizing

Zookeeper Config may be customized using the following properties:

bootstrap.yml. 

spring:
  cloud:
    zookeeper:
      config:
        enabled: true
        root: configuration
        defaultContext: apps
        profileSeparator: '::'

  • enabled setting this value to "false" disables Zookeeper Config
  • root sets the base namespace for configuration values
  • defaultContext sets the name used by all applications
  • profileSeparator sets the value of the separator used to separate the profile name in property sources with profiles

72.3 ACLs

You can add authentication information for Zookeeper ACLs by calling the addAuthInfo method of a CuratorFramework bean. One way to accomplish this is by providing your own CuratorFramework bean:

@BoostrapConfiguration
public class CustomCuratorFrameworkConfig {

  @Bean
  public CuratorFramework curatorFramework() {
    CuratorFramework curator = new CuratorFramework();
    curator.addAuthInfo("digest", "user:password".getBytes());
    return curator;
  }

}

Consult the ZookeeperAutoConfiguration class to see how the CuratorFramework bean is configured by default.

Alternatively, you can add your credentials from a class that depends on the existing CuratorFramework bean:

@BoostrapConfiguration
public class DefaultCuratorFrameworkConfig {

  public ZookeeperConfig(CuratorFramework curator) {
    curator.addAuthInfo("digest", "user:password".getBytes());
  }

}

This must occur during the boostrapping phase. You can register configuration classes to run during this phase by annotating them with @BootstrapConfiguration and including them in a comma-separated list set as the value of the property org.springframework.cloud.bootstrap.BootstrapConfiguration in the file resources/META-INF/spring.factories:

resources/META-INF/spring.factories. 

org.springframework.cloud.bootstrap.BootstrapConfiguration=\
my.project.CustomCuratorFrameworkConfig,\
my.project.DefaultCuratorFrameworkConfig

Unresolved directive in spring-cloud.adoc - include::../../../../cli/docs/src/main/asciidoc/spring-cloud-cli.adoc[]

Part X. Spring Cloud Security

Spring Cloud Security offers a set of primitives for building secure applications and services with minimum fuss. A declarative model which can be heavily configured externally (or centrally) lends itself to the implementation of large systems of co-operating, remote components, usually with a central indentity management service. It is also extremely easy to use in a service platform like Cloud Foundry. Building on Spring Boot and Spring Security OAuth2 we can quickly create systems that implement common patterns like single sign on, token relay and token exchange.

[Note]Note

Spring Cloud is released under the non-restrictive Apache 2.0 license. If you would like to contribute to this section of the documentation or if you find an error, please find the source code and issue trackers in the project at github.

73. Quickstart

73.1 OAuth2 Single Sign On

Here’s a Spring Cloud "Hello World" app with HTTP Basic authentication and a single user account:

app.groovy. 

@Grab('spring-boot-starter-security')
@Controller
class Application {

  @RequestMapping('/')
  String home() {
    'Hello World'
  }

}

You can run it with spring run app.groovy and watch the logs for the password (username is "user"). So far this is just the default for a Spring Boot app.

Here’s a Spring Cloud app with OAuth2 SSO:

app.groovy. 

@Controller
@EnableOAuth2Sso
class Application {

  @RequestMapping('/')
  String home() {
    'Hello World'
  }

}

Spot the difference? This app will actually behave exactly the same as the previous one, because it doesn’t know it’s OAuth2 credentals yet.

You can register an app in github quite easily, so try that if you want a production app on your own domain. If you are happy to test on localhost:8080, then set up these properties in your application configuration:

application.yml. 

security:
  oauth2:
    client:
      clientId: bd1c0a783ccdd1c9b9e4
      clientSecret: 1a9030fbca47a5b2c28e92f19050bb77824b5ad1
      accessTokenUri: https://github.com/login/oauth/access_token
      userAuthorizationUri: https://github.com/login/oauth/authorize
      clientAuthenticationScheme: form
    resource:
      userInfoUri: https://api.github.com/user
      preferTokenInfo: false

run the app above and it will redirect to github for authorization. If you are already signed into github you won’t even notice that it has authenticated. These credentials will only work if your app is running on port 8080.

To limit the scope that the client asks for when it obtains an access token you can set security.oauth2.client.scope (comma separated or an array in YAML). By default the scope is empty and it is up to to Authorization Server to decide what the defaults should be, usually depending on the settings in the client registration that it holds.

[Note]Note

The examples above are all Groovy scripts. If you want to write the same code in Java (or Groovy) you need to add Spring Security OAuth2 to the classpath (e.g. see the sample here).

73.2 OAuth2 Protected Resource

You want to protect an API resource with an OAuth2 token? Here’s a simple example (paired with the client above):

app.groovy. 

@Grab('spring-cloud-starter-security')
@RestController
@EnableResourceServer
class Application {

  @RequestMapping('/')
  def home() {
    [message: 'Hello World']
  }

}

and

application.yml. 

security:
  oauth2:
    resource:
      userInfoUri: https://api.github.com/user
      preferTokenInfo: false

74. More Detail

74.1 Single Sign On

[Note]Note

All of the OAuth2 SSO and resource server features moved to Spring Boot in version 1.3. You can find documentation in the Spring Boot user guide.

74.2 Token Relay

A Token Relay is where an OAuth2 consumer acts as a Client and forwards the incoming token to outgoing resource requests. The consumer can be a pure Client (like an SSO application) or a Resource Server.

74.2.1 Client Token Relay

If your app is a user facing OAuth2 client (i.e. has declared @EnableOAuth2Sso or @EnableOAuth2Client) then it has an OAuth2ClientContext in request scope from Spring Boot. You can create your own OAuth2RestTemplate from this context and an autowired OAuth2ProtectedResourceDetails, and then the context will always forward the access token downstream, also refreshing the access token automatically if it expires. (These are features of Spring Security and Spring Boot.)

[Note]Note

Spring Boot (1.4.1) does not create an OAuth2ProtectedResourceDetails automatically if you are using client_credentials tokens. In that case you need to create your own ClientCredentialsResourceDetails and configure it with @ConfigurationProperties("security.oauth2.client").

74.2.2 Client Token Relay in Zuul Proxy

If your app also has a Spring Cloud Zuul embedded reverse proxy (using @EnableZuulProxy) then you can ask it to forward OAuth2 access tokens downstream to the services it is proxying. Thus the SSO app above can be enhanced simply like this:

app.groovy. 

@Controller
@EnableOAuth2Sso
@EnableZuulProxy
class Application {

}

and it will (in addition to logging the user in and grabbing a token) pass the authentication token downstream to the /proxy/* services. If those services are implemented with @EnableResourceServer then they will get a valid token in the correct header.

How does it work? The @EnableOAuth2Sso annotation pulls in spring-cloud-starter-security (which you could do manually in a traditional app), and that in turn triggers some autoconfiguration for a ZuulFilter, which itself is activated because Zuul is on the classpath (via @EnableZuulProxy). The filter just extracts an access token from the currently authenticated user, and puts it in a request header for the downstream requests.

74.2.3 Resource Server Token Relay

If your app has @EnableResourceServer you might want to relay the incoming token downstream to other services. If you use a RestTemplate to contact the downstream services then this is just a matter of how to create the template with the right context.

If your service uses UserInfoTokenServices to authenticate incoming tokens (i.e. it is using the security.oauth2.user-info-uri configuration), then you can simply create an OAuth2RestTemplate using an autowired OAuth2ClientContext (it will be populated by the authentication process before it hits the backend code). Equivalently (with Spring Boot 1.4), you could inject a UserInfoRestTemplateFactory and grab its OAuth2RestTemplate in your configuration. For example:

MyConfiguration.java. 

@Bean
public OAuth2RestTemplate restTemplate(UserInfoRestTemplateFactory factory) {
    return factory.getUserInfoRestTemplate();
}

This rest template will then have the same OAuth2ClientContext (request-scoped) that is used by the authentication filter, so you can use it to send requests with the same access token.

If your app is not using UserInfoTokenServices but is still a client (i.e. it declares @EnableOAuth2Client or @EnableOAuth2Sso), then with Spring Security Cloud any OAuth2RestOperations that the user creates from an @Autowired @OAuth2Context will also forward tokens. This feature is implemented by default as an MVC handler interceptor, so it only works in Spring MVC. If you are not using MVC you could use a custom filter or AOP interceptor wrapping an AccessTokenContextRelay to provide the same feature.

Here’s a basic example showing the use of an autowired rest template created elsewhere ("foo.com" is a Resource Server accepting the same tokens as the surrounding app):

MyController.java. 

@Autowired
private OAuth2RestOperations restTemplate;

@RequestMapping("/relay")
public String relay() {
    ResponseEntity<String> response =
      restTemplate.getForEntity("https://foo.com/bar", String.class);
    return "Success! (" + response.getBody() + ")";
}

If you don’t want to forward tokens (and that is a valid choice, since you might want to act as yourself, rather than the client that sent you the token), then you only need to create your own OAuth2Context instead of autowiring the default one.

Feign clients will also pick up an interceptor that uses the OAuth2ClientContext if it is available, so they should also do a token relay anywhere where a RestTemplate would.

75. Configuring Authentication Downstream of a Zuul Proxy

You can control the authorization behaviour downstream of an @EnableZuulProxy through the proxy.auth.* settings. Example:

application.yml. 

proxy:
  auth:
    routes:
      customers: oauth2
      stores: passthru
      recommendations: none

In this example the "customers" service gets an OAuth2 token relay, the "stores" service gets a passthrough (the authorization header is just passed downstream), and the "recommendations" service has its authorization header removed. The default behaviour is to do a token relay if there is a token available, and passthru otherwise.

See ProxyAuthenticationProperties for full details.

Part XI. Spring Cloud for Cloud Foundry

Spring Cloud for Cloudfoundry makes it easy to run Spring Cloud apps in Cloud Foundry (the Platform as a Service). Cloud Foundry has the notion of a "service", which is middlware that you "bind" to an app, essentially providing it with an environment variable containing credentials (e.g. the location and username to use for the service).

The spring-cloud-cloudfoundry-web project provides basic support for some enhanced features of webapps in Cloud Foundry: binding automatically to single-sign-on services and optionally enabling sticky routing for discovery.

The spring-cloud-cloudfoundry-discovery project provides an implementation of Spring Cloud Commons DiscoveryClient so you can @EnableDiscoveryClient and provide your credentials as spring.cloud.cloudfoundry.discovery.[email,password] and then you can use the DiscoveryClient directly or via a LoadBalancerClient (also *.url if you are not connecting to Pivotal Web Services).

The first time you use it the discovery client might be slow owing to the fact that it has to get an access token from Cloud Foundry.

76. Discovery

Here’s a Spring Cloud app with Cloud Foundry discovery:

app.groovy. 

@Grab('org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-cloudfoundry')
@RestController
@EnableDiscoveryClient
class Application {

  @Autowired
  DiscoveryClient client

  @RequestMapping('/')
  String home() {
    'Hello from ' + client.getLocalServiceInstance()
  }

}

If you run it without any service bindings:

$ spring jar app.jar app.groovy
$ cf push -p app.jar

It will show its app name in the home page.

The DiscoveryClient can lists all the apps in a space, according to the credentials it is authenticated with, where the space defaults to the one the client is running in (if any). If neither org nor space are configured, they default per the user’s profile in Cloud Foundry.

77. Single Sign On

[Note]Note

All of the OAuth2 SSO and resource server features moved to Spring Boot in version 1.3. You can find documentation in the Spring Boot user guide.

This project provides automatic binding from CloudFoundry service credentials to the Spring Boot features. If you have a CloudFoundry service called "sso", for instance, with credentials containing "client_id", "client_secret" and "auth_domain", it will bind automatically to the Spring OAuth2 client that you enable with @EnableOAuth2Sso (from Spring Boot). The name of the service can be parameterized using spring.oauth2.sso.serviceId.

Part XII. Spring Cloud Contract

Documentation Authors: Adam Dudczak, Mathias Düsterhöft, Marcin Grzejszczak, Dennis Kieselhorst, Jakub Kubryński, Karol Lassak, Olga Maciaszek-Sharma, Mariusz Smykuła, Dave Syer

Dalston.SR5

78. Spring Cloud Contract

What you always need is confidence in pushing new features into a new application or service in a distributed system. This project provides support for Consumer Driven Contracts and service schemas in Spring applications, covering a range of options for writing tests, publishing them as assets, asserting that a contract is kept by producers and consumers, for HTTP and message-based interactions.

79. Spring Cloud Contract Verifier Introduction

[Tip]Tip

The Accurest project was initially started by Marcin Grzejszczak and Jakub Kubrynski (codearte.io)

Just to make long story short - Spring Cloud Contract Verifier is a tool that enables Consumer Driven Contract (CDC) development of JVM-based applications. It is shipped with Contract Definition Language (DSL). Contract definitions are used to produce following resources:

  • JSON stub definitions to be used by WireMock when doing integration testing on the client code (client tests). Test code must still be written by hand, test data is produced by Spring Cloud Contract Verifier.
  • Messaging routes if you’re using one. We’re integrating with Spring Integration, Spring Cloud Stream, Spring AMQP and Apache Camel. You can however set your own integrations if you want to
  • Acceptance tests (in JUnit or Spock) used to verify if server-side implementation of the API is compliant with the contract (server tests). Full test is generated by Spring Cloud Contract Verifier.

Spring Cloud Contract Verifier moves TDD to the level of software architecture.

79.1 Why?

Let us assume that we have a system comprising of multiple microservices:

Microservices Architecture

79.1.1 Testing issues

If we wanted to test the application in top left corner if it can communicate with other services then we could do one of two things:

  • deploy all microservices and perform end to end tests
  • mock other microservices in unit / integration tests

Both have their advantages but also a lot of disadvantages. Let’s focus on the latter.

Deploy all microservices and perform end to end tests

Advantages:

  • simulates production
  • tests real communication between services

Disadvantages:

  • to test one microservice we would have to deploy 6 microservices, a couple of databases etc.
  • the environment where the tests would be conducted would be locked for a single suite of tests (i.e. nobody else would be able to run the tests in the meantime).
  • long to run
  • very late feedback
  • extremely hard to debug

Mock other microservices in unit / integration tests

Advantages:

  • very fast feedback
  • no infrastructure requirements

Disadvantages:

  • the implementor of the service creates stubs thus they might have nothing to do with the reality
  • you can go to production with passing tests and failing production

To solve the aforementioned issues Spring Cloud Contract Verifier with Stub Runner were created. Their main idea is to give you very fast feedback, without the need to set up the whole world of microservices. If you work on stubs then the only applications you need are those that your application is using directly.

Stubbed Services

Spring Cloud Contract Verifier gives you the certainty that the stubs that you’re using were created by the service that you’re calling. Also if you can use them it means that they were tested against the producer’s side. In other words - you can trust those stubs.

79.2 Purposes

The main purposes of Spring Cloud Contract Verifier with Stub Runner are:

  • to ensure that WireMock / Messaging stubs (used when developing the client) are doing exactly what actual server-side implementation will do,
  • to promote ATDD method and Microservices architectural style,
  • to provide a way to publish changes in contracts that are immediately visible on both sides,
  • to generate boilerplate test code used on the server side.
[Important]Important

Spring Cloud Contract Verifier’s purpose is NOT to start writing business features in the contracts. Let’s assume that we have a business use case of fraud check. If a user can be a fraud for 100 different reasons, we would assume that you would create 2 contracts. One for the positive and one for the negative fraud case. Contract tests are used to test contracts between applications and not to simulate full behaviour.

79.3 How

79.3.1 Define the contract

As consumers we need to define what exactly we want to achieve. We need to formulate our expectations. That’s why we write the following contract.

Let’s assume that we’d like to send the request containing the id of the client and the amount he wants to borrow from us. We’d like to send it to the /fraudcheck url via the PUT method.

package contracts

org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract.make {
	request { // (1)
		method 'PUT' // (2)
		url '/fraudcheck' // (3)
		body([ // (4)
			   "client.id": $(regex('[0-9]{10}')),
			   loanAmount: 99999
		])
		headers { // (5)
			contentType('application/json')
		}
	}
	response { // (6)
		status 200 // (7)
		body([ // (8)
			   fraudCheckStatus: "FRAUD",
			   "rejection.reason": "Amount too high"
		])
		headers { // (9)
			contentType('application/json')
		}
	}
}

/*
From the Consumer perspective, when shooting a request in the integration test:

(1) - If the consumer sends a request
(2) - With the "PUT" method
(3) - to the URL "/fraudcheck"
(4) - with the JSON body that
 * has a field `clientId` that matches a regular expression `[0-9]{10}`
 * has a field `loanAmount` that is equal to `99999`
(5) - with header `Content-Type` equal to `application/json`
(6) - then the response will be sent with
(7) - status equal `200`
(8) - and JSON body equal to
 { "fraudCheckStatus": "FRAUD", "rejectionReason": "Amount too high" }
(9) - with header `Content-Type` equal to `application/json`

From the Producer perspective, in the autogenerated producer-side test:

(1) - A request will be sent to the producer
(2) - With the "PUT" method
(3) - to the URL "/fraudcheck"
(4) - with the JSON body that
 * has a field `clientId` that will have a generated value that matches a regular expression `[0-9]{10}`
 * has a field `loanAmount` that is equal to `99999`
(5) - with header `Content-Type` equal to `application/json`
(6) - then the test will assert if the response has been sent with
(7) - status equal `200`
(8) - and JSON body equal to
 { "fraudCheckStatus": "FRAUD", "rejectionReason": "Amount too high" }
(9) - with header `Content-Type` matching `application/json.*`
 */

79.3.2 Client Side

Spring Cloud Contract will generate stubs, which you can use during client side testing. You will have a WireMock instance / Messaging route up and running that simulates the service Y. You would like to feed that instance with a proper stub definition.

At some point in time you need to send a request to the Fraud Detection service.

ResponseEntity<FraudServiceResponse> response =
		restTemplate.exchange("http://localhost:" + port + "/fraudcheck", HttpMethod.PUT,
				new HttpEntity<>(request, httpHeaders),
				FraudServiceResponse.class);

Annotate your test class with @AutoConfigureStubRunner. In the annotation provide the group id and artifact id for the Stub Runner to download stubs of your collaborators.

@RunWith(SpringRunner.class)
@SpringBootTest(webEnvironment=WebEnvironment.NONE)
@AutoConfigureStubRunner(ids = {"com.example:http-server-dsl:+:stubs:6565"}, workOffline = true)
@DirtiesContext
public class LoanApplicationServiceTests {

After that, during the tests Spring Cloud Contract will automatically find the stubs (simulating the real service) in Maven repository and expose them on configured (or random) port.

79.3.3 Server Side

Being a service Y since you are developing your stub, you need to be sure that it’s actually resembling your concrete implementation. You can’t have a situation where your stub acts in one way and your application on production behaves in a different way.

That’s why from the provided stub acceptance tests will be generated that will ensure that your application behaves in the same way as you define in your stub.

The autogenerated test would look like this:

@Test
public void validate_shouldMarkClientAsFraud() throws Exception {
    // given:
        MockMvcRequestSpecification request = given()
                .header("Content-Type", "application/vnd.fraud.v1+json")
                .body("{\"client.id\":\"1234567890\",\"loanAmount\":99999}");

    // when:
        ResponseOptions response = given().spec(request)
                .put("/fraudcheck");

    // then:
        assertThat(response.statusCode()).isEqualTo(200);
        assertThat(response.header("Content-Type")).matches("application/vnd.fraud.v1.json.*");
    // and:
        DocumentContext parsedJson = JsonPath.parse(response.getBody().asString());
        assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("['fraudCheckStatus']").matches("[A-Z]{5}");
        assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("['rejection.reason']").isEqualTo("Amount too high");
}

79.4 Step by step guide to CDC

Let’s take an example of Fraud Detection and Loan Issuance process. The business scenario is such that we want to issue loans to people but don’t want them to steal the money from us. The current implementation of our system grants loans to everybody.

Let’s assume that the Loan Issuance is a client to the Fraud Detection server. In the current sprint we are required to develop a new feature - if a client wants to borrow too much money then we mark him as fraud.

Technical remark - Fraud Detection will have artifact id http-server, Loan Issuance http-client and both have group id com.example.

Social remark - both client and server development teams need to communicate directly and discuss changes while going through the process. CDC is all about communication.

The server side code is available here and the client side code here.

[Tip]Tip

In this case the ownership of the contracts lays on the producer side. It means that physically all the contract are present in the producer’s repository

79.4.1 Technical note

If using the SNAPSHOT / Milestone / Release Candidate versions please add the following section to your

Maven. 

<repositories>
	<repository>
		<id>spring-snapshots</id>
		<name>Spring Snapshots</name>
		<url>https://repo.spring.io/snapshot</url>
		<snapshots>
			<enabled>true</enabled>
		</snapshots>
	</repository>
	<repository>
		<id>spring-milestones</id>
		<name>Spring Milestones</name>
		<url>https://repo.spring.io/milestone</url>
		<snapshots>
			<enabled>false</enabled>
		</snapshots>
	</repository>
	<repository>
		<id>spring-releases</id>
		<name>Spring Releases</name>
		<url>https://repo.spring.io/release</url>
		<snapshots>
			<enabled>false</enabled>
		</snapshots>
	</repository>
</repositories>
<pluginRepositories>
	<pluginRepository>
		<id>spring-snapshots</id>
		<name>Spring Snapshots</name>
		<url>https://repo.spring.io/snapshot</url>
		<snapshots>
			<enabled>true</enabled>
		</snapshots>
	</pluginRepository>
	<pluginRepository>
		<id>spring-milestones</id>
		<name>Spring Milestones</name>
		<url>https://repo.spring.io/milestone</url>
		<snapshots>
			<enabled>false</enabled>
		</snapshots>
	</pluginRepository>
	<pluginRepository>
		<id>spring-releases</id>
		<name>Spring Releases</name>
		<url>https://repo.spring.io/release</url>
		<snapshots>
			<enabled>false</enabled>
		</snapshots>
	</pluginRepository>
</pluginRepositories>

Gradle. 

repositories {
	mavenCentral()
	mavenLocal()
	maven { url "http://repo.spring.io/snapshot" }
	maven { url "http://repo.spring.io/milestone" }
	maven { url "http://repo.spring.io/release" }
}

79.4.2 Consumer side (Loan Issuance)

As a developer of the Loan Issuance service (a consumer of the Fraud Detection server):

start doing TDD by writing a test to your feature

@Test
public void shouldBeRejectedDueToAbnormalLoanAmount() {
	// given:
	LoanApplication application = new LoanApplication(new Client("1234567890"),
			99999);
	// when:
	LoanApplicationResult loanApplication = service.loanApplication(application);
	// then:
	assertThat(loanApplication.getLoanApplicationStatus())
			.isEqualTo(LoanApplicationStatus.LOAN_APPLICATION_REJECTED);
	assertThat(loanApplication.getRejectionReason()).isEqualTo("Amount too high");
}

We’ve just written a test of our new feature. If a loan application for a big amount is received we should reject that loan application with some description.

write the missing implementation

At some point in time you need to send a request to the Fraud Detection service. Let’s assume that we’d like to send the request containing the id of the client and the amount he wants to borrow from us. We’d like to send it to the /fraudcheck url via the PUT method.

ResponseEntity<FraudServiceResponse> response =
		restTemplate.exchange("http://localhost:" + port + "/fraudcheck", HttpMethod.PUT,
				new HttpEntity<>(request, httpHeaders),
				FraudServiceResponse.class);

For simplicity we’ve hardcoded the port of the Fraud Detection service at 8080 and our application is running on 8090.

If we’d start the written test it would obviously break since we have no service running on port 8080.

clone the Fraud Detection service repository locally

We’ll start playing around with the server side contract. That’s why we need to first clone it.

git clone https://your-git-server.com/server-side.git local-http-server-repo

define the contract locally in the repo of Fraud Detection service

As consumers we need to define what exactly we want to achieve. We need to formulate our expectations. That’s why we write the following contract.

[Important]Important

We’re placing the contract under src/test/resources/contracts/fraud folder. The fraud folder is important cause we’ll reference that folder in the producer’s test base class name.

package contracts

org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract.make {
	request { // (1)
		method 'PUT' // (2)
		url '/fraudcheck' // (3)
		body([ // (4)
			   "client.id": $(regex('[0-9]{10}')),
			   loanAmount: 99999
		])
		headers { // (5)
			contentType('application/json')
		}
	}
	response { // (6)
		status 200 // (7)
		body([ // (8)
			   fraudCheckStatus: "FRAUD",
			   "rejection.reason": "Amount too high"
		])
		headers { // (9)
			contentType('application/json')
		}
	}
}

/*
From the Consumer perspective, when shooting a request in the integration test:

(1) - If the consumer sends a request
(2) - With the "PUT" method
(3) - to the URL "/fraudcheck"
(4) - with the JSON body that
 * has a field `clientId` that matches a regular expression `[0-9]{10}`
 * has a field `loanAmount` that is equal to `99999`
(5) - with header `Content-Type` equal to `application/json`
(6) - then the response will be sent with
(7) - status equal `200`
(8) - and JSON body equal to
 { "fraudCheckStatus": "FRAUD", "rejectionReason": "Amount too high" }
(9) - with header `Content-Type` equal to `application/json`

From the Producer perspective, in the autogenerated producer-side test:

(1) - A request will be sent to the producer
(2) - With the "PUT" method
(3) - to the URL "/fraudcheck"
(4) - with the JSON body that
 * has a field `clientId` that will have a generated value that matches a regular expression `[0-9]{10}`
 * has a field `loanAmount` that is equal to `99999`
(5) - with header `Content-Type` equal to `application/json`
(6) - then the test will assert if the response has been sent with
(7) - status equal `200`
(8) - and JSON body equal to
 { "fraudCheckStatus": "FRAUD", "rejectionReason": "Amount too high" }
(9) - with header `Content-Type` matching `application/json.*`
 */

The Contract is written using a statically typed Groovy DSL. You might be wondering what are those value(client(…​), server(…​)) parts. By using this notation Spring Cloud Contract allows you to define parts of a JSON / URL / etc. which are dynamic. In case of an identifier or a timestamp you don’t want to hardcode a value. You want to allow some different ranges of values. That’s why for the consumer side you can set regular expressions matching those values. You can provide the body either by means of a map notation or String with interpolations. Consult the docs for more information. We highly recommend using the map notation!

[Tip]Tip

It’s really important that you understand the map notation to set up contracts. Please read the Groovy docs regarding JSON

The aforementioned contract is an agreement between two sides that:

  • if an HTTP request is sent with

    • a method PUT on an endpoint /fraudcheck
    • JSON body with client.id matching the regular expression [0-9]{10} and loanAmount equal to 99999
    • and with a header Content-Type equal to application/vnd.fraud.v1+json
  • then an HTTP response would be sent to the consumer that

    • has status 200
    • contains JSON body with the fraudCheckStatus field containing a value FRAUD and the rejectionReason field having value Amount too high
    • and a Content-Type header with a value of application/vnd.fraud.v1+json

Once we’re ready to check the API in practice in the integration tests we need to just install the stubs locally

add the Spring Cloud Contract Verifier plugin

We can add either Maven or Gradle plugin - in this example we’ll show how to add Maven. First we need to add the Spring Cloud Contract BOM.

<dependencyManagement>
	<dependencies>
		<dependency>
			<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
			<artifactId>spring-cloud-dependencies</artifactId>
			<version>${spring-cloud-dependencies.version}</version>
			<type>pom</type>
			<scope>import</scope>
		</dependency>
	</dependencies>
</dependencyManagement>

Next, the Spring Cloud Contract Verifier Maven plugin

<plugin>
	<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
	<artifactId>spring-cloud-contract-maven-plugin</artifactId>
	<version>${spring-cloud-contract.version}</version>
	<extensions>true</extensions>
	<configuration>
		<packageWithBaseClasses>com.example.fraud</packageWithBaseClasses>
	</configuration>
</plugin>

Since the plugin was added we get the Spring Cloud Contract Verifier features which from the provided contracts:

  • generate and run tests
  • produce and install stubs

We don’t want to generate tests since we, as consumers, want only to play with the stubs. That’s why we need to skip the tests generation and execution. When we execute:

cd local-http-server-repo
./mvnw clean install -DskipTests

In the logs we’ll see something like this:

[INFO] --- spring-cloud-contract-maven-plugin:1.0.0.BUILD-SNAPSHOT:generateStubs (default-generateStubs) @ http-server ---
[INFO] Building jar: /some/path/http-server/target/http-server-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT-stubs.jar
[INFO]
[INFO] --- maven-jar-plugin:2.6:jar (default-jar) @ http-server ---
[INFO] Building jar: /some/path/http-server/target/http-server-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT.jar
[INFO]
[INFO] --- spring-boot-maven-plugin:1.5.4.BUILD-SNAPSHOT:repackage (default) @ http-server ---
[INFO]
[INFO] --- maven-install-plugin:2.5.2:install (default-install) @ http-server ---
[INFO] Installing /some/path/http-server/target/http-server-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT.jar to /path/to/your/.m2/repository/com/example/http-server/0.0.1-SNAPSHOT/http-server-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT.jar
[INFO] Installing /some/path/http-server/pom.xml to /path/to/your/.m2/repository/com/example/http-server/0.0.1-SNAPSHOT/http-server-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT.pom
[INFO] Installing /some/path/http-server/target/http-server-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT-stubs.jar to /path/to/your/.m2/repository/com/example/http-server/0.0.1-SNAPSHOT/http-server-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT-stubs.jar

This line is extremely important

[INFO] Installing /some/path/http-server/target/http-server-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT-stubs.jar to /path/to/your/.m2/repository/com/example/http-server/0.0.1-SNAPSHOT/http-server-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT-stubs.jar

It’s confirming that the stubs of the http-server have been installed in the local repository.

run the integration tests

In order to profit from the Spring Cloud Contract Stub Runner functionality of automatic stub downloading you have to do the following in our consumer side project (Loan Application service).

Add the Spring Cloud Contract BOM

<dependencyManagement>
	<dependencies>
		<dependency>
			<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
			<artifactId>spring-cloud-dependencies</artifactId>
			<version>${spring-cloud-dependencies.version}</version>
			<type>pom</type>
			<scope>import</scope>
		</dependency>
	</dependencies>
</dependencyManagement>

Add the dependency to Spring Cloud Contract Stub Runner

<dependency>
	<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
	<artifactId>spring-cloud-starter-contract-stub-runner</artifactId>
	<scope>test</scope>
</dependency>

Annotate your test class with @AutoConfigureStubRunner. In the annotation provide the group id and artifact id for the Stub Runner to download stubs of your collaborators. Also provide the offline work switch since you’re playing with the collaborators offline (optional step).

@RunWith(SpringRunner.class)
@SpringBootTest(webEnvironment=WebEnvironment.NONE)
@AutoConfigureStubRunner(ids = {"com.example:http-server-dsl:+:stubs:6565"}, workOffline = true)
@DirtiesContext
public class LoanApplicationServiceTests {

Now if you run your tests you’ll see sth like this:

2016-07-19 14:22:25.403  INFO 41050 --- [           main] o.s.c.c.stubrunner.AetherStubDownloader  : Desired version is + - will try to resolve the latest version
2016-07-19 14:22:25.438  INFO 41050 --- [           main] o.s.c.c.stubrunner.AetherStubDownloader  : Resolved version is 0.0.1-SNAPSHOT
2016-07-19 14:22:25.439  INFO 41050 --- [           main] o.s.c.c.stubrunner.AetherStubDownloader  : Resolving artifact com.example:http-server:jar:stubs:0.0.1-SNAPSHOT using remote repositories []
2016-07-19 14:22:25.451  INFO 41050 --- [           main] o.s.c.c.stubrunner.AetherStubDownloader  : Resolved artifact com.example:http-server:jar:stubs:0.0.1-SNAPSHOT to /path/to/your/.m2/repository/com/example/http-server/0.0.1-SNAPSHOT/http-server-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT-stubs.jar
2016-07-19 14:22:25.465  INFO 41050 --- [           main] o.s.c.c.stubrunner.AetherStubDownloader  : Unpacking stub from JAR [URI: file:/path/to/your/.m2/repository/com/example/http-server/0.0.1-SNAPSHOT/http-server-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT-stubs.jar]
2016-07-19 14:22:25.475  INFO 41050 --- [           main] o.s.c.c.stubrunner.AetherStubDownloader  : Unpacked file to [/var/folders/0p/xwq47sq106x1_g3dtv6qfm940000gq/T/contracts100276532569594265]
2016-07-19 14:22:27.737  INFO 41050 --- [           main] o.s.c.c.stubrunner.StubRunnerExecutor    : All stubs are now running RunningStubs [namesAndPorts={com.example:http-server:0.0.1-SNAPSHOT:stubs=8080}]

Which means that Stub Runner has found your stubs and started a server for app with group id com.example, artifact id http-server with version 0.0.1-SNAPSHOT of the stubs and with stubs classifier on port 8080.

file a PR

What we did until now is an iterative process. We can play around with the contract, install it locally and work on the consumer side until we’re happy with the contract.

Once we’re satisfied with the results and the test passes publish a PR to the server side. Currently the consumer side work is done.

79.4.3 Producer side (Fraud Detection server)

As a developer of the Fraud Detection server (a server to the Loan Issuance service):

initial implementation

As a reminder here you can see the initial implementation

@RequestMapping(value = "/fraudcheck", method = PUT)
public FraudCheckResult fraudCheck(@RequestBody FraudCheck fraudCheck) {
return new FraudCheckResult(FraudCheckStatus.OK, NO_REASON);
}

take over the PR

git checkout -b contract-change-pr master
git pull https://your-git-server.com/server-side-fork.git contract-change-pr

You have to add the dependencies needed by the autogenerated tests

<dependency>
	<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
	<artifactId>spring-cloud-starter-contract-verifier</artifactId>
	<scope>test</scope>
</dependency>

In the configuration of the Maven plugin we passed the packageWithBaseClasses property

<plugin>
	<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
	<artifactId>spring-cloud-contract-maven-plugin</artifactId>
	<version>${spring-cloud-contract.version}</version>
	<extensions>true</extensions>
	<configuration>
		<packageWithBaseClasses>com.example.fraud</packageWithBaseClasses>
	</configuration>
</plugin>
[Important]Important

We’ve decided to use the "convention based" naming by setting the packageWithBaseClasses property. That means that 2 last packages will be combined into a name of the base test class. In our case the contracts were placed under src/test/resources/contracts/fraud. Since we don’t have 2 packages starting from the contracts folder we’re picking only one which is fraud. We’re adding the Base suffix and we’re capitalizing fraud. That gives us the FraudBase test class name.

That’s because all the generated tests will extend that class. Over there you can set up your Spring Context or whatever is necessary. In our case we’re using Rest Assured MVC to start the server side FraudDetectionController.

package com.example.fraud;

import org.junit.Before;

import io.restassured.module.mockmvc.RestAssuredMockMvc;

public class FraudBase {
	@Before
	public void setup() {
		RestAssuredMockMvc.standaloneSetup(new FraudDetectionController(),
				new FraudStatsController(stubbedStatsProvider()));
	}

	private StatsProvider stubbedStatsProvider() {
		return fraudType -> {
			switch (fraudType) {
			case DRUNKS:
				return 100;
			case ALL:
				return 200;
			}
			return 0;
		};
	}

	public void assertThatRejectionReasonIsNull(Object rejectionReason) {
		assert rejectionReason == null;
	}
}

Now, if you run the ./mvnw clean install you would get sth like this:

Results :

Tests in error:
  ContractVerifierTest.validate_shouldMarkClientAsFraud:32 » IllegalState Parsed...

That’s because you have a new contract from which a test was generated and it failed since you haven’t implemented the feature. The autogenerated test would look like this:

@Test
public void validate_shouldMarkClientAsFraud() throws Exception {
    // given:
        MockMvcRequestSpecification request = given()
                .header("Content-Type", "application/vnd.fraud.v1+json")
                .body("{\"client.id\":\"1234567890\",\"loanAmount\":99999}");

    // when:
        ResponseOptions response = given().spec(request)
                .put("/fraudcheck");

    // then:
        assertThat(response.statusCode()).isEqualTo(200);
        assertThat(response.header("Content-Type")).matches("application/vnd.fraud.v1.json.*");
    // and:
        DocumentContext parsedJson = JsonPath.parse(response.getBody().asString());
        assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("['fraudCheckStatus']").matches("[A-Z]{5}");
        assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("['rejection.reason']").isEqualTo("Amount too high");
}

As you can see all the producer() parts of the Contract that were present in the value(consumer(…​), producer(…​)) blocks got injected into the test.

What’s important here to note is that on the producer side we also are doing TDD. We have expectations in form of a test. This test is shooting a request to our own application to an URL, headers and body defined in the contract. It also is expecting very precisely defined values in the response. In other words you have is your red part of red, green and refactor. Time to convert the red into the green.

write the missing implementation

Now since we now what is the expected input and expected output let’s write the missing implementation.

@RequestMapping(value = "/fraudcheck", method = PUT)
public FraudCheckResult fraudCheck(@RequestBody FraudCheck fraudCheck) {
if (amountGreaterThanThreshold(fraudCheck)) {
	return new FraudCheckResult(FraudCheckStatus.FRAUD, AMOUNT_TOO_HIGH);
}
return new FraudCheckResult(FraudCheckStatus.OK, NO_REASON);
}

If we execute ./mvnw clean install again the tests will pass. Since the Spring Cloud Contract Verifier plugin adds the tests to the generated-test-sources you can actually run those tests from your IDE.

deploy your app

Once you’ve finished your work it’s time to deploy your change. First merge the branch

git checkout master
git merge --no-ff contract-change-pr
git push origin master

Then we assume that your CI would run sth like ./mvnw clean deploy which would publish both the application and the stub artifcats.

79.4.4 Consumer side (Loan Issuance) final step

As a developer of the Loan Issuance service (a consumer of the Fraud Detection server):

merge branch to master

git checkout master
git merge --no-ff contract-change-pr

work online

Now you can disable the offline work for Spring Cloud Contract Stub Runner and provide where the repository with your stubs is placed. At this moment the stubs of the server side will be automatically downloaded from Nexus / Artifactory. You can switch off the value of the workOffline parameter in your annotation. Below you can see an example of achieving the same by changing the properties.

stubrunner:
  ids: 'com.example:http-server-dsl:+:stubs:8080'
  repositoryRoot: http://repo.spring.io/libs-snapshot

And that’s it!

79.5 Dependencies

The best way to add the dependencies is to just use the proper starter dependency.

For stub-runner use spring-cloud-starter-stub-runner and when you’re using a plugin just add spring-cloud-starter-contract-verifier.

79.6 Additional links

Below you can find some resources related to Spring Cloud Contract Verifier and Stub Runner. Note that some can be outdated since the Spring Cloud Contract Verifier project is under constant development.

79.6.1 Spring Cloud Contract video

You can check out the video from the Warsaw JUG about Spring Cloud Contract:

79.7 Samples

Here you can find some samples.

80. Spring Cloud Contract Verifier Setup

80.1 Gradle Project

80.1.1 Prerequisites

In order to use Spring Cloud Contract Verifier with WireMock you have to use Gradle or Maven plugin.

[Warning]Warning

If you want to use Spock in your projects you have to add separately the spock-core and spock-spring modules. Check Spock docs for more information

80.1.2 Add gradle plugin with dependencies

buildscript {
	repositories {
		mavenCentral()
	}
	dependencies {
	    classpath "org.springframework.boot:spring-boot-gradle-plugin:${springboot_version}"
		classpath "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-contract-gradle-plugin:${verifier_version}"
	}
}

apply plugin: 'groovy'
apply plugin: 'spring-cloud-contract'

dependencyManagement {
	imports {
		mavenBom "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-contract-dependencies:${verifier_version}"
	}
}

dependencies {
	testCompile 'org.codehaus.groovy:groovy-all:2.4.6'
	// example with adding Spock core and Spock Spring
	testCompile 'org.spockframework:spock-core:1.0-groovy-2.4'
	testCompile 'org.spockframework:spock-spring:1.0-groovy-2.4'
	testCompile 'org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-starter-contract-verifier'
}

80.1.3 Gradle and Rest Assured 3.0

By default Rest Assured 2.x is added to the classpath. However in order to give the users the opportunity to use Rest Assured 3.x it’s enough to add it to the plugins classpath.

buildscript {
	repositories {
		mavenCentral()
	}
	dependencies {
	    classpath "org.springframework.boot:spring-boot-gradle-plugin:${springboot_version}"
		classpath "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-contract-gradle-plugin:${verifier_version}"
		classpath "io.rest-assured:rest-assured:3.0.2"
		classpath "io.rest-assured:spring-mock-mvc:3.0.2"
	}
}

depenendencies {
    // all dependencies
    // you can exclude rest-assured from spring-cloud-contract-verifier
    testCompile "io.rest-assured:rest-assured:3.0.2"
    testCompile "io.rest-assured:spring-mock-mvc:3.0.2"
}

That way the plugin will automatically see that Rest Assured 3.x is present on the classpath and will modify the imports accordingly.

80.1.4 Snapshot versions for Gradle

Add the additional snapshot repository to your build.gradle to use snapshot versions which are automatically uploaded after every successful build:

buildscript {
	repositories {
		mavenCentral()
		mavenLocal()
		maven { url "http://repo.spring.io/snapshot" }
		maven { url "http://repo.spring.io/milestone" }
		maven { url "http://repo.spring.io/release" }
	}
}

80.1.5 Add stubs

By default Spring Cloud Contract Verifier is looking for stubs in src/test/resources/contracts directory.

Directory containing stub definitions is treated as a class name, and each stub definition is treated as a single test. We assume that it contains at least one directory which will be used as test class name. If there is more than one level of nested directories all except the last one will be used as package name. So with following structure

src/test/resources/contracts/myservice/shouldCreateUser.groovy
src/test/resources/contracts/myservice/shouldReturnUser.groovy

Spring Cloud Contract Verifier will create test class defaultBasePackage.MyService with two methods

  • shouldCreateUser()
  • shouldReturnUser()

80.1.6 Run plugin

Plugin registers itself to be invoked before check task. You have nothing to do as long as you want it to be part of your build process. If you just want to generate tests please invoke generateContractTests task.

80.1.7 Default setup

Default Gradle Plugin setup creates the following Gradle part of the build (it’s a pseudocode)

contracts {
    targetFramework = 'JUNIT'
    testMode = 'MockMvc'
    generatedTestSourcesDir = project.file("${project.buildDir}/generated-test-sources/contracts")
    contractsDslDir = "${project.rootDir}/src/test/resources/contracts"
    basePackageForTests = 'org.springframework.cloud.verifier.tests'
    stubsOutputDir = project.file("${project.buildDir}/stubs")

    // the following properties are used when you want to provide where the JAR with contract lays
    contractDependency {
        stringNotation = ''
    }
    contractsPath = ''
    contractsWorkOffline = false
    contractRepository {
        cacheDownloadedContracts(true)
    }
}

tasks.create(type: Jar, name: 'verifierStubsJar', dependsOn: 'generateClientStubs') {
    baseName = project.name
    classifier = contracts.stubsSuffix
    from contractVerifier.stubsOutputDir
}

project.artifacts {
    archives task
}

tasks.create(type: Copy, name: 'copyContracts') {
    from contracts.contractsDslDir
    into contracts.stubsOutputDir
}

verifierStubsJar.dependsOn 'copyContracts'

publishing {
    publications {
        stubs(MavenPublication) {
            artifactId project.name
            artifact verifierStubsJar
        }
    }
}

80.1.8 Configure plugin

To change default configuration just add contracts snippet to your Gradle config

contracts {
	testMode = 'MockMvc'
	baseClassForTests = 'org.mycompany.tests'
	generatedTestSourcesDir = project.file('src/generatedContract')
}

80.1.9 Configuration options

  • testMode - defines mode for acceptance tests. By default MockMvc which is based on Spring’s MockMvc. It can also be changed to JaxRsClient or to Explicit for real HTTP calls.
  • imports - array with imports that should be included in generated tests (for example ['org.myorg.Matchers']). By default empty array []
  • staticImports - array with static imports that should be included in generated tests(for example ['org.myorg.Matchers.*']). By default empty array []
  • basePackageForTests - specifies base package for all generated tests. By default set to org.springframework.cloud.verifier.tests
  • baseClassForTests - base class for all generated tests. By default spock.lang.Specification if using Spock tests.
  • packageWithBaseClasses - instead of providing a fixed value for base class you can provide a package where all the base classes lay. Takes precedence over baseClassForTests.
  • baseClassMappings - explicitly map contract package to a FQN of a base class. Takes precedence over packageWithBaseClasses and baseClassForTests.
  • ruleClassForTests - specifies Rule which should be added to generated test classes.
  • ignoredFiles - Ant matcher allowing defining stub files for which processing should be skipped. By default empty array []
  • contractsDslDir - directory containing contracts written using the GroovyDSL. By default $rootDir/src/test/resources/contracts
  • generatedTestSourcesDir - test source directory where tests generated from Groovy DSL should be placed. By default $buildDir/generated-test-sources/contractVerifier
  • stubsOutputDir - dir where the generated WireMock stubs from Groovy DSL should be placed
  • targetFramework - the target test framework to be used; currently Spock and JUnit are supported with JUnit being the default framework

The following properties are used when you want to provide where the JAR with contract lays

  • contractDependency - the Dependency that provides groupid:artifactid:version:classifier coordinates. You can use the contractDependency closure to set it up
  • contractsPath - if contract deps are downloaded will default to groupid/artifactid where groupid will be slash separated. Otherwise will scan contracts under provided directory
  • contractsWorkOffline - in order not to download the dependencies each time you can download them once and work offline afterwards (reuse local Maven repo)

80.1.10 Single base class for all tests

When using Spring Cloud Contract Verifier in default MockMvc you need to create a base specification for all generated acceptance tests. In this class you need to point to endpoint which should be verified.

abstract class BaseMockMvcSpec extends Specification {

	def setup() {
		RestAssuredMockMvc.standaloneSetup(new PairIdController())
	}

	void isProperCorrelationId(Integer correlationId) {
		assert correlationId == 123456
	}

	void isEmpty(String value) {
		assert value == null
	}

}

In case of using Explicit mode, you can use base class to initialize the whole tested app similarly as in regular integration tests. In case of JAXRSCLIENT mode this base class should also contain protected WebTarget webTarget field, right now the only option to test JAX-RS API is to start a web server.

80.1.11 Different base classes for contracts

If your base classes differ between contracts you can tell the Spring Cloud Contract plugin which class should get extended by the autogenerated tests. You have two options:

  • follow a convention by providing the packageWithBaseClasses
  • provide explicit mapping via baseClassMappings

Convention

The convention is such that if you have a contract under e.g. src/test/resources/contract/foo/bar/baz/ and provide the value of the packageWithBaseClasses property to com.example.base then we will assume that there is a BarBazBase class under com.example.base package. In other words we take last two parts of package if they exist and form a class with a Base suffix. Takes precedence over baseClassForTests. Example of usage in the contracts closure:

packageWithBaseClasses = 'com.example.base'

Mapping

You can manually map a regular expression of the contract’s package to fully qualified name of the base class for the matched contract. Let’s take a look at the following example:

baseClassForTests = "com.example.FooBase"
baseClassMappings {
	baseClassMapping('.*/com/.*', 'com.example.ComBase')
	baseClassMapping('.*/bar/.*':'com.example.BarBase')
}

Let’s assume that you have contracts under - src/test/resources/contract/com/ - src/test/resources/contract/foo/

By providing the baseClassForTests we have a fallback in case mapping didn’t succeed (you could also provide the packageWithBaseClasses as fallback). That way the tests generated from src/test/resources/contract/com/ contracts will be extending the com.example.ComBase whereas the rest of tests will extend com.example.FooBase.

80.1.12 Invoking generated tests

To ensure that provider side is complaint with defined contracts, you need to invoke:

./gradlew generateContractTests test

80.1.13 Spring Cloud Contract Verifier on consumer side

In consumer service you need to configure Spring Cloud Contract Verifier plugin in exactly the same way as in case of provider. If you don’t want to use Stub Runner then you need to copy contracts stored in src/test/resources/contracts and generate WireMock json stubs using:

./gradlew generateClientStubs

Note that stubsOutputDir option has to be set for stub generation to work.

When present, json stubs can be used in consumer automated tests.

@ContextConfiguration(loader == SpringApplicationContextLoader, classes == Application)
class LoanApplicationServiceSpec extends Specification {

 @ClassRule
 @Shared
 WireMockClassRule wireMockRule == new WireMockClassRule()

 @Autowired
 LoanApplicationService sut

 def 'should successfully apply for loan'() {
   given:
 	LoanApplication application =
			new LoanApplication(client: new Client(clientPesel: '12345678901'), amount: 123.123)
   when:
	LoanApplicationResult loanApplication == sut.loanApplication(application)
   then:
	loanApplication.loanApplicationStatus == LoanApplicationStatus.LOAN_APPLIED
	loanApplication.rejectionReason == null
 }
}

Underneath LoanApplication makes a call to FraudDetection service. This request is handled by WireMock server configured using stubs generated by Spring Cloud Contract Verifier.

80.2 Using in your Maven project

80.2.1 Add maven plugin

Add the Spring Cloud Contract BOM

<dependencyManagement>
	<dependencies>
		<dependency>
			<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
			<artifactId>spring-cloud-dependencies</artifactId>
			<version>${spring-cloud-dependencies.version}</version>
			<type>pom</type>
			<scope>import</scope>
		</dependency>
	</dependencies>
</dependencyManagement>

Next, the Spring Cloud Contract Verifier Maven plugin

<plugin>
	<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
	<artifactId>spring-cloud-contract-maven-plugin</artifactId>
	<version>${spring-cloud-contract.version}</version>
	<extensions>true</extensions>
	<configuration>
		<packageWithBaseClasses>com.example.fraud</packageWithBaseClasses>
	</configuration>
</plugin>

You can read more in the Spring Cloud Contract Maven Plugin Docs

80.2.2 Maven and Rest Assured 3.0

By default Rest Assured 2.x is added to the classpath. However in order to give the users the opportunity to use Rest Assured 3.x it’s enough to add it to the plugins classpath.

<plugin>
    <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
    <artifactId>spring-cloud-contract-maven-plugin</artifactId>
    <version>${spring-cloud-contract.version}</version>
    <extensions>true</extensions>
    <configuration>
        <packageWithBaseClasses>com.example</packageWithBaseClasses>
    </configuration>
    <dependencies>
        <dependency>
            <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
            <artifactId>spring-cloud-contract-verifier</artifactId>
            <version>${spring-cloud-contract.version}</version>
        </dependency>
        <dependency>
           <groupId>io.rest-assured</groupId>
           <artifactId>rest-assured</artifactId>
           <version>3.0.2</version>
           <scope>compile</scope>
        </dependency>
        <dependency>
           <groupId>io.rest-assured</groupId>
           <artifactId>spring-mock-mvc</artifactId>
           <version>3.0.2</version>
           <scope>compile</scope>
        </dependency>
    </dependencies>
</plugin>

<dependencies>
    <!-- all dependencies -->
    <!-- you can exclude rest-assured from spring-cloud-contract-verifier -->
    <dependency>
       <groupId>io.rest-assured</groupId>
       <artifactId>rest-assured</artifactId>
       <version>3.0.2</version>
       <scope>test</scope>
    </dependency>
    <dependency>
       <groupId>io.rest-assured</groupId>
       <artifactId>spring-mock-mvc</artifactId>
       <version>3.0.2</version>
       <scope>test</scope>
    </dependency>
</dependencies>

That way the plugin will automatically see that Rest Assured 3.x is present on the classpath and will modify the imports accordingly.

80.2.3 Snapshot versions for Maven

For Snapshot / Milestone versions you have to add the following section to your pom.xml

<repositories>
	<repository>
		<id>spring-snapshots</id>
		<name>Spring Snapshots</name>
		<url>https://repo.spring.io/snapshot</url>
		<snapshots>
			<enabled>true</enabled>
		</snapshots>
	</repository>
	<repository>
		<id>spring-milestones</id>
		<name>Spring Milestones</name>
		<url>https://repo.spring.io/milestone</url>
		<snapshots>
			<enabled>false</enabled>
		</snapshots>
	</repository>
	<repository>
		<id>spring-releases</id>
		<name>Spring Releases</name>
		<url>https://repo.spring.io/release</url>
		<snapshots>
			<enabled>false</enabled>
		</snapshots>
	</repository>
</repositories>
<pluginRepositories>
	<pluginRepository>
		<id>spring-snapshots</id>
		<name>Spring Snapshots</name>
		<url>https://repo.spring.io/snapshot</url>
		<snapshots>
			<enabled>true</enabled>
		</snapshots>
	</pluginRepository>
	<pluginRepository>
		<id>spring-milestones</id>
		<name>Spring Milestones</name>
		<url>https://repo.spring.io/milestone</url>
		<snapshots>
			<enabled>false</enabled>
		</snapshots>
	</pluginRepository>
	<pluginRepository>
		<id>spring-releases</id>
		<name>Spring Releases</name>
		<url>https://repo.spring.io/release</url>
		<snapshots>
			<enabled>false</enabled>
		</snapshots>
	</pluginRepository>
</pluginRepositories>

80.2.4 Add stubs

By default Spring Cloud Contract Verifier is looking for stubs in src/test/resources/contracts directory. Directory containing stub definitions is treated as a class name, and each stub definition is treated as a single test. We assume that it contains at least one directory which will be used as test class name. If there is more than one level of nested directories all except the last one will be used as package name. So with following structure

src/test/resources/contracts/myservice/shouldCreateUser.groovy
src/test/resources/contracts/myservice/shouldReturnUser.groovy

Spring Cloud Contract Verifier will create test class defaultBasePackage.MyService with two methods - shouldCreateUser() - shouldReturnUser()

80.2.5 Run plugin

Plugin goal generateTests is assigned to be invoked in phase generate-test-sources. You have nothing to do as long as you want it to be part of your build process. If you just want to generate tests please invoke generateTests goal.

80.2.6 Configure plugin

To change default configuration just add configuration section to plugin definition or execution definition.

<plugin>
    <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
    <artifactId>spring-cloud-contract-maven-plugin</artifactId>
    <executions>
        <execution>
            <goals>
                <goal>convert</goal>
                <goal>generateStubs</goal>
                <goal>generateTests</goal>
            </goals>
        </execution>
    </executions>
    <configuration>
        <basePackageForTests>org.springframework.cloud.verifier.twitter.place</basePackageForTests>
        <baseClassForTests>org.springframework.cloud.verifier.twitter.place.BaseMockMvcSpec</baseClassForTests>
    </configuration>
</plugin>

80.2.7 Important configuration options

  • testMode - defines mode for acceptance tests. By default MockMvc which is based on Spring’s MockMvc. It can also be changed to JaxRsClient or to Explicit for real HTTP calls.
  • basePackageForTests - specifies base package for all generated tests. By default set to org.springframework.cloud.verifier.tests.
  • ruleClassForTests - specifies Rule which should be added to generated test classes.
  • baseClassForTests - base class for generated tests. By default spock.lang.Specification if using Spock tests.
  • contractsDirectory - directory containing contracts written using the GroovyDSL. By default /src/test/resources/contracts.
  • testFramework - the target test framework to be used; currently Spock and JUnit are supported with JUnit being the default framework
  • packageWithBaseClasses - instead of providing a fixed value for base class you can provide a package where all the base classes lay. The convention is such that if you have a contract under src/test/resources/contract/foo/bar/baz/ and provide the value of this property to com.example.base then we will assume that there is a BarBazBase class under com.example.base package. Takes precedence over baseClassForTests
  • baseClassMappings - list of base class mappings that where you have to provide contractPackageRegex which is checked against the package in which the contract lays and baseClassFQN that maps to fully qualified name of the base class for the matched contract. If you have a contract under src/test/resources/contract/foo/bar/baz/ and map the property .*com.example.base.BaseClass then the test class generated from these contracts will extend com.example.base.BaseClass. Takes precedence over packageWithBaseClasses and baseClassForTests.

If you want to download your contract definitions from a Maven repository you can use

  • contractDependency - the contract dependency that contains all the packaged contracts
  • contractsPath - path to concrete contracts in the JAR with packaged contracts. Defaults to groupid/artifactid where gropuid is slash separated.
  • contractsWorkOffline - if the dependencies should be downloaded or local Maven only should be reused
  • contractsRepositoryUrl - DEPRECATED PROPERTY - please use the contractRepository closure - URL to a repo with the artifacts with contracts, if not provided should use the current Maven ones
  • contractRepository - closure where you can define properties related to repository with contracts

    • username - username to be used to connect to the repo
    • password - username to be used to connect to the repo
    • proxyHost - proxy host to be used to connect to the repo
    • proxyPort - proxy port to be used to connect to the repo
    • cacheDownloadedContracts - if you want to reuse download JARs that contain contract definitions. We cache only non-snapshot, explicitly provided versions (e.g. + or 1.0.0.BUILD-SNAPSHOT won’t get cached). By default this feature is turned on.

80.2.8 Single base class for all tests

When using Spring Cloud Contract Verifier in default MockMvc you need to create a base specification for all generated acceptance tests. In this class you need to point to endpoint which should be verified.

package org.mycompany.tests

import org.mycompany.ExampleSpringController
import com.jayway.restassured.module.mockmvc.RestAssuredMockMvc
import spock.lang.Specification

class  MvcSpec extends Specification {
  def setup() {
   RestAssuredMockMvc.standaloneSetup(new ExampleSpringController())
  }
}

In case of using Explicit mode, you can use base class to initialize the whole tested app similarly as in regular integration tests. In case of JAXRSCLIENT mode this base class should also contain protected WebTarget webTarget field, right now the only option to test JAX-RS API is to start a web server.

80.2.9 Different base classes for contracts

If your base classes differ between contracts you can tell the Spring Cloud Contract plugin which class should get extended by the autogenerated tests. You have two options:

  • follow a convention by providing the packageWithBaseClasses
  • provide explicit mapping via baseClassMappings

Convention

The convention is such that if you have a contract under e.g. src/test/resources/contract/hello/v1/ and provide the value of the packageWithBaseClasses property to hello then we will assume that there is a HelloV1Base class under hello package. In other words we take last two parts of package if they exist and form a class with a Base suffix. Takes precedence over baseClassForTests. Example of usage:

<plugin>
	<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
	<artifactId>spring-cloud-contract-maven-plugin</artifactId>
	<configuration>
		<packageWithBaseClasses>hello</packageWithBaseClasses>
	</configuration>
</plugin>

Mapping

You can manually map a regular expression of the contract’s package to fully qualified name of the base class for the matched contract. You have to provide a list baseClassMappings of baseClassMapping that takes a contractPackageRegex to baseClassFQN mapping. Let’s take a look at the following example:

<plugin>
	<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
	<artifactId>spring-cloud-contract-maven-plugin</artifactId>
	<configuration>
		<baseClassForTests>com.example.FooBase</baseClassForTests>
		<baseClassMappings>
			<baseClassMapping>
				<contractPackageRegex>.*com.*</contractPackageRegex>
				<baseClassFQN>com.example.TestBase</baseClassFQN>
			</baseClassMapping>
		</baseClassMappings>
	</configuration>
</plugin>

Let’s assume that you have contracts under - src/test/resources/contract/com/ - src/test/resources/contract/foo/

By providing the baseClassForTests we have a fallback in case mapping didn’t succeed (you could also provide the packageWithBaseClasses as fallback). That way the tests generated from src/test/resources/contract/com/ contracts will be extending the com.example.ComBase whereas the rest of tests will extend com.example.FooBase.

80.2.10 Invoking generated tests

Spring Cloud Contract Maven Plugin generates verification code into directory /generated-test-sources/contractVerifier and attach this directory to testCompile goal.

For Groovy Spock code use:

<plugin>
	<groupId>org.codehaus.gmavenplus</groupId>
	<artifactId>gmavenplus-plugin</artifactId>
	<version>1.5</version>
	<executions>
		<execution>
			<goals>
				<goal>testCompile</goal>
			</goals>
		</execution>
	</executions>
	<configuration>
		<testSources>
			<testSource>
				<directory>${project.basedir}/src/test/groovy</directory>
				<includes>
					<include>**/*.groovy</include>
				</includes>
			</testSource>
			<testSource>
				<directory>${project.build.directory}/generated-test-sources/contractVerifier</directory>
				<includes>
					<include>**/*.groovy</include>
				</includes>
			</testSource>
		</testSources>
	</configuration>
</plugin>

To ensure that provider side is complaint with defined contracts, you need to invoke mvn generateTest test

80.2.11 FAQ with Maven Plugin

80.2.12 Maven Plugin and STS

In case you see the following exception while using STS

STS Exception

when you click on the marker you should see sth like this

 plugin:1.1.0.M1:convert:default-convert:process-test-resources) org.apache.maven.plugin.PluginExecutionException: Execution default-convert of goal org.springframework.cloud:spring-
 cloud-contract-maven-plugin:1.1.0.M1:convert failed. at org.apache.maven.plugin.DefaultBuildPluginManager.executeMojo(DefaultBuildPluginManager.java:145) at
 org.eclipse.m2e.core.internal.embedder.MavenImpl.execute(MavenImpl.java:331) at org.eclipse.m2e.core.internal.embedder.MavenImpl$11.call(MavenImpl.java:1362) at
...
 org.eclipse.core.internal.jobs.Worker.run(Worker.java:55) Caused by: java.lang.NullPointerException at
 org.eclipse.m2e.core.internal.builder.plexusbuildapi.EclipseIncrementalBuildContext.hasDelta(EclipseIncrementalBuildContext.java:53) at
 org.sonatype.plexus.build.incremental.ThreadBuildContext.hasDelta(ThreadBuildContext.java:59) at

In order to fix this issue just provide the following section in your pom.xml

<build>
    <pluginManagement>
        <plugins>
            <!--This plugin's configuration is used to store Eclipse m2e settings
                only. It has no influence on the Maven build itself. -->
            <plugin>
                <groupId>org.eclipse.m2e</groupId>
                <artifactId>lifecycle-mapping</artifactId>
                <version>1.0.0</version>
                <configuration>
                    <lifecycleMappingMetadata>
                        <pluginExecutions>
                             <pluginExecution>
                                <pluginExecutionFilter>
                                    <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
                                    <artifactId>spring-cloud-contract-maven-plugin</artifactId>
                                    <versionRange>[1.0,)</versionRange>
                                    <goals>
                                        <goal>convert</goal>
                                    </goals>
                                </pluginExecutionFilter>
                                <action>
                                    <execute />
                                </action>
                             </pluginExecution>
                        </pluginExecutions>
                    </lifecycleMappingMetadata>
                </configuration>
            </plugin>
        </plugins>
    </pluginManagement>
</build>

80.2.13 Spring Cloud Contract Verifier on consumer side

You can actually use the Spring Cloud Contract Verifier also for the consumer side! You can use the plugin so that it only converts the contracts and generates the stubs. To achieve that you need to configure Spring Cloud Contract Verifier plugin in exactly the same way as in case of provider. You need to copy contracts stored in src/test/resources/contracts and generate WireMock json stubs using: mvn generateStubs command. By default generated WireMock mapping is stored in directory target/mappings. Your project should create from this generated mappings additional artifact with classifier stubs for easy deploy to maven repository.

Sample configuration:

<plugin>
    <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
    <artifactId>spring-cloud-contract-maven-plugin</artifactId>
    <version>${verifier-plugin.version}</version>
    <executions>
        <execution>
            <goals>
                <goal>convert</goal>
                <goal>generateStubs</goal>
            </goals>
        </execution>
    </executions>
</plugin>

When present, json stubs can be used in consumer automated tests.

@RunWith(SpringTestRunner.class)
@SpringBootTest
@AutoConfigureStubRunner
public class LoanApplicationServiceTests {

  @Autowired
  LoanApplicationService service;

  @Test
  public void shouldSuccessfullyApplyForLoan() {
    //given:
 	LoanApplication application =
			new LoanApplication(new Client("12345678901"), 123.123);
    //when:
	LoanApplicationResult loanApplication = service.loanApplication(application);
    // then:
	assertThat(loanApplication.loanApplicationStatus).isEqualTo(LoanApplicationStatus.LOAN_APPLIED);
	assertThat(loanApplication.rejectionReason).isNull();
  }
}

Underneath LoanApplication makes a call to the FraudDetection service. This request is handled by a WireMock server configured using stubs generated by Spring Cloud Contract Verifier.

80.3 Scenarios

It’s possible to handle scenarios with Spring Cloud Contract Verifier. All you need to do is to stick to proper naming convention while creating your contracts. The convention requires to include order number followed by the underscore.

my_contracts_dir\
  scenario1\
    1_login.groovy
    2_showCart.groovy
    3_logout.groovy

Such tree will cause Spring Cloud Contract Verifier generating WireMock’s scenario with name scenario1 and three steps:

  • login marked as Started pointing to:
  • showCart marked as Step1 pointing to:
  • logout marked as Step2 which will close the scenario.

More details about WireMock scenarios can be found under http://wiremock.org/stateful-behaviour.html

Spring Cloud Contract Verifier will also generate tests with guaranteed order of execution.

80.4 Stubs and transitive dependencies

The Maven and Gradle plugin that we’re created are adding the tasks that create the stubs jar for you. What can be problematic is that when reusing the stubs you can by mistake import all of that stub dependencies! When building a Maven artifact even though you have a couple of different jars, all of them share one pom:

├── github-webhook-0.0.1.BUILD-20160903.075506-1-stubs.jar
├── github-webhook-0.0.1.BUILD-20160903.075506-1-stubs.jar.sha1
├── github-webhook-0.0.1.BUILD-20160903.075655-2-stubs.jar
├── github-webhook-0.0.1.BUILD-20160903.075655-2-stubs.jar.sha1
├── github-webhook-0.0.1.BUILD-SNAPSHOT.jar
├── github-webhook-0.0.1.BUILD-SNAPSHOT.pom
├── github-webhook-0.0.1.BUILD-SNAPSHOT-stubs.jar
├── ...
└── ...

There are three possibilities of working with those dependencies so as not to have any issues with transitive dependencies.

Mark all application dependencies as optional

If in the github-webhook application we would mark all of our dependencies as optional, when you include the github-webhook stubs in another application (or when that dependency gets downloaded by Stub Runner) then, since all of the depenencies are optional, they will not get downloaded.

Create a separate artifactid for stubs

If you create a separate artifactid then you can set it up in whatever way you wish. For example by having no dependencies at all.

Exclude dependencies on the consumer side

As a consumer, if you add the stub dependency to your classpath you can explicitly exclude the unwanted dependencies.

81. Spring Cloud Contract Verifier Messaging

Spring Cloud Contract Verifier allows you to verify your application that uses messaging as means of communication. All of our integrations are working with Spring but you can also create one yourself and use it.

81.1 Integrations

You can use one of the four integration configurations:

  • Apache Camel
  • Spring Integration
  • Spring Cloud Stream
  • Spring AMQP

Since we’re using Spring Boot then if you have added one of the aforementioned libraries to the classpath then automatically all the messaging configuration will be set up.

[Important]Important

Remember to put @AutoConfigureMessageVerifier on the base class of your generated tests. Otherwise messaging part of Spring Cloud Contract Verifier will not work.

[Important]Important

If you want to use Spring Cloud Stream remember to add a org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-stream-test-support dependency.

Maven. 

<dependency>
    <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
    <artifactId>spring-cloud-stream-test-support</artifactId>
    <scope>test</scope>
</dependency>

Gradle. 

testCompile "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-stream-test-support"

81.2 Manual Integration Testing

The main interface used by the tests is the org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.messaging.MessageVerifier. It defines how to send and receive messages. You can create your own implementation to achieve the same goal.

In the a test you can inject a ContractVerifierMessageExchange to send and receive messages that follow the contract. Then add @AutoConfigureMessageVerifier to your test, e.g.

@RunWith(SpringTestRunner.class)
@SpringBootTest
@AutoConfigureMessageVerifier
public static class MessagingContractTests {

  @Autowired
  private MessageVerifier verifier;
  ...
}
[Note]Note

If your tests require stubs as well, then @AutoConfigureStubRunner includes the messaging configuration, so you only need the one annotation.

81.3 Publisher side test generation

Having the input or outputMessage sections in your DSL will result in creation of tests on the publisher’s side. By default JUnit tests will be created, however there is also a possibility to create Spock tests.

There are 3 main scenarios that we should take into consideration:

  • Scenario 1: there is no input message that produces an output one. The output message is triggered by a component inside the application (e.g. scheduler)
  • Scenario 2: the input message triggers an output message
  • Scenario 3: the input message is consumed and there is no output message
[Important]Important

The destination passed to messageFrom or sentTo can have different meanings for different messaging implementations. For Stream and Integration it’s first resolved as a destination of a channel, and then if there is no such destination it’s resolved as a channel name. For Camel that’s a certain component (e.x. jms).

Example for Camel:

81.3.1 Scenario 1 (no input message)

For the given contract:

def contractDsl = Contract.make {
	label 'some_label'
	input {
		triggeredBy('bookReturnedTriggered()')
	}
	outputMessage {
		sentTo('activemq:output')
		body('''{ "bookName" : "foo" }''')
		headers {
			header('BOOK-NAME', 'foo')
			messagingContentType(applicationJson())
		}
	}
}

The following JUnit test will be created:

'''
 // when:
  bookReturnedTriggered();

 // then:
  ContractVerifierMessage response = contractVerifierMessaging.receive("activemq:output");
  assertThat(response).isNotNull();
  assertThat(response.getHeader("BOOK-NAME")).isNotNull();
  assertThat(response.getHeader("BOOK-NAME").toString()).isEqualTo("foo");
  assertThat(response.getHeader("contentType")).isNotNull();
  assertThat(response.getHeader("contentType").toString()).isEqualTo("application/json");
 // and:
  DocumentContext parsedJson = JsonPath.parse(contractVerifierObjectMapper.writeValueAsString(response.getPayload()));
  assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("bookName").isEqualTo("foo");
'''

And the following Spock test would be created:

'''
 when:
  bookReturnedTriggered()

 then:
  ContractVerifierMessage response = contractVerifierMessaging.receive('activemq:output')
  assert response != null
  response.getHeader('BOOK-NAME')?.toString()  == 'foo'
  response.getHeader('contentType')?.toString()  == 'application/json'
 and:
  DocumentContext parsedJson = JsonPath.parse(contractVerifierObjectMapper.writeValueAsString(response.payload))
  assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("bookName").isEqualTo("foo")

'''

81.3.2 Scenario 2 (output triggered by input)

For the given contract:

def contractDsl = Contract.make {
	label 'some_label'
	input {
		messageFrom('jms:input')
		messageBody([
				bookName: 'foo'
		])
		messageHeaders {
			header('sample', 'header')
		}
	}
	outputMessage {
		sentTo('jms:output')
		body([
				bookName: 'foo'
		])
		headers {
			header('BOOK-NAME', 'foo')
		}
	}
}

The following JUnit test will be created:

'''
// given:
 ContractVerifierMessage inputMessage = contractVerifierMessaging.create(
  "{\\"bookName\\":\\"foo\\"}"
, headers()
  .header("sample", "header"));

// when:
 contractVerifierMessaging.send(inputMessage, "jms:input");

// then:
 ContractVerifierMessage response = contractVerifierMessaging.receive("jms:output");
 assertThat(response).isNotNull();
 assertThat(response.getHeader("BOOK-NAME")).isNotNull();
 assertThat(response.getHeader("BOOK-NAME").toString()).isEqualTo("foo");
// and:
 DocumentContext parsedJson = JsonPath.parse(contractVerifierObjectMapper.writeValueAsString(response.getPayload()));
 assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("bookName").isEqualTo("foo");
'''

And the following Spock test would be created:

"""\
given:
   ContractVerifierMessage inputMessage = contractVerifierMessaging.create(
    '''{"bookName":"foo"}''',
    ['sample': 'header']
  )

when:
   contractVerifierMessaging.send(inputMessage, 'jms:input')

then:
   ContractVerifierMessage response = contractVerifierMessaging.receive('jms:output')
   assert response !- null
   response.getHeader('BOOK-NAME')?.toString()  == 'foo'
and:
   DocumentContext parsedJson = JsonPath.parse(contractVerifierObjectMapper.writeValueAsString(response.payload))
   assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("bookName").isEqualTo("foo")
"""

81.3.3 Scenario 3 (no output message)

For the given contract:

def contractDsl = Contract.make {
	label 'some_label'
	input {
		messageFrom('jms:delete')
		messageBody([
				bookName: 'foo'
		])
		messageHeaders {
			header('sample', 'header')
		}
		assertThat('bookWasDeleted()')
	}
}

The following JUnit test will be created:

'''
// given:
 ContractVerifierMessage inputMessage = contractVerifierMessaging.create(
	"{\\"bookName\\":\\"foo\\"}"
, headers()
	.header("sample", "header"));

// when:
 contractVerifierMessaging.send(inputMessage, "jms:delete");

// then:
 bookWasDeleted();
'''

And the following Spock test would be created:

'''
given:
	 ContractVerifierMessage inputMessage = contractVerifierMessaging.create(
		\'\'\'{"bookName":"foo"}\'\'\',
		['sample': 'header']
	)

when:
	 contractVerifierMessaging.send(inputMessage, 'jms:delete')

then:
	 noExceptionThrown()
	 bookWasDeleted()
'''

81.4 Consumer Stub Side generation

Unlike the HTTP part - in Messaging we need to publish the Groovy DSL inside the JAR with a stub. Then it’s parsed on the consumer side and proper stubbed routes are created.

For more information please consult the Stub Runner Messaging sections.

Maven. 

<dependencies>
	<dependency>
		<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
		<artifactId>spring-cloud-starter-stream-rabbit</artifactId>
	</dependency>

	<dependency>
		<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
		<artifactId>spring-cloud-starter-contract-stub-runner</artifactId>
		<scope>test</scope>
	</dependency>
	<dependency>
		<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
		<artifactId>spring-cloud-stream-test-support</artifactId>
		<scope>test</scope>
	</dependency>
</dependencies>

<dependencyManagement>
	<dependencies>
		<dependency>
			<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
			<artifactId>spring-cloud-dependencies</artifactId>
			<version>Dalston.BUILD-SNAPSHOT</version>
			<type>pom</type>
			<scope>import</scope>
		</dependency>
	</dependencies>
</dependencyManagement>

Gradle. 

ext {
	contractsDir = file("mappings")
	stubsOutputDirRoot = file("${project.buildDir}/production/${project.name}-stubs/")
}

// Automatically added by plugin:
// copyContracts - copies contracts to the output folder from which JAR will be created
// verifierStubsJar - JAR with a provided stub suffix
// the presented publication is also added by the plugin but you can modify it as you wish

publishing {
	publications {
		stubs(MavenPublication) {
			artifactId "${project.name}-stubs"
			artifact verifierStubsJar
		}
	}
}

82. Spring Cloud Contract Stub Runner

One of the issues that you could have encountered while using Spring Cloud Contract Verifier was to pass the generated WireMock JSON stubs from the server side to the client side (or various clients). The same takes place in terms of client side generation for messaging.

Copying the JSON files / setting the client side for messaging manually is out of the question.

That’s why we’ll introduce Spring Cloud Contract Stub Runner that can download and run the stubs automatically for you.

82.1 Snapshot versions

Add the additional snapshot repository to your build.gradle to use snapshot versions which are automatically uploaded after every successful build:

Maven. 

<repositories>
	<repository>
		<id>spring-snapshots</id>
		<name>Spring Snapshots</name>
		<url>https://repo.spring.io/snapshot</url>
		<snapshots>
			<enabled>true</enabled>
		</snapshots>
	</repository>
	<repository>
		<id>spring-milestones</id>
		<name>Spring Milestones</name>
		<url>https://repo.spring.io/milestone</url>
		<snapshots>
			<enabled>false</enabled>
		</snapshots>
	</repository>
	<repository>
		<id>spring-releases</id>
		<name>Spring Releases</name>
		<url>https://repo.spring.io/release</url>
		<snapshots>
			<enabled>false</enabled>
		</snapshots>
	</repository>
</repositories>
<pluginRepositories>
	<pluginRepository>
		<id>spring-snapshots</id>
		<name>Spring Snapshots</name>
		<url>https://repo.spring.io/snapshot</url>
		<snapshots>
			<enabled>true</enabled>
		</snapshots>
	</pluginRepository>
	<pluginRepository>
		<id>spring-milestones</id>
		<name>Spring Milestones</name>
		<url>https://repo.spring.io/milestone</url>
		<snapshots>
			<enabled>false</enabled>
		</snapshots>
	</pluginRepository>
	<pluginRepository>
		<id>spring-releases</id>
		<name>Spring Releases</name>
		<url>https://repo.spring.io/release</url>
		<snapshots>
			<enabled>false</enabled>
		</snapshots>
	</pluginRepository>
</pluginRepositories>

Gradle. 

buildscript {
	repositories {
		mavenCentral()
		mavenLocal()
		maven { url "http://repo.spring.io/snapshot" }
		maven { url "http://repo.spring.io/milestone" }
		maven { url "http://repo.spring.io/release" }
	}

82.2 Publishing stubs as JARs

The easiest approach would be to centralize the way stubs are kept. For example you can keep them as JARs in a Maven repository.

[Tip]Tip

For both Maven and Gradle the setup comes out of the box. But you can customize it if you want to.

Maven. 

<!-- First disable the default jar setup in the properties section-->
<!-- we don't want the verifier to do a jar for us -->
<spring.cloud.contract.verifier.skip>true</spring.cloud.contract.verifier.skip>

<!-- Next add the assembly plugin to your build -->
<!-- we want the assembly plugin to generate the JAR -->
<plugin>
	<groupId>org.apache.maven.plugins</groupId>
	<artifactId>maven-assembly-plugin</artifactId>
	<executions>
		<execution>
			<id>stub</id>
			<phase>prepare-package</phase>
			<goals>
				<goal>single</goal>
			</goals>
			<inherited>false</inherited>
			<configuration>
				<attach>true</attach>
				<descriptors>
					$../../../../src/assembly/stub.xml
				</descriptors>
			</configuration>
		</execution>
	</executions>
</plugin>

<!-- Finally setup your assembly. Below you can find the contents of src/main/assembly/stub.xml -->
<assembly
	xmlns="http://maven.apache.org/plugins/maven-assembly-plugin/assembly/1.1.3"
	xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
	xsi:schemaLocation="http://maven.apache.org/plugins/maven-assembly-plugin/assembly/1.1.3 http://maven.apache.org/xsd/assembly-1.1.3.xsd">
	<id>stubs</id>
	<formats>
		<format>jar</format>
	</formats>
	<includeBaseDirectory>false</includeBaseDirectory>
	<fileSets>
		<fileSet>
			<directory>src/main/java</directory>
			<outputDirectory>/</outputDirectory>
			<includes>
				<include>**com/example/model/*.*</include>
			</includes>
		</fileSet>
		<fileSet>
			<directory>${project.build.directory}/classes</directory>
			<outputDirectory>/</outputDirectory>
			<includes>
				<include>**com/example/model/*.*</include>
			</includes>
		</fileSet>
		<fileSet>
			<directory>${project.build.directory}/snippets/stubs</directory>
			<outputDirectory>META-INF/${project.groupId}/${project.artifactId}/${project.version}/mappings</outputDirectory>
			<includes>
				<include>**/*</include>
			</includes>
		</fileSet>
		<fileSet>
			<directory>$../../../../src/test/resources/contracts</directory>
			<outputDirectory>META-INF/${project.groupId}/${project.artifactId}/${project.version}/contracts</outputDirectory>
			<includes>
				<include>**/*.groovy</include>
			</includes>
		</fileSet>
	</fileSets>
</assembly>

Gradle. 

ext {
	contractsDir = file("mappings")
	stubsOutputDirRoot = file("${project.buildDir}/production/${project.name}-stubs/")
}

// Automatically added by plugin:
// copyContracts - copies contracts to the output folder from which JAR will be created
// verifierStubsJar - JAR with a provided stub suffix
// the presented publication is also added by the plugin but you can modify it as you wish

publishing {
	publications {
		stubs(MavenPublication) {
			artifactId "${project.name}-stubs"
			artifact verifierStubsJar
		}
	}
}

82.3 Stub Runner Core

Runs stubs for service collaborators. Treating stubs as contracts of services allows to use stub-runner as an implementation of Consumer Driven Contracts.

Stub Runner allows you to automatically download the stubs of the provided dependencies (or pick those from the classpath), start WireMock servers for them and feed them with proper stub definitions. For messaging, special stub routes are defined.

82.3.1 Retrieving stubs

You can pick the following options of acquiring stubs

  • Aether based solution that downloads JARs with stubs from Artifactory / Nexus
  • Classpath scanning solution that searches classpath via pattern to retrieve stubs
  • Write your own implementation of the org.springframework.cloud.contract.stubrunner.StubDownloaderBuilder for full customization

The latter example is described in the Custom Stub Runner section.

Stub downloading

If you provide the stubrunner.repositoryRoot or stubrunner.workOffline flag will be set to true then Stub Runner will connect to the given server and download the required jars. It will then unpack the JAR to a temporary folder and reference those files in further contract processing.

Example:

@AutoConfigureStubRunner(repositoryRoot="http://foo.bar", ids = "com.example:beer-api-producer:+:stubs:8095")

Classpath scanning

If you DON’T provide the stubrunner.repositoryRoot and stubrunner.workOffline flag will be set to false (that’s the default) then classpath will get scanned. Let’s look at the following example:

@AutoConfigureStubRunner(ids = {
    "com.example:beer-api-producer:+:stubs:8095",
    "com.example.foo:bar:1.0.0:superstubs:8096"
})

If you’ve added the dependencies to your classpath

Maven. 

<dependency>
    <groupId>com.example</groupId>
    <artifactId>beer-api-producer-restdocs</artifactId>
    <classifier>stubs</classifier>
    <version>0.0.1-SNAPSHOT</version>
    <scope>test</scope>
    <exclusions>
        <exclusion>
            <groupId>*</groupId>
            <artifactId>*</artifactId>
        </exclusion>
    </exclusions>
</dependency>
<dependency>
    <groupId>com.example.foo</groupId>
    <artifactId>bar</artifactId>
    <classifier>superstubs</classifier>
    <version>1.0.0</version>
    <scope>test</scope>
    <exclusions>
        <exclusion>
            <groupId>*</groupId>
            <artifactId>*</artifactId>
        </exclusion>
    </exclusions>
</dependency>

Gradle. 

testCompile("com.example:beer-api-producer-restdocs:0.0.1-SNAPSHOT:stubs") {
    transitive = false
}
testCompile("com.example.foo:bar:1.0.0:superstubs") {
    transitive = false
}

Then the following locations on your classpath will get scanned. For com.example:beer-api-producer-restdocs

  • /META-INF/com.example/beer-api-producer-restdocs/*/.*
  • /contracts/com.example/beer-api-producer-restdocs/*/.*
  • /mappings/com.example/beer-api-producer-restdocs/*/.*

and com.example.foo:bar

  • /META-INF/com.example.foo/bar/*/.*
  • /contracts/com.example.foo/bar/*/.*
  • /mappings/com.example.foo/bar/*/.*
[Tip]Tip

As you can see you have to explicitly provide the group and artifact ids when packaging the producer stubs.

The producer would setup the contracts like this:

└── src
    └── test
        └── resources
            └── contracts
                └── com.example
                    └── beer-api-producer-restdocs
                        └── nested
                            └── contract3.groovy

To achieve proper stub packaging.

Or using the Maven assembly plugin or Gradle Jar task you have to create the following structure in your stubs jar.

└── META-INF
    └── com.example
        └── beer-api-producer-restdocs
            └── 2.0.0
                ├── contracts
                │   └── nested
                │       └── contract2.groovy
                └── mappings
                    └── mapping.json

By maintaining this structure classpath gets scanned and you can profit from the messaging / HTTP stubs without the need to download artifacts.

82.3.2 Running stubs

Limitations

[Important]Important

There might be a problem with StubRunner shutting down ports between tests. You might have a situation in which you get port conflicts. As long as you use the same context across tests everything works fine. But when the context are different (e.g. different stubs or different profiles) then you have to either use @DirtiesContext to shut down the stub servers, or else run them on different ports per test.

Running using main app

You can set the following options to the main class:

-c, --classifier                Suffix for the jar containing stubs (e.
                                  g. 'stubs' if the stub jar would
                                  have a 'stubs' classifier for stubs:
                                  foobar-stubs ). Defaults to 'stubs'
                                  (default: stubs)
--maxPort, --maxp <Integer>     Maximum port value to be assigned to
                                  the WireMock instance. Defaults to
                                  15000 (default: 15000)
--minPort, --minp <Integer>     Minimum port value to be assigned to
                                  the WireMock instance. Defaults to
                                  10000 (default: 10000)
-p, --password                  Password to user when connecting to
                                  repository
--phost, --proxyHost            Proxy host to use for repository
                                  requests
--pport, --proxyPort [Integer]  Proxy port to use for repository
                                  requests
-r, --root                      Location of a Jar containing server
                                  where you keep your stubs (e.g. http:
                                  //nexus.
                                  net/content/repositories/repository)
-s, --stubs                     Comma separated list of Ivy
                                  representation of jars with stubs.
                                  Eg. groupid:artifactid1,groupid2:
                                  artifactid2:classifier
-u, --username                  Username to user when connecting to
                                  repository
--wo, --workOffline             Switch to work offline. Defaults to
                                  'false'

HTTP Stubs

Stubs are defined in JSON documents, whose syntax is defined in WireMock documentation

Example:

{
    "request": {
        "method": "GET",
        "url": "/ping"
    },
    "response": {
        "status": 200,
        "body": "pong",
        "headers": {
            "Content-Type": "text/plain"
        }
    }
}

Viewing registered mappings

Every stubbed collaborator exposes list of defined mappings under __/admin/ endpoint.

Messaging Stubs

Depending on the provided Stub Runner dependency and the DSL the messaging routes are automatically set up.

82.4 Stub Runner JUnit Rule

Stub Runner comes with a JUnit rule thanks to which you can very easily download and run stubs for given group and artifact id:

@ClassRule public static StubRunnerRule rule = new StubRunnerRule()
		.repoRoot(repoRoot())
		.downloadStub("org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs", "loanIssuance")
		.downloadStub("org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:fraudDetectionServer");

After that rule gets executed Stub Runner connects to your Maven repository and for the given list of dependencies tries to:

  • download them
  • cache them locally
  • unzip them to a temporary folder
  • start a WireMock server for each Maven dependency on a random port from the provided range of ports / provided port
  • feed the WireMock server with all JSON files that are valid WireMock definitions
  • can also send messages (remember to pass an implementation of MessageVerifier interface)

Stub Runner uses Eclipse Aether mechanism to download the Maven dependencies. Check their docs for more information.

Since the StubRunnerRule implements the StubFinder it allows you to find the started stubs:

package org.springframework.cloud.contract.stubrunner;

import java.net.URL;
import java.util.Collection;
import java.util.Map;

import org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract;

public interface StubFinder extends StubTrigger {
	/**
	 * For the given groupId and artifactId tries to find the matching
	 * URL of the running stub.
	 *
	 * @param groupId - might be null. In that case a search only via artifactId takes place
	 * @return URL of a running stub or throws exception if not found
	 */
	URL findStubUrl(String groupId, String artifactId) throws StubNotFoundException;

	/**
	 * For the given Ivy notation {@code [groupId]:artifactId:[version]:[classifier]} tries to
	 * find the matching URL of the running stub. You can also pass only {@code artifactId}.
	 *
	 * @param ivyNotation - Ivy representation of the Maven artifact
	 * @return URL of a running stub or throws exception if not found
	 */
	URL findStubUrl(String ivyNotation) throws StubNotFoundException;

	/**
	 * Returns all running stubs
	 */
	RunningStubs findAllRunningStubs();

	/**
	 * Returns the list of Contracts
	 */
	Map<StubConfiguration, Collection<Contract>> getContracts();
}

Example of usage in Spock tests:

@ClassRule @Shared StubRunnerRule rule = new StubRunnerRule()
		.repoRoot(StubRunnerRuleSpec.getResource("/m2repo/repository").toURI().toString())
		.downloadStub("org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs", "loanIssuance")
		.downloadStub("org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:fraudDetectionServer")

def 'should start WireMock servers'() {
	expect: 'WireMocks are running'
		rule.findStubUrl('org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs', 'loanIssuance') != null
		rule.findStubUrl('loanIssuance') != null
		rule.findStubUrl('loanIssuance') == rule.findStubUrl('org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs', 'loanIssuance')
		rule.findStubUrl('org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:fraudDetectionServer') != null
	and:
		rule.findAllRunningStubs().isPresent('loanIssuance')
		rule.findAllRunningStubs().isPresent('org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs', 'fraudDetectionServer')
		rule.findAllRunningStubs().isPresent('org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:fraudDetectionServer')
	and: 'Stubs were registered'
		"${rule.findStubUrl('loanIssuance').toString()}/name".toURL().text == 'loanIssuance'
		"${rule.findStubUrl('fraudDetectionServer').toString()}/name".toURL().text == 'fraudDetectionServer'
}

Example of usage in JUnit tests:

@Test
public void should_start_wiremock_servers() throws Exception {
	// expect: 'WireMocks are running'
		then(rule.findStubUrl("org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs", "loanIssuance")).isNotNull();
		then(rule.findStubUrl("loanIssuance")).isNotNull();
		then(rule.findStubUrl("loanIssuance")).isEqualTo(rule.findStubUrl("org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs", "loanIssuance"));
		then(rule.findStubUrl("org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:fraudDetectionServer")).isNotNull();
	// and:
		then(rule.findAllRunningStubs().isPresent("loanIssuance")).isTrue();
		then(rule.findAllRunningStubs().isPresent("org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs", "fraudDetectionServer")).isTrue();
		then(rule.findAllRunningStubs().isPresent("org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:fraudDetectionServer")).isTrue();
	// and: 'Stubs were registered'
		then(httpGet(rule.findStubUrl("loanIssuance").toString() + "/name")).isEqualTo("loanIssuance");
		then(httpGet(rule.findStubUrl("fraudDetectionServer").toString() + "/name")).isEqualTo("fraudDetectionServer");
}

Check the Common properties for JUnit and Spring for more information on how to apply global configuration of Stub Runner.

[Important]Important

To use the JUnit rule together with messaging you have to provide an implementation of the MessageVerifier interface to the rule builder (e.g. rule.messageVerifier(new MyMessageVerifier())). If you don’t do this then whenever you try to send a message an exception will be thrown.

82.4.1 Maven settings

The stub downloader honors Maven settings for a different local repository folder. Authentication details for repositories and profiles are currently not taken into account, so you need to specify it using the properties mentioned above.

82.4.2 Providing fixed ports

You can also run your stubs on fixed ports. You can do it in two different ways. One is to pass it in the properties, and the other via fluent API of JUnit rule.

82.4.3 Fluent API

When using the StubRunnerRule you can add a stub to download and then pass the port for the last downloaded stub.

@ClassRule public static StubRunnerRule rule = new StubRunnerRule()
		.repoRoot(repoRoot())
		.downloadStub("org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs", "loanIssuance")
		.withPort(12345)
		.downloadStub("org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:fraudDetectionServer:12346");

You can see that for this example the following test is valid:

then(rule.findStubUrl("loanIssuance")).isEqualTo(URI.create("http://localhost:12345").toURL());
then(rule.findStubUrl("fraudDetectionServer")).isEqualTo(URI.create("http://localhost:12346").toURL());

82.4.4 Stub Runner with Spring

Sets up Spring configuration of the Stub Runner project.

By providing a list of stubs inside your configuration file the Stub Runner automatically downloads and registers in WireMock the selected stubs.

If you want to find the URL of your stubbed dependency you can autowire the StubFinder interface and use its methods as presented below:

@ContextConfiguration(classes = Config, loader = SpringBootContextLoader)
@SpringBootTest(properties = [" stubrunner.cloud.enabled=false",
		"stubrunner.camel.enabled=false",
		'foo=${stubrunner.runningstubs.fraudDetectionServer.port}'])
@AutoConfigureStubRunner
@DirtiesContext
@ActiveProfiles("test")
class StubRunnerConfigurationSpec extends Specification {

	@Autowired StubFinder stubFinder
	@Autowired Environment environment
	@Value('${foo}') Integer foo

	@BeforeClass
	@AfterClass
	void setupProps() {
		System.clearProperty("stubrunner.repository.root")
		System.clearProperty("stubrunner.classifier")
	}

	def 'should start WireMock servers'() {
		expect: 'WireMocks are running'
			stubFinder.findStubUrl('org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs', 'loanIssuance') != null
			stubFinder.findStubUrl('loanIssuance') != null
			stubFinder.findStubUrl('loanIssuance') == stubFinder.findStubUrl('org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs', 'loanIssuance')
			stubFinder.findStubUrl('loanIssuance') == stubFinder.findStubUrl('org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:loanIssuance')
			stubFinder.findStubUrl('org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:loanIssuance:0.0.1-SNAPSHOT') == stubFinder.findStubUrl('org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:loanIssuance:0.0.1-SNAPSHOT:stubs')
			stubFinder.findStubUrl('org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:fraudDetectionServer') != null
		and:
			stubFinder.findAllRunningStubs().isPresent('loanIssuance')
			stubFinder.findAllRunningStubs().isPresent('org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs', 'fraudDetectionServer')
			stubFinder.findAllRunningStubs().isPresent('org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:fraudDetectionServer')
		and: 'Stubs were registered'
			"${stubFinder.findStubUrl('loanIssuance').toString()}/name".toURL().text == 'loanIssuance'
			"${stubFinder.findStubUrl('fraudDetectionServer').toString()}/name".toURL().text == 'fraudDetectionServer'
	}

	def 'should throw an exception when stub is not found'() {
		when:
			stubFinder.findStubUrl('nonExistingService')
		then:
			thrown(StubNotFoundException)
		when:
			stubFinder.findStubUrl('nonExistingGroupId', 'nonExistingArtifactId')
		then:
			thrown(StubNotFoundException)
	}

	def 'should register started servers as environment variables'() {
		expect:
			environment.getProperty("stubrunner.runningstubs.loanIssuance.port") != null
			stubFinder.findAllRunningStubs().getPort("loanIssuance") == (environment.getProperty("stubrunner.runningstubs.loanIssuance.port") as Integer)
		and:
			environment.getProperty("stubrunner.runningstubs.fraudDetectionServer.port") != null
			stubFinder.findAllRunningStubs().getPort("fraudDetectionServer") == (environment.getProperty("stubrunner.runningstubs.fraudDetectionServer.port") as Integer)
	}

	def 'should be able to interpolate a running stub in the passed test property'() {
		given:
			int fraudPort = stubFinder.findAllRunningStubs().getPort("fraudDetectionServer")
		expect:
			fraudPort > 0
			environment.getProperty("foo", Integer) == fraudPort
			foo == fraudPort
	}

	@Configuration
	@EnableAutoConfiguration
	static class Config {}
}

for the following configuration file:

stubrunner:
  repositoryRoot: classpath:m2repo/repository/
  ids:
    - org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:loanIssuance
    - org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:fraudDetectionServer
    - org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:bootService

Instead of using the properties you can also use the properties inside the @AutoConfigureStubRunner. Below you can find an example of achieving the same result by setting values on the annotation.

@AutoConfigureStubRunner(
		ids = ["org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:loanIssuance",
		"org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:fraudDetectionServer",
		"org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:bootService"],
		repositoryRoot = "classpath:m2repo/repository/")

Stub Runner Spring registers environment variables in the following manner for every registered WireMock server. Example for Stub Runner ids com.example:foo, com.example:bar.

  • stubrunner.runningstubs.foo.port
  • stubrunner.runningstubs.bar.port

Which you can reference in your code.

82.5 Stub Runner Spring Cloud

Stub Runner can integrate with Spring Cloud.

For real life examples you can check the

82.5.1 Stubbing Service Discovery

The most important feature of Stub Runner Spring Cloud is the fact that it’s stubbing

  • DiscoveryClient
  • Ribbon ServerList

that means that regardless of the fact whether you’re using Zookeeper, Consul, Eureka or anything else, you don’t need that in your tests. We’re starting WireMock instances of your dependencies and we’re telling your application whenever you’re using Feign, load balanced RestTemplate or DiscoveryClient directly, to call those stubbed servers instead of calling the real Service Discovery tool.

For example this test will pass

def 'should make service discovery work'() {
	expect: 'WireMocks are running'
		"${stubFinder.findStubUrl('loanIssuance').toString()}/name".toURL().text == 'loanIssuance'
		"${stubFinder.findStubUrl('fraudDetectionServer').toString()}/name".toURL().text == 'fraudDetectionServer'
	and: 'Stubs can be reached via load service discovery'
		restTemplate.getForObject('http://loanIssuance/name', String) == 'loanIssuance'
		restTemplate.getForObject('http://someNameThatShouldMapFraudDetectionServer/name', String) == 'fraudDetectionServer'
}

for the following configuration file

stubrunner:
  idsToServiceIds:
    ivyNotation: someValueInsideYourCode
    fraudDetectionServer: someNameThatShouldMapFraudDetectionServer

Test profiles and service discovery

In your integration tests you typically don’t want to call neither a discovery service (e.g. Eureka) or Config Server. That’s why you create an additional test configuration in which you want to disable these features.

Due to certain limitations of spring-cloud-commons to achieve this you have disable these properties via a static block like presented below (example for Eureka)

    //Hack to work around https://github.com/spring-cloud/spring-cloud-commons/issues/156
    static {
        System.setProperty("eureka.client.enabled", "false");
        System.setProperty("spring.cloud.config.failFast", "false");
    }

82.5.2 Additional Configuration

You can match the artifactId of the stub with the name of your app by using the stubrunner.idsToServiceIds: map. You can disable Stub Runner Ribbon support by providing: stubrunner.cloud.ribbon.enabled equal to false You can disable Stub Runner support by providing: stubrunner.cloud.enabled equal to false

[Tip]Tip

By default all service discovery will be stubbed. That means that regardless of the fact if you have an existing DiscoveryClient its results will be ignored. However, if you want to reuse it, just set stubrunner.cloud.delegate.enabled to true and then your existing DiscoveryClient results will be merged with the stubbed ones.

82.6 Stub Runner Boot Application

Spring Cloud Contract Stub Runner Boot is a Spring Boot application that exposes REST endpoints to trigger the messaging labels and to access started WireMock servers.

One of the use-cases is to run some smoke (end to end) tests on a deployed application. You can check out the Spring Cloud Pipelines project for more information.

82.6.1 How to use it?

Stub Runner Server

Just add the

compile "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-starter-stub-runner"

Annotate a class with @EnableStubRunnerServer, build a fat-jar and you’re ready to go!

For the properties check the Stub Runner Spring section.

Spring Cloud CLI

Starting from 1.4.0.RELEASE version of the Spring Cloud CLI project you can start Stub Runner Boot by executing spring cloud stubrunner.

In order to pass the configuration just create a stubrunner.yml file in the current working directory or a subdirectory called config or in ~/.spring-cloud. The file could look like this (example for running stubs installed locally)

stubrunner.yml. 

stubrunner:
  workOffline: true
  ids:
    - com.example:beer-api-producer:+:9876

and then just call spring cloud stubrunner from your terminal window to start the Stub Runner server. It will be available at port 8750.

82.6.2 Endpoints

HTTP

  • GET /stubs - returns a list of all running stubs in ivy:integer notation
  • GET /stubs/{ivy} - returns a port for the given ivy notation (when calling the endpoint ivy can also be artifactId only)

Messaging

For Messaging

  • GET /triggers - returns a list of all running labels in ivy : [ label1, label2 …​] notation
  • POST /triggers/{label} - executes a trigger with label
  • POST /triggers/{ivy}/{label} - executes a trigger with label for the given ivy notation (when calling the endpoint ivy can also be artifactId only)

82.6.3 Example

@ContextConfiguration(classes = StubRunnerBoot, loader = SpringBootContextLoader)
@SpringBootTest(properties = "spring.cloud.zookeeper.enabled=false")
@ActiveProfiles("test")
class StubRunnerBootSpec extends Specification {

	@Autowired StubRunning stubRunning

	def setup() {
		RestAssuredMockMvc.standaloneSetup(new HttpStubsController(stubRunning),
				new TriggerController(stubRunning))
	}

	def 'should return a list of running stub servers in "full ivy:port" notation'() {
		when:
			String response = RestAssuredMockMvc.get('/stubs').body.asString()
		then:
			def root = new JsonSlurper().parseText(response)
			root.'org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:bootService:0.0.1-SNAPSHOT:stubs' instanceof Integer
	}

	def 'should return a port on which a [#stubId] stub is running'() {
		when:
			def response = RestAssuredMockMvc.get("/stubs/${stubId}")
		then:
			response.statusCode == 200
			response.body.as(Integer) > 0
		where:
			stubId << ['org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:bootService:+:stubs',
					   'org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:bootService:0.0.1-SNAPSHOT:stubs',
					   'org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:bootService:+',
					   'org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:bootService',
					   'bootService']
	}

	def 'should return 404 when missing stub was called'() {
		when:
			def response = RestAssuredMockMvc.get("/stubs/a:b:c:d")
		then:
			response.statusCode == 404
	}

	def 'should return a list of messaging labels that can be triggered when version and classifier are passed'() {
		when:
			String response = RestAssuredMockMvc.get('/triggers').body.asString()
		then:
			def root = new JsonSlurper().parseText(response)
			root.'org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:bootService:0.0.1-SNAPSHOT:stubs'?.containsAll(["delete_book","return_book_1","return_book_2"])
	}

	def 'should trigger a messaging label'() {
		given:
			StubRunning stubRunning = Mock()
			RestAssuredMockMvc.standaloneSetup(new HttpStubsController(stubRunning), new TriggerController(stubRunning))
		when:
			def response = RestAssuredMockMvc.post("/triggers/delete_book")
		then:
			response.statusCode == 200
		and:
			1 * stubRunning.trigger('delete_book')
	}

	def 'should trigger a messaging label for a stub with [#stubId] ivy notation'() {
		given:
			StubRunning stubRunning = Mock()
			RestAssuredMockMvc.standaloneSetup(new HttpStubsController(stubRunning), new TriggerController(stubRunning))
		when:
			def response = RestAssuredMockMvc.post("/triggers/$stubId/delete_book")
		then:
			response.statusCode == 200
		and:
			1 * stubRunning.trigger(stubId, 'delete_book')
		where:
			stubId << ['org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:bootService:stubs', 'org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:bootService', 'bootService']
	}

	def 'should throw exception when trigger is missing'() {
		when:
			RestAssuredMockMvc.post("/triggers/missing_label")
		then:
			Exception e = thrown(Exception)
			e.message.contains("Exception occurred while trying to return [missing_label] label.")
			e.message.contains("Available labels are")
			e.message.contains("org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:loanIssuance:0.0.1-SNAPSHOT:stubs=[]")
			e.message.contains("org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:bootService:0.0.1-SNAPSHOT:stubs=")
	}

}

82.6.4 Stub Runner Boot with Service Discovery

One of the possibilities of using Stub Runner Boot is to use it as a feed of stubs for "smoke-tests". What does it mean? Let’s assume that you don’t want to deploy 50 microservice to a test environment in order to check if your application is working fine. You’ve already executed a suite of tests during the build process but you would also like to ensure that the packaging of your application is fine. What you can do is to deploy your application to an environment, start it and run a couple of tests on it to see if it’s working fine. We can call those tests smoke-tests since their idea is to check only a handful of testing scenarios.

The problem with this approach is such that if you’re doing microservices most likely you’re using a service discovery tool. Stub Runner Boot allows you to solve this issue by starting the required stubs and register them in a service discovery tool. Let’s take a look at an example of such a setup with Eureka. Let’s assume that Eureka was already running.

@SpringBootApplication
@EnableStubRunnerServer
@EnableEurekaClient
@AutoConfigureStubRunner
public class StubRunnerBootEurekaExample {

	public static void main(String[] args) {
		SpringApplication.run(StubRunnerBootEurekaExample.class, args);
	}

}

As you can see we want to start a Stub Runner Boot server @EnableStubRunnerServer, enable Eureka client @EnableEurekaClient and we want to have the stub runner feature turned on @AutoConfigureStubRunner.

Now let’s assume that we want to start this application so that the stubs get automatically registered. We can do it by running the app java -jar ${SYSTEM_PROPS} stub-runner-boot-eureka-example.jar where ${SYSTEM_PROPS} would contain the following list of properties

-Dstubrunner.repositoryRoot=http://repo.spring.io/snapshots (1)
-Dstubrunner.cloud.stubbed.discovery.enabled=false (2)
-Dstubrunner.ids=org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:loanIssuance,org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:fraudDetectionServer,org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:bootService (3)
-Dstubrunner.idsToServiceIds.fraudDetectionServer=someNameThatShouldMapFraudDetectionServer (4)

(1) - we tell Stub Runner where all the stubs reside
(2) - we don't want the default behaviour where the discovery service is stubbed. That's why the stub registration will be picked
(3) - we provide a list of stubs to download
(4) - we provide a list of artifactId to serviceId mapping

That way your deployed application can send requests to started WireMock servers via the service discovery. Most likely points 1-3 could be set by default in application.yml cause they are not likely to change. That way you can provide only the list of stubs to download whenever you start the Stub Runner Boot.

82.7 Stubs Per Consumer

There are cases in which 2 consumers of the same endpoint want to have 2 different responses.

[Tip]Tip

This approach also allows you to immediately know which consumer is using which part of your API. You can remove part of a response that your API produces and you can see which of your autogenerated tests fails. If none fails then you can safely delete that part of the response cause nobody is using it.

Let’s look at the following example for contract defined for the producer called producer. There are 2 consumers: foo-consumer and bar-consumer.

Consumer foo-service

request {
   url '/foo'
   method GET()
}
response {
    status 200
    body(
       foo: "foo"
    }
}

Consumer bar-service

request {
   url '/foo'
   method GET()
}
response {
    status 200
    body(
       bar: "bar"
    }
}

You can’t produce for the same request 2 different responses. That’s why you can properly package the contracts and then profit from the stubsPerConsumer feature.

On the producer side the consumers can have a folder that contains contracts related only to them. By setting the stubrunner.stubs-per-consumer flag to true we no longer register all stubs but only those that correspond to the consumer application’s name. In other words we’ll scan the path of every stub and if it contains the subfolder with name of the consumer in the path only then will it get registered.

On the foo producer side the contracts would look like this

.
└── contracts
    ├── bar-consumer
    │   ├── bookReturnedForBar.groovy
    │   └── shouldCallBar.groovy
    └── foo-consumer
        ├── bookReturnedForFoo.groovy
        └── shouldCallFoo.groovy

Being the bar-consumer consumer you can either set the spring.application.name or the stubrunner.consumer-name to bar-consumer Or set the test as follows:

@ContextConfiguration(classes = Config, loader = SpringBootContextLoader)
@SpringBootTest(properties = ["spring.application.name=bar-consumer"])
@AutoConfigureStubRunner(ids = "org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:producerWithMultipleConsumers",
		repositoryRoot = "classpath:m2repo/repository/",
		stubsPerConsumer = true)
@DirtiesContext
class StubRunnerStubsPerConsumerSpec extends Specification {
...
}

Then only the stubs registered under a path that contains the bar-consumer in its name (i.e. those from the src/test/resources/contracts/bar-consumer/some/contracts/…​ folder) will be allowed to be referenced.

Or set the consumer name explicitly

@ContextConfiguration(classes = Config, loader = SpringBootContextLoader)
@SpringBootTest
@AutoConfigureStubRunner(ids = "org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:producerWithMultipleConsumers",
		repositoryRoot = "classpath:m2repo/repository/",
		consumerName = "foo-consumer",
		stubsPerConsumer = true)
@DirtiesContext
class StubRunnerStubsPerConsumerWithConsumerNameSpec extends Specification {
...
}

Then only the stubs registered under a path that contains the foo-consumer in its name (i.e. those from the src/test/resources/contracts/foo-consumer/some/contracts/…​ folder) will be allowed to be referenced.

You can check out issue 224 for more information about the reasons behind this change.

82.8 Common

82.8.1 Common properties for JUnit and Spring

Some of the properties that are repetitive can be set using system properties or configuration properties (for Spring). Here are their names with their default values:

Property nameDefault valueDescription

stubrunner.minPort

10000

Minimal value of a port for a started WireMock with stubs

stubrunner.maxPort

15000

Minimal value of a port for a started WireMock with stubs

stubrunner.repositoryRoot

 

Maven repo url. If blank then will call the local maven repo

stubrunner.classifier

stubs

Default classifier for the stub artifacts

stubrunner.workOffline

false

If true then will not contact any remote repositories to download stubs

stubrunner.ids

 

Array of Ivy notation stubs to download

stubrunner.username

 

Optional username to access the tool that stores the JARs with stubs

stubrunner.password

 

Optional password to access the tool that stores the JARs with stubs

stubrunner.stubsPerConsumer

false

Set to true if you want to use different stubs per each consumer instead of registering all stubs for every consumer

stubrunner.consumerName

 

If you want to use stubs per consumer and want to override the consumer name just change this value

82.8.2 Stub runner stubs ids

You can provide the stubs to download via the stubrunner.ids system property. They follow the following pattern:

groupId:artifactId:version:classifier:port

version, classifier and port are optional.

  • If you don’t provide the port then a random one will be picked
  • If you don’t provide the classifier then the default one will be taken. (NOTE that you can pass an empty classifier like this groupId:artifactId:version:)
  • If you don’t provide the version then the + will be passed and the latest one will be downloaded

Where port means the port of the WireMock server.

[Important]Important

Starting from version 1.0.4 as a version you can provide a range of versions that you would like the Stub Runner to take into consideration. You can read more about the Aether versioning ranges here.

Taken from Aether Docs:

This scheme accepts versions of any form, interpreting a version as a sequence of numeric and alphabetic segments. The characters '-', '_', and '.' as well as the mere transitions from digit to letter and vice versa delimit the version segments. Delimiters are treated as equivalent.

Numeric segments are compared mathematically, alphabetic segments are compared lexicographically and case-insensitively. However, the following qualifier strings are recognized and treated specially: "alpha" = "a" < "beta" = "b" < "milestone" = "m" < "cr" = "rc" < "snapshot" < "final" = "ga" < "sp". All of those well-known qualifiers are considered smaller/older than other strings. An empty segment/string is equivalent to 0.

In addition to the above mentioned qualifiers, the tokens "min" and "max" may be used as final version segment to denote the smallest/greatest version having a given prefix. For example, "1.2.min" denotes the smallest version in the 1.2 line, "1.2.max" denotes the greatest version in the 1.2 line. A version range of the form "[M.N.*]" is short for "[M.N.min, M.N.max]".

Numbers and strings are considered incomparable against each other. Where version segments of different kind would collide, comparison will instead assume that the previous segments are padded with trailing 0 or "ga" segments, respectively, until the kind mismatch is resolved, e.g. "1-alpha" = "1.0.0-alpha" < "1.0.1-ga" = "1.0.1".

83. Stub Runner for Messaging

Stub Runner has the functionality to run the published stubs in memory. It can integrate with the following frameworks out of the box

  • Spring Integration
  • Spring Cloud Stream
  • Apache Camel
  • Spring AMQP

It also provides points of entry to integrate with any other solution on the market.

[Important]Important

If you have multiple frameworks on the classpath Stub Runner will need to define which one should be used. Let’s assume that you have both AMQP, Spring Cloud Stream and Spring Integration on the classpath. Then you need to set stubrunner.stream.enabled=false and stubrunner.integration.enabled=false. That way the only remaining framework is Spring AMQP.

83.1 Stub triggering

To trigger a message it’s enough to use the StubTrigger interface:

package org.springframework.cloud.contract.stubrunner;

import java.util.Collection;
import java.util.Map;

public interface StubTrigger {

	/**
	 * Triggers an event by a given label for a given {@code groupid:artifactid} notation. You can use only {@code artifactId} too.
	 *
	 * Feature related to messaging.
	 *
	 * @return true - if managed to run a trigger
	 */
	boolean trigger(String ivyNotation, String labelName);

	/**
	 * Triggers an event by a given label.
	 *
	 * Feature related to messaging.
	 *
	 * @return true - if managed to run a trigger
	 */
	boolean trigger(String labelName);

	/**
	 * Triggers all possible events.
	 *
	 * Feature related to messaging.
	 *
	 * @return true - if managed to run a trigger
	 */
	boolean trigger();

	/**
	 * Returns a mapping of ivy notation of a dependency to all the labels it has.
	 *
	 * Feature related to messaging.
	 */
	Map<String, Collection<String>> labels();
}

For convenience the StubFinder interface extends StubTrigger so it’s enough to use only one in your tests.

StubTrigger gives you the following options to trigger a message:

83.1.1 Trigger by label

stubFinder.trigger('return_book_1')

83.1.2 Trigger by group and artifact ids

stubFinder.trigger('org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:camelService', 'return_book_1')

83.1.3 Trigger by artifact ids

stubFinder.trigger('camelService', 'return_book_1')

83.1.4 Trigger all messages

stubFinder.trigger()

83.2 Stub Runner Camel

Spring Cloud Contract Verifier Stub Runner’s messaging module gives you an easy way to integrate with Apache Camel. For the provided artifacts it will automatically download the stubs and register the required routes.

83.2.1 Adding it to the project

It’s enough to have both Apache Camel and Spring Cloud Contract Stub Runner on classpath. Remember to annotate your test class with @AutoConfigureStubRunner.

83.2.2 Disabling the functionality

If you need to disable this functionality just pass stubrunner.camel.enabled=false property.

83.2.3 Examples

Stubs structure

Let us assume that we have the following Maven repository with a deployed stubs for the camelService application.

└── .m2
    └── repository
        └── io
            └── codearte
                └── accurest
                    └── stubs
                        └── camelService
                            ├── 0.0.1-SNAPSHOT
                            │   ├── camelService-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT.pom
                            │   ├── camelService-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT-stubs.jar
                            │   └── maven-metadata-local.xml
                            └── maven-metadata-local.xml

And the stubs contain the following structure:

├── META-INF
│   └── MANIFEST.MF
└── repository
    ├── accurest
    │   ├── bookDeleted.groovy
    │   ├── bookReturned1.groovy
    │   └── bookReturned2.groovy
    └── mappings

Let’s consider the following contracts (let' number it with 1):

Contract.make {
	label 'return_book_1'
	input {
		triggeredBy('bookReturnedTriggered()')
	}
	outputMessage {
		sentTo('jms:output')
		body('''{ "bookName" : "foo" }''')
		headers {
			header('BOOK-NAME', 'foo')
		}
	}
}

and number 2

Contract.make {
	label 'return_book_2'
	input {
		messageFrom('jms:input')
		messageBody([
				bookName: 'foo'
		])
		messageHeaders {
			header('sample', 'header')
		}
	}
	outputMessage {
		sentTo('jms:output')
		body([
				bookName: 'foo'
		])
		headers {
			header('BOOK-NAME', 'foo')
		}
	}
}

Scenario 1 (no input message)

So as to trigger a message via the return_book_1 label we’ll use the StubTigger interface as follows

stubFinder.trigger('return_book_1')

Next we’ll want to listen to the output of the message sent to jms:output

Exchange receivedMessage = camelContext.createConsumerTemplate().receive('jms:output', 5000)

And the received message would pass the following assertions

receivedMessage != null
assertThatBodyContainsBookNameFoo(receivedMessage.in.body)
receivedMessage.in.headers.get('BOOK-NAME') == 'foo'

Scenario 2 (output triggered by input)

Since the route is set for you it’s enough to just send a message to the jms:output destination.

camelContext.createProducerTemplate().sendBodyAndHeaders('jms:input', new BookReturned('foo'), [sample: 'header'])

Next we’ll want to listen to the output of the message sent to jms:output

Exchange receivedMessage = camelContext.createConsumerTemplate().receive('jms:output', 5000)

And the received message would pass the following assertions

receivedMessage != null
assertThatBodyContainsBookNameFoo(receivedMessage.in.body)
receivedMessage.in.headers.get('BOOK-NAME') == 'foo'

Scenario 3 (input with no output)

Since the route is set for you it’s enough to just send a message to the jms:output destination.

camelContext.createProducerTemplate().sendBodyAndHeaders('jms:delete', new BookReturned('foo'), [sample: 'header'])

83.3 Stub Runner Integration

Spring Cloud Contract Verifier Stub Runner’s messaging module gives you an easy way to integrate with Spring Integration. For the provided artifacts it will automatically download the stubs and register the required routes.

83.3.1 Adding it to the project

It’s enough to have both Spring Integration and Spring Cloud Contract Stub Runner on classpath. Remember to annotate your test class with @AutoConfigureStubRunner.

83.3.2 Disabling the functionality

If you need to disable this functionality just pass stubrunner.integration.enabled=false property.

83.3.3 Examples

Stubs structure

Let us assume that we have the following Maven repository with a deployed stubs for the integrationService application.

└── .m2
    └── repository
        └── io
            └── codearte
                └── accurest
                    └── stubs
                        └── integrationService
                            ├── 0.0.1-SNAPSHOT
                            │   ├── integrationService-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT.pom
                            │   ├── integrationService-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT-stubs.jar
                            │   └── maven-metadata-local.xml
                            └── maven-metadata-local.xml

And the stubs contain the following structure:

├── META-INF
│   └── MANIFEST.MF
└── repository
    ├── accurest
    │   ├── bookDeleted.groovy
    │   ├── bookReturned1.groovy
    │   └── bookReturned2.groovy
    └── mappings

Let’s consider the following contracts (let' number it with 1):

Contract.make {
	label 'return_book_1'
	input {
		triggeredBy('bookReturnedTriggered()')
	}
	outputMessage {
		sentTo('output')
		body('''{ "bookName" : "foo" }''')
		headers {
			header('BOOK-NAME', 'foo')
		}
	}
}

and number 2

Contract.make {
	label 'return_book_2'
	input {
		messageFrom('input')
		messageBody([
				bookName: 'foo'
		])
		messageHeaders {
			header('sample', 'header')
		}
	}
	outputMessage {
		sentTo('output')
		body([
				bookName: 'foo'
		])
		headers {
			header('BOOK-NAME', 'foo')
		}
	}
}

and the following Spring Integration Route:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<beans:beans xmlns="http://www.springframework.org/schema/integration"
			 xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
			 xmlns:beans="http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans"
			 xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans
			http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans/spring-beans.xsd
			http://www.springframework.org/schema/integration
			http://www.springframework.org/schema/integration/spring-integration.xsd">


	<!-- REQUIRED FOR TESTING -->
	<bridge input-channel="output"
			output-channel="outputTest"/>

	<channel id="outputTest">
		<queue/>
	</channel>

</beans:beans>

Scenario 1 (no input message)

So as to trigger a message via the return_book_1 label we’ll use the StubTigger interface as follows

stubFinder.trigger('return_book_1')

Next we’ll want to listen to the output of the message sent to output

Message<?> receivedMessage = messaging.receive('outputTest')

And the received message would pass the following assertions

receivedMessage != null
assertJsons(receivedMessage.payload)
receivedMessage.headers.get('BOOK-NAME') == 'foo'

Scenario 2 (output triggered by input)

Since the route is set for you it’s enough to just send a message to the output destination.

messaging.send(new BookReturned('foo'), [sample: 'header'], 'input')

Next we’ll want to listen to the output of the message sent to output

Message<?> receivedMessage = messaging.receive('outputTest')

And the received message would pass the following assertions

receivedMessage != null
assertJsons(receivedMessage.payload)
receivedMessage.headers.get('BOOK-NAME') == 'foo'

Scenario 3 (input with no output)

Since the route is set for you it’s enough to just send a message to the input destination.

messaging.send(new BookReturned('foo'), [sample: 'header'], 'delete')

83.4 Stub Runner Stream

Spring Cloud Contract Verifier Stub Runner’s messaging module gives you an easy way to integrate with Spring Stream. For the provided artifacts it will automatically download the stubs and register the required routes.

[Warning]Warning

In Stub Runner’s integration with Stream the messageFrom or sentTo Strings are resolved first as a destination of a channel, and then if there is no such destination it’s resolved as a channel name.

[Important]Important

If you want to use Spring Cloud Stream remember to add a org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-stream-test-support dependency.

Maven. 

<dependency>
    <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
    <artifactId>spring-cloud-stream-test-support</artifactId>
    <scope>test</scope>
</dependency>

Gradle. 

testCompile "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-stream-test-support"

83.4.1 Adding it to the project

It’s enough to have both Spring Cloud Stream and Spring Cloud Contract Stub Runner on classpath. Remember to annotate your test class with @AutoConfigureStubRunner.

83.4.2 Disabling the functionality

If you need to disable this functionality just pass stubrunner.stream.enabled=false property.

83.4.3 Examples

Stubs structure

Let us assume that we have the following Maven repository with a deployed stubs for the streamService application.

└── .m2
    └── repository
        └── io
            └── codearte
                └── accurest
                    └── stubs
                        └── streamService
                            ├── 0.0.1-SNAPSHOT
                            │   ├── streamService-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT.pom
                            │   ├── streamService-0.0.1-SNAPSHOT-stubs.jar
                            │   └── maven-metadata-local.xml
                            └── maven-metadata-local.xml

And the stubs contain the following structure:

├── META-INF
│   └── MANIFEST.MF
└── repository
    ├── accurest
    │   ├── bookDeleted.groovy
    │   ├── bookReturned1.groovy
    │   └── bookReturned2.groovy
    └── mappings

Let’s consider the following contracts (let' number it with 1):

Contract.make {
	label 'return_book_1'
	input { triggeredBy('bookReturnedTriggered()') }
	outputMessage {
		sentTo('returnBook')
		body('''{ "bookName" : "foo" }''')
		headers { header('BOOK-NAME', 'foo') }
	}
}

and number 2

Contract.make {
	label 'return_book_2'
	input {
		messageFrom('bookStorage')
		messageBody([
			bookName: 'foo'
		])
		messageHeaders { header('sample', 'header') }
	}
	outputMessage {
		sentTo('returnBook')
		body([
			bookName: 'foo'
		])
		headers { header('BOOK-NAME', 'foo') }
	}
}

and the following Spring configuration:

stubrunner.repositoryRoot: classpath:m2repo/repository/
stubrunner.ids: org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs:streamService:0.0.1-SNAPSHOT:stubs

spring:
  cloud:
    stream:
      bindings:
        output:
          destination: returnBook
        input:
          destination: bookStorage

server:
  port: 0

debug: true

Scenario 1 (no input message)

So as to trigger a message via the return_book_1 label we’ll use the StubTrigger interface as follows

stubFinder.trigger('return_book_1')

Next we’ll want to listen to the output of the message sent to a channel whose destination is returnBook

Message<?> receivedMessage = messaging.receive('returnBook')

And the received message would pass the following assertions

receivedMessage != null
assertJsons(receivedMessage.payload)
receivedMessage.headers.get('BOOK-NAME') == 'foo'

Scenario 2 (output triggered by input)

Since the route is set for you it’s enough to just send a message to the bookStorage destination.

messaging.send(new BookReturned('foo'), [sample: 'header'], 'bookStorage')

Next we’ll want to listen to the output of the message sent to returnBook

Message<?> receivedMessage = messaging.receive('returnBook')

And the received message would pass the following assertions

receivedMessage != null
assertJsons(receivedMessage.payload)
receivedMessage.headers.get('BOOK-NAME') == 'foo'

Scenario 3 (input with no output)

Since the route is set for you it’s enough to just send a message to the output destination.

messaging.send(new BookReturned('foo'), [sample: 'header'], 'delete')

83.5 Stub Runner Spring AMQP

Spring Cloud Contract Verifier Stub Runner’s messaging module provides an easy way to integrate with Spring AMQP’s Rabbit Template. For the provided artifacts it will automatically download the stubs and register the required routes.

The integration tries to work standalone, that is without interaction with a running RabbitMQ message broker. It expects a RabbitTemplate on the application context and uses it as a spring boot test @SpyBean. Thus it can use the mockito spy functionality to verify and introspect messages sent by the application.

On the message consumer side, it considers all @RabbitListener annotated endpoints as well as all `SimpleMessageListenerContainer`s on the application context.

As messages are usually sent to exchanges in AMQP the message contract contains the exchange name as the destination. Message listeners on the other side are bound to queues. Bindings connect an exchange to a queue. If message contracts are triggered the Spring AMQP stub runner integration will look for bindings on the application context that match this exchange. Then it collects the queues from the Spring exchanges and tries to find messages listeners bound to these queues. The message is triggered to all matching message listeners.

83.5.1 Adding it to the project

It’s enough to have both Spring AMQP and Spring Cloud Contract Stub Runner on the classpath and set the property stubrunner.amqp.enabled=true. Remember to annotate your test class with @AutoConfigureStubRunner.

[Important]Important

If you already have Stream and Integration on the classpath you need to disable them explicitly via stubrunner.stream.enabled=false and stubrunner.integration.enabled=false properties

83.5.2 Examples

Stubs structure

Let us assume that we have the following Maven repository with a deployed stubs for the spring-cloud-contract-amqp-test application.

└── .m2
    └── repository
        └── com
            └── example
                └── spring-cloud-contract-amqp-test
                    ├── 0.4.0-SNAPSHOT
                    │   ├── spring-cloud-contract-amqp-test-0.4.0-SNAPSHOT.pom
                    │   ├── spring-cloud-contract-amqp-test-0.4.0-SNAPSHOT-stubs.jar
                    │   └── maven-metadata-local.xml
                    └── maven-metadata-local.xml

And the stubs contain the following structure:

├── META-INF
│   └── MANIFEST.MF
└── contracts
    └── shouldProduceValidPersonData.groovy

Let’s consider the following contract:

Contract.make {
    // Human readable description
    description 'Should produce valid person data'
    // Label by means of which the output message can be triggered
    label 'contract-test.person.created.event'
    // input to the contract
    input {
        // the contract will be triggered by a method
        triggeredBy('createPerson()')
    }
    // output message of the contract
    outputMessage {
        // destination to which the output message will be sent
        sentTo 'contract-test.exchange'
        headers {
            header('contentType': 'application/json')
            header('__TypeId__': 'org.springframework.cloud.contract.stubrunner.messaging.amqp.Person')
        }
        // the body of the output message
        body ([
                id: $(consumer(9), producer(regex("[0-9]+"))),
                name: "me"
        ])
    }
}

and the following Spring configuration:

stubrunner:
  repositoryRoot: classpath:m2repo/repository/
  ids: org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.stubs.amqp:spring-cloud-contract-amqp-test:0.4.0-SNAPSHOT:stubs
  amqp:
    enabled: true
server:
  port: 0

Triggering the message

So to trigger a message using the contract above we’ll use the StubTrigger interface as follows.

stubTrigger.trigger("contract-test.person.created.event")

The message has the destination contract-test.exchange so the Spring AMQP stub runner integration looks for bindings related to this exchange.

@Bean
public Binding binding() {
	return BindingBuilder.bind(new Queue("test.queue")).to(new DirectExchange("contract-test.exchange")).with("#");
}

The binding definition binds the queue test.queue. So the following listener definition is a match and is invoked with the contract message.

@Bean
public SimpleMessageListenerContainer simpleMessageListenerContainer(ConnectionFactory connectionFactory,
																		MessageListenerAdapter listenerAdapter) {
	SimpleMessageListenerContainer container = new SimpleMessageListenerContainer();
	container.setConnectionFactory(connectionFactory);
	container.setQueueNames("test.queue");
	container.setMessageListener(listenerAdapter);

	return container;
}

Also, the following annotated listener represents a match and would be invoked.

@RabbitListener(bindings = @QueueBinding(
		value = @Queue(value = "test.queue"),
		exchange = @Exchange(value = "contract-test.exchange", ignoreDeclarationExceptions = "true")))
public void handlePerson(Person person) {
	this.person = person;
}
[Note]Note

The message is directly handed over to the onMessage method of the MessageListener associated with the matching SimpleMessageListenerContainer.

Spring AMQP Test Configuration

In order to avoid that Spring AMQP is trying to connect to a running broker during our tests we configure a mock ConnectionFactory.

To disable the mocked ConnectionFactory set the property stubrunner.amqp.mockConnection=false

stubrunner:
  amqp:
    mockConnection: false

84. Contract DSL

[Important]Important

Remember that, inside the contract file, you have to provide the fully qualified name to the Contract class and make static imports, such as org.springframework.cloud.spec.Contract.make { …​ }. You can also provide an import to the Contract class: import org.springframework.cloud.spec.Contract and then call Contract.make { …​ }.

Contract DSL is written in Groovy, but do not be alarmed if you have not used Groovy before. Knowledge of the language is not really needed, as the Contract DSL uses only a tiny subset of it (only literals, method calls and closures). Also, the DSL is statically typed, to make it programmer-readable without any knowledge of the DSL itself.

[Tip]Tip

Spring Cloud Contract supports defining multiple contracts in a single file.

The Contract is present in the spring-cloud-contract-spec module of the Spring Cloud Contract Verifier repository.

The following is a complete example of a contract definition:

org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract.make {
	request {
		method 'PUT'
		url '/api/12'
		headers {
			header 'Content-Type': 'application/vnd.org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.twitter-places-analyzer.v1+json'
		}
		body '''\
		[{
			"created_at": "Sat Jul 26 09:38:57 +0000 2014",
			"id": 492967299297845248,
			"id_str": "492967299297845248",
			"text": "Gonna see you at Warsaw",
			"place":
			{
				"attributes":{},
				"bounding_box":
				{
					"coordinates":
						[[
							[-77.119759,38.791645],
							[-76.909393,38.791645],
							[-76.909393,38.995548],
							[-77.119759,38.995548]
						]],
					"type":"Polygon"
				},
				"country":"United States",
				"country_code":"US",
				"full_name":"Washington, DC",
				"id":"01fbe706f872cb32",
				"name":"Washington",
				"place_type":"city",
				"url": "http://api.twitter.com/1/geo/id/01fbe706f872cb32.json"
			}
		}]
	'''
	}
	response {
		status 200
	}
}
[Note]Note

The preceding example does not contain all the features of the DSL appear. The remainder of this section describes the other features.

You can compile Contracts to WireMock stubs mapping using standalone maven command: mvn org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-contract-maven-plugin:convert

84.1 Limitations

[Warning]Warning

Spring Cloud Contract Verifier does not properly support XML. Please use JSON or help us implement this feature.

[Warning]Warning

The support for verifying the size of JSON arrays is experimental. If you want to turn it on, please set the value of the following system property to true: spring.cloud.contract.verifier.assert.size. By default, this feature is set to false. You can also provide the assertJsonSize property in the plugin configuration.

[Warning]Warning

Because JSON structure can have any form, it can be impossible to parse it properly when using the value(consumer(…​), producer(…​)) notation in GString. That is why you should use the Groovy Map notation.

84.2 Common Top-Level elements

The following sections describe the most common top-level elements:

84.2.1 Description

You can add a description to your contract. The description is arbitrary text. The following code shows an example:

		org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract.make {
			description('''
given:
	An input
when:
	Sth happens
then:
	Output
''')
		}

84.2.2 Name

You can provide a name for your contract. Assume that you provided the following name: should register a user. If you do so, the name of the autogenerated test is validate_should_register_a_user. Also, the name of the stub in a WireMock stub is should_register_a_user.json.

[Important]Important

You must ensure that the name does not contain any characters that make the generated test not compile. Also, remember that, if you provide the same name for multiple contracts, your autogenerated tests fail to compile and your generated stubs override each other.

84.2.3 Ignoring Contracts

If you want to ignore a contract, you can either set a value of ignored contracts in the plugin configuration or set the ignored property on the contract itself:

org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract.make {
	ignored()
}

84.2.4 HTTP Top-Level Elements

The following methods can be called in the top-level closure of a contract definition. request and response are mandatory. priority is optional.

org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract.make {
	// Definition of HTTP request part of the contract
	// (this can be a valid request or invalid depending
	// on type of contract being specified).
	request {
		//...
	}

	// Definition of HTTP response part of the contract
	// (a service implementing this contract should respond
	// with following response after receiving request
	// specified in "request" part above).
	response {
		//...
	}

	// Contract priority, which can be used for overriding
	// contracts (1 is highest). Priority is optional.
	priority 1
}

84.3 Request

The HTTP protocol requires only method and address to be specified in a request. The same information is mandatory in request definition of the Contract.

org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract.make {
	request {
		// HTTP request method (GET/POST/PUT/DELETE).
		method 'GET'

		// Path component of request URL is specified as follows.
		urlPath('/users')
	}

	response {
		//...
	}
}

It is possible to specify an absolute rather than relative url, but using urlPath is the recommended way, as doing so makes the tests host-independent.

org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract.make {
	request {
		method 'GET'

		// Specifying `url` and `urlPath` in one contract is illegal.
		url('http://localhost:8888/users')
	}

	response {
		//...
	}
}

request may contain query parameters, which are specified in a closure nested in a call to urlPath or url.

org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract.make {
	request {
		//...

		urlPath('/users') {

			// Each parameter is specified in form
			// `'paramName' : paramValue` where parameter value
			// may be a simple literal or one of matcher functions,
			// all of which are used in this example.
			queryParameters {

				// If a simple literal is used as value
				// default matcher function is used (equalTo)
				parameter 'limit': 100

				// `equalTo` function simply compares passed value
				// using identity operator (==).
				parameter 'filter': equalTo("email")

				// `containing` function matches strings
				// that contains passed substring.
				parameter 'gender': value(consumer(containing("[mf]")), producer('mf'))

				// `matching` function tests parameter
				// against passed regular expression.
				parameter 'offset': value(consumer(matching("[0-9]+")), producer(123))

				// `notMatching` functions tests if parameter
				// does not match passed regular expression.
				parameter 'loginStartsWith': value(consumer(notMatching(".{0,2}")), producer(3))
			}
		}

		//...
	}

	response {
		//...
	}
}

request may contain additional request headers, as shown in the following example:

org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract.make {
	request {
		//...

		// Each header is added in form `'Header-Name' : 'Header-Value'`.
		// there are also some helper methods
		headers {
			header 'key': 'value'
			contentType(applicationJson())
		}

		//...
	}

	response {
		//...
	}
}

request may contain a request body, as shown in the following example:

org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract.make {
	request {
		//...

		// Currently only JSON format of request body is supported.
		// Format will be determined from a header or body's content.
		body '''{ "login" : "john", "name": "John The Contract" }'''
	}

	response {
		//...
	}
}

request may contain multipart elements. To include multipart elements, call the multipart() method, as shown in the following example

org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract contractDsl = org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract.make {
	request {
		method "PUT"
		url "/multipart"
		headers {
			contentType('multipart/form-data;boundary=AaB03x')
		}
		multipart(
				// key (parameter name), value (parameter value) pair
				formParameter: $(c(regex('".+"')), p('"formParameterValue"')),
				someBooleanParameter: $(c(regex(anyBoolean())), p('true')),
				// a named parameter (e.g. with `file` name) that represents file with
				// `name` and `content`. You can also call `named("fileName", "fileContent")`
				file: named(
						// name of the file
						name: $(c(regex(nonEmpty())), p('filename.csv')),
						// content of the file
						content: $(c(regex(nonEmpty())), p('file content')))
		)
	}
	response {
		status 200
	}
}

In the preceding example, we define parameters in either of two ways:

  • Directly, by using the map notation, where the value can be a dynamic property (such as formParameter: $(consumer(…​), producer(…​))).
  • By using the named(…​) method that lets you set a named parameter. A named parameter can set a name and content. You can call it either via a method with two arguments, such as named("fileName", "fileContent"), or via a map notation, such as named(name: "fileName", content: "fileContent").

From this contract, the generated test is as follows:

// given:
 MockMvcRequestSpecification request = given()
   .header("Content-Type", "multipart/form-data;boundary=AaB03x")
   .param("formParameter", "\"formParameterValue\"")
   .param("someBooleanParameter", "true")
   .multiPart("file", "filename.csv", "file content".getBytes());

// when:
 ResponseOptions response = given().spec(request)
   .put("/multipart");

// then:
 assertThat(response.statusCode()).isEqualTo(200);

The WireMock stub is as follows:

			'''
{
  "request" : {
	"url" : "/multipart",
	"method" : "PUT",
	"headers" : {
	  "Content-Type" : {
		"matches" : "multipart/form-data;boundary=AaB03x.*"
	  }
	},
	"bodyPatterns" : [ {
		"matches" : ".*--(.*)\\r\\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\\"formParameter\\"\\r\\n(Content-Type: .*\\r\\n)?(Content-Length: \\\\d+\\r\\n)?\\r\\n\\".+\\"\\r\\n--\\\\1.*"
  		}, {
    			"matches" : ".*--(.*)\\r\\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\\"someBooleanParameter\\"\\r\\n(Content-Type: .*\\r\\n)?(Content-Length: \\\\d+\\r\\n)?\\r\\n(true|false)\\r\\n--\\\\1.*"
  		}, {
	  "matches" : ".*--(.*)\\r\\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\\"file\\"; filename=\\"[\\\\S\\\\s]+\\"\\r\\n(Content-Type: .*\\r\\n)?(Content-Length: \\\\d+\\r\\n)?\\r\\n[\\\\S\\\\s]+\\r\\n--\\\\1.*"
	} ]
  },
  "response" : {
	"status" : 200,
	"transformers" : [ "response-template" ]
  }
}
	'''

84.4 Response

The response must contain an HTTP status code and may contain other information. The following code shows an example:

org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract.make {
	request {
		//...
	}
	response {
		// Status code sent by the server
		// in response to request specified above.
		status 200
	}
}

Besides status, the response may contain headers and a body, both of which are specified the same way as in the request (see the previous paragraph).

84.5 Dynamic properties

The contract can contain some dynamic properties: timestamps, IDs, and so on. You do not want to force the consumers to stub their clocks to always return the same value of time so that it gets matched by the stub. You can provide the dynamic parts in your contracts in two ways: pass them directly in the body or set them in separate sections called testMatchers and stubMatchers.

84.5.1 Dynamic properties inside the body

You can set the properties inside the body either with the value method or, if you use the Groovy map notation, with $(). The following example shows how to set dynamic properties with the value method:

value(consumer(...), producer(...))
value(c(...), p(...))
value(stub(...), test(...))
value(client(...), server(...))

The following example shows how to set dynamic properties with $():

$(consumer(...), producer(...))
$(c(...), p(...))
$(stub(...), test(...))
$(client(...), server(...))

Both approaches work equally well. stub and client methods are aliases over the consumer method. Subsequent sections take a closer look at what you can do with those values.

84.5.2 Regular expressions

You can use regular expressions to write your requests in Contract DSL. Doing so is particularly useful when you want to indicate that a given response should be provided for requests that follow a given pattern. Also, you can use regular expressions when you need to use patterns and not exact values both for your test and your server side tests.

The following example shows how to use regular expressions to write a request:

org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract.make {
	request {
		method('GET')
		url $(consumer(~/\/[0-9]{2}/), producer('/12'))
	}
	response {
		status 200
		body(
				id: $(anyNumber()),
				surname: $(
						consumer('Kowalsky'),
						producer(regex('[a-zA-Z]+'))
				),
				name: 'Jan',
				created: $(consumer('2014-02-02 12:23:43'), producer(execute('currentDate(it)'))),
				correlationId: value(consumer('5d1f9fef-e0dc-4f3d-a7e4-72d2220dd827'),
						producer(regex('[a-fA-F0-9]{8}-[a-fA-F0-9]{4}-[a-fA-F0-9]{4}-[a-fA-F0-9]{4}-[a-fA-F0-9]{12}'))
				)
		)
		headers {
			header 'Content-Type': 'text/plain'
		}
	}
}

You can also provide only one side of the communication with a regular expression. If you do so, then the contract engine automatically provides the generated string that matches the provided regular expression. The following code shows an example:

org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract.make {
	request {
		method 'PUT'
		url value(consumer(regex('/foo/[0-9]{5}')))
		body([
			requestElement: $(consumer(regex('[0-9]{5}')))
		])
		headers {
			header('header', $(consumer(regex('application\\/vnd\\.fraud\\.v1\\+json;.*'))))
		}
	}
	response {
		status 200
		body([
			responseElement: $(producer(regex('[0-9]{7}')))
		])
		headers {
			contentType("application/vnd.fraud.v1+json")
		}
	}
}

In the preceding example, the opposite side of the communication has the respective data generated for request and response.

Spring Cloud Contract comes with a series of predefined regular expressions that you can use in your contracts, as shown in the following example:

protected static final Pattern TRUE_OR_FALSE = Pattern.compile(/(true|false)/)
protected static final Pattern ONLY_ALPHA_UNICODE = Pattern.compile(/[\p{L}]*/)
protected static final Pattern NUMBER = Pattern.compile('-?\\d*(\\.\\d+)?')
protected static final Pattern IP_ADDRESS = Pattern.compile('([01]?\\d\\d?|2[0-4]\\d|25[0-5])\\.([01]?\\d\\d?|2[0-4]\\d|25[0-5])\\.([01]?\\d\\d?|2[0-4]\\d|25[0-5])\\.([01]?\\d\\d?|2[0-4]\\d|25[0-5])')
protected static final Pattern HOSTNAME_PATTERN = Pattern.compile('((http[s]?|ftp):/)/?([^:/\\s]+)(:[0-9]{1,5})?')
protected static final Pattern EMAIL = Pattern.compile('[a-zA-Z0-9._%+-]+@[a-zA-Z0-9.-]+\\.[a-zA-Z]{2,6}')
protected static final Pattern URL = UrlHelper.URL
protected static final Pattern UUID = Pattern.compile('[a-f0-9]{8}-[a-f0-9]{4}-[a-f0-9]{4}-[a-f0-9]{4}-[a-f0-9]{12}')
protected static final Pattern ANY_DATE = Pattern.compile('(\\d\\d\\d\\d)-(0[1-9]|1[012])-(0[1-9]|[12][0-9]|3[01])')
protected static final Pattern ANY_DATE_TIME = Pattern.compile('([0-9]{4})-(1[0-2]|0[1-9])-(3[01]|0[1-9]|[12][0-9])T(2[0-3]|[01][0-9]):([0-5][0-9]):([0-5][0-9])')
protected static final Pattern ANY_TIME = Pattern.compile('(2[0-3]|[01][0-9]):([0-5][0-9]):([0-5][0-9])')
protected static final Pattern NON_EMPTY = Pattern.compile(/[\S\s]+/)
protected static final Pattern NON_BLANK = Pattern.compile(/^\s*\S[\S\s]*/)
protected static final Pattern ISO8601_WITH_OFFSET = Pattern.compile(/([0-9]{4})-(1[0-2]|0[1-9])-(3[01]|0[1-9]|[12][0-9])T(2[0-3]|[01][0-9]):([0-5][0-9]):([0-5][0-9])(\.\d{3})?(Z|[+-][01]\d:[0-5]\d)/)

protected static Pattern anyOf(String... values){
	return Pattern.compile(values.collect({"^$it\$"}).join("|"))
}

String onlyAlphaUnicode() {
	return ONLY_ALPHA_UNICODE.pattern()
}

String number() {
	return NUMBER.pattern()
}

String anyBoolean() {
	return TRUE_OR_FALSE.pattern()
}

String ipAddress() {
	return IP_ADDRESS.pattern()
}

String hostname() {
	return HOSTNAME_PATTERN.pattern()
}

String email() {
	return EMAIL.pattern()
}

String url() {
	return URL.pattern()
}

String uuid(){
	return UUID.pattern()
}

String isoDate() {
	return ANY_DATE.pattern()
}

String isoDateTime() {
	return ANY_DATE_TIME.pattern()
}

String isoTime() {
	return ANY_TIME.pattern()
}

String iso8601WithOffset() {
	return ISO8601_WITH_OFFSET.pattern()
}

String nonEmpty() {
	return NON_EMPTY.pattern()
}

String nonBlank() {
	return NON_BLANK.pattern()
}

In your contract, you can use it as shown in the following example:

Contract dslWithOptionalsInString = Contract.make {
	priority 1
	request {
		method POST()
		url '/users/password'
		headers {
			contentType(applicationJson())
		}
		body(
				email: $(consumer(optional(regex(email()))), producer('[email protected]')),
				callback_url: $(consumer(regex(hostname())), producer('http://partners.com'))
		)
	}
	response {
		status 404
		headers {
			contentType(applicationJson())
		}
		body(
				code: value(consumer("123123"), producer(optional("123123"))),
				message: "User not found by email = [${value(producer(regex(email())), consumer('[email protected]'))}]"
		)
	}
}

84.5.3 Passing Optional Parameters

It is possible to provide optional parameters in your contract. However, you can provide optional parameters only for the following:

  • STUB side of the Request
  • TEST side of the Response

The following example shows how to provide optional parameters:

org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract.make {
	priority 1
	request {
		method 'POST'
		url '/users/password'
		headers {
			contentType(applicationJson())
		}
		body(
				email: $(consumer(optional(regex(email()))), producer('[email protected]')),
				callback_url: $(consumer(regex(hostname())), producer('http://partners.com'))
		)
	}
	response {
		status 404
		headers {
			header 'Content-Type': 'application/json'
		}
		body(
				code: value(consumer("123123"), producer(optional("123123")))
		)
	}
}

By wrapping a part of the body with the optional() method, you create a regular expression that must be present 0 or more times.

If you use Spock for, the following test would be generated from the previous example:

"""
 given:
  def request = given()
    .header("Content-Type", "application/json")
    .body('''{"email":"[email protected]","callback_url":"http://partners.com"}''')

 when:
  def response = given().spec(request)
    .post("/users/password")

 then:
  response.statusCode == 404
  response.header('Content-Type')  == 'application/json'
 and:
  DocumentContext parsedJson = JsonPath.parse(response.body.asString())
  assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("['code']").matches("(123123)?")
"""

The following stub would also be generated:

'''
{
  "request" : {
    "url" : "/users/password",
    "method" : "POST",
    "bodyPatterns" : [ {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$[?(@.['email'] =~ /([a-zA-Z0-9._%+-]+@[a-zA-Z0-9.-]+\\\\.[a-zA-Z]{2,6})?/)]"
    }, {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$[?(@.['callback_url'] =~ /((http[s]?|ftp):\\\\/)\\\\/?([^:\\\\/\\\\s]+)(:[0-9]{1,5})?/)]"
    } ],
    "headers" : {
      "Content-Type" : {
        "equalTo" : "application/json"
      }
    }
  },
  "response" : {
    "status" : 404,
    "body" : "{\\"code\\":\\"123123\\",\\"message\\":\\"User not found by email == [not.existing@user.com]\\"}",
    "headers" : {
      "Content-Type" : "application/json"
    }
  },
  "priority" : 1
}
'''

84.5.4 Executing Custom Methods on the Server Side

You can define a method call that executes on the server side during the test. Such a method can be added to the class defined as "baseClassForTests" in the configuration. The following code shows an example of the contract portion of the test case:

org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract.make {
	request {
		method 'PUT'
		url $(consumer(regex('^/api/[0-9]{2}$')), producer('/api/12'))
		headers {
			header 'Content-Type': 'application/json'
		}
		body '''\
				[{
					"text": "Gonna see you at Warsaw"
				}]
			'''
	}
	response {
		body (
				path: $(consumer('/api/12'), producer(regex('^/api/[0-9]{2}$'))),
				correlationId: $(consumer('1223456'), producer(execute('isProperCorrelationId($it)')))
		)
		status 200
	}
}

The following code shows the base class portion of the test case:

abstract class BaseMockMvcSpec extends Specification {

	def setup() {
		RestAssuredMockMvc.standaloneSetup(new PairIdController())
	}

	void isProperCorrelationId(Integer correlationId) {
		assert correlationId == 123456
	}

	void isEmpty(String value) {
		assert value == null
	}

}
[Important]Important

You cannot use both a String and execute to perform concatenation. For example, calling header('Authorization', 'Bearer ' + execute('authToken()')) leads to improper results. Instead, call header('Authorization', execute('authToken()')) and ensure that the authToken() method returns everything you need.

The type of the object read from the JSON can be one of the following, depending on the JSON path:

  • String: If you point to a String value in the JSON.
  • JSONArray: If you point to a List in the JSON.
  • Map: If you point to a Map in the JSON.
  • Number: If you point to Integer, Double etc. in the JSON.
  • Boolean: If you point to a Boolean in the JSON.

In the request part of the contract, you can specify that the body should be taken from a method.

[Important]Important

You must provide both the consumer and the producer side. The execute part is applied for the whole body - not for parts of it.

The following example shows how to read an object from JSON:

Contract contractDsl = Contract.make {
	request {
		method 'GET'
		url '/something'
		body(
				$(c("foo"), p(execute("hashCode()")))
		)
	}
	response {
		status 200
	}
}

The preceding example results in calling the hashCode() method in the request body. It should resemble the following code:

// given:
 MockMvcRequestSpecification request = given()
   .body(hashCode());

// when:
 ResponseOptions response = given().spec(request)
   .get("/something");

// then:
 assertThat(response.statusCode()).isEqualTo(200);

84.5.5 Referencing the Request from the Response

The best situation is to provide fixed values, but sometimes you need to reference a request in your response. To do so, you can use the fromRequest() method, which lets you reference a bunch of elements from the HTTP request. You can use the following options:

  • fromRequest().url(): Returns the request URL and query parameters.
  • fromRequest().query(String key): Returns the first query parameter with a given name.
  • fromRequest().query(String key, int index): Returns the nth query parameter with a given name.
  • fromRequest().path(): Returns the full path.
  • fromRequest().path(int index): Returns the nth path element.
  • fromRequest().header(String key): Returns the first header with a given name.
  • fromRequest().header(String key, int index): Returns the nth header with a given name.
  • fromRequest().body(): Returns the full request body.
  • fromRequest().body(String jsonPath): Returns the element from the request that matches the JSON Path.

Consider the following contract:

Contract contractDsl = Contract.make {
	request {
		method 'GET'
		url('/api/v1/xxxx') {
			queryParameters {
				parameter("foo", "bar")
				parameter("foo", "bar2")
			}
		}
		headers {
			header(authorization(), "secret")
			header(authorization(), "secret2")
		}
		body(foo: "bar", baz: 5)
	}
	response {
		status 200
		headers {
			header(authorization(), "foo ${fromRequest().header(authorization())} bar")
		}
		body(
				url: fromRequest().url(),
				param: fromRequest().query("foo"),
				paramIndex: fromRequest().query("foo", 1),
				authorization: fromRequest().header("Authorization"),
				authorization2: fromRequest().header("Authorization", 1),
				fullBody: fromRequest().body(),
				responseFoo: fromRequest().body('$.foo'),
				responseBaz: fromRequest().body('$.baz'),
				responseBaz2: "Bla bla ${fromRequest().body('$.foo')} bla bla"
		)
	}
}

Running a JUnit test generation leads to a test that resembles the following example:

// given:
 MockMvcRequestSpecification request = given()
   .header("Authorization", "secret")
   .header("Authorization", "secret2")
   .body("{\"foo\":\"bar\",\"baz\":5}");

// when:
 ResponseOptions response = given().spec(request)
   .queryParam("foo","bar")
   .queryParam("foo","bar2")
   .get("/api/v1/xxxx");

// then:
 assertThat(response.statusCode()).isEqualTo(200);
 assertThat(response.header("Authorization")).isEqualTo("foo secret bar");
// and:
 DocumentContext parsedJson = JsonPath.parse(response.getBody().asString());
 assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("['fullBody']").isEqualTo("{\"foo\":\"bar\",\"baz\":5}");
 assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("['authorization']").isEqualTo("secret");
 assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("['authorization2']").isEqualTo("secret2");
 assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("['path']").isEqualTo("/api/v1/xxxx");
 assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("['param']").isEqualTo("bar");
 assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("['paramIndex']").isEqualTo("bar2");
 assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("['pathIndex']").isEqualTo("v1");
 assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("['responseBaz']").isEqualTo(5);
 assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("['responseFoo']").isEqualTo("bar");
 assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("['url']").isEqualTo("/api/v1/xxxx?foo=bar&foo=bar2");
 assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("['responseBaz2']").isEqualTo("Bla bla bar bla bla");

As you can see, elements from the request have been properly referenced in the response.

The generated WireMock stub should resemble the following example:

{
  "request" : {
    "urlPath" : "/api/v1/xxxx",
    "method" : "POST",
    "headers" : {
      "Authorization" : {
        "equalTo" : "secret2"
      }
    },
    "queryParameters" : {
      "foo" : {
        "equalTo" : "bar2"
      }
    },
    "bodyPatterns" : [ {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$[?(@.['baz'] == 5)]"
    }, {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$[?(@.['foo'] == 'bar')]"
    } ]
  },
  "response" : {
    "status" : 200,
    "body" : "{\"authorization\":\"{{{request.headers.Authorization.[0]}}}\",\"path\":\"{{{request.path}}}\",\"responseBaz\":{{{jsonpath this '$.baz'}}} ,\"param\":\"{{{request.query.foo.[0]}}}\",\"pathIndex\":\"{{{request.path.[1]}}}\",\"responseBaz2\":\"Bla bla {{{jsonpath this '$.foo'}}} bla bla\",\"responseFoo\":\"{{{jsonpath this '$.foo'}}}\",\"authorization2\":\"{{{request.headers.Authorization.[1]}}}\",\"fullBody\":\"{{{escapejsonbody}}}\",\"url\":\"{{{request.url}}}\",\"paramIndex\":\"{{{request.query.foo.[1]}}}\"}",
    "headers" : {
      "Authorization" : "{{{request.headers.Authorization.[0]}}};foo"
    },
    "transformers" : [ "response-template" ]
  }
}

Sending a request such as the one presented in the request part of the contract results in sending the following response body:

{
  "url" : "/api/v1/xxxx?foo=bar&foo=bar2",
  "path" : "/api/v1/xxxx",
  "pathIndex" : "v1",
  "param" : "bar",
  "paramIndex" : "bar2",
  "authorization" : "secret",
  "authorization2" : "secret2",
  "fullBody" : "{\"foo\":\"bar\",\"baz\":5}",
  "responseFoo" : "bar",
  "responseBaz" : 5,
  "responseBaz2" : "Bla bla bar bla bla"
}
[Important]Important

This feature works only with WireMock having a version greater than or equal to 2.5.1. The Spring Cloud Contract Verifier uses WireMock’s response-template response transformer. It uses Handlebars to convert the Mustache {{{ }}} templates into proper values. Additionally, it registers two helper functions:

  • escapejsonbody: Escapes the request body in a format that can be embedded in a JSON.
  • jsonpath: For a given parameter, find an object in the request body.

84.5.6 Registering Your Own WireMock Extension

WireMock lets you register custom extensions. By default, Spring Cloud Contract registers the transformer, which lets you reference a request from a response. If you want to provide your own extensions, you can register an implementation of the org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.dsl.wiremock.WireMockExtensions interface. Since we use the spring.factories extension approach, you can create an entry in META-INF/spring.factories file similar to the following:

[Important]Important

Remember to override the applyGlobally() method and set it to false if you want the transformation to be applied only for a mapping that explicitly requires it.

84.5.7 Dynamic Properties in the Matchers Sections

If you work with Pact, the following discussion may seem familiar. Quite a few users are used to having a separation between the body and setting the dynamic parts of a contract.

You can use two separate sections:

  • stubMatchers, which lets you define the dynamic values that should end up in a stub. You can set it in the request or inputMessage part of your contract.
  • testMatchers, which is present in the response or outputMessage side of the contract.

Currently, Spring Cloud Contract Verifier supports only JSON Path-based matchers with the following matching possibilities:

  • For stubMatchers:

    • byEquality(): The value taken from the response via the provided JSON Path must be equal to the value provided in the contract.
    • byRegex(…​): The value taken from the response via the provided JSON Path must match the regex.
    • byDate(): The value taken from the response via the provided JSON Path must match the regex for an ISO Date value.
    • byTimestamp(): The value taken from the response via the provided JSON Path must match the regex for an ISO DateTime value.
    • byTime(): The value taken from the response via the provided JSON Path must match the regex for an ISO Time value.
  • For testMatchers:

    • byEquality(): The value taken from the response via the provided JSON Path must be equal to the provided value in the contract.
    • byRegex(…​): The value taken from the response via the provided JSON Path must match the regex.
    • byDate(): The value taken from the response via the provided JSON Path must match the regex for an ISO Date value.
    • byTimestamp(): The value taken from the response via the provided JSON Path must match the regex for an ISO DateTime value.
    • byTime(): The value taken from the response via the provided JSON Path must match the regex for an ISO Time value.
    • byType(): The value taken from the response via the provided JSON Path needs to be of the same type as the type defined in the body of the response in the contract. byType can take a closure, in which you can set minOccurrence and maxOccurrence. That way, you can assert the size of the flattened collection. To check the size of an unflattened collection, use a custom method with the byCommand(…​) testMatcher.
    • byCommand(…​): The value taken from the response via the provided JSON Path is passed as an input to the custom method that you provide. For example, byCommand('foo($it)') results in calling a foo method to which the value matching the JSON Path gets passed. The type of the object read from the JSON can be one of the following, depending on the JSON path:

      • String: If you point to a String value.
      • JSONArray: If you point to a List.
      • Map: If you point to a Map.
      • Number: If you point to Integer, Double, or other kind of number.
      • Boolean: If you point to a Boolean.

Consider the following example:

Contract contractDsl = Contract.make {
	request {
		method 'GET'
		urlPath '/get'
		body([
				duck: 123,
				alpha: "abc",
				number: 123,
				aBoolean: true,
				date: "2017-01-01",
				dateTime: "2017-01-01T01:23:45",
				time: "01:02:34",
				valueWithoutAMatcher: "foo",
				valueWithTypeMatch: "string",
				key: [
						'complex.key' : 'foo'
				]
		])
		stubMatchers {
			jsonPath('$.duck', byRegex("[0-9]{3}"))
			jsonPath('$.duck', byEquality())
			jsonPath('$.alpha', byRegex(onlyAlphaUnicode()))
			jsonPath('$.alpha', byEquality())
			jsonPath('$.number', byRegex(number()))
			jsonPath('$.aBoolean', byRegex(anyBoolean()))
			jsonPath('$.date', byDate())
			jsonPath('$.dateTime', byTimestamp())
			jsonPath('$.time', byTime())
			jsonPath("\$.['key'].['complex.key']", byEquality())
		}
		headers {
			contentType(applicationJson())
		}
	}
	response {
		status 200
		body([
				duck: 123,
				alpha: "abc",
				number: 123,
				aBoolean: true,
				date: "2017-01-01",
				dateTime: "2017-01-01T01:23:45",
				time: "01:02:34",
				valueWithoutAMatcher: "foo",
				valueWithTypeMatch: "string",
				valueWithMin: [
					1,2,3
				],
				valueWithMax: [
					1,2,3
				],
				valueWithMinMax: [
					1,2,3
				],
				valueWithMinEmpty: [],
				valueWithMaxEmpty: [],
				key: [
				        'complex.key' : 'foo'
				]
		])
		testMatchers {
			// asserts the jsonpath value against manual regex
			jsonPath('$.duck', byRegex("[0-9]{3}"))
			// asserts the jsonpath value against the provided value
			jsonPath('$.duck', byEquality())
			// asserts the jsonpath value against some default regex
			jsonPath('$.alpha', byRegex(onlyAlphaUnicode()))
			jsonPath('$.alpha', byEquality())
			jsonPath('$.number', byRegex(number()))
			jsonPath('$.aBoolean', byRegex(anyBoolean()))
			// asserts vs inbuilt time related regex
			jsonPath('$.date', byDate())
			jsonPath('$.dateTime', byTimestamp())
			jsonPath('$.time', byTime())
			// asserts that the resulting type is the same as in response body
			jsonPath('$.valueWithTypeMatch', byType())
			jsonPath('$.valueWithMin', byType {
				// results in verification of size of array (min 1)
				minOccurrence(1)
			})
			jsonPath('$.valueWithMax', byType {
				// results in verification of size of array (max 3)
				maxOccurrence(3)
			})
			jsonPath('$.valueWithMinMax', byType {
				// results in verification of size of array (min 1 & max 3)
				minOccurrence(1)
				maxOccurrence(3)
			})
			jsonPath('$.valueWithMinEmpty', byType {
				// results in verification of size of array (min 0)
				minOccurrence(0)
			})
			jsonPath('$.valueWithMaxEmpty', byType {
				// results in verification of size of array (max 0)
				maxOccurrence(0)
			})
			// will execute a method `assertThatValueIsANumber`
			jsonPath('$.duck', byCommand('assertThatValueIsANumber($it)'))
			jsonPath("\$.['key'].['complex.key']", byEquality())
		}
		headers {
			contentType(applicationJson())
		}
	}
}

In the preceding example, you can see the dynamic portions of the contract in the matchers sections. For the request part, you can see that, for all fields but valueWithoutAMatcher, the values of the regular expressions that the stub should contain are explicitly set. For the valueWithoutAMatcher, the verification takes place in the same way as without the use of matchers. In that case, the test performs an equality check.

For the response side in the testMatchers section, we define the dynamic parts in a similar manner. The only difference is that the byType matchers are also present. The verifier engine checks four fields to verify whether the response from the test has a value for which the JSON path matches the given field, is of the same type as the one defined in the response body, and passes the following check (based on the method being called):

  • For $.valueWithTypeMatch, the engine checks whether the type is the same.
  • For $.valueWithMin, the engine check the type and asserts whether the size is greater than or equal to the minimum occurrence.
  • For $.valueWithMax, the engine checks the type and asserts whether the size is smaller than or equal to the maximum occurrence.
  • For $.valueWithMinMax, the engine checks the type and asserts whether the size is between the min and maximum occurrence.

The resulting test would resemble the following example (note that an and section separates the autogenerated assertions and the assertion from matchers):

// given:
 MockMvcRequestSpecification request = given()
   .header("Content-Type", "application/json")
   .body("{\"duck\":123,\"alpha\":\"abc\",\"number\":123,\"aBoolean\":true,\"date\":\"2017-01-01\",\"dateTime\":\"2017-01-01T01:23:45\",\"time\":\"01:02:34\",\"valueWithoutAMatcher\":\"foo\",\"valueWithTypeMatch\":\"string\"}");

// when:
 ResponseOptions response = given().spec(request)
   .get("/get");

// then:
 assertThat(response.statusCode()).isEqualTo(200);
 assertThat(response.header("Content-Type")).matches("application/json.*");
// and:
 DocumentContext parsedJson = JsonPath.parse(response.getBody().asString());
 assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("valueWithoutAMatcher").isEqualTo("foo");
// and:
 assertThat(parsedJson.read("$.duck", String.class)).matches("[0-9]{3}");
 assertThat(parsedJson.read("$.duck", Integer.class)).isEqualTo(123);
 assertThat(parsedJson.read("$.alpha", String.class)).matches("[\\p{L}]*");
 assertThat(parsedJson.read("$.alpha", String.class)).isEqualTo("abc");
 assertThat(parsedJson.read("$.number", String.class)).matches("-?\\d*(\\.\\d+)?");
 assertThat(parsedJson.read("$.aBoolean", String.class)).matches("(true|false)");
 assertThat(parsedJson.read("$.date", String.class)).matches("(\\d\\d\\d\\d)-(0[1-9]|1[012])-(0[1-9]|[12][0-9]|3[01])");
 assertThat(parsedJson.read("$.dateTime", String.class)).matches("([0-9]{4})-(1[0-2]|0[1-9])-(3[01]|0[1-9]|[12][0-9])T(2[0-3]|[01][0-9]):([0-5][0-9]):([0-5][0-9])");
 assertThat(parsedJson.read("$.time", String.class)).matches("(2[0-3]|[01][0-9]):([0-5][0-9]):([0-5][0-9])");
 assertThat((Object) parsedJson.read("$.valueWithTypeMatch")).isInstanceOf(java.lang.String.class);
 assertThat((Object) parsedJson.read("$.valueWithMin")).isInstanceOf(java.util.List.class);
 assertThat((java.lang.Iterable) parsedJson.read("$.valueWithMin", java.util.Collection.class)).hasSizeGreaterThanOrEqualTo(1);
 assertThat((Object) parsedJson.read("$.valueWithMax")).isInstanceOf(java.util.List.class);
 assertThat((java.lang.Iterable) parsedJson.read("$.valueWithMax", java.util.Collection.class)).hasSizeLessThanOrEqualTo(3);
 assertThat((Object) parsedJson.read("$.valueWithMinMax")).isInstanceOf(java.util.List.class);
 assertThat((java.lang.Iterable) parsedJson.read("$.valueWithMinMax", java.util.Collection.class)).hasSizeBetween(1, 3);
 assertThat((Object) parsedJson.read("$.valueWithMinEmpty")).isInstanceOf(java.util.List.class);
 assertThat((java.lang.Iterable) parsedJson.read("$.valueWithMinEmpty", java.util.Collection.class)).hasSizeGreaterThanOrEqualTo(0);
 assertThat((Object) parsedJson.read("$.valueWithMaxEmpty")).isInstanceOf(java.util.List.class);
 assertThat((java.lang.Iterable) parsedJson.read("$.valueWithMaxEmpty", java.util.Collection.class)).hasSizeLessThanOrEqualTo(0);
 assertThatValueIsANumber(parsedJson.read("$.duck"));
[Important]Important

Notice that, for the byCommand method, the example calls the assertThatValueIsANumber. This method must be defined in the test base class or be statically imported to your tests. Notice that the byCommand call was converted to assertThatValueIsANumber(parsedJson.read("$.duck"));. That means that the engine took the method name and passed the proper JSON path as a parameter to it.

The resulting WireMock stub is in the following example:

				'''
{
  "request" : {
    "urlPath" : "/get",
    "method" : "POST",
    "headers" : {
      "Content-Type" : {
        "matches" : "application/json.*"
      }
    },
    "bodyPatterns" : [ {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$[?(@.['valueWithoutAMatcher'] == 'foo')]"
    }, {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$[?(@.['valueWithTypeMatch'] == 'string')]"
    }, {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$.['list'].['some'].['nested'][?(@.['anothervalue'] == 4)]"
    }, {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$.['list'].['someother'].['nested'][?(@.['anothervalue'] == 4)]"
    }, {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$.['list'].['someother'].['nested'][?(@.['json'] == 'with value')]"
    }, {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$[?(@.duck =~ /([0-9]{3})/)]"
    }, {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$[?(@.duck == 123)]"
    }, {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$[?(@.alpha =~ /([\\\\p{L}]*)/)]"
    }, {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$[?(@.alpha == 'abc')]"
    }, {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$[?(@.number =~ /(-?\\\\d*(\\\\.\\\\d+)?)/)]"
    }, {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$[?(@.aBoolean =~ /((true|false))/)]"
    }, {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$[?(@.date =~ /((\\\\d\\\\d\\\\d\\\\d)-(0[1-9]|1[012])-(0[1-9]|[12][0-9]|3[01]))/)]"
    }, {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$[?(@.dateTime =~ /(([0-9]{4})-(1[0-2]|0[1-9])-(3[01]|0[1-9]|[12][0-9])T(2[0-3]|[01][0-9]):([0-5][0-9]):([0-5][0-9]))/)]"
    }, {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$[?(@.time =~ /((2[0-3]|[01][0-9]):([0-5][0-9]):([0-5][0-9]))/)]"
    }, {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$.list.some.nested[?(@.json =~ /(.*)/)]"
    } ]
  },
  "response" : {
    "status" : 200,
    "body" : "{\\"duck\\":123,\\"alpha\\":\\"abc\\",\\"number\\":123,\\"aBoolean\\":true,\\"date\\":\\"2017-01-01\\",\\"dateTime\\":\\"2017-01-01T01:23:45\\",\\"time\\":\\"01:02:34\\",\\"valueWithoutAMatcher\\":\\"foo\\",\\"valueWithTypeMatch\\":\\"string\\",\\"valueWithMin\\":[1,2,3],\\"valueWithMax\\":[1,2,3],\\"valueWithMinMax\\":[1,2,3]}",
    "headers" : {
      "Content-Type" : "application/json"
    }
  }
}
'''
[Important]Important

If you use a matcher, then the part of the request aned response that the matcher addresses with the JSON Path gets removed from the assertion. In the case of verifying a collection, you must create matchers for all the elements of the collection.

Consider the following example:

Contract.make {
    request {
        method 'GET'
        url("/foo")
    }
    response {
        status 200
        body(events: [[
                                 operation          : 'EXPORT',
                                 eventId            : '16f1ed75-0bcc-4f0d-a04d-3121798faf99',
                                 status             : 'OK'
                         ], [
                                 operation          : 'INPUT_PROCESSING',
                                 eventId            : '3bb4ac82-6652-462f-b6d1-75e424a0024a',
                                 status             : 'OK'
                         ]
                ]
        )
        testMatchers {
            jsonPath('$.events[0].operation', byRegex('.+'))
            jsonPath('$.events[0].eventId', byRegex('^([a-fA-F0-9]{8}-[a-fA-F0-9]{4}-[a-fA-F0-9]{4}-[a-fA-F0-9]{4}-[a-fA-F0-9]{12})$'))
            jsonPath('$.events[0].status', byRegex('.+'))
        }
    }
}

The preceding code leads to creating the following test (the code block shows only the assertion section):

and:
	DocumentContext parsedJson = JsonPath.parse(response.body.asString())
	assertThatJson(parsedJson).array("['events']").contains("['eventId']").isEqualTo("16f1ed75-0bcc-4f0d-a04d-3121798faf99")
	assertThatJson(parsedJson).array("['events']").contains("['operation']").isEqualTo("EXPORT")
	assertThatJson(parsedJson).array("['events']").contains("['operation']").isEqualTo("INPUT_PROCESSING")
	assertThatJson(parsedJson).array("['events']").contains("['eventId']").isEqualTo("3bb4ac82-6652-462f-b6d1-75e424a0024a")
	assertThatJson(parsedJson).array("['events']").contains("['status']").isEqualTo("OK")
and:
	assertThat(parsedJson.read("\$.events[0].operation", String.class)).matches(".+")
	assertThat(parsedJson.read("\$.events[0].eventId", String.class)).matches("^([a-fA-F0-9]{8}-[a-fA-F0-9]{4}-[a-fA-F0-9]{4}-[a-fA-F0-9]{4}-[a-fA-F0-9]{12})\$")
	assertThat(parsedJson.read("\$.events[0].status", String.class)).matches(".+")

As you can see, the assertion is malformed. Only the first element of the array got asserted. In order to fix this, you should apply the assertion to the whole $.events collection and assert it with the byCommand(…​) method.

84.6 JAX-RS Support

The Spring Cloud Contract Verifier supports the JAX-RS 2 Client API. The base class needs to define protected WebTarget webTarget and server initialization. The only option for testing JAX-RS API is to start a web server. Also, a request with a body needs to have a content type set. Otherwise, the default of application/octet-stream gets used.

In order to use JAX-RS mode, use the following settings:

testMode == 'JAXRSCLIENT'

The following example shows a generated test API:

'''
 // when:
  Response response = webTarget
    .path("/users")
    .queryParam("limit", "10")
    .queryParam("offset", "20")
    .queryParam("filter", "email")
    .queryParam("sort", "name")
    .queryParam("search", "55")
    .queryParam("age", "99")
    .queryParam("name", "Denis.Stepanov")
    .queryParam("email", "[email protected]")
    .request()
    .method("GET");

  String responseAsString = response.readEntity(String.class);

 // then:
  assertThat(response.getStatus()).isEqualTo(200);
 // and:
  DocumentContext parsedJson = JsonPath.parse(responseAsString);
  assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("['property1']").isEqualTo("a");
'''

84.7 Async Support

If you’re using asynchronous communication on the server side (your controllers are returning Callable, DeferredResult, and so on), then, inside your contract, you must provide a sync() method in the response section. The following code shows an example:

org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract.make {
    request {
        method GET()
        url '/get'
    }
    response {
        status 200
        body 'Passed'
        async()
    }
}

84.8 Working with Context Paths

Spring Cloud Contract supports context paths.

[Important]Important

The only change needed to fully support context paths is the switch on the PRODUCER side. Also, the autogenerated tests must use EXPLICIT mode. The consumer side remains untouched. In order for the generated test to pass, you must use EXPLICIT mode.

Maven. 

<plugin>
    <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
    <artifactId>spring-cloud-contract-maven-plugin</artifactId>
    <version>${spring-cloud-contract.version}</version>
    <extensions>true</extensions>
    <configuration>
        <testMode>EXPLICIT</testMode>
    </configuration>
</plugin>

Gradle. 

contracts {
		testMode = 'EXPLICIT'
}

That way, you generate a test that DOES NOT use MockMvc. It means that you generate real requests and you need to setup your generated test’s base class to work on a real socket.

Consider the following contract:

org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract.make {
	request {
		method 'GET'
		url '/my-context-path/url'
	}
	response {
		status 200
	}
}

The following example shows how to set up a base class and Rest Assured:

import com.jayway.restassured.RestAssured;
import org.junit.Before;
import org.springframework.boot.context.embedded.LocalServerPort;
import org.springframework.boot.test.context.SpringBootTest;

@SpringBootTest(classes = ContextPathTestingBaseClass.class, webEnvironment = SpringBootTest.WebEnvironment.RANDOM_PORT)
class ContextPathTestingBaseClass {

	@LocalServerPort int port;

	@Before
	public void setup() {
		RestAssured.baseURI = "http://localhost";
		RestAssured.port = this.port;
	}
}

If you do it this way:

  • All of your requests in the autogenerated tests are sent to the real endpoint with your context path included (for example, /my-context-path/url).
  • Your contracts reflect that you have a context path. Your generated stubs also have that information (for example, in the stubs, you have to call /my-context-path/url).

84.9 Messaging Top-Level Elements

The DSL for messaging looks a little bit different than the one that focuses on HTTP. The following sections explain the differences:

84.9.1 Output Triggered by a Method

The output message can be triggered by calling a method (such as a Scheduler when a was started and a message was sent), as shown in the following example:

def dsl = Contract.make {
	// Human readable description
	description 'Some description'
	// Label by means of which the output message can be triggered
	label 'some_label'
	// input to the contract
	input {
		// the contract will be triggered by a method
		triggeredBy('bookReturnedTriggered()')
	}
	// output message of the contract
	outputMessage {
		// destination to which the output message will be sent
		sentTo('output')
		// the body of the output message
		body('''{ "bookName" : "foo" }''')
		// the headers of the output message
		headers {
			header('BOOK-NAME', 'foo')
		}
	}
}

In the previous example case, the output message is sent to output if a method called bookReturnedTriggered is executed. On the message publisher’s side, we generate a test that calls that method to trigger the message. On the consumer side, you can use the some_label to trigger the message.

84.9.2 Output Triggered by a Message

The output message can be triggered by receiving a message, as shown in the following example:

def dsl = Contract.make {
	description 'Some Description'
	label 'some_label'
	// input is a message
	input {
		// the message was received from this destination
		messageFrom('input')
		// has the following body
		messageBody([
		        bookName: 'foo'
		])
		// and the following headers
		messageHeaders {
			header('sample', 'header')
		}
	}
	outputMessage {
		sentTo('output')
		body([
		        bookName: 'foo'
		])
		headers {
			header('BOOK-NAME', 'foo')
		}
	}
}

In the preceding example, the output message is sent to output if a proper message is received on the input destination. On the message publisher’s side, the engine generates a test that sends the input message to the defined destination. On the consumer side, you can either send a message to the input destination or use a label (some_label in the example) to trigger the message.

84.9.3 Consumer/Producer

In HTTP, you have a notion of client/stub and `server/test notation. You can also use those paradigms in messaging. In addition, Spring Cloud Contract Verifier also provides the consumer and producer methods, as presented in the following example (note that you can use either $ or value methods to provide consumer and producer parts):

Contract.make {
	label 'some_label'
	input {
		messageFrom value(consumer('jms:output'), producer('jms:input'))
		messageBody([
				bookName: 'foo'
		])
		messageHeaders {
			header('sample', 'header')
		}
	}
	outputMessage {
		sentTo $(consumer('jms:input'), producer('jms:output'))
		body([
				bookName: 'foo'
		])
	}
}

84.9.4 Common

In the input {} or outputMessage {} section you can call assertThat with the name of a method (e.g. assertThatMessageIsOnTheQueue()) that you have defined in the base class or in a static import. Spring Cloud Pipelines will execute that method in the genertaed test.

84.10 Multiple Contracts in One File

You can define multiple contracts in one file. Such a contract might resemble the following example:

import org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract

[
        Contract.make {
            name("should post a user")
            request {
                method 'POST'
                url('/users/1')
            }
            response {
                status 200
            }
        },
        Contract.make {
            request {
                method 'POST'
                url('/users/2')
            }
            response {
                status 200
            }
        }
]

In the preceding example, one contract has the name field and the other does not. This leads to generation of two tests that look more or less like this:

package org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.tests.com.hello;

import com.example.TestBase;
import com.jayway.jsonpath.DocumentContext;
import com.jayway.jsonpath.JsonPath;
import com.jayway.restassured.module.mockmvc.specification.MockMvcRequestSpecification;
import com.jayway.restassured.response.ResponseOptions;
import org.junit.Test;

import static com.jayway.restassured.module.mockmvc.RestAssuredMockMvc.*;
import static com.toomuchcoding.jsonassert.JsonAssertion.assertThatJson;
import static org.assertj.core.api.Assertions.assertThat;

public class V1Test extends TestBase {

	@Test
	public void validate_should_post_a_user() throws Exception {
		// given:
			MockMvcRequestSpecification request = given();

		// when:
			ResponseOptions response = given().spec(request)
					.post("/users/1");

		// then:
			assertThat(response.statusCode()).isEqualTo(200);
	}

	@Test
	public void validate_withList_1() throws Exception {
		// given:
			MockMvcRequestSpecification request = given();

		// when:
			ResponseOptions response = given().spec(request)
					.post("/users/2");

		// then:
			assertThat(response.statusCode()).isEqualTo(200);
	}

}

Notice that, for the contract that has the name field, the generated test method is named validate_should_post_a_user. For the one that does not have the name, it is called validate_withList_1. It corresponds to the name of the file WithList.groovy and the index of the contract in the list.

The generated stubs is shown in the following example:

should post a user.json
1_WithList.json

As you can see, the first file got the name parameter from the contract. The second got the name of the contract file (WithList.groovy) prefixed with the index (in this case, the contract had an index of 1 in the list of contracts in the file).

[Tip]Tip

As you can see, it iss much better if you name your contracts because doing so makes your tests far more meaningful.

85. Customization

You can customize the Spring Cloud Contract Verifier by extending the DSL, as shown in the remainder of this section.

85.1 Extending the DSL

You can provide your own functions to the DSL. The key requirement for this feature is to maintain the static compatibility. Later in this document, you can see examples of:

  • Creating a JAR with reusable classes.
  • Referencing of these classes in the DSLs.

You can find the full example here.

85.1.1 Common JAR

The following examples show three classes that can be reused in the DSLs.

PatternUtils contains functions used by both the consumer and the producer.

package com.example;

import java.util.regex.Pattern;

/**
 * If you want to use {@link Pattern} directly in your tests
 * then you can create a class resembling this one. It can
 * contain all the {@link Pattern} you want to use in the DSL.
 *
 * <pre>
 * {@code
 * request {
 *     body(
 *         [ age: $(c(PatternUtils.oldEnough()))]
 *     )
 * }
 * </pre>
 *
 * Notice that we're using both {@code $()} for dynamic values
 * and {@code c()} for the consumer side.
 *
 * @author Marcin Grzejszczak
 */
//tag::impl[]
public class PatternUtils {

	public static String tooYoung() {
		//remove::start[]
		return "[0-1][0-9]";
		//remove::end[return]
	}

	public static Pattern oldEnough() {
		//remove::start[]
		return Pattern.compile("[2-9][0-9]");
		//remove::end[return]
	}

	/**
	 * Makes little sense but it's just an example ;)
	 */
	public static Pattern ok() {
		//remove::start[]
		return Pattern.compile("OK");
		//remove::end[return]
	}
}
//end::impl[]

ConsumerUtils contains functions used by the consumer.

package com.example;

import org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.internal.ClientDslProperty;

/**
 * DSL Properties passed to the DSL from the consumer's perspective.
 * That means that on the input side {@code Request} for HTTP
 * or {@code Input} for messaging you can have a regular expression.
 * On the {@code Response} for HTTP or {@code Output} for messaging
 * you have to have a concrete value.
 *
 * @author Marcin Grzejszczak
 */
//tag::impl[]
public class ConsumerUtils {
	/**
	 * Consumer side property. By using the {@link ClientDslProperty}
	 * you can omit most of boilerplate code from the perspective
	 * of dynamic values. Example
	 *
	 * <pre>
	 * {@code
	 * request {
	 *     body(
	 *         [ age: $(ConsumerUtils.oldEnough())]
	 *     )
	 * }
	 * </pre>
	 *
	 * That way it's in the implementation that we decide what value we will pass to the consumer
	 * and which one to the producer.
	 *
	 * @author Marcin Grzejszczak
	 */
	public static ClientDslProperty oldEnough() {
		//remove::start[]
		// this example is not the best one and
		// theoretically you could just pass the regex instead of `ServerDslProperty` but
		// it's just to show some new tricks :)
		return new ClientDslProperty(PatternUtils.oldEnough(), 40);
		//remove::end[return]
	}

}
//end::impl[]

ProducerUtils contains functions used by the producer.

package com.example;

import org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.internal.ServerDslProperty;

/**
 * DSL Properties passed to the DSL from the producer's perspective.
 * That means that on the input side {@code Request} for HTTP
 * or {@code Input} for messaging you have to have a concrete value.
 * On the {@code Response} for HTTP or {@code Output} for messaging
 * you can have a regular expression.
 *
 * @author Marcin Grzejszczak
 */
//tag::impl[]
public class ProducerUtils {

	/**
	 * Producer side property. By using the {@link ProducerUtils}
	 * you can omit most of boilerplate code from the perspective
	 * of dynamic values. Example
	 *
	 * <pre>
	 * {@code
	 * response {
	 *     body(
	 *         [ status: $(ProducerUtils.ok())]
	 *     )
	 * }
	 * </pre>
	 *
	 * That way it's in the implementation that we decide what value we will pass to the consumer
	 * and which one to the producer.
	 */
	public static ServerDslProperty ok() {
		// this example is not the best one and
		// theoretically you could just pass the regex instead of `ServerDslProperty` but
		// it's just to show some new tricks :)
		return new ServerDslProperty( PatternUtils.ok(), "OK");
	}
}
//end::impl[]

85.1.2 Adding the Dependency to the Project

In order for the plugins and IDE to be able to reference the common JAR classes, you need to pass the dependency to your project.

85.1.3 Test the Dependency in the Project’s Dependencies

First, add the common jar dependency as a test dependency. Because your contracts files are available on the test resources path, the common jar classes automatically become visible in your Groovy files. The following examples show how to test the dependency:

Maven. 

<dependency>
	<groupId>com.example</groupId>
	<artifactId>beer-common</artifactId>
	<version>${project.version}</version>
	<scope>test</scope>
</dependency>

Gradle. 

testCompile("com.example:beer-common:0.0.1-SNAPSHOT")

85.1.4 Test a Dependency in the Plugin’s Dependencies

Now, you must add the dependency for the plugin to reuse at runtime, as shown in the following example:

Maven. 

<plugin>
	<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
	<artifactId>spring-cloud-contract-maven-plugin</artifactId>
	<version>${spring-cloud-contract.version}</version>
	<extensions>true</extensions>
	<configuration>
		<packageWithBaseClasses>com.example</packageWithBaseClasses>
		<baseClassMappings>
			<baseClassMapping>
				<contractPackageRegex>.*intoxication.*</contractPackageRegex>
				<baseClassFQN>com.example.intoxication.BeerIntoxicationBase</baseClassFQN>
			</baseClassMapping>
		</baseClassMappings>
	</configuration>
	<dependencies>
		<dependency>
			<groupId>com.example</groupId>
			<artifactId>beer-common</artifactId>
			<version>${project.version}</version>
			<scope>compile</scope>
		</dependency>
	</dependencies>
</plugin>

Gradle. 

classpath "com.example:beer-common:0.0.1-SNAPSHOT"

85.1.5 Referencing classes in DSLs

You can now reference your classes in your DSL, as shown in the following example:

package contracts.beer.rest

import com.example.ConsumerUtils
import com.example.ProducerUtils
import org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract

Contract.make {
	description("""
Represents a successful scenario of getting a beer

```
given:
	client is old enough
when:
	he applies for a beer
then:
	we'll grant him the beer
```

""")
	request {
		method 'POST'
		url '/check'
		body(
				age: $(ConsumerUtils.oldEnough())
		)
		headers {
			contentType(applicationJson())
		}
	}
	response {
		status 200
		body("""
			{
				"status": "${value(ProducerUtils.ok())}"
			}
			""")
		headers {
			contentType(applicationJson())
		}
	}
}

86. Using the Pluggable Architecture

You may encounter cases where you have your contracts have been defined in other formats, such as YAML, RAML or PACT. In those cases, you still want to benefit from the automatic generation of tests and stubs. You can add your own implementation for generating both tests and stubs. Also, you can customize the way tests are generated (for example, you can generate tests for other languages) and the way stubs are generated (for example, you can generate stubs for other HTTP server implementations).

86.1 Custom Contract Converter

Assume that your contract is written in a YAML file as follows:

request:
  url: /foo
  method: PUT
  headers:
    foo: bar
  body:
    foo: bar
response:
  status: 200
  headers:
    foo2: bar
  body:
    foo2: bar

The ContractConverter interface lets you register your own implementation of a contract structure converter. The following code listing shows the ContractConverter interface:

package org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec

/**
 * Converter to be used to convert FROM {@link File} TO {@link Contract}
 * and from {@link Contract} to {@code T}
 *
 * @param <T> - type to which we want to convert the contract
 *
 * @author Marcin Grzejszczak
 * @since 1.1.0
 */
interface ContractConverter<T> {

	/**
	 * Should this file be accepted by the converter. Can use the file extension
	 * to check if the conversion is possible.
	 *
	 * @param file - file to be considered for conversion
	 * @return - {@code true} if the given implementation can convert the file
	 */
	boolean isAccepted(File file)

	/**
	 * Converts the given {@link File} to its {@link Contract} representation
	 *
	 * @param file - file to convert
	 * @return - {@link Contract} representation of the file
	 */
	Collection<Contract> convertFrom(File file)

	/**
	 * Converts the given {@link Contract} to a {@link T} representation
	 *
	 * @param contract - the parsed contract
	 * @return - {@link T} the type to which we do the conversion
	 */
	T convertTo(Collection<Contract> contract)
}

Your implementation must define the condition on which it should start the conversion. Also, you must define how to perform that conversion in both directions.

[Important]Important

Once you create your implementation, you must create a /META-INF/spring.factories file in which you provide the fully qualified name of your implementation.

The following example shows a typical spring.factories file:

# Converters
org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.ContractConverter=\
org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.converter.YamlContractConverter

The following example shows a typical YAML implementation that matches the preceding example:

package org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.converter

import java.nio.file.Files

import groovy.transform.CompileStatic
import org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract
import org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.ContractConverter
import org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.internal.Headers
import org.yaml.snakeyaml.Yaml

/**
 * Simple converter from and to a {@link YamlContract} to a collection of {@link Contract}
 */
@CompileStatic
class YamlContractConverter implements ContractConverter<List<YamlContract>> {

	@Override
	public boolean isAccepted(File file) {
		String name = file.getName()
		return name.endsWith(".yml") || name.endsWith(".yaml")
	}

	@Override
	public Collection<Contract> convertFrom(File file) {
		try {
			YamlContract yamlContract = new Yaml().loadAs(
					Files.newInputStream(file.toPath()), YamlContract.class)
			return [Contract.make {
				request {
					method(yamlContract?.request?.method)
					url(yamlContract?.request?.url)
					headers {
						yamlContract?.request?.headers?.each { String key, Object value ->
							header(key, value)
						}
					}
					body(yamlContract?.request?.body)
				}
				response {
					status(yamlContract?.response?.status)
					headers {
						yamlContract?.response?.headers?.each { String key, Object value ->
							header(key, value)
						}
					}
					body(yamlContract?.response?.body)
				}
			}]
		}
		catch (FileNotFoundException e) {
			throw new IllegalStateException(e)
		}
	}

	@Override
	public List<YamlContract> convertTo(Collection<Contract> contracts) {
		return contracts.collect { Contract contract ->
			YamlContract yamlContract = new YamlContract()
			yamlContract.request.with {
				method = contract?.request?.method?.clientValue
				url = contract?.request?.url?.clientValue
				headers = (contract?.request?.headers as Headers)?.asStubSideMap()
				body = contract?.request?.body?.clientValue as Map
			}
			yamlContract.response.with {
				status = contract?.response?.status?.clientValue as Integer
				headers = (contract?.response?.headers as Headers)?.asStubSideMap()
				body = contract?.response?.body?.clientValue as Map
			}
			return yamlContract
		}
	}
}

86.1.1 Pact Converter

Spring Cloud Contract includes support for Pact representation of contracts. Instead of using the Groovy DSL, you can use Pact files. In this section, we present how to add Pact support for your project.

86.1.2 Pact Contract

Consider following example of a Pact contract, which is a file under the src/test/resources/contracts folder.

{
  "provider": {
    "name": "Provider"
  },
  "consumer": {
    "name": "Consumer"
  },
  "interactions": [
    {
      "description": "",
      "request": {
        "method": "PUT",
        "path": "/fraudcheck",
        "headers": {
          "Content-Type": "application/vnd.fraud.v1+json"
        },
        "body": {
          "clientId": "1234567890",
          "loanAmount": 99999
        },
        "matchingRules": {
          "$.body.clientId": {
            "match": "regex",
            "regex": "[0-9]{10}"
          }
        }
      },
      "response": {
        "status": 200,
        "headers": {
          "Content-Type": "application/vnd.fraud.v1+json;charset=UTF-8"
        },
        "body": {
          "fraudCheckStatus": "FRAUD",
          "rejectionReason": "Amount too high"
        },
        "matchingRules": {
          "$.body.fraudCheckStatus": {
            "match": "regex",
            "regex": "FRAUD"
          }
        }
      }
    }
  ],
  "metadata": {
    "pact-specification": {
      "version": "2.0.0"
    },
    "pact-jvm": {
      "version": "2.4.18"
    }
  }
}

The remainder of this section about using Pact refers to the preceding file.

86.1.3 Pact for Producers

On the producer side, you mustadd two additional dependencies to your plugin configuration. One is the Spring Cloud Contract Pact support, and the other represents the current Pact version that you use.

Maven. 

<plugin>
	<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
	<artifactId>spring-cloud-contract-maven-plugin</artifactId>
	<version>${spring-cloud-contract.version}</version>
	<extensions>true</extensions>
	<configuration>
		<packageWithBaseClasses>com.example.fraud</packageWithBaseClasses>
	</configuration>
	<dependencies>
		<dependency>
			<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
			<artifactId>spring-cloud-contract-spec-pact</artifactId>
			<version>${spring-cloud-contract.version}</version>
		</dependency>
		<dependency>
			<groupId>au.com.dius</groupId>
			<artifactId>pact-jvm-model</artifactId>
			<version>2.4.18</version>
		</dependency>
	</dependencies>
</plugin>

Gradle. 

classpath "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-contract-spec-pact:${findProperty('verifierVersion') ?: verifierVersion}"
classpath 'au.com.dius:pact-jvm-model:2.4.18'

When you execute the build of your application, a test will be generated. The generated test might be as follows:

@Test
public void validate_shouldMarkClientAsFraud() throws Exception {
	// given:
		MockMvcRequestSpecification request = given()
				.header("Content-Type", "application/vnd.fraud.v1+json")
				.body("{\"clientId\":\"1234567890\",\"loanAmount\":99999}");

	// when:
		ResponseOptions response = given().spec(request)
				.put("/fraudcheck");

	// then:
		assertThat(response.statusCode()).isEqualTo(200);
		assertThat(response.header("Content-Type")).isEqualTo("application/vnd.fraud.v1+json;charset=UTF-8");
	// and:
		DocumentContext parsedJson = JsonPath.parse(response.getBody().asString());
		assertThatJson(parsedJson).field("rejectionReason").isEqualTo("Amount too high");
	// and:
		assertThat(parsedJson.read("$.fraudCheckStatus", String.class)).matches("FRAUD");
}

The corresponding generated stub might be as follows:

{
  "uuid" : "996ae5ae-6834-4db6-8fac-358ca187ab62",
  "request" : {
    "url" : "/fraudcheck",
    "method" : "PUT",
    "headers" : {
      "Content-Type" : {
        "equalTo" : "application/vnd.fraud.v1+json"
      }
    },
    "bodyPatterns" : [ {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$[?(@.loanAmount == 99999)]"
    }, {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$[?(@.clientId =~ /([0-9]{10})/)]"
    } ]
  },
  "response" : {
    "status" : 200,
    "body" : "{\"fraudCheckStatus\":\"FRAUD\",\"rejectionReason\":\"Amount too high\"}",
    "headers" : {
      "Content-Type" : "application/vnd.fraud.v1+json;charset=UTF-8"
    }
  }
}

86.1.4 Pact for Consumers

On the producer side, you must add two additional dependencies to your project dependencies. One is the Spring Cloud Contract Pact support, and the other represents the current Pact version that you use.

Maven. 

<dependency>
	<groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
	<artifactId>spring-cloud-contract-spec-pact</artifactId>
	<scope>test</scope>
</dependency>
<dependency>
	<groupId>au.com.dius</groupId>
	<artifactId>pact-jvm-model</artifactId>
	<version>2.4.18</version>
	<scope>test</scope>
</dependency>

Gradle. 

testCompile "org.springframework.cloud:spring-cloud-contract-spec-pact"
testCompile 'au.com.dius:pact-jvm-model:2.4.18'

86.2 Using the Custom Test Generator

If you want to generate tests for languages other than Java or you are not happy with the way the verifier builds Java tests, you can register your own implementation.

The SingleTestGenerator interface lets you register your own implementation. The following code listing shows the SingleTestGenerator interface:

package org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.builder

import org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.config.ContractVerifierConfigProperties
import org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.file.ContractMetadata
/**
 * Builds a single test.
 *
 * @since 1.1.0
 */
interface SingleTestGenerator {

	/**
	 * Creates contents of a single test class in which all test scenarios from
	 * the contract metadata should be placed.
	 *
	 * @param properties - properties passed to the plugin
	 * @param listOfFiles - list of parsed contracts with additional metadata
	 * @param className - the name of the generated test class
	 * @param classPackage - the name of the package in which the test class should be stored
	 * @param includedDirectoryRelativePath - relative path to the included directory
	 * @return contents of a single test class
	 */
	String buildClass(ContractVerifierConfigProperties properties, Collection<ContractMetadata> listOfFiles,
					  String className, String classPackage, String includedDirectoryRelativePath)

	/**
	 * Extension that should be appended to the generated test class. E.g. {@code .java} or {@code .php}
	 *
	 * @param properties - properties passed to the plugin
	 */
	String fileExtension(ContractVerifierConfigProperties properties)
}

Again, you must provide a spring.factories file, such as the one shown in the following example:

org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.builder.SingleTestGenerator=/
com.example.MyGenerator

86.3 Using the Custom Stub Generator

If you want to generate stubs for stub servers other than WireMock, you can plug in your own implementation of the StubGenerator interface. The following code listing shows the StubGenerator interface:

package org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.converter

import groovy.transform.CompileStatic
import org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract
import org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.file.ContractMetadata

/**
 * Converts contracts into their stub representation.
 *
 * @since 1.1.0
 */
@CompileStatic
interface StubGenerator {

	/**
	 * Returns {@code true} if the converter can handle the file to convert it into a stub.
	 */
	boolean canHandleFileName(String fileName)

	/**
	 * Returns the collection of converted contracts into stubs. One contract can
	 * result in multiple stubs.
	 */
	Map<Contract, String> convertContents(String rootName, ContractMetadata content)

	/**
	 * Returns the name of the converted stub file. If you have multiple contracts
	 * in a single file then a prefix will be added to the generated file. If you
	 * provide the {@link Contract#name} field then that field will override the
	 * generated file name.
	 *
	 * Example: name of file with 2 contracts is {@code foo.groovy}, it will be
	 * converted by the implementation to {@code foo.json}. The recursive file
	 * converter will create two files {@code 0_foo.json} and {@code 1_foo.json}
	 */
	String generateOutputFileNameForInput(String inputFileName)
}

Again, you must provide a spring.factories file, such as the one shown in the following example:

# Stub converters
org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.converter.StubGenerator=\
org.springframework.cloud.contract.verifier.wiremock.DslToWireMockClientConverter

The default implementation is the WireMock stub generation.

[Tip]Tip

You can provide multiple stub generator implementations. For example, from a single DSL, you can produce both WireMock stubs and Pact files.

86.4 Using the Custom Stub Runner

If you decide to use a custom stub generation, you also need a custom way of running stubs with your different stub provider.

Assume that you use Moco to build your stubs and that you have written a stub generator and placed your stubs in a JAR file.

In order for Stub Runner to know how to run your stubs, you have to define a custom HTTP Stub server implementation, which might resemble the following example:

package org.springframework.cloud.contract.stubrunner.provider.moco

import com.github.dreamhead.moco.bootstrap.arg.HttpArgs
import com.github.dreamhead.moco.runner.JsonRunner
import com.github.dreamhead.moco.runner.RunnerSetting
import groovy.util.logging.Slf4j
import org.springframework.cloud.contract.stubrunner.HttpServerStub
import org.springframework.util.SocketUtils

@Slf4j
class MocoHttpServerStub implements HttpServerStub {

	private boolean started
	private JsonRunner runner
	private int port

	@Override
	int port() {
		if (!isRunning()) {
			return -1
		}
		return port
	}

	@Override
	boolean isRunning() {
		return started
	}

	@Override
	HttpServerStub start() {
		return start(SocketUtils.findAvailableTcpPort())
	}

	@Override
	HttpServerStub start(int port) {
		this.port = port
		return this
	}

	@Override
	HttpServerStub stop() {
		if (!isRunning()) {
			return this
		}
		this.runner.stop()
		return this
	}

	@Override
	HttpServerStub registerMappings(Collection<File> stubFiles) {
		List<RunnerSetting> settings = stubFiles.findAll { it.name.endsWith("json") }
				.collect {
			log.info("Trying to parse [{}]", it.name)
			try {
				return RunnerSetting.aRunnerSetting().withStream(it.newInputStream()).build()
			} catch (Exception e) {
				log.warn("Exception occurred while trying to parse file [{}]", it.name, e)
				return null
			}
		}.findAll { it }
		this.runner = JsonRunner.newJsonRunnerWithSetting(settings,
				HttpArgs.httpArgs().withPort(this.port).build())
		this.runner.run()
		this.started = true
		return this
	}

	@Override
	boolean isAccepted(File file) {
		return file.name.endsWith(".json")
	}
}

Then, you can register it in your spring.factories file, as shown in the following example:

org.springframework.cloud.contract.stubrunner.HttpServerStub=\
org.springframework.cloud.contract.stubrunner.provider.moco.MocoHttpServerStub

Now you can run stubs with Moco.

[Important]Important

If you do not provide any implementation, then the default (WireMock) implementation is used. If you provide more than one, the first one on the list is used.

86.5 Using the Custom Stub Downloader

You can customize the way your stubs are downloaded by creating an implementation of the StubDownloaderBuilder interface, as shown in the following example:

package com.example;

class CustomStubDownloaderBuilder implements StubDownloaderBuilder {

	@Override
	public StubDownloader build(final StubRunnerOptions stubRunnerOptions) {
		return new StubDownloader() {
			@Override
			public Map.Entry<StubConfiguration, File> downloadAndUnpackStubJar(
					StubConfiguration config) {
				File unpackedStubs = retrieveStubs();
				return new AbstractMap.SimpleEntry<>(
						new StubConfiguration(config.getGroupId(), config.getArtifactId(), version,
								config.getClassifier()), unpackedStubs);
			}

			File retrieveStubs() {
			    // here goes your custom logic to provide a folder where all the stubs reside
			}
}

Then you can register it in your spring.factories file, as shown in the following example:

# Example of a custom Stub Downloader Provider
org.springframework.cloud.contract.stubrunner.StubDownloaderBuilder=\
com.example.CustomStubDownloaderBuilder

Now you can pick a folder with the source of your stubs.

[Important]Important

If you do not provide any implementation, then the default is used. If you use the repositoryRoot property or the workOffline flag, then an Aether-based implementation that downloads stubs from a remote repository is used. If you do not provide these values, the ClasspathStubProvider (which will scan the classpath) is used. If you provide more than one, then the first one on the list is used.

87. Spring Cloud Contract WireMock

Modules giving you the possibility to use WireMock with different servers by using the "ambient" server embedded in a Spring Boot application. Check out the samples for more details.

[Important]Important

The Spring Cloud Release Train BOM imports spring-cloud-contract-dependencies which in turn has exclusions for the dependencies needed by WireMock. This might lead to a situation that even if you’re not using Spring Cloud Contract then your dependencies will be influenced anyways.

If you have a Spring Boot application that uses Tomcat as an embedded server, for example (the default with spring-boot-starter-web), then you can simply add spring-cloud-contract-wiremock to your classpath and add @AutoConfigureWireMock in order to be able to use Wiremock in your tests. Wiremock runs as a stub server and you can register stub behaviour using a Java API or via static JSON declarations as part of your test. Here’s a simple example:

@RunWith(SpringRunner.class)
@SpringBootTest(webEnvironment = WebEnvironment.RANDOM_PORT)
@AutoConfigureWireMock(port = 0)
public class WiremockForDocsTests {
	// A service that calls out over HTTP
	@Autowired private Service service;

	// Using the WireMock APIs in the normal way:
	@Test
	public void contextLoads() throws Exception {
		// Stubbing WireMock
		stubFor(get(urlEqualTo("/resource"))
				.willReturn(aResponse().withHeader("Content-Type", "text/plain").withBody("Hello World!")));
		// We're asserting if WireMock responded properly
		assertThat(this.service.go()).isEqualTo("Hello World!");
	}

}

To start the stub server on a different port use @AutoConfigureWireMock(port=9999) (for example), and for a random port use the value 0. The stub server port will be bindable in the test application context as "wiremock.server.port". Using @AutoConfigureWireMock adds a bean of type WiremockConfiguration to your test application context, where it will be cached in between methods and classes having the same context, just like for normal Spring integration tests.

87.1 Registering Stubs Automatically

If you use @AutoConfigureWireMock then it will register WireMock JSON stubs from the file system or classpath, by default from file:src/test/resources/mappings. You can customize the locations using the stubs attribute in the annotation, which can be a resource pattern (ant-style) or a directory, in which case */.json is appended. Example:

@RunWith(SpringRunner.class)
@SpringBootTest
@AutoConfigureWireMock(stubs="classpath:/stubs")
public class WiremockImportApplicationTests {

	@Autowired
	private Service service;

	@Test
	public void contextLoads() throws Exception {
		assertThat(this.service.go()).isEqualTo("Hello World!");
	}

}
[Note]Note

Actually WireMock always loads mappings from src/test/resources/mappings as well as the custom locations in the stubs attribute. To change this behaviour you have to also specify a files root as described next.

87.2 Using Files to Specify the Stub Bodies

WireMock can read response bodies from files on the classpath or file system. In that case you will see in the JSON DSL that the response has a "bodyFileName" instead of a (literal) "body". The files are resolved relative to a root directory src/test/resources/__files by default. To customize this location you can set the files attribute in the @AutoConfigureWireMock annotation to the location of the parent directory (i.e. the place __files is a subdirectory). You can use Spring resource notation to refer to file:…​ or classpath:…​ locations (but generic URLs are not supported). A list of values can be given and WireMock will resolve the first file that exists when it needs to find a response body.

[Note]Note

when you configure the files root, then it affects the automatic loading of stubs as well (they come from the root location in a subdirectory called "mappings"). The value of files has no effect on the stubs loaded explicitly from the stubs attribute.

87.3 Alternative: Using JUnit Rules

For a more conventional WireMock experience, using JUnit @Rules to start and stop the server, just use the WireMockSpring convenience class to obtain an Options instance:

@RunWith(SpringRunner.class)
@SpringBootTest(webEnvironment = WebEnvironment.RANDOM_PORT)
public class WiremockForDocsClassRuleTests {

	// Start WireMock on some dynamic port
	// for some reason `dynamicPort()` is not working properly
	@ClassRule
	public static WireMockClassRule wiremock = new WireMockClassRule(
			WireMockSpring.options().dynamicPort());
	// A service that calls out over HTTP to localhost:${wiremock.port}
	@Autowired
	private Service service;

	// Using the WireMock APIs in the normal way:
	@Test
	public void contextLoads() throws Exception {
		// Stubbing WireMock
		wiremock.stubFor(get(urlEqualTo("/resource"))
				.willReturn(aResponse().withHeader("Content-Type", "text/plain").withBody("Hello World!")));
		// We're asserting if WireMock responded properly
		assertThat(this.service.go()).isEqualTo("Hello World!");
	}

}

The use @ClassRule means that the server will shut down after all the methods in this class.

87.4 Relaxed SSL Validation for Rest Template

WireMock allows you to stub a "secure" server with an "https" URL protocol. If your application wants to contact that stub server in an integration test, then it will find that the SSL certificates are not valid (it’s the usual problem with self-installed certificates). The best option is often to just re-configure the client to use "http", but if that’s not open to you then you can ask Spring to configure an HTTP client that ignores SSL validation errors (just for tests).

To make this work with minimum fuss you need to be using the Spring Boot RestTemplateBuilder in your app, e.g.

@Bean
public RestTemplate restTemplate(RestTemplateBuilder builder) {
	return builder.build();
}

This is because the builder is passed through callbacks to initalize it, so the SSL validation can be set up in the client at that point. This will happen automatically in your test if you are using the @AutoConfigureWireMock annotation (or the stub runner). If you are using the JUnit @Rule approach you need to add the @AutoConfigureHttpClient annotation as well:

@RunWith(SpringRunner.class)
@SpringBootTest("app.baseUrl=https://localhost:6443")
@AutoConfigureHttpClient
public class WiremockHttpsServerApplicationTests {

	@ClassRule
	public static WireMockClassRule wiremock = new WireMockClassRule(
			WireMockSpring.options().httpsPort(6443));
...
}

If you are using spring-boot-starter-test then you will have the Apache HTTP client on the classpath and it will be selected by the RestTemplateBuilder and configured to ignore SSL errors. If you are using the default java.net client you don’t need the annotation (but it won’t do any harm). There is no support currently for other clients, but it may be added in future releases.

87.5 WireMock and Spring MVC Mocks

Spring Cloud Contract provides a convenience class that can load JSON WireMock stubs into a Spring MockRestServiceServer. Here’s an example:

@RunWith(SpringRunner.class)
@SpringBootTest(webEnvironment = WebEnvironment.NONE)
public class WiremockForDocsMockServerApplicationTests {

	@Autowired
	private RestTemplate restTemplate;

	@Autowired
	private Service service;

	@Test
	public void contextLoads() throws Exception {
		// will read stubs classpath
		MockRestServiceServer server = WireMockRestServiceServer.with(this.restTemplate)
				.baseUrl("http://example.org").stubs("classpath:/stubs/resource.json")
				.build();
		// We're asserting if WireMock responded properly
		assertThat(this.service.go()).isEqualTo("Hello World");
		server.verify();
	}
}

The baseUrl is prepended to all mock calls, and the stubs() method takes a stub path resource pattern as an argument. So in this example the stub defined at /stubs/resource.json is loaded into the mock server, so if the RestTemplate is asked to visit http://example.org/ it will get the responses as declared there. More than one stub pattern can be specified, and each one can be a directory (for a recursive list of all ".json"), or a fixed filename (like in the example above) or an ant-style pattern. The JSON format is the normal WireMock format which you can read about in the WireMock website.

Currently we support Tomcat, Jetty and Undertow as Spring Boot embedded servers, and Wiremock itself has "native" support for a particular version of Jetty (currently 9.2). To use the native Jetty you need to add the native wiremock dependencies and exclude the Spring Boot container if there is one.

87.6 Generating Stubs using RestDocs

Spring RestDocs can be used to generate documentation (e.g. in asciidoctor format) for an HTTP API with Spring MockMvc or Rest Assured. At the same time as you generate documentation for your API, you can also generate WireMock stubs, by using Spring Cloud Contract WireMock. Just write your normal RestDocs test cases and use @AutoConfigureRestDocs to have stubs automatically in the restdocs output directory. For example:

@RunWith(SpringRunner.class)
@SpringBootTest
@AutoConfigureRestDocs(outputDir = "target/snippets")
@AutoConfigureMockMvc
public class ApplicationTests {

	@Autowired
	private MockMvc mockMvc;

	@Test
	public void contextLoads() throws Exception {
		mockMvc.perform(get("/resource"))
				.andExpect(content().string("Hello World"))
				.andDo(document("resource"));
	}
}

From this test will be generated a WireMock stub at "target/snippets/stubs/resource.json". It matches all GET requests to the "/resource" path.

Without any additional configuration this will create a stub with a request matcher for the HTTP method and all headers except "host" and "content-length". To match the request more precisely, for example to match the body of a POST or PUT, we need to explicitly create a request matcher. This will do two things: 1) create a stub that only matches the way you specify, 2) assert that the request in the test case also matches the same conditions.

The main entry point for this is WireMockRestDocs.verify() which can be used as a substitute for the document() convenience method. For example:

@RunWith(SpringRunner.class)
@SpringBootTest
@AutoConfigureRestDocs(outputDir = "target/snippets")
@AutoConfigureMockMvc
public class ApplicationTests {

	@Autowired
	private MockMvc mockMvc;

	@Test
	public void contextLoads() throws Exception {
		mockMvc.perform(post("/resource")
                .content("{\"id\":\"123456\",\"message\":\"Hello World\"}"))
				.andExpect(status().isOk())
				.andDo(verify().jsonPath("$.id")
                        .stub("resource"));
	}
}

So this contract is saying: any valid POST with an "id" field will get back an the same response as in this test. You can chain together calls to .jsonPath() to add additional matchers. The JayWay documentation can help you to get up to speed with JSON Path if it is unfamiliar to you.

Instead of the jsonPath and contentType convenience methods, you can also use the WireMock APIs to verify the request matches the created stub. Example:

@Test
public void contextLoads() throws Exception {
	mockMvc.perform(post("/resource")
               .content("{\"id\":\"123456\",\"message\":\"Hello World\"}"))
			.andExpect(status().isOk())
			.andDo(verify()
					.wiremock(WireMock.post(
						urlPathEquals("/resource"))
						.withRequestBody(matchingJsonPath("$.id"))
                       .stub("post-resource"));
}

The WireMock API is rich - you can match headers, query parameters, and request body by regex as well as by json path - so this can useful to create stubs with a wider range of parameters. The above example will generate a stub something like this:

post-resource.json. 

{
  "request" : {
    "url" : "/resource",
    "method" : "POST",
    "bodyPatterns" : [ {
      "matchesJsonPath" : "$.id"
    }]
  },
  "response" : {
    "status" : 200,
    "body" : "Hello World",
    "headers" : {
      "X-Application-Context" : "application:-1",
      "Content-Type" : "text/plain"
    }
  }
}

[Note]Note

You can use either the wiremock() method or the jsonPath() and contentType() methods to create request matchers, but not both.

On the consumer side, you can make the resource.json generated above available on the classpath (by publishing stubs as JARs for example). After that, you can create a stub using WireMock in a number of different ways, including as described above using @AutoConfigureWireMock(stubs="classpath:resource.json").

87.7 Generating Contracts using RestDocs

Another thing that can be generated with Spring RestDocs is the Spring Cloud Contract DSL file and documentation. If you combine that with Spring Cloud WireMock then you’re getting both the contracts and stubs.

Why would you want to use this feature? Some people in the community asked questions about situation in which they would like to move to DSL based contract definition but they already have a lot of Spring MVC tests. Using this feature allows you to generate the contract files that you can later modify and move to proper folders so that the plugin picks them up.

[Tip]Tip

You might wonder why this functionality is in the WireMock module. Come to think of it, it does make sense since it makes little sense to generate only contracts and not generate the stubs. That’s why we suggest to do both.

Let’s imagine the following test:

		this.mockMvc.perform(post("/foo")
					.accept(MediaType.APPLICATION_PDF)
					.accept(MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON)
					.contentType(MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON)
					.content("{\"foo\": 23, \"bar\" : \"baz\" }"))
				.andExpect(status().isOk())
				.andExpect(content().string("bar"))
				// first WireMock
				.andDo(WireMockRestDocs.verify()
						.jsonPath("$[?(@.foo >= 20)]")
						.jsonPath("$[?(@.bar in ['baz','bazz','bazzz'])]")
						.contentType(MediaType.valueOf("application/json"))
						.stub("shouldGrantABeerIfOldEnough"))
				// then Contract DSL documentation
				.andDo(document("index", SpringCloudContractRestDocs.dslContract()));

This will lead in the creation of the stub as presented in the previous section, contract will get generated and a documentation file too.

The contract will be called index.groovy and look more like this.

import org.springframework.cloud.contract.spec.Contract

Contract.make {
    request {
        method 'POST'
        url '/foo'
        body('''
            {"foo": 23 }
        ''')
        headers {
            header('''Accept''', '''application/json''')
            header('''Content-Type''', '''application/json''')
        }
    }
    response {
        status 200
        body('''
        bar
        ''')
        headers {
            header('''Content-Type''', '''application/json;charset=UTF-8''')
            header('''Content-Length''', '''3''')
        }
        testMatchers {
            jsonPath('$[?(@.foo >= 20)]', byType())
        }
    }
}

the generated document (example for Asciidoc) will contain a formatted contract (the location of this file would be index/dsl-contract.adoc).

Part XIII. Spring Cloud Vault

© 2016-2017 The original authors.

[Note]Note

Copies of this document may be made for your own use and for distribution to others, provided that you do not charge any fee for such copies and further provided that each copy contains this Copyright Notice, whether distributed in print or electronically.

Spring Cloud Vault Config provides client-side support for externalized configuration in a distributed system. With HashiCorp’s Vault you have a central place to manage external secret properties for applications across all environments. Vault can manage static and dynamic secrets such as username/password for remote applications/resources and provide credentials for external services such as MySQL, PostgreSQL, Apache Cassandra, MongoDB, Consul, AWS and more.

89. Quick Start

Prerequisites

To get started with Vault and this guide you need a *NIX-like operating systems that provides:

  • wget, openssl and unzip
  • at least Java 7 and a properly configured JAVA_HOME environment variable

Install Vault

$ src/test/bash/install_vault.sh

Create SSL certificates for Vault

$ src/test/bash/create_certificates.sh
[Note]Note

create_certificates.sh creates certificates in work/ca and a JKS truststore work/keystore.jks. If you want to run Spring Cloud Vault using this quickstart guide you need to configure the truststore the spring.cloud.vault.ssl.trust-store property to file:work/keystore.jks.

Start Vault server

$ src/test/bash/local_run_vault.sh

Vault is started listening on 0.0.0.0:8200 using the inmem storage and https. Vault is sealed and not initialized when starting up.

[Note]Note

If you want to run tests, leave Vault uninitialized. The tests will initialize Vault and create a root token 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000.

If you want to use Vault for your application or give it a try then you need to initialize it first.

$ export VAULT_ADDR="https://localhost:8200"
$ export VAULT_SKIP_VERIFY=true # Don't do this for production
$ vault init

You should see something like:

Key 1: 7149c6a2e16b8833f6eb1e76df03e47f6113a3288b3093faf5033d44f0e70fe701
Key 2: 901c534c7988c18c20435a85213c683bdcf0efcd82e38e2893779f152978c18c02
Key 3: 03ff3948575b1165a20c20ee7c3e6edf04f4cdbe0e82dbff5be49c63f98bc03a03
Key 4: 216ae5cc3ddaf93ceb8e1d15bb9fc3176653f5b738f5f3d1ee00cd7dccbe926e04
Key 5: b2898fc8130929d569c1677ee69dc5f3be57d7c4b494a6062693ce0b1c4d93d805
Initial Root Token: 19aefa97-cccc-bbbb-aaaa-225940e63d76

Vault initialized with 5 keys and a key threshold of 3. Please
securely distribute the above keys. When the Vault is re-sealed,
restarted, or stopped, you must provide at least 3 of these keys
to unseal it again.

Vault does not store the master key. Without at least 3 keys,
your Vault will remain permanently sealed.

Vault will initialize and return a set of unsealing keys and the root token. Pick 3 keys and unseal Vault. Store the Vault token in the VAULT_TOKEN environment variable.

$ vault unseal (Key 1)
$ vault unseal (Key 2)
$ vault unseal (Key 3)
$ export VAULT_TOKEN=(Root token)
# Required to run Spring Cloud Vault tests after manual initialization
$ vault token-create -id="00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000" -policy="root"

Spring Cloud Vault accesses different resources. By default, the secret backend is enabled which accesses secret config settings via JSON endpoints.

The HTTP service has resources in the form:

/secret/{application}/{profile}
/secret/{application}
/secret/{defaultContext}/{profile}
/secret/{defaultContext}

where the "application" is injected as the spring.application.name in the SpringApplication (i.e. what is normally "application" in a regular Spring Boot app), "profile" is an active profile (or comma-separated list of properties). Properties retrieved from Vault will be used "as-is" without further prefixing of the property names.

90. Client Side Usage

To use these features in an application, just build it as a Spring Boot application that depends on spring-cloud-vault-config (e.g. see the test cases). Example Maven configuration:

Example 90.1. pom.xml

<parent>
    <groupId>org.springframework.boot</groupId>
    <artifactId>spring-boot-starter-parent</artifactId>
    <version>1.5.4.RELEASE</version>
    <relativePath /> <!-- lookup parent from repository -->
</parent>

<dependencies>
    <dependency>
        <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
        <artifactId>spring-cloud-starter-vault-config</artifactId>
        <version>Dalston.SR5</version>
    </dependency>
    <dependency>
        <groupId>org.springframework.boot</groupId>
        <artifactId>spring-boot-starter-test</artifactId>
        <scope>test</scope>
    </dependency>
</dependencies>

<build>
    <plugins>
        <plugin>
            <groupId>org.springframework.boot</groupId>
            <artifactId>spring-boot-maven-plugin</artifactId>
        </plugin>
    </plugins>
</build>

<!-- repositories also needed for snapshots and milestones -->

Then you can create a standard Spring Boot application, like this simple HTTP server:

@SpringBootApplication
@RestController
public class Application {

    @RequestMapping("/")
    public String home() {
        return "Hello World!";
    }

    public static void main(String[] args) {
        SpringApplication.run(Application.class, args);
    }
}

When it runs it will pick up the external configuration from the default local Vault server on port 8200 if it is running. To modify the startup behavior you can change the location of the Vault server using bootstrap.properties (like application.properties but for the bootstrap phase of an application context), e.g.

Example 90.2. bootstrap.yml

spring.cloud.vault:
    host: localhost
    port: 8200
    scheme: https
    connection-timeout: 5000
    read-timeout: 15000
    config:
        order: -10

  • host sets the hostname of the Vault host. The host name will be used for SSL certificate validation
  • port sets the Vault port
  • scheme setting the scheme to http will use plain HTTP. Supported schemes are http and https.
  • connection-timeout sets the connection timeout in milliseconds
  • read-timeout sets the read timeout in milliseconds
  • config.order sets the order for the property source

Enabling further integrations requires additional dependencies and configuration. Depending on how you have set up Vault you might need additional configuration like SSL and authentication.

If the application imports the spring-boot-starter-actuator project, the status of the vault server will be available via the /health endpoint.

The vault health indicator can be enabled or disabled through the property health.vault.enabled (default true).

90.1 Authentication

Vault requires an authentication mechanism to authorize client requests.

Spring Cloud Vault supports multiple authentication mechanisms to authenticate applications with Vault.

For a quickstart, use the root token printed by the Vault initialization.

Example 90.3. bootstrap.yml

spring.cloud.vault:
    token: 19aefa97-cccc-bbbb-aaaa-225940e63d76

[Warning]Warning

Consider carefully your security requirements. Static token authentication is fine if you want quickly get started with Vault, but a static token is not protected any further. Any disclosure to unintended parties allows Vault use with the associated token roles.

91. Authentication methods

Different organizations have different requirements for security and authentication. Vault reflects that need by shipping multiple authentication methods. Spring Cloud Vault supports token and AppId authentication.

91.1 Token authentication

Tokens are the core method for authentication within Vault. Token authentication requires a static token to be provided using the Bootstrap Application Context.

[Note]Note

Token authentication is the default authentication method. If a token is disclosed an unintended party gains access to Vault and can access secrets for the intended client.

Example 91.1. bootstrap.yml

spring.cloud.vault:
    authentication: TOKEN
    token: 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000

  • authentication setting this value to TOKEN selects the Token authentication method
  • token sets the static token to use

See also: Vault Documentation: Tokens

91.2 AppId authentication

Vault supports AppId authentication that consists of two hard to guess tokens. The AppId defaults to spring.application.name that is statically configured. The second token is the UserId which is a part determined by the application, usually related to the runtime environment. IP address, Mac address or a Docker container name are good examples. Spring Cloud Vault Config supports IP address, Mac address and static UserId’s (e.g. supplied via System properties). The IP and Mac address are represented as Hex-encoded SHA256 hash.

IP address-based UserId’s use the local host’s IP address.

Example 91.2. bootstrap.yml using SHA256 IP-Address UserId’s

spring.cloud.vault:
    authentication: APPID
    app-id:
        user-id: IP_ADDRESS

  • authentication setting this value to APPID selects the AppId authentication method
  • app-id-path sets the path of the AppId mount to use
  • user-id sets the UserId method. Possible values are IP_ADDRESS, MAC_ADDRESS or a class name implementing a custom AppIdUserIdMechanism

The corresponding command to generate the IP address UserId from a command line is:

$ echo -n 192.168.99.1 | sha256sum
[Note]Note

Including the line break of echo leads to a different hash value so make sure to include the -n flag.

Mac address-based UserId’s obtain their network device from the localhost-bound device. The configuration also allows specifying a network-interface hint to pick the right device. The value of network-interface is optional and can be either an interface name or interface index (0-based).

Example 91.3. bootstrap.yml using SHA256 Mac-Address UserId’s

spring.cloud.vault:
    authentication: APPID
    app-id:
        user-id: MAC_ADDRESS
        network-interface: eth0

  • network-interface sets network interface to obtain the physical address

The corresponding command to generate the IP address UserId from a command line is:

$ echo -n 0AFEDE1234AC | sha256sum
[Note]Note

The Mac address is specified uppercase and without colons. Including the line break of echo leads to a different hash value so make sure to include the -n flag.

91.2.1 Custom UserId

The UserId generation is an open mechanism. You can set spring.cloud.vault.app-id.user-id to any string and the configured value will be used as static UserId.

A more advanced approach lets you set spring.cloud.vault.app-id.user-id to a classname. This class must be on your classpath and must implement the org.springframework.cloud.vault.AppIdUserIdMechanism interface and the createUserId method. Spring Cloud Vault will obtain the UserId by calling createUserId each time it authenticates using AppId to obtain a token.

Example 91.4. bootstrap.yml

spring.cloud.vault:
    authentication: APPID
    app-id:
        user-id: com.examlple.MyUserIdMechanism

Example 91.5. MyUserIdMechanism.java

public class MyUserIdMechanism implements AppIdUserIdMechanism {

  @Override
  public String createUserId() {
    String userId = ...
    return userId;
  }
}

See also: Vault Documentation: Using the App ID auth backend

91.3 AppRole authentication

AppRole is intended for machine authentication, like the deprecated (since Vault 0.6.1) Section 91.2, “AppId authentication”. AppRole authentication consists of two hard to guess (secret) tokens: RoleId and SecretId.

Spring Vault supports AppRole authentication by providing either RoleId only or together with a provided SecretId (push or pull mode).

RoleId and optionally SecretId must be provided by configuration, Spring Vault will not look up these or create a custom SecretId.

Example 91.6. bootstrap.yml with AppRole authentication properties

spring.cloud.vault:
    authentication: APPROLE
    app-role:
        role-id: bde2076b-cccb-3cf0-d57e-bca7b1e83a52

  • role-id sets the RoleId.

Example 91.7. bootstrap.yml with all AppRole authentication properties

spring.cloud.vault:
    authentication: APPROLE
    app-role:
        role-id: bde2076b-cccb-3cf0-d57e-bca7b1e83a52
        secret-id: 1696536f-1976-73b1-b241-0b4213908d39
        app-auth-path: approle

  • role-id sets the RoleId.
  • secret-id sets the SecretId. SecretId can be omitted if AppRole is configured without requiring SecretId (See bind_secret_id)
  • approle-path sets the path of the approle authentication mount to use

See also: Vault Documentation: Using the AppRole auth backend

91.4 AWS-EC2 authentication

The aws-ec2 auth backend provides a secure introduction mechanism for AWS EC2 instances, allowing automated retrieval of a Vault token. Unlike most Vault authentication backends, this backend does not require first-deploying, or provisioning security-sensitive credentials (tokens, username/password, client certificates, etc.). Instead, it treats AWS as a Trusted Third Party and uses the cryptographically signed dynamic metadata information that uniquely represents each EC2 instance.

Example 91.8. bootstrap.yml using AWS-EC2 Authentication

spring.cloud.vault:
    authentication: AWS_EC2

AWS-EC2 authentication enables nonce by default to follow the Trust On First Use (TOFU) principle. Any unintended party that gains access to the PKCS#7 identity metadata can authenticate against Vault.

During the first login, Spring Cloud Vault generates a nonce that is stored in the auth backend aside the instance Id. Re-authentication requires the same nonce to be sent. Any other party does not have the nonce and can raise an alert in Vault for further investigation.

The nonce is kept in memory and is lost during application restart.

AWS-EC2 authentication roles are optional and default to the AMI. You can configure the authentication role by setting the spring.cloud.vault.aws-ec2.role property.

Example 91.9. bootstrap.yml with configured role

spring.cloud.vault:
    authentication: AWS_EC2
    aws-ec2:
        role: application-server

Example 91.10. bootstrap.yml with all AWS EC2 authentication properties

spring.cloud.vault:
    authentication: AWS_EC2
    aws-ec2:
        role: application-server
        aws-ec2-path: aws-ec2
        identity-document: http://...

  • authentication setting this value to AWS_EC2 selects the AWS EC2 authentication method
  • role sets the role name of the AWS EC2 role definition
  • aws-ec2-path sets the path of the AWS EC2 mount to use
  • identity-document sets URL of the PKCS#7 AWS EC2 identity document

See also: Vault Documentation: Using the aws-ec2 auth backend

91.5 TLS certificate authentication

The cert auth backend allows authentication using SSL/TLS client certificates that are either signed by a CA or self-signed.

To enable cert authentication you need to:

  1. Use SSL, see Chapter 95, Vault Client SSL configuration
  2. Configure a Java Keystore that contains the client certificate and the private key
  3. Set the spring.cloud.vault.authentication to CERT

Example 91.11. bootstrap.yml

spring.cloud.vault:
    authentication: CERT
    ssl:
        key-store: classpath:keystore.jks
        key-store-password: changeit
        cert-auth-path: cert

See also: Vault Documentation: Using the Cert auth backend

91.6 Cubbyhole authentication

Cubbyhole authentication uses Vault primitives to provide a secured authentication workflow. Cubbyhole authentication uses tokens as primary login method. An ephemeral token is used to obtain a second, login VaultToken from Vault’s Cubbyhole secret backend. The login token is usually longer-lived and used to interact with Vault. The login token will be retrieved from a wrapped response stored at /cubbyhole/response.

Creating a wrapped token

[Note]Note

Response Wrapping for token creation requires Vault 0.6.0 or higher.

Example 91.12. Crating and storing tokens

$ vault token-create -wrap-ttl="10m"
Key                            Value
---                            -----
wrapping_token:                397ccb93-ff6c-b17b-9389-380b01ca2645
wrapping_token_ttl:            0h10m0s
wrapping_token_creation_time:  2016-09-18 20:29:48.652957077 +0200 CEST
wrapped_accessor:              46b6aebb-187f-932a-26d7-4f3d86a68319

Example 91.13. bootstrap.yml

spring.cloud.vault:
    authentication: CUBBYHOLE
    token: 397ccb93-ff6c-b17b-9389-380b01ca2645

See also:

92. Secret Backends

92.1 Generic Backend

Spring Cloud Vault supports at the basic level the generic secret backend. The generic secret backend allows storage of arbitrary values as key-value store. A single context can store one or many key-value tuples. Contexts can be organized hierarchically. Spring Cloud Vault allows using the Application name and a default context name (application) in combination with active profiles.

/secret/{application}/{profile}
/secret/{application}
/secret/{default-context}/{profile}
/secret/{default-context}

The application name is determined by the properties:

  • spring.cloud.vault.generic.application-name
  • spring.cloud.vault.application-name
  • spring.application.name

Secrets can be obtained from other folders within the generic backend by adding their paths to the application name, separated by commas. For example, given the application name usefulapp,mysql1,projectx/aws, each of these folders will be used:

  • /secret/usefulapp
  • /secret/mysql1
  • /secret/projectx/aws

Spring Cloud Vault adds all active profiles to the list of possible context paths. No active profiles will skip accessing contexts with a profile name.

Properties are exposed like they are stored (i.e. without additional prefixes).

spring.cloud.vault:
    generic:
        enabled: true
        backend: secret
        profile-separator: '/'
        default-context: application
        application-name: my-app
  • enabled setting this value to false disables the secret backend config usage
  • backend sets the path of the secret mount to use
  • default-context sets the context name used by all applications
  • application-name overrides the application name for use in the generic backend
  • profile-separator separates the profile name from the context in property sources with profiles

See also: Vault Documentation: Using the generic secret backend

92.2 Consul

Spring Cloud Vault can obtain credentials for HashiCorp Consul. The Consul integration requires the spring-cloud-vault-config-consul dependency.

Example 92.1. pom.xml

<dependencies>
    <dependency>
        <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
        <artifactId>spring-cloud-vault-config-consul</artifactId>
        <version>Dalston.SR5</version>
    </dependency>
</dependencies>

The integration can be enabled by setting spring.cloud.vault.consul.enabled=true (default false) and providing the role name with spring.cloud.vault.consul.role=….

The obtained token is stored in spring.cloud.consul.token so using Spring Cloud Consul can pick up the generated credentials without further configuration. You can configure the property name by setting spring.cloud.vault.consul.token-property.

spring.cloud.vault:
    consul:
        enabled: true
        role: readonly
        backend: consul
        token-property: spring.cloud.consul.token
  • enabled setting this value to true enables the Consul backend config usage
  • role sets the role name of the Consul role definition
  • backend sets the path of the Consul mount to use
  • token-property sets the property name in which the Consul ACL token is stored

See also: Vault Documentation: Setting up Consul with Vault

92.3 RabbitMQ

Spring Cloud Vault can obtain credentials for RabbitMQ.

The RabbitMQ integration requires the spring-cloud-vault-config-rabbitmq dependency.

Example 92.2. pom.xml

<dependencies>
    <dependency>
        <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
        <artifactId>spring-cloud-vault-config-rabbitmq</artifactId>
        <version>Dalston.SR5</version>
    </dependency>
</dependencies>

The integration can be enabled by setting spring.cloud.vault.rabbitmq.enabled=true (default false) and providing the role name with spring.cloud.vault.rabbitmq.role=….

Username and password are stored in spring.rabbitmq.username and spring.rabbitmq.password so using Spring Boot will pick up the generated credentials without further configuration. You can configure the property names by setting spring.cloud.vault.rabbitmq.username-property and spring.cloud.vault.rabbitmq.password-property.

spring.cloud.vault:
    rabbitmq:
        enabled: true
        role: readonly
        backend: rabbitmq
        username-property: spring.rabbitmq.username
        password-property: spring.rabbitmq.password
  • enabled setting this value to true enables the RabbitMQ backend config usage
  • role sets the role name of the RabbitMQ role definition
  • backend sets the path of the RabbitMQ mount to use
  • username-property sets the property name in which the RabbitMQ username is stored
  • password-property sets the property name in which the RabbitMQ password is stored

See also: Vault Documentation: Setting up RabbitMQ with Vault

92.4 AWS

Spring Cloud Vault can obtain credentials for AWS.

The AWS integration requires the spring-cloud-vault-config-aws dependency.

Example 92.3. pom.xml

<dependencies>
    <dependency>
        <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
        <artifactId>spring-cloud-vault-config-aws</artifactId>
        <version>Dalston.SR5</version>
    </dependency>
</dependencies>

The integration can be enabled by setting spring.cloud.vault.aws=true (default false) and providing the role name with spring.cloud.vault.aws.role=….

The access key and secret key are stored in cloud.aws.credentials.accessKey and cloud.aws.credentials.secretKey so using Spring Cloud AWS will pick up the generated credentials without further configuration. You can configure the property names by setting spring.cloud.vault.aws.access-key-property and spring.cloud.vault.aws.secret-key-property.

spring.cloud.vault:
    aws:
        enabled: true
        role: readonly
        backend: aws
        access-key-property: cloud.aws.credentials.accessKey
        secret-key-property: cloud.aws.credentials.secretKey
  • enabled setting this value to true enables the AWS backend config usage
  • role sets the role name of the AWS role definition
  • backend sets the path of the AWS mount to use
  • access-key-property sets the property name in which the AWS access key is stored
  • secret-key-property sets the property name in which the AWS secret key is stored

See also: Vault Documentation: Setting up AWS with Vault

93. Database backends

Vault supports several database secret backends to generate database credentials dynamically based on configured roles. This means services that need to access a database no longer need to configure credentials: they can request them from Vault, and use Vault’s leasing mechanism to more easily roll keys.

Spring Cloud Vault integrates with these backends:

Using a database secret backend requires to enable the backend in the configuration and the spring-cloud-vault-config-databases dependency.

Example 93.1. pom.xml

<dependencies>
    <dependency>
        <groupId>org.springframework.cloud</groupId>
        <artifactId>spring-cloud-vault-config-databases</artifactId>
        <version>Dalston.SR5</version>
    </dependency>
</dependencies>

[Note]Note

Enabling multiple JDBC-compliant databases will generate credentials and store them by default in the same property keys hence property names for JDBC secrets need to be configured separately.

93.1 Apache Cassandra

Spring Cloud Vault can obtain credentials for Apache Cassandra. The integration can be enabled by setting spring.cloud.vault.cassandra.enabled=true (default false) and providing the role name with spring.cloud.vault.cassandra.role=….

Username and password are stored in spring.data.cassandra.username and spring.data.cassandra.password so using Spring Boot will pick up the generated credentials without further configuration. You can configure the property names by setting spring.cloud.vault.cassandra.username-property and spring.cloud.vault.cassandra.password-property.

spring.cloud.vault:
    cassandra:
        enabled: true
        role: readonly
        backend: cassandra
        username-property: spring.data.cassandra.username
        password-property: spring.data.cassandra.username
  • enabled setting this value to true enables the Cassandra backend config usage
  • role sets the role name of the Cassandra role definition
  • backend sets the path of the Cassandra mount to use
  • username-property sets the property name in which the Cassandra username is stored
  • password-property sets the property name in which the Cassandra password is stored

See also: Vault Documentation: Setting up Apache Cassandra with Vault

93.2 MongoDB

Spring Cloud Vault can obtain credentials for MongoDB. The integration can be enabled by setting spring.cloud.vault.mongodb.enabled=true (default false) and providing the role name with spring.cloud.vault.mongodb.role=….

Username and password are stored in spring.data.mongodb.username and spring.data.mongodb.password so using Spring Boot will pick up the generated credentials without further configuration. You can configure the property names by setting spring.cloud.vault.mongodb.username-property and spring.cloud.vault.mongodb.password-property.

spring.cloud.vault:
    mongodb:
        enabled: true
        role: readonly
        backend: mongodb
        username-property: spring.data.mongodb.username
        password-property: spring.data.mongodb.password
  • enabled setting this value to true enables the MongodB backend config usage
  • role sets the role name of the MongoDB role definition
  • backend sets the path of the MongoDB mount to use
  • username-property sets the property name in which the MongoDB username is stored
  • password-property sets the property name in which the MongoDB password is stored

See also: Vault Documentation: Setting up MongoDB with Vault

93.3 MySQL

Spring Cloud Vault can obtain credentials for MySQL. The integration can be enabled by setting spring.cloud.vault.mysql.enabled=true (default false) and providing the role name with spring.cloud.vault.mysql.role=….

Username and password are stored in spring.datasource.username and spring.datasource.password so using Spring Boot will pick up the generated credentials without further configuration. You can configure the property names by setting spring.cloud.vault.mysql.username-property and spring.cloud.vault.mysql.password-property.

spring.cloud.vault:
    mysql:
        enabled: true
        role: readonly
        backend: mysql
        username-property: spring.datasource.username
        password-property: spring.datasource.username
  • enabled setting this value to true enables the MySQL backend config usage
  • role sets the role name of the MySQL role definition
  • backend sets the path of the MySQL mount to use
  • username-property sets the property name in which the MySQL username is stored
  • password-property sets the property name in which the MySQL password is stored

See also: Vault Documentation: Setting up MySQL with Vault

93.4 PostgreSQL

Spring Cloud Vault can obtain credentials for PostgreSQL. The integration can be enabled by setting spring.cloud.vault.postgresql.enabled=true (default false) and providing the role name with spring.cloud.vault.postgresql.role=….

Username and password are stored in spring.datasource.username and spring.datasource.password so using Spring Boot will pick up the generated credentials without further configuration. You can configure the property names by setting spring.cloud.vault.postgresql.username-property and spring.cloud.vault.postgresql.password-property.

spring.cloud.vault:
    postgresql:
        enabled: true
        role: readonly
        backend: postgresql
        username-property: spring.datasource.username
        password-property: spring.datasource.username
  • enabled setting this value to true enables the PostgreSQL backend config usage
  • role sets the role name of the PostgreSQL role definition
  • backend sets the path of the PostgreSQL mount to use
  • username-property sets the property name in which the PostgreSQL username is stored
  • password-property sets the property name in which the PostgreSQL password is stored

See also: Vault Documentation: Setting up PostgreSQL with Vault

94. Vault Client Fail Fast

In some cases, it may be desirable to fail startup of a service if it cannot connect to the Vault Server. If this is the desired behavior, set the bootstrap configuration property spring.cloud.vault.fail-fast=true and the client will halt with an Exception.

spring.cloud.vault:
    fail-fast: true

95. Vault Client SSL configuration

SSL can be configured declaratively by setting various properties. You can set either javax.net.ssl.trustStore to configure JVM-wide SSL settings or spring.cloud.vault.ssl.trust-store to set SSL settings only for Spring Cloud Vault Config.

spring.cloud.vault:
    ssl:
        trust-store: classpath:keystore.jks
        trust-store-password: changeit
  • trust-store sets the resource for the trust-store. SSL-secured Vault communication will validate the Vault SSL certificate with the specified trust-store.
  • trust-store-password sets the trust-store password

Please note that configuring spring.cloud.vault.ssl.* can be only applied when either Apache Http Components or the OkHttp client is on your class-path.

96. Lease lifecycle management (renewal and revocation)

With every secret, Vault creates a lease: metadata containing information such as a time duration, renewability, and more.

Vault promises that the data will be valid for the given duration, or Time To Live (TTL). Once the lease is expired, Vault can revoke the data, and the consumer of the secret can no longer be certain that it is valid.

Spring Cloud Vault maintains a lease lifecycle beyond the creation of login tokens and secrets. That said, login tokens and secrets associated with a lease are scheduled for renewal just before the lease expires until terminal expiry. Application shutdown revokes obtained login tokens and renewable leases.

Secret service and database backends (such as MongoDB or MySQL) usually generate a renewable lease so generated credentials will be disabled on application shutdown.

[Note]Note

Static tokens are not renewed or revoked.

Lease renewal and revocation is enabled by default and can be disabled by setting spring.cloud.vault.config.lifecycle.enabled to false. This is not recommended as leases can expire and Spring Cloud Vault cannot longer access Vault or services using generated credentials and valid credentials remain active after application shutdown.

spring.cloud.vault:
    config.lifecycle.enabled: true

See also: Vault Documentation: Lease, Renew, and Revoke

Part XIV. Appendix: Compendium of Configuration Properties

NameDefaultDescription

encrypt.fail-on-error

true

Flag to say that a process should fail if there is an encryption or decryption error.

encrypt.key

 

A symmetric key. As a stronger alternative consider using a keystore.

encrypt.key-store.alias

 

Alias for a key in the store.

encrypt.key-store.location

 

Location of the key store file, e.g. classpath:/keystore.jks.

encrypt.key-store.password

 

Password that locks the keystore.

encrypt.key-store.secret

 

Secret protecting the key (defaults to the same as the password).

encrypt.rsa.algorithm

 

The RSA algorithm to use (DEFAULT or OEAP). Once it is set do not change it (or existing ciphers will not a decryptable).

encrypt.rsa.salt

deadbeef

Salt for the random secret used to encrypt cipher text. Once it is set do not change it (or existing ciphers will not a decryptable).

encrypt.rsa.strong

false

Flag to indicate that "strong" AES encryption should be used internally. If true then the GCM algorithm is applied to the AES encrypted bytes. Default is false (in which case "standard" CBC is used instead). Once it is set do not change it (or existing ciphers will not a decryptable).

endpoints.bus.enabled

  

endpoints.bus.id

  

endpoints.bus.sensitive

  

endpoints.consul.enabled

  

endpoints.consul.id

  

endpoints.consul.sensitive

  

endpoints.env.post.enabled

true

Enable changing the Environment through a POST to /env.

endpoints.features.enabled

  

endpoints.features.id

  

endpoints.features.sensitive

  

endpoints.pause.enabled

true

Enable the /pause endpoint (to send Lifecycle.stop()).

endpoints.pause.id

  

endpoints.pause.sensitive

  

endpoints.refresh.enabled

true

Enable the /refresh endpoint to refresh configuration and re-initialize refresh scoped beans.

endpoints.refresh.id

  

endpoints.refresh.sensitive

  

endpoints.restart.enabled

true

Enable the /restart endpoint to restart the application context.

endpoints.restart.id

  

endpoints.restart.pause-endpoint.enabled

  

endpoints.restart.pause-endpoint.id

  

endpoints.restart.pause-endpoint.sensitive

  

endpoints.restart.resume-endpoint.enabled

  

endpoints.restart.resume-endpoint.id

  

endpoints.restart.resume-endpoint.sensitive

  

endpoints.restart.sensitive

  

endpoints.restart.timeout

0

 

endpoints.resume.enabled

true

Enable the /resume endpoint (to send Lifecycle.start()).

endpoints.resume.id

  

endpoints.resume.sensitive

  

endpoints.zookeeper.enabled

true

Enable the /zookeeper endpoint to inspect the state of zookeeper.

eureka.client.allow-redirects

false

Indicates whether server can redirect a client request to a backup server/cluster. If set to false, the server will handle the request directly, If set to true, it may send HTTP redirect to the client, with a new server location.

eureka.client.availability-zones

 

Gets the list of availability zones (used in AWS data centers) for the region in which this instance resides.

The changes are effective at runtime at the next registry fetch cycle as specified by registryFetchIntervalSeconds.

eureka.client.backup-registry-impl

 

Gets the name of the implementation which implements BackupRegistry to fetch the registry information as a fall back option for only the first time when the eureka client starts.

This may be needed for applications which needs additional resiliency for registry information without which it cannot operate.

eureka.client.cache-refresh-executor-exponential-back-off-bound

10

Cache refresh executor exponential back off related property. It is a maximum multiplier value for retry delay, in case where a sequence of timeouts occurred.

eureka.client.cache-refresh-executor-thread-pool-size

2

The thread pool size for the cacheRefreshExecutor to initialise with

eureka.client.client-data-accept

 

EurekaAccept name for client data accept

eureka.client.decoder-name

 

This is a transient config and once the latest codecs are stable, can be removed (as there will only be one)

eureka.client.disable-delta

false

Indicates whether the eureka client should disable fetching of delta and should rather resort to getting the full registry information.

Note that the delta fetches can reduce the traffic tremendously, because the rate of change with the eureka server is normally much lower than the rate of fetches.

The changes are effective at runtime at the next registry fetch cycle as specified by registryFetchIntervalSeconds

eureka.client.dollar-replacement

_-

Get a replacement string for Dollar sign <code>$</code> during serializing/deserializing information in eureka server.

eureka.client.enabled

true

Flag to indicate that the Eureka client is enabled.

eureka.client.encoder-name

 

This is a transient config and once the latest codecs are stable, can be removed (as there will only be one)

eureka.client.escape-char-replacement

__

Get a replacement string for underscore sign <code>_</code> during serializing/deserializing information in eureka server.

eureka.client.eureka-connection-idle-timeout-seconds

30

Indicates how much time (in seconds) that the HTTP connections to eureka server can stay idle before it can be closed.

In the AWS environment, it is recommended that the values is 30 seconds or less, since the firewall cleans up the connection information after a few mins leaving the connection hanging in limbo

eureka.client.eureka-server-connect-timeout-seconds

5

Indicates how long to wait (in seconds) before a connection to eureka server needs to timeout. Note that the connections in the client are pooled by org.apache.http.client.HttpClient and this setting affects the actual connection creation and also the wait time to get the connection from the pool.

eureka.client.eureka-server-d-n-s-name

 

Gets the DNS name to be queried to get the list of eureka servers.This information is not required if the contract returns the service urls by implementing serviceUrls.

The DNS mechanism is used when useDnsForFetchingServiceUrls is set to true and the eureka client expects the DNS to configured a certain way so that it can fetch changing eureka servers dynamically.

The changes are effective at runtime.

eureka.client.eureka-server-port

 

Gets the port to be used to construct the service url to contact eureka server when the list of eureka servers come from the DNS.This information is not required if the contract returns the service urls eurekaServerServiceUrls(String).

The DNS mechanism is used when useDnsForFetchingServiceUrls is set to true and the eureka client expects the DNS to configured a certain way so that it can fetch changing eureka servers dynamically.

The changes are effective at runtime.

eureka.client.eureka-server-read-timeout-seconds

8

Indicates how long to wait (in seconds) before a read from eureka server needs to timeout.

eureka.client.eureka-server-total-connections

200

Gets the total number of connections that is allowed from eureka client to all eureka servers.

eureka.client.eureka-server-total-connections-per-host

50

Gets the total number of connections that is allowed from eureka client to a eureka server host.

eureka.client.eureka-server-u-r-l-context

 

Gets the URL context to be used to construct the service url to contact eureka server when the list of eureka servers come from the DNS. This information is not required if the contract returns the service urls from eurekaServerServiceUrls.

The DNS mechanism is used when useDnsForFetchingServiceUrls is set to true and the eureka client expects the DNS to configured a certain way so that it can fetch changing eureka servers dynamically. The changes are effective at runtime.

eureka.client.eureka-service-url-poll-interval-seconds

0

Indicates how often(in seconds) to poll for changes to eureka server information. Eureka servers could be added or removed and this setting controls how soon the eureka clients should know about it.

eureka.client.fetch-registry

true

Indicates whether this client should fetch eureka registry information from eureka server.

eureka.client.fetch-remote-regions-registry

 

Comma separated list of regions for which the eureka registry information will be fetched. It is mandatory to define the availability zones for each of these regions as returned by availabilityZones. Failing to do so, will result in failure of discovery client startup.

eureka.client.filter-only-up-instances

true

Indicates whether to get the applications after filtering the applications for instances with only InstanceStatus UP states.

eureka.client.g-zip-content

true

Indicates whether the content fetched from eureka server has to be compressed whenever it is supported by the server. The registry information from the eureka server is compressed for optimum network traffic.

eureka.client.heartbeat-executor-exponential-back-off-bound

10

Heartbeat executor exponential back off related property. It is a maximum multiplier value for retry delay, in case where a sequence of timeouts occurred.

eureka.client.heartbeat-executor-thread-pool-size

2

The thread pool size for the heartbeatExecutor to initialise with

eureka.client.initial-instance-info-replication-interval-seconds

40

Indicates how long initially (in seconds) to replicate instance info to the eureka server

eureka.client.instance-info-replication-interval-seconds

30

Indicates how often(in seconds) to replicate instance changes to be replicated to the eureka server.

eureka.client.log-delta-diff

false

Indicates whether to log differences between the eureka server and the eureka client in terms of registry information.

Eureka client tries to retrieve only delta changes from eureka server to minimize network traffic. After receiving the deltas, eureka client reconciles the information from the server to verify it has not missed out some information. Reconciliation failures could happen when the client has had network issues communicating to server.If the reconciliation fails, eureka client gets the full registry information.

While getting the full registry information, the eureka client can log the differences between the client and the server and this setting controls that.

The changes are effective at runtime at the next registry fetch cycle as specified by registryFetchIntervalSecondsr

eureka.client.on-demand-update-status-change

true

If set to true, local status updates via ApplicationInfoManager will trigger on-demand (but rate limited) register/updates to remote eureka servers

eureka.client.prefer-same-zone-eureka

true

Indicates whether or not this instance should try to use the eureka server in the same zone for latency and/or other reason.

Ideally eureka clients are configured to talk to servers in the same zone

The changes are effective at runtime at the next registry fetch cycle as specified by registryFetchIntervalSeconds

eureka.client.property-resolver

  

eureka.client.proxy-host

 

Gets the proxy host to eureka server if any.

eureka.client.proxy-password

 

Gets the proxy password if any.

eureka.client.proxy-port

 

Gets the proxy port to eureka server if any.

eureka.client.proxy-user-name

 

Gets the proxy user name if any.

eureka.client.region

us-east-1

Gets the region (used in AWS datacenters) where this instance resides.

eureka.client.register-with-eureka

true

Indicates whether or not this instance should register its information with eureka server for discovery by others.

In some cases, you do not want your instances to be discovered whereas you just want do discover other instances.

eureka.client.registry-fetch-interval-seconds

30

Indicates how often(in seconds) to fetch the registry information from the eureka server.

eureka.client.registry-refresh-single-vip-address

 

Indicates whether the client is only interested in the registry information for a single VIP.

eureka.client.service-url

 

Map of availability zone to list of fully qualified URLs to communicate with eureka server. Each value can be a single URL or a comma separated list of alternative locations.

Typically the eureka server URLs carry protocol,host,port,context and version information if any. Example: http://ec2-256-156-243-129.compute-1.amazonaws.com:7001/eureka/

The changes are effective at runtime at the next service url refresh cycle as specified by eurekaServiceUrlPollIntervalSeconds.

eureka.client.transport

  

eureka.client.use-dns-for-fetching-service-urls

false

Indicates whether the eureka client should use the DNS mechanism to fetch a list of eureka servers to talk to. When the DNS name is updated to have additional servers, that information is used immediately after the eureka client polls for that information as specified in eurekaServiceUrlPollIntervalSeconds.

Alternatively, the service urls can be returned serviceUrls, but the users should implement their own mechanism to return the updated list in case of changes.

The changes are effective at runtime.

eureka.dashboard.enabled

true

Flag to enable the Eureka dashboard. Default true.

eureka.dashboard.path

/

The path to the Eureka dashboard (relative to the servlet path). Defaults to "/".

eureka.instance.a-s-g-name

 

Gets the AWS autoscaling group name associated with this instance. This information is specifically used in an AWS environment to automatically put an instance out of service after the instance is launched and it has been disabled for traffic..

eureka.instance.app-group-name

 

Get the name of the application group to be registered with eureka.

eureka.instance.appname

unknown

Get the name of the application to be registered with eureka.

eureka.instance.data-center-info

 

Returns the data center this instance is deployed. This information is used to get some AWS specific instance information if the instance is deployed in AWS.

eureka.instance.default-address-resolution-order

[]

 

eureka.instance.environment

  

eureka.instance.health-check-url

 

Gets the absolute health check page URL for this instance. The users can provide the healthCheckUrlPath if the health check page resides in the same instance talking to eureka, else in the cases where the instance is a proxy for some other server, users can provide the full URL. If the full URL is provided it takes precedence.

<p> It is normally used for making educated decisions based on the health of the instance - for example, it can be used to determine whether to proceed deployments to an entire farm or stop the deployments without causing further damage. The full URL should follow the format http://${eureka.hostname}:7001/ where the value ${eureka.hostname} is replaced at runtime.

eureka.instance.health-check-url-path

/health

Gets the relative health check URL path for this instance. The health check page URL is then constructed out of the hostname and the type of communication - secure or unsecure as specified in securePort and nonSecurePort.

It is normally used for making educated decisions based on the health of the instance - for example, it can be used to determine whether to proceed deployments to an entire farm or stop the deployments without causing further damage.

eureka.instance.home-page-url

 

Gets the absolute home page URL for this instance. The users can provide the homePageUrlPath if the home page resides in the same instance talking to eureka, else in the cases where the instance is a proxy for some other server, users can provide the full URL. If the full URL is provided it takes precedence.

It is normally used for informational purposes for other services to use it as a landing page. The full URL should follow the format http://${eureka.hostname}:7001/ where the value ${eureka.hostname} is replaced at runtime.

eureka.instance.home-page-url-path

/

Gets the relative home page URL Path for this instance. The home page URL is then constructed out of the hostName and the type of communication - secure or unsecure.

It is normally used for informational purposes for other services to use it as a landing page.

eureka.instance.host-info

  

eureka.instance.hostname

 

The hostname if it can be determined at configuration time (otherwise it will be guessed from OS primitives).

eureka.instance.inet-utils

  

eureka.instance.initial-status

 

Initial status to register with rmeote Eureka server.

eureka.instance.instance-enabled-onit

false

Indicates whether the instance should be enabled for taking traffic as soon as it is registered with eureka. Sometimes the application might need to do some pre-processing before it is ready to take traffic.

eureka.instance.instance-id

 

Get the unique Id (within the scope of the appName) of this instance to be registered with eureka.

eureka.instance.ip-address

 

Get the IPAdress of the instance. This information is for academic purposes only as the communication from other instances primarily happen using the information supplied in {@link #getHostName(boolean)}.

eureka.instance.lease-expiration-duration-in-seconds

90

Indicates the time in seconds that the eureka server waits since it received the last heartbeat before it can remove this instance from its view and there by disallowing traffic to this instance.

Setting this value too long could mean that the traffic could be routed to the instance even though the instance is not alive. Setting this value too small could mean, the instance may be taken out of traffic because of temporary network glitches.This value to be set to atleast higher than the value specified in leaseRenewalIntervalInSeconds.

eureka.instance.lease-renewal-interval-in-seconds

30

Indicates how often (in seconds) the eureka client needs to send heartbeats to eureka server to indicate that it is still alive. If the heartbeats are not received for the period specified in leaseExpirationDurationInSeconds, eureka server will remove the instance from its view, there by disallowing traffic to this instance.

Note that the instance could still not take traffic if it implements HealthCheckCallback and then decides to make itself unavailable.

eureka.instance.metadata-map

 

Gets the metadata name/value pairs associated with this instance. This information is sent to eureka server and can be used by other instances.

eureka.instance.namespace

eureka

Get the namespace used to find properties. Ignored in Spring Cloud.

eureka.instance.non-secure-port

80

Get the non-secure port on which the instance should receive traffic.

eureka.instance.non-secure-port-enabled

true

Indicates whether the non-secure port should be enabled for traffic or not.

eureka.instance.prefer-ip-address

false

Flag to say that, when guessing a hostname, the IP address of the server should be used in prference to the hostname reported by the OS.

eureka.instance.registry.default-open-for-traffic-count

1

Value used in determining when leases are cancelled, default to 1 for standalone. Should be set to 0 for peer replicated eurekas

eureka.instance.registry.expected-number-of-renews-per-min

1

 

eureka.instance.secure-health-check-url

 

Gets the absolute secure health check page URL for this instance. The users can provide the secureHealthCheckUrl if the health check page resides in the same instance talking to eureka, else in the cases where the instance is a proxy for some other server, users can provide the full URL. If the full URL is provided it takes precedence.

<p> It is normally used for making educated decisions based on the health of the instance - for example, it can be used to determine whether to proceed deployments to an entire farm or stop the deployments without causing further damage. The full URL should follow the format http://${eureka.hostname}:7001/ where the value ${eureka.hostname} is replaced at runtime.

eureka.instance.secure-port

443

Get the Secure port on which the instance should receive traffic.

eureka.instance.secure-port-enabled

false

Indicates whether the secure port should be enabled for traffic or not.

eureka.instance.secure-virtual-host-name

unknown

Gets the secure virtual host name defined for this instance.

This is typically the way other instance would find this instance by using the secure virtual host name.Think of this as similar to the fully qualified domain name, that the users of your services will need to find this instance.

eureka.instance.status-page-url

 

Gets the absolute status page URL path for this instance. The users can provide the statusPageUrlPath if the status page resides in the same instance talking to eureka, else in the cases where the instance is a proxy for some other server, users can provide the full URL. If the full URL is provided it takes precedence.

It is normally used for informational purposes for other services to find about the status of this instance. Users can provide a simple HTML indicating what is the current status of the instance.

eureka.instance.status-page-url-path

/info

Gets the relative status page URL path for this instance. The status page URL is then constructed out of the hostName and the type of communication - secure or unsecure as specified in securePort and nonSecurePort.

It is normally used for informational purposes for other services to find about the status of this instance. Users can provide a simple HTML indicating what is the current status of the instance.

eureka.instance.virtual-host-name

unknown

Gets the virtual host name defined for this instance.

This is typically the way other instance would find this instance by using the virtual host name.Think of this as similar to the fully qualified domain name, that the users of your services will need to find this instance.

eureka.server.a-s-g-cache-expiry-timeout-ms

0

 

eureka.server.a-s-g-query-timeout-ms

300

 

eureka.server.a-s-g-update-interval-ms

0

 

eureka.server.a-w-s-access-id

  

eureka.server.a-w-s-secret-key

  

eureka.server.batch-replication

false

 

eureka.server.binding-strategy

  

eureka.server.delta-retention-timer-interval-in-ms

0

 

eureka.server.disable-delta

false

 

eureka.server.disable-delta-for-remote-regions

false

 

eureka.server.disable-transparent-fallback-to-other-region

false

 

eureka.server.e-i-p-bind-rebind-retries

3

 

eureka.server.e-i-p-binding-retry-interval-ms

0

 

eureka.server.e-i-p-binding-retry-interval-ms-when-unbound

0

 

eureka.server.enable-replicated-request-compression

false

 

eureka.server.enable-self-preservation

true

 

eureka.server.eviction-interval-timer-in-ms

0

 

eureka.server.g-zip-content-from-remote-region

true

 

eureka.server.json-codec-name

  

eureka.server.list-auto-scaling-groups-role-name

ListAutoScalingGroups

 

eureka.server.log-identity-headers

true

 

eureka.server.max-elements-in-peer-replication-pool

10000

 

eureka.server.max-elements-in-status-replication-pool

10000

 

eureka.server.max-idle-thread-age-in-minutes-for-peer-replication

15

 

eureka.server.max-idle-thread-in-minutes-age-for-status-replication

10

 

eureka.server.max-threads-for-peer-replication

20

 

eureka.server.max-threads-for-status-replication

1

 

eureka.server.max-time-for-replication

30000

 

eureka.server.min-threads-for-peer-replication

5

 

eureka.server.min-threads-for-status-replication

1

 

eureka.server.number-of-replication-retries

5

 

eureka.server.peer-eureka-nodes-update-interval-ms

0

 

eureka.server.peer-eureka-status-refresh-time-interval-ms

0

 

eureka.server.peer-node-connect-timeout-ms

200

 

eureka.server.peer-node-connection-idle-timeout-seconds

30

 

eureka.server.peer-node-read-timeout-ms

200

 

eureka.server.peer-node-total-connections

1000

 

eureka.server.peer-node-total-connections-per-host

500

 

eureka.server.prime-aws-replica-connections

true

 

eureka.server.property-resolver

  

eureka.server.rate-limiter-burst-size

10

 

eureka.server.rate-limiter-enabled

false

 

eureka.server.rate-limiter-full-fetch-average-rate

100

 

eureka.server.rate-limiter-privileged-clients

  

eureka.server.rate-limiter-registry-fetch-average-rate

500

 

eureka.server.rate-limiter-throttle-standard-clients

false

 

eureka.server.registry-sync-retries

0

 

eureka.server.registry-sync-retry-wait-ms

0

 

eureka.server.remote-region-app-whitelist

  

eureka.server.remote-region-connect-timeout-ms

1000

 

eureka.server.remote-region-connection-idle-timeout-seconds

30

 

eureka.server.remote-region-fetch-thread-pool-size

20

 

eureka.server.remote-region-read-timeout-ms

1000

 

eureka.server.remote-region-registry-fetch-interval

30

 

eureka.server.remote-region-total-connections

1000

 

eureka.server.remote-region-total-connections-per-host

500

 

eureka.server.remote-region-trust-store

  

eureka.server.remote-region-trust-store-password

changeit

 

eureka.server.remote-region-urls

  

eureka.server.remote-region-urls-with-name

  

eureka.server.renewal-percent-threshold

0.85

 

eureka.server.renewal-threshold-update-interval-ms

0

 

eureka.server.response-cache-auto-expiration-in-seconds

180

 

eureka.server.response-cache-update-interval-ms

0

 

eureka.server.retention-time-in-m-s-in-delta-queue

0

 

eureka.server.route53-bind-rebind-retries

3

 

eureka.server.route53-binding-retry-interval-ms

0

 

eureka.server.route53-domain-t-t-l

30

 

eureka.server.sync-when-timestamp-differs

true

 

eureka.server.use-read-only-response-cache

true

 

eureka.server.wait-time-in-ms-when-sync-empty

0

 

eureka.server.xml-codec-name

  

feign.compression.request.mime-types

[text/xml, application/xml, application/json]

The list of supported mime types.

feign.compression.request.min-request-size

2048

The minimum threshold content size.

health.config.enabled

false

Flag to indicate that the config server health indicator should be installed.

health.config.time-to-live

0

Time to live for cached result, in milliseconds. Default 300000 (5 min).

hystrix.metrics.enabled

true

Enable Hystrix metrics polling. Defaults to true.

hystrix.metrics.polling-interval-ms

2000

Interval between subsequent polling of metrics. Defaults to 2000 ms.

management.health.refresh.enabled

true

Enable the health endpoint for the refresh scope.

management.health.zookeeper.enabled

true

Enable the health endpoint for zookeeper.

netflix.atlas.batch-size

10000

 

netflix.atlas.enabled

true

 

netflix.atlas.uri

  

netflix.metrics.servo.cache-warning-threshold

1000

When the ServoMonitorCache reaches this size, a warning is logged. This will be useful if you are using string concatenation in RestTemplate urls.

netflix.metrics.servo.registry-class

com.netflix.servo.BasicMonitorRegistry

Fully qualified class name for monitor registry used by Servo.

proxy.auth.load-balanced

  

proxy.auth.routes

 

Authentication strategy per route.

spring.cloud.bus.ack.destination-service

 

Service that wants to listen to acks. By default null (meaning all services).

spring.cloud.bus.ack.enabled

true

Flag to switch off acks (default on).

spring.cloud.bus.destination

springCloudBus

Name of Spring Cloud Stream destination for messages.

spring.cloud.bus.enabled

true

Flag to indicate that the bus is enabled.

spring.cloud.bus.env.enabled

true

Flag to switch off environment change events (default on).

spring.cloud.bus.refresh.enabled

true

Flag to switch off refresh events (default on).

spring.cloud.bus.trace.enabled

false

Flag to switch on tracing of acks (default off).

spring.cloud.cloudfoundry.discovery.enabled

true

Flag to indicate that discovery is enabled.

spring.cloud.cloudfoundry.discovery.heartbeat-frequency

5000

Frequency in milliseconds of poll for heart beat. The client will poll on this frequency and broadcast a list of service ids.

spring.cloud.cloudfoundry.discovery.org

 

Organization name to authenticate with (default to user’s default).

spring.cloud.cloudfoundry.discovery.password

 

Password for user to authenticate and obtain token.

spring.cloud.cloudfoundry.discovery.space

 

Space name to authenticate with (default to user’s default).

spring.cloud.cloudfoundry.discovery.url

https://api.run.pivotal.io

URL of Cloud Foundry API (Cloud Controller).

spring.cloud.cloudfoundry.discovery.username

 

Username to authenticate (usually an email address).

spring.cloud.config.allow-override

true

Flag to indicate that {@link #isSystemPropertiesOverride() systemPropertiesOverride} can be used. Set to false to prevent users from changing the default accidentally. Default true.

spring.cloud.config.authorization

 

Authorization token used by the client to connect to the server.

spring.cloud.config.discovery.enabled

false

Flag to indicate that config server discovery is enabled (config server URL will be looked up via discovery).

spring.cloud.config.discovery.service-id

configserver

Service id to locate config server.

spring.cloud.config.enabled

true

Flag to say that remote configuration is enabled. Default true;

spring.cloud.config.fail-fast

false

Flag to indicate that failure to connect to the server is fatal (default false).

spring.cloud.config.label

 

The label name to use to pull remote configuration properties. The default is set on the server (generally "master" for a git based server).

spring.cloud.config.name

 

Name of application used to fetch remote properties.

spring.cloud.config.override-none

false

Flag to indicate that when {@link #setAllowOverride(boolean) allowOverride} is true, external properties should take lowest priority, and not override any existing property sources (including local config files). Default false.

spring.cloud.config.override-system-properties

true

Flag to indicate that the external properties should override system properties. Default true.

spring.cloud.config.password

 

The password to use (HTTP Basic) when contacting the remote server.

spring.cloud.config.profile

default

The default profile to use when fetching remote configuration (comma-separated). Default is "default".

spring.cloud.config.retry.initial-interval

1000

Initial retry interval in milliseconds.

spring.cloud.config.retry.max-attempts

6

Maximum number of attempts.

spring.cloud.config.retry.max-interval

2000

Maximum interval for backoff.

spring.cloud.config.retry.multiplier

1.1

Multiplier for next interval.

spring.cloud.config.server.bootstrap

false

Flag indicating that the config server should initialize its own Environment with properties from the remote repository. Off by default because it delays startup but can be useful when embedding the server in another application.

spring.cloud.config.server.default-application-name

application

Default application name when incoming requests do not have a specific one.

spring.cloud.config.server.default-label

 

Default repository label when incoming requests do not have a specific label.

spring.cloud.config.server.default-profile

default

Default application profile when incoming requests do not have a specific one.

spring.cloud.config.server.encrypt.enabled

true

Enable decryption of environment properties before sending to client.

spring.cloud.config.server.git.basedir

 

Base directory for local working copy of repository.

spring.cloud.config.server.git.clone-on-start

 

Flag to indicate that the repository should be cloned on startup (not on demand). Generally leads to slower startup but faster first query.

spring.cloud.config.server.git.default-label

  

spring.cloud.config.server.git.environment

  

spring.cloud.config.server.git.force-pull

 

Flag to indicate that the repository should force pull. If true discard any local changes and take from remote repository.

spring.cloud.config.server.git.git-factory

  

spring.cloud.config.server.git.password

 

Password for authentication with remote repository.

spring.cloud.config.server.git.repos

 

Map of repository identifier to location and other properties.

spring.cloud.config.server.git.search-paths

 

Search paths to use within local working copy. By default searches only the root.

spring.cloud.config.server.git.timeout

 

Timeout (in seconds) for obtaining HTTP or SSH connection (if applicable). Default 5 seconds.

spring.cloud.config.server.git.uri

 

URI of remote repository.

spring.cloud.config.server.git.username

 

Username for authentication with remote repository.

spring.cloud.config.server.health.repositories

  

spring.cloud.config.server.native.fail-on-error

false

Flag to determine how to handle exceptions during decryption (default false).

spring.cloud.config.server.native.search-locations

[]

Locations to search for configuration files. Defaults to the same as a Spring Boot app so [classpath:/,classpath:/config/,file:./,file:./config/].

spring.cloud.config.server.native.version

 

Version string to be reported for native repository

spring.cloud.config.server.overrides

 

Extra map for a property source to be sent to all clients unconditionally.

spring.cloud.config.server.prefix

 

Prefix for configuration resource paths (default is empty). Useful when embedding in another application when you don’t want to change the context path or servlet path.

spring.cloud.config.server.strip-document-from-yaml

true

Flag to indicate that YAML documents that are text or collections (not a map) should be returned in "native" form.

spring.cloud.config.server.svn.basedir

 

Base directory for local working copy of repository.

spring.cloud.config.server.svn.default-label

trunk

The default label for environment properties requests.

spring.cloud.config.server.svn.environment

  

spring.cloud.config.server.svn.password

 

Password for authentication with remote repository.

spring.cloud.config.server.svn.search-paths

 

Search paths to use within local working copy. By default searches only the root.

spring.cloud.config.server.svn.uri

 

URI of remote repository.

spring.cloud.config.server.svn.username

 

Username for authentication with remote repository.

spring.cloud.config.token

 

Security Token passed thru to underlying environment repository.

spring.cloud.config.uri

http://localhost:8888

The URI of the remote server (default http://localhost:8888).

spring.cloud.config.username

 

The username to use (HTTP Basic) when contacting the remote server.

spring.cloud.consul.config.acl-token

  

spring.cloud.consul.config.data-key

data

If format is Format.PROPERTIES or Format.YAML then the following field is used as key to look up consul for configuration.

spring.cloud.consul.config.default-context

application

 

spring.cloud.consul.config.enabled

true

 

spring.cloud.consul.config.fail-fast

true

Throw exceptions during config lookup if true, otherwise, log warnings.

spring.cloud.consul.config.format

  

spring.cloud.consul.config.prefix

config

 

spring.cloud.consul.config.profile-separator

,

 

spring.cloud.consul.config.watch.delay

1000

The value of the fixed delay for the watch in millis. Defaults to 1000.

spring.cloud.consul.config.watch.enabled

true

If the watch is enabled. Defaults to true.

spring.cloud.consul.config.watch.wait-time

55

The number of seconds to wait (or block) for watch query, defaults to 55. Needs to be less than default ConsulClient (defaults to 60). To increase ConsulClient timeout create a ConsulClient bean with a custom ConsulRawClient with a custom HttpClient.

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.acl-token

  

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.catalog-services-watch-delay

10

 

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.catalog-services-watch-timeout

2

 

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.default-query-tag

 

Tag to query for in service list if one is not listed in serverListQueryTags.

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.default-zone-metadata-name

zone

Service instance zone comes from metadata. This allows changing the metadata tag name.

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.enabled

true

Is service discovery enabled?

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.fail-fast

true

Throw exceptions during service registration if true, otherwise, log warnings (defaults to true).

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.health-check-interval

10s

How often to perform the health check (e.g. 10s)

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.health-check-path

/health

Alternate server path to invoke for health checking

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.health-check-timeout

 

Timeout for health check (e.g. 10s)

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.health-check-url

 

Custom health check url to override default

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.heartbeat.enabled

false

 

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.heartbeat.heartbeat-interval

  

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.heartbeat.interval-ratio

  

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.heartbeat.ttl-unit

s

 

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.heartbeat.ttl-value

30

 

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.host-info

  

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.hostname

 

Hostname to use when accessing server

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.instance-id

 

Unique service instance id

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.instance-zone

 

Service instance zone

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.ip-address

 

IP address to use when accessing service (must also set preferIpAddress to use)

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.lifecycle.enabled

true

 

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.management-port

 

Port to register the management service under (defaults to management port)

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.management-suffix

management

Suffix to use when registering management service

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.management-tags

 

Tags to use when registering management service

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.port

 

Port to register the service under (defaults to listening port)

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.prefer-agent-address

false

Source of how we will determine the address to use

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.prefer-ip-address

false

Use ip address rather than hostname during registration

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.query-passing

false

Add the 'passing` parameter to /v1/health/service/serviceName. This pushes health check passing to the server.

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.register

true

Register as a service in consul.

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.register-health-check

true

Register health check in consul. Useful during development of a service.

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.scheme

http

Whether to register an http or https service

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.server-list-query-tags

 

Map of serviceId’s → tag to query for in server list. This allows filtering services by a single tag.

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.service-name

 

Service name

spring.cloud.consul.discovery.tags

 

Tags to use when registering service

spring.cloud.consul.enabled

true

Is spring cloud consul enabled

spring.cloud.consul.host

localhost

Consul agent hostname. Defaults to 'localhost'.

spring.cloud.consul.port

8500

Consul agent port. Defaults to '8500'.

spring.cloud.consul.retry.initial-interval

1000

Initial retry interval in milliseconds.

spring.cloud.consul.retry.max-attempts

6

Maximum number of attempts.

spring.cloud.consul.retry.max-interval

2000

Maximum interval for backoff.

spring.cloud.consul.retry.multiplier

1.1

Multiplier for next interval.

spring.cloud.hypermedia.refresh.fixed-delay

5000

 

spring.cloud.hypermedia.refresh.initial-delay

10000

 

spring.cloud.inetutils.default-hostname

localhost

The default hostname. Used in case of errors.

spring.cloud.inetutils.default-ip-address

127.0.0.1

The default ipaddress. Used in case of errors.

spring.cloud.inetutils.ignored-interfaces

 

List of Java regex expressions for network interfaces that will be ignored.

spring.cloud.inetutils.preferred-networks

 

List of Java regex expressions for network addresses that will be ignored.

spring.cloud.inetutils.timeout-seconds

1

Timeout in seconds for calculating hostname.

spring.cloud.inetutils.use-only-site-local-interfaces

false

Use only interfaces with site local addresses. See {@link InetAddress#isSiteLocalAddress()} for more details.

spring.cloud.loadbalancer.retry.enabled

false

 

spring.cloud.stream.binders

  

spring.cloud.stream.bindings

  

spring.cloud.stream.consul.binder.event-timeout

5

 

spring.cloud.stream.consumer-defaults

  

spring.cloud.stream.default-binder

  

spring.cloud.stream.dynamic-destinations

[]

 

spring.cloud.stream.ignore-unknown-properties

true

 

spring.cloud.stream.instance-count

1

 

spring.cloud.stream.instance-index

0

 

spring.cloud.stream.producer-defaults

  

spring.cloud.stream.rabbit.binder.admin-adresses

[]

 

spring.cloud.stream.rabbit.binder.compression-level

0

 

spring.cloud.stream.rabbit.binder.nodes

[]

 

spring.cloud.stream.rabbit.bindings

  

spring.cloud.zookeeper.base-sleep-time-ms

50

Initial amount of time to wait between retries

spring.cloud.zookeeper.block-until-connected-unit

 

The unit of time related to blocking on connection to Zookeeper

spring.cloud.zookeeper.block-until-connected-wait

10

Wait time to block on connection to Zookeeper

spring.cloud.zookeeper.connect-string

localhost:2181

Connection string to the Zookeeper cluster

spring.cloud.zookeeper.default-health-endpoint

 

Default health endpoint that will be checked to verify that a dependency is alive

spring.cloud.zookeeper.dependencies

 

Mapping of alias to ZookeeperDependency. From Ribbon perspective the alias is actually serviceID since Ribbon can’t accept nested structures in serviceID

spring.cloud.zookeeper.dependency-configurations

  

spring.cloud.zookeeper.dependency-names

  

spring.cloud.zookeeper.discovery.enabled

true

 

spring.cloud.zookeeper.discovery.instance-host

 

Predefined host with which a service can register itself in Zookeeper. Corresponds to the {code address} from the URI spec.

spring.cloud.zookeeper.discovery.instance-port

 

Port to register the service under (defaults to listening port)

spring.cloud.zookeeper.discovery.metadata

 

Gets the metadata name/value pairs associated with this instance. This information is sent to zookeeper and can be used by other instances.

spring.cloud.zookeeper.discovery.register

true

Register as a service in zookeeper.

spring.cloud.zookeeper.discovery.root

/services

Root Zookeeper folder in which all instances are registered

spring.cloud.zookeeper.discovery.uri-spec

{scheme}://{address}:{port}

The URI specification to resolve during service registration in Zookeeper

spring.cloud.zookeeper.enabled

true

Is Zookeeper enabled

spring.cloud.zookeeper.max-retries

10

Max number of times to retry

spring.cloud.zookeeper.max-sleep-ms

500

Max time in ms to sleep on each retry

spring.cloud.zookeeper.prefix

 

Common prefix that will be applied to all Zookeeper dependencies' paths

spring.integration.poller.fixed-delay

1000

Fixed delay for default poller.

spring.integration.poller.max-messages-per-poll

1

Maximum messages per poll for the default poller.

spring.sleuth.integration.enabled

true

Enable Spring Integration sleuth instrumentation.

spring.sleuth.integration.patterns

*

An array of simple patterns against which channel names will be matched. Default is * (all channels). See org.springframework.util.PatternMatchUtils.simpleMatch(String, String).

spring.sleuth.keys.async.class-name-key

class

Simple name of the class with a method annotated with {@code @Async} from which the asynchronous process started

@see org.springframework.scheduling.annotation.Async

spring.sleuth.keys.async.method-name-key

method

Name of the method annotated with {@code @Async}

@see org.springframework.scheduling.annotation.Async

spring.sleuth.keys.async.prefix

 

Prefix for header names if they are added as tags.

spring.sleuth.keys.async.thread-name-key

thread

Name of the thread that executed the async method

@see org.springframework.scheduling.annotation.Async

spring.sleuth.keys.http.headers

 

Additional headers that should be added as tags if they exist. If the header value is multi-valued, the tag value will be a comma-separated, single-quoted list.

spring.sleuth.keys.http.host

http.host

The domain portion of the URL or host header. Example: "mybucket.s3.amazonaws.com". Used to filter by host as opposed to ip address.

spring.sleuth.keys.http.method

http.method

The HTTP method, or verb, such as "GET" or "POST". Used to filter against an http route.

spring.sleuth.keys.http.path

http.path

The absolute http path, without any query parameters. Example: "/objects/abcd-ff". Used to filter against an http route, portably with zipkin v1. In zipkin v1, only equals filters are supported. Dropping query parameters makes the number of distinct URIs less. For example, one can query for the same resource, regardless of signing parameters encoded in the query line. This does not reduce cardinality to a HTTP single route. For example, it is common to express a route as an http URI template like "/resource/{resource_id}". In systems where only equals queries are available, searching for {@code http.uri=/resource} won’t match if the actual request was "/resource/abcd-ff". Historical note: This was commonly expressed as "http.uri" in zipkin, eventhough it was most often just a path.

spring.sleuth.keys.http.prefix

http.

Prefix for header names if they are added as tags.

spring.sleuth.keys.http.request-size

http.request.size

The size of the non-empty HTTP request body, in bytes. Ex. "16384"

<p>Large uploads can exceed limits or contribute directly to latency.

spring.sleuth.keys.http.response-size

http.response.size

The size of the non-empty HTTP response body, in bytes. Ex. "16384"

<p>Large downloads can exceed limits or contribute directly to latency.

spring.sleuth.keys.http.status-code

http.status_code

The HTTP response code, when not in 2xx range. Ex. "503" Used to filter for error status. 2xx range are not logged as success codes are less interesting for latency troubleshooting. Omitting saves at least 20 bytes per span.

spring.sleuth.keys.http.url

http.url

The entire URL, including the scheme, host and query parameters if available. Ex. "https://mybucket.s3.amazonaws.com/objects/abcd-ff?X-Amz-Algorithm=AWS4-HMAC-SHA256&X-Amz-Algorithm=AWS4-HMAC-SHA256…​" Combined with {@link #method}, you can understand the fully-qualified request line. This is optional as it may include private data or be of considerable length.

spring.sleuth.keys.hystrix.command-group

commandGroup

Name of the command group. Hystrix uses the command group key to group together commands such as for reporting, alerting, dashboards, or team/library ownership.

@see com.netflix.hystrix.HystrixCommandGroupKey

spring.sleuth.keys.hystrix.command-key

commandKey

Name of the command key. Describes the name for the given command. A key to represent a {@link com.netflix.hystrix.HystrixCommand} for monitoring, circuit-breakers, metrics publishing, caching and other such uses.

@see com.netflix.hystrix.HystrixCommandKey

spring.sleuth.keys.hystrix.prefix

 

Prefix for header names if they are added as tags.

spring.sleuth.keys.hystrix.thread-pool-key

threadPoolKey

Name of the thread pool key. The thread-pool key represents a {@link com.netflix.hystrix.HystrixThreadPool} for monitoring, metrics publishing, caching, and other such uses. A {@link com.netflix.hystrix.HystrixCommand} is associated with a single {@link com.netflix.hystrix.HystrixThreadPool} as retrieved by the {@link com.netflix.hystrix.HystrixThreadPoolKey} injected into it, or it defaults to one created using the {@link com.netflix.hystrix.HystrixCommandGroupKey} it is created with.

@see com.netflix.hystrix.HystrixThreadPoolKey

spring.sleuth.keys.message.headers

 

Additional headers that should be added as tags if they exist. If the header value is not a String it will be converted to a String using its toString() method.

spring.sleuth.keys.message.payload.size

message/payload-size

An estimate of the size of the payload if available.

spring.sleuth.keys.message.payload.type

message/payload-type

The type of the payload.

spring.sleuth.keys.message.prefix

message/

Prefix for header names if they are added as tags.

spring.sleuth.keys.mvc.controller-class

mvc.controller.class

The lower case, hyphen delimited name of the class that processes the request. Ex. class named "BookController" will result in "book-controller" tag value.

spring.sleuth.keys.mvc.controller-method

mvc.controller.method

The lower case, hyphen delimited name of the class that processes the request. Ex. method named "listOfBooks" will result in "list-of-books" tag value.

spring.sleuth.metric.span.accepted-name

counter.span.accepted

 

spring.sleuth.metric.span.dropped-name

counter.span.dropped

 

spring.sleuth.sampler.percentage

0.1

Percentage of requests that should be sampled. E.g. 1.0 - 100% requests should be sampled. The precision is whole-numbers only (i.e. there’s no support for 0.1% of the traces).

spring.sleuth.trace-id128

false

When true, generate 128-bit trace IDs instead of 64-bit ones.

zuul.add-host-header

false

Flag to determine whether the proxy forwards the Host header.

zuul.add-proxy-headers

true

Flag to determine whether the proxy adds X-Forwarded-* headers.

zuul.host.max-per-route-connections

20

The maximum number of connections that can be used by a single route.

zuul.host.max-total-connections

200

The maximum number of total connections the proxy can hold open to backends.

zuul.ignore-local-service

true

 

zuul.ignore-security-headers

true

Flag to say that SECURITY_HEADERS are added to ignored headers if spring security is on the classpath. By setting ignoreSecurityHeaders to false we can switch off this default behaviour. This should be used together with disabling the default spring security headers see https://docs.spring.io/spring-security/site/docs/current/reference/html/headers.html#default-security-headers

zuul.ignored-headers

 

Names of HTTP headers to ignore completely (i.e. leave them out of downstream requests and drop them from downstream responses).

zuul.ignored-patterns

  

zuul.ignored-services

 

Set of service names not to consider for proxying automatically. By default all services in the discovery client will be proxied.

zuul.prefix

 

A common prefix for all routes.

zuul.remove-semicolon-content

true

Flag to say that path elements past the first semicolon can be dropped.

zuul.retryable

 

Flag for whether retry is supported by default (assuming the routes themselves support it).

zuul.ribbon-isolation-strategy

  

zuul.routes

 

Map of route names to properties.

zuul.s-e-c-u-r-i-t-y-h-e-a-d-e-r-s

 

Headers that are generally expected to be added by Spring Security, and hence often duplicated if the proxy and the backend are secured with Spring. By default they are added to the ignored headers if Spring Security is present and ignoreSecurityHeaders = true.

zuul.semaphore.max-semaphores

100

The maximum number of total semaphores for Hystrix.

zuul.sensitive-headers

 

List of sensitive headers that are not passed to downstream requests. Defaults to a "safe" set of headers that commonly contain user credentials. It’s OK to remove those from the list if the downstream service is part of the same system as the proxy, so they are sharing authentication data. If using a physical URL outside your own domain, then generally it would be a bad idea to leak user credentials.

zuul.servlet-path

/zuul

Path to install Zuul as a servlet (not part of Spring MVC). The servlet is more memory efficient for requests with large bodies, e.g. file uploads.

zuul.ssl-hostname-validation-enabled

true

Flag to say whether the hostname for ssl connections should be verified or not. Default is true. This should only be used in test setups!

zuul.strip-prefix

true

Flag saying whether to strip the prefix from the path before forwarding.

zuul.trace-request-body

true

Flag to say that request bodies can be traced.